Casino Gaming Rule
Queensland
Office of Liquor and Gaming Regulation
Casino Gaming Rule
2010
This Rule is prepared by the
Queensland Office of Liquor and Gaming Regulation
© 2010 V7
1
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Queensland
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
Contents
Part 1
1
2
3
4
Preliminary ................................................................................................................. 22
Short title .................................................................................................................... 22
Commencement ......................................................................................................... 22
Casino games ............................................................................................................ 22
Definitions .................................................................................................................. 22
Part 2
5
6
7
8
9
Miscellaneous ............................................................................................................ 24
Use of calculators and other devices prohibited ........................................................ 24
Use of cash in games................................................................................................. 25
Tables operated for teaching purposes ...................................................................... 25
Players to be silent ..................................................................................................... 25
Effect of contravention of rules ................................................................................... 25
Schedule 1 Baccarat ..................................................................................................................... 27
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Conducting and playing baccarat ............................................................................... 27
Definitions for sch 1.................................................................................................... 27
Table and layout ......................................................................................................... 27
Drop box and discard holder ...................................................................................... 27
Standing players ........................................................................................................ 27
Number of decks and way cards are dealt ................................................................. 28
Value of cards and point count of hands .................................................................... 28
Permissible wagers and results ................................................................................. 28
How wagers may be made ......................................................................................... 29
When wagers can not be placed, changed or withdrawn........................................... 29
Minimum and maximum wagers ................................................................................. 29
Free hand ................................................................................................................... 29
Payout odds and commission .................................................................................... 30
No commission baccarat ............................................................................................ 30
Procedures for inspecting and shuffling cards ........................................................... 31
Cutting the cards ........................................................................................................ 31
Selecting the banker .................................................................................................. 32
Banker must make minimum wagers ......................................................................... 33
Dealer may be the banker .......................................................................................... 33
Dealing of first 2 cards to each hand.......................................................................... 33
Announcement of point count of each hand after first 4 cards ................................... 34
Dealing of additional cards ......................................................................................... 34
Appearance of cutting card during play ...................................................................... 34
No additional cards may be drawn in certain circumstances ..................................... 35
When player’s hand must draw or stay ...................................................................... 35
Additional cards for banker’s hand in certain circumstances ..................................... 35
Deciding the results of the round and dealing with wagers ........................................ 36
2
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
28
29
Continuing as banker or selecting a new banker ....................................................... 36
Irregularities ............................................................................................................... 36
Schedule 2 Blackjack .................................................................................................................... 40
Part 1
1
2
3
4
Preliminary ................................................................................................................. 40
Conducting and playing blackjack .............................................................................. 40
Definitions for sch 2.................................................................................................... 40
Table and layout ......................................................................................................... 41
Drop box and discard rack ......................................................................................... 41
Part 2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
General rules .............................................................................................................. 41
Number of decks ........................................................................................................ 41
Value of cards ............................................................................................................ 41
Winning and losing wagers ........................................................................................ 42
How wagers may be made ......................................................................................... 42
Payout odds for winning wagers ................................................................................ 43
Time for wagering ...................................................................................................... 43
Entry to or exclusion from game after first round ....................................................... 43
Minimum and maximum wagers for tables ................................................................. 43
Procedures for inspecting and shuffling cards ........................................................... 44
Cutting of cards by player and dealer ........................................................................ 44
Selecting player to cut cards ...................................................................................... 45
Replacing the cards ................................................................................................... 46
Using a dealing shoe.................................................................................................. 46
Dealing the cards ....................................................................................................... 46
Collecting and discarding cards after play ................................................................. 47
Procedure when cutting card is reached .................................................................... 47
Players not to handle cards ........................................................................................ 47
Player responsible for own point total ........................................................................ 47
Play if player has blackjack ........................................................................................ 47
Part 3
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Different types of wagers, extra players and other matters ........................................ 48
Insurance wagers ....................................................................................................... 48
Doubling down ........................................................................................................... 49
Splitting cards............................................................................................................. 49
Additional cards for players ........................................................................................ 50
Additional cards for dealer ......................................................................................... 50
One player for each box ............................................................................................. 51
More than 1 player for a box ...................................................................................... 51
Relationship between players placing blackjack wagers on the same box ................ 51
Circumstances when a player may wager on more than 1 box .................................. 52
Part 4
33
34
35
36
37
38
Super sevens wagers ................................................................................................. 52
Additional super sevens wager .................................................................................. 52
Placing a super sevens wager ................................................................................... 52
Winning and losing super sevens wagers and payout odds ...................................... 52
Low super sevens wagers are dealt with ................................................................... 53
Splitting sevens .......................................................................................................... 54
Two or more players on a box .................................................................................... 54
Part 5
39
40
41
42
43
Bonus blackjack ......................................................................................................... 54
Additional bonus blackjack wager .............................................................................. 54
Placing a bonus blackjack wager ............................................................................... 55
Winning bonus blackjack wagers and payouts .......................................................... 55
Dealing with bonus blackjack wagers ........................................................................ 56
Splitting cards............................................................................................................. 56
Part 6
44
Madness 21 wagers ................................................................................................... 57
Definitions for pt 6 ...................................................................................................... 57
3
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
Additional madness 21 wager .................................................................................... 57
Placing a madness 21 wager ..................................................................................... 57
Winning and losing madness 21 wagers and payouts ............................................... 58
Deciding who is eligible to press jackpot button......................................................... 58
Pressing the jackpot button ........................................................................................ 59
How madness 21 wagers are dealt with ..................................................................... 59
Schedule of prizes ...................................................................................................... 60
Part 7
52
53
54
55
56
57
Perfect pairs wagers .................................................................................................. 61
Definitions for pt 7 ...................................................................................................... 61
Perfect pairs wager .................................................................................................... 61
Placing a perfect pairs wager ..................................................................................... 61
Winning and losing perfect pairs wagers and payouts ............................................... 62
Schedule of prizes ...................................................................................................... 63
How perfect pairs wager dealt with ............................................................................ 63
Part 8
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
Irregularities ............................................................................................................... 63
Exposed card in rack .................................................................................................. 63
Card drawn in error to be used in play ....................................................................... 63
Card drawn in error not to be used ............................................................................ 64
Not enough cards in shoe to complete round of play ................................................. 64
Incorrect placement of card........................................................................................ 64
Dealer with too many cards ........................................................................................ 65
No cards or only 1 card dealt to a player’s hand ........................................................ 65
No second card to last player if dealer has no second card ...................................... 66
Additional cards not offered or dealt to a player ......................................................... 66
No second card or additional cards to last player if dealer has second card and
more ........................................................................................................................... 66
Dealer with no first card ............................................................................................. 67
Extra hand dealt ......................................................................................................... 67
Player not acting on hand after wagering ................................................................... 68
Part 9
71
72
Use of card machine .................................................................................................. 68
Card machine ............................................................................................................. 68
Card machine malfunction ......................................................................................... 69
Schedule 3 Caribbean stud poker ................................................................................................. 71
Part 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Preliminary ................................................................................................................. 71
Conducting and playing caribbean stud poker ........................................................... 71
Definitions for sch 3.................................................................................................... 71
Meaning of closes a player’s hand ............................................................................. 73
Meaning of qualifies for a dealer’s hand .................................................................... 73
Meaning of winning jackpot hand ............................................................................... 73
Meaning of various poker hands ................................................................................ 74
Ranking of poker hands and cards ............................................................................ 75
Part 2
8
9
10
Table, layout and equipment ...................................................................................... 76
Table and layout ......................................................................................................... 76
Special jackpot equipment ......................................................................................... 76
Other equipment ........................................................................................................ 77
Part 3
11
12
Preparing for the game at a table ............................................................................... 77
Cards.......................................................................................................................... 77
Procedures for inspecting, shuffling and cutting cards .............................................. 78
Part 4
13
14
15
Placing wagers and playing the game ....................................................................... 78
Placing ante and jackpot wagers ............................................................................... 78
How wagers are made ............................................................................................... 79
Dealing the cards ....................................................................................................... 79
4
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
16
17
18
19
20
Players may look at cards and fold or place a bet wager ........................................... 80
Declaration by dealer ................................................................................................. 80
If dealer’s hand does not qualify ................................................................................ 80
If dealer’s hand qualifies ............................................................................................ 81
Players must not exchange cards or communicate ................................................... 81
Part 5
21
22
23
24
25
Deciding the outcome of wagers and paying winning wagers .................................... 81
Player’s hand—when it wins, loses or is a stand off .................................................. 81
Payment odds for bet wagers .................................................................................... 83
Winning jackpot hands ............................................................................................... 83
Payments for winning jackpot hands .......................................................................... 84
More than 1 straight flush or royal flush as winning jackpot hands in a round ........... 85
Part 6
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Irregularities ............................................................................................................... 85
Coin-in button pressed before jackpot wagers accepted ........................................... 85
Bet wager under or over twice the ante wager ........................................................... 86
Cards dealt when no ante wager................................................................................ 86
Player wagering on more than 1 betting area ............................................................ 86
Incorrect number of cards .......................................................................................... 86
Effect of cards being exposed during a deal .............................................................. 88
Card placed in incorrect position ................................................................................ 89
Schedule 4 Craps .......................................................................................................................... 91
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Conducting and playing craps .................................................................................... 91
Definitions for sch 4.................................................................................................... 91
Table and layout ......................................................................................................... 91
Permissible wagers and results ................................................................................. 92
Time and way for wagering ........................................................................................ 96
Removal or reduction of wager .................................................................................. 96
Circumstances when place bets inactive or active ..................................................... 97
Minimum and maximum wagers ................................................................................. 97
Player responsible if wagering or giving instructions ................................................. 97
Payout odds for winning wagers ................................................................................ 98
True odds for buy bets ............................................................................................... 99
True odds for lay bets .............................................................................................. 100
Percentages, fees and other matters ....................................................................... 100
Supplemental wagers after come out roll for win bets ............................................. 100
Suplemental wagers after come out roll for don’t win bets ....................................... 101
Supplemental wagers after come out roll for come bets .......................................... 102
Supplemental wagers after come out roll for don’t come bets ................................. 102
Control of dice .......................................................................................................... 103
Checking of dice during play. ................................................................................... 103
Selecting the shooter and matters about inactive dice............................................. 103
Procedure if die goes off table ................................................................................. 104
Wagering and dice throwing by shooter ................................................................... 104
Invalid roll of the dice ............................................................................................... 105
Declaration may be overruled .................................................................................. 106
Calling the results of throw and dealing with wagers ............................................... 106
Continuing shooter or selecting new shooter ........................................................... 107
Schedule 5 Manila poker ............................................................................................................. 109
Part 1
1
2
3
4
5
Preliminary ............................................................................................................... 109
Conducting and playing manila poker ...................................................................... 109
Definitions for sch 5.................................................................................................. 109
Meaning of call and called........................................................................................ 111
Meaning of player’s hand ......................................................................................... 112
Meaning of raise ....................................................................................................... 112
5
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
6
7
8
9
10
Meaning of round of betting ..................................................................................... 112
Meaning of showdown.............................................................................................. 112
Meaning of various poker hands .............................................................................. 113
Ranking of poker hands and cards .......................................................................... 114
Clockwise direction to be used ................................................................................. 115
Part 2
11
12
Table, layout and equipment .................................................................................... 115
Table and layout ....................................................................................................... 115
Equipment and information ...................................................................................... 115
Part 3
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Preparation for the game at a table .......................................................................... 116
Cards........................................................................................................................ 116
Sorting, inspecting and shuffling cards .................................................................... 116
Seating positions ...................................................................................................... 116
Shuffling cards before each round of play ................................................................ 117
The buck .................................................................................................................. 117
Ace high and low or high only .................................................................................. 118
Minimum table stake ................................................................................................ 118
Play sequence.......................................................................................................... 118
Part 4
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Playing the game ..................................................................................................... 119
How to wager ........................................................................................................... 119
Placing the blind bet and dealing the first cards ...................................................... 119
Sequence for first round of betting ........................................................................... 119
Sequence for second, third, fourth and final rounds of betting................................. 121
Showdown ................................................................................................................ 123
Raises ...................................................................................................................... 124
Tapping out .............................................................................................................. 124
Commission ............................................................................................................. 126
Table stake............................................................................................................... 126
Checking .................................................................................................................. 127
How to fold ............................................................................................................... 127
Part 5
32
33
34
35
36
37
Irregularities ............................................................................................................. 128
Collusion .................................................................................................................. 128
Misdeals ................................................................................................................... 128
Betting out of turn ..................................................................................................... 129
Premature exposure of communal cards ................................................................. 130
Holding the wrong number of hole cards ................................................................. 130
Players must not exchange cards or communicate ................................................. 131
Schedule 6 Mini-baccarat and premium mini-baccarat ............................................................... 132
Part 1
1
2
3
4
Preliminary ............................................................................................................... 132
Conducting and playing mini-baccarat and premium mini-baccarat ........................ 132
Definitions for sch 6.................................................................................................. 132
Table and layout ....................................................................................................... 133
Electronic terminal for mini-baccarat ........................................................................ 133
Part 2
5
6
7
8
9
10
General rules ............................................................................................................ 134
Standing players at a table ....................................................................................... 134
Maximum of 3 players for a numbered place at a table ........................................... 134
Number of decks and way cards are dealt ............................................................... 134
Value of cards and point value of hand .................................................................... 134
Mini-baccarat and premium mini-baccarat wagers and results ................................ 135
How wagers are made at a table and when a wager can not be placed, changed
or withdrawn ............................................................................................................. 135
How wagers are made at an electronic terminal and when a wager can not be
placed, changed or withdrawn ................................................................................. 136
Minimum and maximum wagers ............................................................................... 136
11
12
6
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
13
14
15
Free hand at a table ................................................................................................. 136
Payout odds for winning mini-baccarat and premium mini-baccarat wagers ........... 137
No commission mini-baccarat and no commission premium mini-baccarat ............ 137
Part 3
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Playing the game ..................................................................................................... 138
Procedures for inspecting and shuffling cards ......................................................... 138
Cutting the cards ...................................................................................................... 138
Banker ...................................................................................................................... 139
Banker must make minimum wagers ....................................................................... 140
Dealing first 2 cards to each hand............................................................................ 140
Announcing point count of each hand after first 2 cards and dealing additional
cards ........................................................................................................................ 141
Appearance of cutting card during play .................................................................... 141
No additional cards may be drawn in certain circumstances ................................... 141
When player’s hand must draw or stay .................................................................... 141
Additional card for banker’s hand in certain circumstances ..................................... 142
Deciding the round and dealing with wagers ........................................................... 142
Electronic terminal payments ................................................................................... 143
Part 4
28
29
30
31
Perfect pairs wagers ................................................................................................ 143
Definitions for pt 4 .................................................................................................... 143
Perfect pairs wager .................................................................................................. 144
Placing a perfect pairs wager ................................................................................... 144
Winning and losing perfect pairs wagers and payouts ............................................. 144
Part 5
32
33
34
35
Dragon bonus wager ................................................................................................ 145
Dragon bonus wagers .............................................................................................. 145
Placing a dragon bonus wager................................................................................. 146
Winning and losing dragon bonus wagers ............................................................... 146
Payouts .................................................................................................................... 147
Part 6
36
37
38
39
Player pair or banker pair wagers ............................................................................ 147
Definitions for pt 6 .................................................................................................... 147
Player pair or banker pair wager .............................................................................. 148
Placing a player pair or banker pair wager ............................................................... 148
Winning and losing player pair or banker pair wagers and payouts ........................ 148
Part 7
40
41
42
43
Super 6 wager .......................................................................................................... 149
Definitions for part 7 ................................................................................................. 149
Super 6 wager .......................................................................................................... 149
Placing a super 6 wager ........................................................................................... 149
Winning and losing super 6 wagers and payouts .................................................... 149
Part 8
44
45
Irregularities ............................................................................................................. 150
Irregularities ............................................................................................................. 150
Irregularities— electronic terminal............................................................................ 151
Schedule 7 Mini-dice ................................................................................................................... 155
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Conducting and playing mini-dice ............................................................................ 155
Table layout, dice number and 3 identical dice ........................................................ 155
Inspecting dice tumbler and seal before opening table for gaming .......................... 155
Permissible wagers and results ............................................................................... 156
How wagers may be made ....................................................................................... 156
Player responsible when wagering or giving instructions ......................................... 156
Time for wagering .................................................................................................... 156
How wagers are dealt with ....................................................................................... 157
Change to application of ss 6 and 8 if unfair ............................................................ 157
Use of non-value chips............................................................................................. 157
Payout odds for winning wagers .............................................................................. 158
Use of dice tumbler .................................................................................................. 158
7
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
13
14
15
Announcing the result .............................................................................................. 158
No unauthorised interference with gaming equipment ............................................. 159
15 Irregularities ........................................................................................................ 159
Schedule 8 Pai gow .................................................................................................................... 161
Part 1
1
2
3
4
Preliminary ............................................................................................................... 161
Conducting and playing pai gow .............................................................................. 161
Definitions for sch 8.................................................................................................. 161
Meaning of chong ranking 3 ..................................................................................... 163
How to achieve chong ranking 3 or better ................................................................ 163
Part 2
5
6
7
8
Table, layout, tiles and tile ranking ........................................................................... 163
Table and layout ....................................................................................................... 163
Tiles.......................................................................................................................... 164
Tile ranking............................................................................................................... 164
Tile point counts ....................................................................................................... 165
Part 3
9
10
11
12
Other equipment and its use .................................................................................... 166
Chung....................................................................................................................... 166
Tumbler, dice and cover ........................................................................................... 166
Use of dice ............................................................................................................... 166
Off marker ................................................................................................................ 166
Part 4
13
14
15
16
Wagers ..................................................................................................................... 167
Placing wagers ......................................................................................................... 167
Minimum and maximum wagers ............................................................................... 167
Number of players for a box ..................................................................................... 168
Number of hands for a player ................................................................................... 168
Part 5
17
18
The bank .................................................................................................................. 169
Use of the chung ...................................................................................................... 169
Appointment as banker ............................................................................................ 169
Part 6
19
Payout odds and commission .................................................................................. 170
Winning wagers and commission ............................................................................ 170
Part 7
20
Opening of table for gaming ..................................................................................... 171
Sorting, inspecting and shuffling the tiles ................................................................. 171
Part 8
21
22
23
24
Shuffling and cutting the tiles ................................................................................... 171
Shuffling and stacking for each round of play .......................................................... 171
La ja ......................................................................................................................... 171
Cutting the tiles ........................................................................................................ 172
Replacing the tiles .................................................................................................... 172
Part 9
25
26
Dealing the tiles ........................................................................................................ 173
Dealing the tiles........................................................................................................ 173
Controlling the tiles................................................................................................... 173
Part 10
27
28
29
Setting the hands ..................................................................................................... 173
Hands ....................................................................................................................... 173
Setting the hands ..................................................................................................... 174
Particular settings..................................................................................................... 174
Part 11
30
31
32
33
34
35
Setting hands the house way ................................................................................... 175
Setting hands the house way ................................................................................... 175
Play the pairs ........................................................................................................... 175
Wongs, gongs and high 9s ...................................................................................... 176
Maximise point count ............................................................................................... 176
High ranking tiles...................................................................................................... 176
Exceptions ................................................................................................................ 176
8
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 12
36
Payment and collection of wagers ........................................................................... 177
Wagers and commission.......................................................................................... 178
Part 13
37
38
39
40
41
42
Irregularities ............................................................................................................. 178
38 Dice ..................................................................................................................... 178
Dealing irregularities ................................................................................................ 178
Exposed tiles ............................................................................................................ 178
Incorrect setting of tiles ............................................................................................ 179
Abandoned round of play ......................................................................................... 179
Failure to wager ....................................................................................................... 179
Schedule 9 Roulette .................................................................................................................... 184
Part 1
1
Preliminary ............................................................................................................... 184
Conducting and playing roulette ............................................................................... 184
Part 2
2
3
4
Equipment for roulette .............................................................................................. 184
Roulette wheel and ball ............................................................................................ 184
Roulette table and layout ......................................................................................... 185
Electronic terminal.................................................................................................... 185
Part 3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
General rules ............................................................................................................ 185
Playing roulette ........................................................................................................ 185
Rotating the wheel and ball and controlling wagering .............................................. 186
Announcing the winning number, placing the crown and dealing with wagers ........ 186
No unauthorised interference with gaming equipment ............................................. 187
Permissible wagers and results ............................................................................... 187
How wagers are made and changed at a table ........................................................ 188
How wagers are made and changed—electronic terminal ....................................... 188
Use of non-value chips at a table ............................................................................. 189
Player responsible for placing wagers at a table ...................................................... 189
Wagers dealt with when ball falls to rest .................................................................. 189
Change to application of ss 13 and 14 if unfair ........................................................ 190
Minimum and maximum wagers ............................................................................... 190
Use of value chips .................................................................................................... 191
Payout odds for winning wagers .............................................................................. 192
Electronic terminal payments ................................................................................... 193
Part 4
20
21
Irregularities ............................................................................................................. 193
Irregularities and announcing no spin ...................................................................... 193
Irregularities—electronic terminal............................................................................. 194
Schedule 10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Sic-bo ................................................................................................................ 199
Conducting and playing sic-bo ................................................................................. 199
Table layout, dice tumbler and 3 identical dice ........................................................ 199
Electronic terminal for sic-bo .................................................................................... 199
Electronic equipment and entry terminal for results at a table ................................. 200
Uppermost sides of dice used to decide results ...................................................... 200
Permissible wagers .................................................................................................. 201
How wagers are made at a table.............................................................................. 202
How wagers are made at an electronic terminal ...................................................... 202
Player responsible for placing wagers at a table ...................................................... 203
Time for wagering .................................................................................................... 203
How wagers are dealt with ....................................................................................... 203
Change to application of ss 9 and 11 if unfair .......................................................... 204
Use of non-value chips at a table ............................................................................. 204
Payout odds for winning wagers .............................................................................. 205
Use of dice tumbler .................................................................................................. 206
Announcing result of spin ......................................................................................... 206
9
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
17
18
19
Entering results into the electronic equipment ......................................................... 207
No unauthorised operation of dice tumbler or entry terminal ................................... 207
Electronic terminal payments ................................................................................... 207
Part 4
20
21
Irregularities ............................................................................................................. 208
Irregularities ............................................................................................................. 208
Irregularities – electronic terminal ............................................................................ 208
Schedule 11
Spanish blackjack .............................................................................................. 211
Part 1
1
2
Preliminary ............................................................................................................... 211
Conducting and playing spanish blackjack .............................................................. 211
Definitions for sch 11................................................................................................ 211
Part 2
3
4
Table, layout and equipment .................................................................................... 212
Table and layout ....................................................................................................... 212
Drop box and discard rack ....................................................................................... 212
Part 3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
General rules of spanish blackjack .......................................................................... 213
Number of decks ...................................................................................................... 213
Value of cards .......................................................................................................... 213
Winning and losing wagers ...................................................................................... 213
How wagers may be made ....................................................................................... 214
Payout odds for winning wagers .............................................................................. 214
Time for wagering .................................................................................................... 215
Entry to or exclusion from game after first round ..................................................... 215
Minimum and maximum wagers for tables ............................................................... 216
Procedures for inspecting and shuffling cards ......................................................... 216
Cutting of cards by player and dealer ...................................................................... 217
Selecting player to cut cards .................................................................................... 217
Replacing the cards ................................................................................................. 218
Using a dealing shoe................................................................................................ 218
Dealing the cards ..................................................................................................... 218
Collecting and discarding cards after play ............................................................... 219
Procedure when cutting card is reached .................................................................. 219
Players not to handle cards ...................................................................................... 220
Player responsible for own point total ...................................................................... 220
Play if player has blackjack or a point total of 21 ..................................................... 220
Part 4
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Different types of wagers, extra players and other matters ...................................... 220
Surrender ................................................................................................................. 220
Insurance wagers ..................................................................................................... 221
Doubling down ......................................................................................................... 221
Splitting cards........................................................................................................... 222
Additional cards for players ...................................................................................... 223
Additional cards for dealer ....................................................................................... 224
One player for each box ........................................................................................... 224
More than 1 player for a box .................................................................................... 224
Relationship between players placing spanish blackjack wagers on the same
box .......................................................................................................................... 224
When a player may wager on more than 1 box ....................................................... 225
Part 5
34
35
36
37
38
39
Perfect pairs wagers ................................................................................................ 226
Definitions for pt 5 .................................................................................................... 226
Perfect pairs wager .................................................................................................. 226
Placing a perfect pairs wager ................................................................................... 226
Winning and losing perfect pairs wagers and payouts ............................................. 227
Schedule of prizes.................................................................................................... 227
How perfect pairs wager dealt with .......................................................................... 228
10
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 6
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Madness 21 wagers ................................................................................................. 228
Definitions for pt 6 .................................................................................................... 228
Additional madness 21 wager .................................................................................. 228
Placing a madness 21 wager ................................................................................... 229
Winning and losing madness 21 wagers and payouts ............................................. 229
Deciding who is eligible to press jackpot button....................................................... 229
Pressing the jackpot button ...................................................................................... 230
How madness 21 wagers are dealt with ................................................................... 231
Schedule of prizes.................................................................................................... 232
Part 7
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
Irregularities ............................................................................................................. 232
Exposed card in rack ................................................................................................ 232
Card drawn in error to be used in play ..................................................................... 232
Card drawn in error not to be used .......................................................................... 233
Not enough cards in shoe to complete round of play ............................................... 233
Incorrect placement of card...................................................................................... 233
Dealer with too many cards ...................................................................................... 234
No cards or only 1 card dealt to a player’s hand ...................................................... 234
No second card to last player if dealer has no second card .................................... 234
Additional cards not offered or dealt to a player ....................................................... 235
No second card or additional cards to last player if dealer has second card and
more ......................................................................................................................... 235
Dealer with no first card ........................................................................................... 236
Extra hand dealt ....................................................................................................... 236
Player not acting on hand after wagering ................................................................. 236
Part 8
61
62
Use of card machine ................................................................................................ 237
Card machine ........................................................................................................... 237
Card machine malfunction ....................................................................................... 238
Schedule 12
Wheel of fortune ................................................................................................ 240
Part 1
1
Preliminary ............................................................................................................... 240
Conducting and playing wheel of fortune ................................................................. 240
Part 2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Rules for wheel with 50 spaces ................................................................................ 240
Wheel and layout ..................................................................................................... 240
Spinning the wheel ................................................................................................... 242
Announcing the winning symbol and dealing with wagers ....................................... 242
No unauthorised interference with gaming equipment ............................................. 243
Permissible wagers and results ............................................................................... 243
How wagers may be made or withdrawn.................................................................. 243
Player responsible when wagering........................................................................... 243
Wagers dealt with when indicator rests in slot ......................................................... 243
Change to application of ss 8 and 9 if unfair ............................................................ 244
Minimum and maximum wagers ............................................................................... 244
Payout odds for winning wagers .............................................................................. 245
Irregularities ............................................................................................................. 245
Part 3
14
15
16
17
18
19
Changed rules for wheel with 52 spaces.................................................................. 246
Wheel and layout ..................................................................................................... 246
Wheel and equipment .............................................................................................. 247
Permissible wagers and results ............................................................................... 247
Minimum and maximum wagers ............................................................................... 247
Payout odds for winning wagers .............................................................................. 247
Irregularities ............................................................................................................. 248
Schedule 13
Part 1
Two-up dice ....................................................................................................... 253
Preliminary ............................................................................................................... 253
11
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
1
2
Conducting and playing two-up dice ........................................................................ 253
Definitions for sch 13................................................................................................ 253
Part 2
3
4
Table, layout and equipment .................................................................................... 254
Table and layout ....................................................................................................... 254
Dice to be used in the game .................................................................................... 254
Part 3
5
6
7
8
9
10
The spinner .............................................................................................................. 255
Selecting the spinner and the dice for spinning ....................................................... 255
Spinner’s wager ....................................................................................................... 255
Spinning the dice...................................................................................................... 256
Results of the spinner’s wager ................................................................................. 256
Payout odds for a spinner’s wager ........................................................................... 256
Changing the spinner ............................................................................................... 256
Part 4
11
12
13
Players ..................................................................................................................... 257
Player’s wager .......................................................................................................... 257
Results of a player’s wager ...................................................................................... 257
Payout odds for a player’s wager ............................................................................. 258
Part 5
14
15
16
17
18
19
Other matters about wagers ..................................................................................... 258
Minimum and maximum wagers ............................................................................... 258
Player responsible for placing wagers ..................................................................... 258
Wagers to remain after dealer calls ‘no more bets’.................................................. 258
How wagers are dealt with ....................................................................................... 258
Change to application of ss 15 and 17 if unfair ........................................................ 258
Results of spins to be displayed............................................................................... 259
Part 6
20
21
Irregularities ............................................................................................................. 260
Invalid spins ............................................................................................................. 260
Dealer may take over as spinner if there are consecutive or numerous invalid
spins ......................................................................................................................... 261
Procedure if a die goes off the table ........................................................................ 261
22
Schedule 14
Texas hold’em poker and omaha poker ............................................................ 264
Part 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Preliminary ............................................................................................................... 264
Conducting and playing texas hold’em poker and omaha poker ............................. 264
Definitions for sch 14................................................................................................ 264
Meaning of calls and called ...................................................................................... 267
Meaning of check ..................................................................................................... 267
Meaning of fold ......................................................................................................... 268
Meaning of being next to a player ............................................................................ 268
Meaning of poker hands ........................................................................................... 268
Ranking of poker hands and cards .......................................................................... 269
Meaning of raise and raises ..................................................................................... 270
Clockwise direction to be used ................................................................................. 271
Part 2
11
12
Table, layout and equipment .................................................................................... 271
Table and layout....................................................................................................... 271
Equipment ................................................................................................................ 271
Part 3
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Preparing for the game ............................................................................................ 272
Cards........................................................................................................................ 272
Procedures for inspecting, shuffling and cutting cards ............................................ 272
Notice of change to game ........................................................................................ 273
Seating positions ...................................................................................................... 273
The dealer button ..................................................................................................... 274
Minimum table stake ................................................................................................ 274
Participation fee ....................................................................................................... 275
Play sequence.......................................................................................................... 275
12
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
21
New and returning players ....................................................................................... 276
Part 4
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Playing the game ..................................................................................................... 277
How to wager ........................................................................................................... 277
Placing the blind bets and dealing the hole cards .................................................... 278
Sequence for the first round of betting ..................................................................... 279
Sequence for the second, third and final rounds of betting ...................................... 280
Payment of pot and commission at end of round of betting ..................................... 282
Showdown ................................................................................................................ 282
Betting structure and raises ..................................................................................... 285
Going all-in ............................................................................................................... 286
Commission ............................................................................................................. 287
Table stake for continuing players ........................................................................... 288
Part 5
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Irregularities ............................................................................................................. 289
Misdeals ................................................................................................................... 289
Holding the wrong number of hole cards ................................................................. 291
Burn card exposed in error ....................................................................................... 292
Burn card not dealt before a community card .......................................................... 292
Community card exposed in error ............................................................................ 293
Betting out of turn ..................................................................................................... 293
Collusion .................................................................................................................. 294
Players must not exchange cards or communicate ................................................. 294
Schedule 15
Texas hold’em bonus poker ............................................................................... 297
Part 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Preliminary ............................................................................................................... 297
Conducting and playing texas hold’em bonus poker ................................................ 297
Definitions for sch 15................................................................................................ 297
Meaning of checks ................................................................................................... 299
Meaning of closes a player’s hand ........................................................................... 299
Meaning of folds ....................................................................................................... 299
Meaning of winning bonus hand .............................................................................. 300
Meaning of poker hands ........................................................................................... 300
Ranking of poker hands and cards .......................................................................... 301
Part 2
9
10
Table, layout and equipment .................................................................................... 302
Table and layout ....................................................................................................... 302
Equipment ................................................................................................................ 303
Part 3
11
12
Preparing for the game ............................................................................................ 303
Cards........................................................................................................................ 303
Procedures for inspecting, shuffling and cutting cards ............................................ 304
Part 4
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Placing wagers and playing the game ..................................................................... 304
Placing ante and bonus wagers ............................................................................... 304
How wagers are made ............................................................................................. 304
Player’s cards to be in full view of dealer ................................................................. 305
Dealing the hole cards and dealer’s cards ............................................................... 305
Players may look at hole cards and fold or place a flop wager ................................ 305
Player may check or place a turn wager .................................................................. 306
Player may check or place a river wager ................................................................. 306
Declaration of highest poker ranking of dealer’s hand ............................................. 307
Deciding the highest poker ranking of player’s hand ............................................... 307
Players must not exchange cards or communicate ................................................. 307
Part 5
23
24
25
Deciding the outcome of wagers and paying winning wagers .................................. 307
Player’s hand—when it wins, loses or is a stand off ................................................ 307
Payment odds for winning ante, flop, turn and river wagers .................................... 308
Winning bonus hand ................................................................................................ 309
13
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
26
Payment odds for winning bonus hands .................................................................. 309
Part 6
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Irregularities ............................................................................................................. 310
Flop wager under or over twice the ante wager ....................................................... 310
Turn wager or river wager under or over the ante wager ......................................... 310
Cards dealt when no ante wager.............................................................................. 310
Player wagering on more than 1 betting area .......................................................... 311
Incorrect number of cards ........................................................................................ 311
32 Effect of card being exposed during initial deal................................................... 313
Community card exposed in error ............................................................................ 313
Another card exposed when dealing river card ........................................................ 313
Card placed in incorrect position .............................................................................. 313
Schedule 16
Three card poker ............................................................................................... 315
Part 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Preliminary ............................................................................................................... 315
Conducting and playing three card poker ................................................................ 315
Definitions for sch 16................................................................................................ 315
Meaning of closes a player’s hand ........................................................................... 316
Meaning of folds ....................................................................................................... 316
Meaning of qualifies for a dealer’s hand .................................................................. 317
Meaning of winning ante bonus hand ...................................................................... 317
Meaning of winning pair plus hand ........................................................................... 317
Meaning of poker hands ........................................................................................... 317
Ranking of poker hands and cards .......................................................................... 318
Part 2
10
11
Table, layout and equipment .................................................................................... 319
Table and layout ....................................................................................................... 319
Equipment ................................................................................................................ 320
Part 3
12
13
Preparing for the game ............................................................................................ 320
Cards........................................................................................................................ 320
Procedures for inspecting, shuffling and cutting cards ............................................ 320
Part 4
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Placing wagers and playing the game ..................................................................... 321
Placing ante and pair plus wagers ........................................................................... 321
How wagers are made ............................................................................................. 321
Dealing the cards ..................................................................................................... 322
Players may look at cards and fold or place a bet wager ......................................... 322
Declaration by dealer ............................................................................................... 323
If dealer’s hand does not qualify .............................................................................. 323
If dealer’s hand qualifies .......................................................................................... 323
Players must not exchange cards or communicate ................................................. 324
Part 5
22
23
24
25
26
Deciding the outcome of wagers and paying winning wagers .................................. 324
Player’s hand—when it wins, loses or is a stand off ................................................ 324
Winning ante bonus hand ........................................................................................ 325
Payment odds for winning ante bonus hands .......................................................... 325
Winning pair plus hand ............................................................................................ 326
Payment odds for winning pair plus hands .............................................................. 326
Part 6
27
28
29
30
31
32
Irregularities ............................................................................................................. 326
Bet wager under or over the ante wager amount ..................................................... 326
Card dealt when no ante wager ............................................................................... 327
Player wagering on more than 1 betting area .......................................................... 327
Incorrect number of cards ........................................................................................ 327
Effect of card being exposed during a deal .............................................................. 329
Card placed in incorrect position .............................................................................. 329
Schedule 17
Four card poker ................................................................................................. 331
14
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Preliminary ............................................................................................................... 331
Conducting and playing four card poker .................................................................. 331
Definitions for sch 17................................................................................................ 331
Meaning of closes a player’s hand ........................................................................... 332
Meaning of folds ....................................................................................................... 332
Meaning of winning ante bonus hand ...................................................................... 333
Meaning of winning aces up hand ............................................................................ 333
Meaning of poker hands ........................................................................................... 333
Ranking of poker hands and cards .......................................................................... 334
Part 2
9
10
Table, layout and equipment .................................................................................... 335
Table and layout ....................................................................................................... 335
Equipment ................................................................................................................ 336
Part 3
11
12
Preparing for the game ............................................................................................ 336
Cards........................................................................................................................ 336
Procedures for inspecting, shuffling and cutting cards ............................................ 337
Part 4
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Placing wagers and playing the game ..................................................................... 337
Placing ante and aces up wagers ............................................................................ 337
How wagers are made ............................................................................................. 338
Dealing the cards ..................................................................................................... 338
Players may look at cards and fold or place a bet wager ......................................... 339
Declaration by dealer ............................................................................................... 339
Deciding the highest poker ranking of player’s hand ............................................... 339
Players must not exchange cards or communicate ................................................. 339
Part 5
20
21
22
23
24
Deciding the outcome of wagers and paying winning wagers .................................. 340
Player’s hand—when it wins or loses ....................................................................... 340
Winning ante bonus hand ........................................................................................ 340
Payment odds for winning ante bonus hands .......................................................... 341
Winning aces up hand ............................................................................................. 341
Payment odds for winning aces up hands ............................................................... 341
Part 6
25
26
27
28
29
30
Irregularities ............................................................................................................. 342
Bet wager under, or more than 3 times, the ante wager amount ............................. 342
Card dealt when no ante wager ............................................................................... 342
Player wagering on more than 1 betting area .......................................................... 342
Incorrect number of cards ........................................................................................ 343
Effect of card being exposed during a deal .............................................................. 344
Card placed in incorrect position .............................................................................. 345
Schedule 18
Casino war ......................................................................................................... 347
Part 1
1
2
3
4
Preliminary ............................................................................................................... 347
Conducting and playing casino war ......................................................................... 347
Definitions for sch 18................................................................................................ 347
Table and layout ....................................................................................................... 347
Drop box and discard holder .................................................................................... 348
Part 2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
General rules ............................................................................................................ 348
Number of decks and way cards are dealt ............................................................... 348
Value of cards .......................................................................................................... 348
Permissible wagers and results ............................................................................... 349
How wagers may be made ....................................................................................... 349
When wagers can not be placed, changed or withdrawn ......................................... 350
Circumstances when a player may wager on more than 1 box ................................ 350
Minimum and maximum wagers ............................................................................... 350
Payout odds ............................................................................................................. 351
Procedures for inspecting and shuffling cards ......................................................... 351
15
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Cutting the cards ...................................................................................................... 352
Selecting player to cut cards .................................................................................... 352
Replacing the cards ................................................................................................. 353
Initial deal ................................................................................................................. 353
Subsequent deal ...................................................................................................... 354
Procedure when cutting card is reached .................................................................. 354
Players not to handle cards ...................................................................................... 354
Player responsible for own card rank ....................................................................... 354
Part 3
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Irregularities ............................................................................................................. 355
Exposed card in rack ................................................................................................ 355
Card drawn in error to be used in play ..................................................................... 355
Card drawn in error not to be used in play ............................................................... 355
Not enough cards in shoe to complete a round of play ............................................ 355
Incorrect placement of card...................................................................................... 355
No second card dealt to a player’s hand .................................................................. 356
Player not acting on hand after wagering ................................................................. 356
No cards dealt to the dealer’s hand ......................................................................... 356
Misdeals ................................................................................................................... 356
Part 4
31
32
Use of card machine ................................................................................................ 357
Card machine ........................................................................................................... 357
Card machine malfunction ....................................................................................... 358
Schedule 19
Double deck blackjack ....................................................................................... 360
Part 1
1
2
3
4
Preliminary ............................................................................................................... 360
Conducting and playing double deck blackjack ....................................................... 360
Definitions for sch 19................................................................................................ 360
Table and layout ....................................................................................................... 361
Drop box and discard rack ....................................................................................... 361
Part 2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
General rules ............................................................................................................ 361
Number of decks ...................................................................................................... 361
Value of cards .......................................................................................................... 361
Winning and losing wagers ...................................................................................... 362
How wagers may be made ....................................................................................... 362
Payout odds for winning wagers .............................................................................. 363
Time for wagering .................................................................................................... 363
Entry to or exclusion from game .............................................................................. 363
Minimum and maximum wagers for tables ............................................................... 363
Procedures for inspecting and shuffling cards ......................................................... 364
Cutting of cards by dealer ........................................................................................ 365
15 Replacing the cards ............................................................................................ 365
Using a dealing shoe................................................................................................ 365
Dealing the cards ..................................................................................................... 365
Collecting and discarding cards after play ............................................................... 367
Procedure when cutting card is reached .................................................................. 367
Players handling cards ............................................................................................. 367
Player responsible for own point total ...................................................................... 367
Play if player has blackjack ...................................................................................... 368
Part 3
23
24
25
26
27
28
Different types of wagers, extra players and other matters ...................................... 368
Insurance wagers ..................................................................................................... 368
Doubling down ......................................................................................................... 369
Splitting cards........................................................................................................... 369
Additional cards for players ...................................................................................... 370
Additional cards for dealer ....................................................................................... 371
One player for each box ........................................................................................... 371
16
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
29
Circumstances when a player may wager on more than 1 box ................................ 371
Part 4
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Irregularities ............................................................................................................. 372
Exposed card in rack ................................................................................................ 372
Card drawn in error to be used in play ..................................................................... 372
Card drawn in error not to be used .......................................................................... 372
Not enough cards in shoe to complete round of play ............................................... 373
Incorrect placement of card...................................................................................... 373
Dealer with too many cards ...................................................................................... 373
Player point count more than 21 .............................................................................. 374
No cards or only 1 card dealt to a player’s hand ...................................................... 374
No second card to last player if dealer has no second card .................................... 374
Additional cards not offered or dealt to a player ....................................................... 375
No second card or additional cards to last player if dealer has second card and
more ......................................................................................................................... 375
Dealer with no first card ........................................................................................... 376
Extra hand dealt ....................................................................................................... 376
Player not acting on hand after wagering ................................................................. 376
41
42
43
Schedule 20
Blackjack switch ................................................................................................ 378
Part 1
1
2
3
4
Preliminary ............................................................................................................... 378
Conducting and playing blackjack switch ................................................................. 378
Definitions for sch 20................................................................................................ 378
Table and layout ....................................................................................................... 379
Drop box and discard rack ....................................................................................... 380
Part 2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
General rules ............................................................................................................ 380
Number of decks ...................................................................................................... 380
Value of cards .......................................................................................................... 380
Winning and losing wagers ...................................................................................... 380
How wagers may be made ....................................................................................... 382
Payout odds for winning wagers .............................................................................. 382
Time for wagering .................................................................................................... 382
Entry to or exclusion from game after first round ..................................................... 382
Minimum and maximum wagers for tables ............................................................... 383
Procedures for inspecting and shuffling cards ......................................................... 383
Cutting of cards by player and dealer ...................................................................... 384
Selecting player to cut cards .................................................................................... 385
Replacing the cards ................................................................................................. 385
Using a dealing shoe................................................................................................ 385
Dealing the cards ..................................................................................................... 385
Collecting and discarding cards after play ............................................................... 387
Procedure when cutting card is reached .................................................................. 387
Players not to handle cards ...................................................................................... 387
Player responsible for own point total ...................................................................... 387
Play if player has blackjack ...................................................................................... 387
Part 3
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Different types of wagers, extra players and other matters ...................................... 388
Insurance wagers ..................................................................................................... 388
Doubling down ......................................................................................................... 389
Splitting cards........................................................................................................... 389
Additional cards for players ...................................................................................... 390
Additional cards for dealer ....................................................................................... 390
One player for each box ........................................................................................... 390
Circumstances when a player may wager on more than 1 box ................................ 390
Part 4
31
Irregularities ............................................................................................................. 391
Exposed card in rack ................................................................................................ 391
17
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
41
42
43
44
Card drawn in error to be used in play ..................................................................... 391
Card drawn in error not to be used .......................................................................... 391
Not enough cards in shoe to complete round of play ............................................... 392
Incorrect placement of card...................................................................................... 392
Dealer with too many cards ...................................................................................... 392
No cards or only 1 card dealt to a player’s hand ...................................................... 393
No second card to either of the last player’s hands if the dealer has no second
card .......................................................................................................................... 393
Additional cards not offered or dealt to a player ....................................................... 394
No second card or additional cards to either of the last player’s hands if the
dealer has second card and more............................................................................ 394
Dealer with no first card ........................................................................................... 395
Extra hand dealt ....................................................................................................... 395
Player not acting on hand after wagering ................................................................. 395
Player having only one bet on blackjack switch box ................................................ 396
Part 5
45
46
Use of card machine ................................................................................................ 396
Card machine ........................................................................................................... 396
Card machine malfunction ....................................................................................... 397
39
40
Schedule 21
Lucky Draw Baccarat ......................................................................................... 399
Part 1
1
2
3
4
Preliminary ............................................................................................................... 399
Conducting and playing Lucky Draw Baccarat ......................................................... 399
Definitions for sch 21................................................................................................ 399
Table and layout ....................................................................................................... 400
Drop box and discard rack ....................................................................................... 400
Part 2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
General rules ........................................................................................................... 400
Number of decks ...................................................................................................... 400
Value of cards .......................................................................................................... 400
Permissible wagers and results ............................................................................... 401
How wagers may be made ....................................................................................... 401
When wagers can not be placed, changed or withdrawn ......................................... 402
Circumstances when a player may wager on more than 1 box ................................ 402
Minimum and maximum wagers for tables ............................................................... 402
Payout odds for winning wagers .............................................................................. 403
Part 3
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Playing the game ..................................................................................................... 403
Procedures for inspecting and shuffling cards ......................................................... 403
Cutting of cards by player and dealer ...................................................................... 404
Selecting player to cut cards .................................................................................... 405
Replacing the cards ................................................................................................. 405
Using a dealing shoe................................................................................................ 405
Dealing the cards ..................................................................................................... 405
Collecting and discarding cards after play ............................................................... 406
Procedure when cutting card is reached .................................................................. 407
Players not to handle cards ...................................................................................... 407
Player responsible for own point total ...................................................................... 407
Part 4
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Irregularities ........................................................................................................... 407
Exposed card in rack ................................................................................................ 407
Card drawn in error to be used in play ..................................................................... 407
Card drawn in error not to be used .......................................................................... 408
Not enough cards in shoe to complete round of play ............................................... 408
Incorrect placement of card...................................................................................... 408
Dealer with too many cards ...................................................................................... 409
No cards or only 1 card dealt to a player’s hand ...................................................... 409
No second card to last player if dealer has no second card .................................... 409
18
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
31
32
33
34
35
Additional card not offered or dealt to a player ........................................................ 410
No second card or additional card to last player if dealer has second card and
more ......................................................................................................................... 410
Dealer with no first card ........................................................................................... 411
Extra hand dealt ....................................................................................................... 411
Player not acting on hand after wagering ................................................................. 411
Part 5
36
37
Use of card machine ................................................................................................ 411
Card machine ........................................................................................................... 411
Card machine malfunction ....................................................................................... 412
Schedule 22
Blackjack challenge ........................................................................................... 414
Part 1
1
2
3
4
Preliminary ............................................................................................................... 414
Conducting and playing blackjack challenge ........................................................... 414
Definitions for sch 22................................................................................................ 414
Table and layout ....................................................................................................... 415
Drop box and discard rack ....................................................................................... 415
Part 2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
General rules ............................................................................................................ 415
Number of decks ...................................................................................................... 415
Value of cards .......................................................................................................... 415
Winning and losing wagers ...................................................................................... 416
How wagers may be made ....................................................................................... 417
Payout odds for winning wagers .............................................................................. 417
Time for wagering .................................................................................................... 417
Entry to or exclusion from game after first round ..................................................... 417
Minimum and maximum wagers for tables ............................................................... 418
Procedures for inspecting and shuffling cards ......................................................... 418
Cutting of cards by player and dealer....................................................................... 419
Selecting player to cut cards .................................................................................... 419
Replacing the cards ................................................................................................. 420
Using a dealing shoe................................................................................................ 420
Dealing the cards ..................................................................................................... 420
Collecting and discarding cards after play ............................................................... 421
Procedure when cutting card is reached .................................................................. 421
Players not to handle cards ...................................................................................... 421
Player responsible for own point total ...................................................................... 422
Play if player has blackjack ...................................................................................... 422
Part 3
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Different types of wagers, extra players and other matters ...................................... 422
Doubling down ......................................................................................................... 422
Splitting cards........................................................................................................... 423
Additional cards for players ...................................................................................... 424
Additional cards for dealer ....................................................................................... 425
Final Settlement ....................................................................................................... 425
One player for each box ........................................................................................... 426
More than 1 player for a box .................................................................................... 426
Relationship between players placing blackjack challenge wagers on the same
box ........................................................................................................................... 426
Circumstances when a player may wager on more than 1 box ................................ 427
Part 4
33
34
35
36
37
Any pair wagers ........................................................................................................ 427
Definitions for Part 4................................................................................................. 427
Any pair wager ......................................................................................................... 427
Playing any pair ........................................................................................................ 427
Winning and losing any pair wagers and payouts .................................................... 428
How any pair wager dealt with ................................................................................. 428
Part 5
Irregularities ............................................................................................................. 429
19
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Exposed card in rack ................................................................................................ 429
Card drawn in error to be used in play ..................................................................... 429
Card drawn in error not to be used........................................................................... 429
Not enough cards in shoe to complete round of play ............................................... 430
Incorrect placement of card...................................................................................... 430
Dealer with too many cards ...................................................................................... 430
No cards or only 1 card dealt to a player’s hand ...................................................... 431
No second card to last player if dealer has no second card ..................................... 431
Additional cards not offered or dealt to a player ....................................................... 431
No second card or additional cards to last player if dealer has second card and
more ......................................................................................................................... 432
Dealer with no first card............................................................................................ 432
Extra hand dealt ....................................................................................................... 433
Player not acting on hand after wagering ................................................................. 433
Part 6
51
52
Use of card machine ................................................................................................ 434
Card machine ........................................................................................................... 434
Card machine malfunction ....................................................................................... 435
Schedule 23
Double Zero Roulette......................................................................................... 438
Part 1
1
Preliminary ............................................................................................................... 438
Conducting and playing double zero roulette ........................................................... 438
Part 2
2
3
4
Equipment for double zero roulette .......................................................................... 438
Double zero roulette wheel and ball ......................................................................... 438
Double zero roulette table and layout ...................................................................... 439
Electronic terminal.................................................................................................... 439
Part 3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
General rules ............................................................................................................ 439
Playing double zero roulette ..................................................................................... 439
Rotating the wheel and ball and controlling wagering at a table .............................. 440
Announcing the winning number, placing the crown and dealing with wagers ........ 440
No unauthorised interference with gaming equipment ............................................. 441
Permissible wagers and results ............................................................................... 441
How wagers are made and changed at a table ........................................................ 442
How wagers are made and changed—electronic terminal ....................................... 443
Use of non-value chips at a table ............................................................................. 443
Player responsible for placing wagers at a table ...................................................... 443
Wagers dealt with when ball falls to rest .................................................................. 444
Change to application of ss 13 and 14 if unfair ........................................................ 444
Minimum and maximum wagers ............................................................................... 444
Use of value chips at a table .................................................................................... 446
Payout odds for winning wagers .............................................................................. 446
Electronic terminal payments ................................................................................... 447
Part 4
20
21
Irregularities ............................................................................................................. 447
Irregularities and announcing no spin ...................................................................... 447
Irregularities—electronic terminal............................................................................. 448
Schedule 24
Mississippi Stud Poker....................................................................................... 452
Part 1
1
2
3
Preliminary ............................................................................................................... 452
Conducting and playing mississippi stud poker ....................................................... 452
Definitions for sch 24................................................................................................ 452
Ranking and meaning of poker hands ..................................................................... 453
Part 2
4
5
Table layout and equipment ..................................................................................... 455
Table and layout ....................................................................................................... 455
Equipment ................................................................................................................ 455
20
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 3
6
7
Preparing the game .................................................................................................. 456
Cards........................................................................................................................ 456
Procedures for inspecting, shuffling and cutting cards ............................................ 456
Part 4
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Placing wagers & playing the game ......................................................................... 457
Placing ante wagers ................................................................................................. 457
How wagers are made ............................................................................................. 457
Player’s cards to be in full view of dealer ................................................................. 457
Dealing the hole cards ............................................................................................. 457
Players may look at hole cards and fold or place a 3 rd street wager ........................ 459
Player may fold or place a 4th street wager .............................................................. 459
Player may fold or place a 5th street wager .............................................................. 459
Deciding the poker ranking of player’s hand ............................................................ 460
Players must not exchange cards or communicate ................................................. 460
Part 5
17
18
Deciding the outcome of wagers and paying winning wagers .................................. 460
Payment odds for winning ante, 3rd, 4th and 5th street wagers .............................. 460
Player’s hand—when it wins, loses or is a stand off ................................................ 461
Part 6
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Irregularities ............................................................................................................. 462
Wagers over or under permissible wager amount ................................................... 462
Cards dealt with no ante wager ................................................................................ 463
Player wagering on more than 1 betting area .......................................................... 463
Incorrect number of cards ........................................................................................ 463
Effect of a card being exposed during a deal ........................................................... 465
Card placed in incorrect position .............................................................................. 465
Community cards ..................................................................................................... 465
General .................................................................................................................... 466
Diagrams
Diagram 1.1
Diagram 1.2
Diagram 2.1
Diagram 3.1
Diagram 4.1
Diagram 6.1
Diagram 6.2
Diagram 6.3
Diagram 7.1
Diagram 8.1
Diagram 8.2
Diagram 8.3
Diagram 8.4
Diagram 9.1
Diagram 9.2
Diagram 9.3
Diagram 9.4
Diagram 10.1
Diagram 10.2
Diagram 11.1
Diagram 12.1
Diagram 12.2
Diagram 12.3
Baccarat table layout....................................................................................... 38
Baccarat table of play..................................................................................... 39
Blackjack table layout .................................................................................... 70
Carribean stud poker table layout .................................................................. 90
Craps table and layout .................................................................................. 108
Mini-baccarat and premium mini-baccarat table layout................................. 152
Mini-baccarat electronic terminal layout ....................................................... 153
Mini-baccarat table of play ............................................................................ 154
Mini-dice table layout .................................................................................... 160
Pai gow table layout ...................................................................................... 180
Pai gow – ranking pairs ................................................................................. 181
Pai gow – wongs, gongs and high 9s ............................................................ 182
Pai gow – ranking tiles .................................................................................. 183
Roulette wheel .............................................................................................. 195
Layout for roulette table and electronic terminal ........................................... 196
Illustration of manner of placement of wagers at a roulette table.................. 197
Illustration of manner of placement of wagers at an electronic terminal ....... 198
Sic-bo table layout......................................................................................... 209
Sic-bo electronic terminal layout ................................................................... 210
Spanish blackjack table layout ...................................................................... 239
Arrangement of wheel of fortune ................................................................... 249
Wheel of fortune table layout ........................................................................ 250
Arrangement of alternative wheel of fortune ................................................. 251
21
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Diagram 12.4
Diagram 13.1
Diagram 14.1
Diagram 15.1
Diagram 16.1
Diagram 17.1
Diagram 18.1
Diagram 19.1
Diagram 20.1
Diagram 21.1
Diagram 22.1
Diagram 22.2
Diagram 23.1
Diagram 23.2
Diagram 23.3
Diagram 24.1
Alternative wheel of fortune table layout
252
Two-up dice table and layout ........................................................................ 263
Texas hold’em poker table layout ................................................................. 296
Texas hold’em bonus poker table layout ....................................................... 314
Three card poker table layout ....................................................................... 330
Four card poker table layout ......................................................................... 346
Casino war table layout ................................................................................. 359
Double deck blackjack table layout ............................................................... 377
Blackjack switch table layout......................................................................... 398
Lucky draw baccarat table layout .................................................................. 413
Blackjack challenge table layout ................................................................... 436
Blackjack Challenge “Any Pair” table layout ................................................ 437
Double zero roulette wheel…………………………………………. ................. 449
Layout for double zero roulette table and electronic terminal ………. ........... 450
Illustration of manner of placement of wagers at a double zero
Roulette table…………………………………………………………. ................ 451
Mississippi stud poker table layout................................................................ 467
Endnotes
...................................................................................................................... 468
22
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
[as amended by all amendments that commenced on or before 26 August 2011]
Part 1
1
Preliminary
Short title
This rule may be cited as the Casino Gaming Rule 2010.
2
Commencement
This rule commences on 30 July 2010.
3
4
Casino games
(1)
This rule provides for conducting and playing games in casinos.
(2)
Each schedule states the rules for conducting and playing the game
described in the schedule.1
(3)
Subsection (2) has effect subject to section 28 of the Casino
Control Regulation 1999.
Definitions
In this rule—
card machine means an item of gaming equipment combining a
card mixing device and a card dealing device, approved by the
1
See sections 63 (Casino games) and 92 (Entry to and exclusion of entry from casino—generally)
of the Act.
23
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
chief executive under section 62 of the Act for use in the game
stated in the approval, that is used—
(a)
for randomly mixing discards into the stack from which
cards are dealt; and
(b)
as a shoe for dealing cards.
dealing shoe means an item of gaming equipment, approved by
the chief executive under section 62 of the Act, that is used for a
game involving playing cards—
(a)
into which the dealer inserts the cards after shuffling them
by hand; and
(b)
from which the cards are dealt, when appropriate, 1 at a
time.
discard rack means a rack required by this rule for certain table
games involving playing cards into which the cards must be placed
as part of the game.
display for an electronic terminal, means electronically display.
electronic terminal means a touch screen, used by a player, for
playing a table game.
floor manager, for a casino, means a person who is licensed for
games supervision in the casino and may also include a casino
employee of the level of pit manager or higher.
non-value chip means a chip2 not of a specified denomination.
pit manager, for a casino, means a person who is licensed for
games supervision in the casino and is assigned the responsibility
for the overall supervision of the operation and conduct of gaming
at a gaming table.
preshuffled, in relation to cards, means cards that have been
inspected and shuffled under this rule and the approved control
system for a casino, before the cards are first placed on a table for
play at the casino.
shuffle means randomly mix cards.
2
Act, schedule (Dictionary)—
chips means any tokens used or capable of being used in a casino in the conduct of gaming in
the place of money and approved for the purpose by the chief executive.
24
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
table means—
(a)
if mentioned in a schedule—a table for playing the game
mentioned in the schedule; or
(b)
otherwise—a table for gaming.
table game means a game played at a table.
value chip means a chip of a specified denomination.
void, for a wager, means the wager neither wins nor loses but is a
stand off.
washing means putting cards face down on the table and moving
them around so the cards are randomly mixed.
Part 2
5
Miscellaneous
Use of calculators and other devices prohibited
(1)
A person must not, either alone or with another person, use or
have in the person’s possession or control at or near a table or
location for the playing of a game a device that is capable, for a
game or a part of a game, of recording, projecting or analysing an
outcome or the changing probabilities or the playing strategies to
be used.
(2)
If a floor manager or casino key employee is satisfied a player has
contravened subsection (1), the floor manager or casino key
employee may—
(a)
declare any wager made by the person to be void; and
(b)
exclude the person from taking part in the game.
(3)
Subsection (1) does not apply to a person who uses or has
possession or control of a device under a written approval granted
by the chief executive.
(4)
In this section—
device includes a calculator, computer and other electronic,
electrical or mechanical apparatus.
25
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
6
Use of cash in games
(1)
A casino operator may—
(a)
permit a player to place a wager using prescribed coins; and
(b)
pay a winning wager using prescribed coins.
(2)
A reference in this rule to chips may, if the context permits, be
read as including a reference to prescribed coins.
(3)
In this section—
prescribed coins means Australian coins of 50c denomination.
7
Tables operated for teaching purposes
A casino operator may operate the number and type of tables
approved by the chief executive at which—
8
(a)
the minimum wager permitted is $2 and the maximum wager
permitted is $10; and
(b)
casino patrons are instructed in the rules, procedures and
basic playing strategies of casino games.
Players to be silent
If a floor manager considers silence is necessary during the
conduct of a game, the floor manager may direct all players to be
silent.
9
Effect of contravention of rules
(1)
(2)
This section applies if a floor manager is satisfied a player—
(a)
has contravened a provision of this rule in relation to a
game; or
(b)
does not comply with a direction given under section 8.
The floor manager or another casino employee of the level of floor
manager or higher may do any 1 or more of the following—
(a)
declare the player’s wager void;
(b)
exclude the player from the game;
26
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(c)
exclude the player from playing the game at the same table
as another player.
27
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 1
Baccarat
section 3(2)
1
Conducting and playing baccarat
This schedule states the rules for conducting and playing the
casino game known as baccarat.
2
Definitions for sch 1
In this schedule—
draw, for the banker’s or player’s hand, means take a third card.
stay, for the banker’s or player’s hand, means not take a third card.
3
4
Table and layout
(1)
Baccarat is played on a table having numbered places for 10 to 14
seated players.
(2)
The layout cloth covering the table must have imprinted on it the
name of, or logo for, the casino and must be marked similarly to
the way shown in diagram 1.1.
Drop box and discard holder
The baccarat table must have a drop box and a discard holder
attached to it in approximately the position shown in diagram 1.1.
5
Standing players
(1)
If all numbered places at the table are occupied by seated players,
players who are standing may also participate in the game.
(2)
Standing players—
(a)
may place a wager in the part of the layout identified for
standing player wagers; and
28
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
6
7
must not participate in the cut of the cards or touch or handle
the cards used in the game; and
(c)
may not be appointed banker; and
(d)
for all winning wagers on the banker’s hand, immediately
the winnings become payable—must pay or have deducted
from the winnings the commission calculated under section
13.
Number of decks and way cards are dealt
(1)
Baccarat is played with 8 decks of cards with backs of the same
colour and design and 2 additional cutting cards.
(2)
All cards must be dealt from a dealing shoe designed for the
purpose.
Value of cards and point count of hands
(1)
8
(b)
The value of the cards in each deck is as follows—
(a)
a card from 2 to 9 has its face value;
(b)
a 10, jack, queen or king has a value of 0;
(c)
an ace has a value of 1.
(2)
The point count of a hand is a single digit number from 0 to 9
inclusive and is decided by adding together the value of the cards
in the hand.
(3)
If the total of the cards in a hand is a 2-digit number, the left digit
of the number must be discarded having no value and the right
digit is the point count of the hand.
Permissible wagers and results
The following wagers are the permissible wagers by a player at a
game of baccarat—
(a)
a wager on the banker’s hand—
(i)
wins if the banker’s hand has a point count higher than
the player’s hand; and
(ii)
loses if the banker’s hand has a point count lower than
the player’s hand; and
29
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(iii) is void if the point counts of the banker’s hand and the
player’s hand are equal;
(b)
a wager on the player’s hand—
(i)
wins if the player’s hand has a point count higher than
the banker’s hand; and
(ii)
loses if the player’s hand has a point count lower than
the banker’s hand; and
(iii) is void if the point counts of the banker’s hand and the
player’s hand are equal;
(c)
9
10
a tie bet wins if the point counts of the banker’s hand and the
player’s hand are equal and loses if the point counts are not
equal.
How wagers may be made
(1)
A wager at baccarat is made by placing gaming chips on the
appropriate wager area of the baccarat layout.
(2)
A wager can not be made orally.
When wagers can not be placed, changed or withdrawn
A wager can not be placed, changed or withdrawn after the first
card of a round has been removed from the shoe.
11
12
Minimum and maximum wagers
(1)
If the minimum wager permitted for a table is not more than $10,
the maximum wager permitted for the table must be at least $500.
(2)
A tie bet must not be more than one-eighth of the maximum wager
permitted for the table.
Free hand
(1)
A casino operator may direct the banker to deal a round of play,
for which the players must not make a wager (a free hand), if—
(a)
a player at the table asks for a free hand; and
(b)
all of the other players agree to play a free hand.
30
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
13
14
(2)
A free hand must be played under sections 20 to 26, 27(1) and (2),
and 29.
(3)
No more than 3 free hands may be played consecutively.
Payout odds and commission
(1)
A winning wager made on either the player’s hand or the banker’s
hand is paid at odds of 1 to 1.
(2)
However, for a winning wager made on the banker’s hand, a 5%
charge (a commission) is payable to the casino operator on the
amount won.
(3)
The commission may be rounded up to 50c or the next highest
multiple of 50c if the commission is not exactly 50c or a multiple
of 50c.
(4)
The commission is collected from a player when the winning
payout is made.
(5)
Collection from seated players may be deferred but all outstanding
commission must be collected before reshuffling the cards in the
shoe.
(6)
For any commission not collected when the winning payout is
made, the dealer must place a marker button showing the amount
of commission owed in a rectangular space imprinted with the
number of the player owing the commission, on the part of the
layout in front of the dealer.
(7)
A winning tie bet is paid at odds of 8 to 1.
No commission baccarat
(1)
A casino operator may, at any time, offer a variation of the game
of baccarat known as ‘no commission baccarat’.
(2)
In no commission baccarat, a winning wager on the banker’s hand
is paid—
(a)
for a banker’s hand with a point count of 6—at odds of 1 to
2; and
(b)
for any other banker’s hand—at odds of 1 to 1.
31
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
15
Procedures for inspecting and shuffling cards
(1)
16
Cards must be inspected and shuffled—
(a)
under the provisions of this schedule; and
(b)
under the approved control system for the casino.
(2)
Before being used in play, the cards must be inspected to check for
marks and imperfections and that each deck of cards contains the
correct cards.
(3)
If a player asks to inspect the cards when the cards are first placed
on the table for play, the dealer must spread the cards face up on
the table to enable a person inspecting them to see if each deck of
cards is complete.
Cutting the cards
(1)
After the cards have been shuffled, the dealer calling the game
must offer the stack of cards, with backs facing away from the
dealer, to the players to be cut.
(2)
The dealer must start with the player seated in the highest number
position at the table and, working clockwise around the table, must
offer the stack to each player until a player accepts the cut.
(3)
The player who accepts the cut may ask another player to cut the
cards.
(4)
If no player accepts the cut, the dealer, or another casino employee
or casino key employee approved under the approved control
system for the casino, must cut the cards.
(5)
The cards must be cut by placing the cutting card in the stack at
least 10 cards in from either end.
(6)
After the cutting card has been inserted into the stack, the dealer
calling the game must take all cards in front of the cutting card and
place them at the back of the stack.
(7)
The dealer must then insert 1 cutting card in a position at least 14
cards in from the back of the stack and the second cutting card at
the end of the stack.
(8)
The stack of cards must then be placed in the dealing shoe for the
start of play.
32
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(9)
Before starting play, the dealer must remove the first card from the
shoe and place it, and an additional number of cards equal to the
face value of the first card drawn, in the discard holder after the
faces of all cards drawn have been shown to the players.
(10) In the procedure mentioned in subsection (9), 10, jack, queen and
king cards have a face value of 10 and an ace card a face value of
1.
17
Selecting the banker
(1)
This section applies subject to section 19.
(2)
The dealer calling the game must, at the start of play, offer the
dealing shoe to the player in seat number 1 at the table.
(3)
If the player rejects the dealing shoe, or there is no-one in seat
number 1, the dealer must offer the shoe to each of the other seated
players in turn, going anticlockwise around the table, until the shoe
is accepted by a player or has been rejected by all of the players.
(4)
If a player accepts the dealing shoe, the player is the banker and
must deal the cards under this rule and the instructions of the
dealer.
(5)
If no player accepts the dealing shoe, the dealer is the banker for
the round of play and must deal the cards.
(6)
If a player stops being the banker (the former banker), the dealer
must, before the start of the next round of play, offer the dealing
shoe to the player seated nearest the former banker, going
anticlockwise around the table.
(7)
If the player to whom the dealing shoe is offered under subsection
(6) rejects the shoe, the dealer must offer the shoe to each of the
other seated players in turn, going anticlockwise around the table,
until the shoe is accepted by a player or has been rejected by all of
the players.
(8)
If a player to whom the dealing shoe is offered under subsection
(6) or (7) accepts the shoe, the player is the banker and must deal
the cards under this rule and the instructions of the dealer.
(9)
If no player accepts the dealing shoe, the dealer is the banker for
the round of play and must deal the cards.
33
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
18
19
20
Banker must make minimum wagers
(1)
A player wishing to continue as banker must wager at least the
permissible minimum wager on either the banker’s hand or the
player’s hand.
(2)
If the player declines to wager, the player stops being the banker
and must relinquish the shoe.
(3)
A player who is the banker may place wagers on either the
banker’s hand or the player’s hand and may switch between the
hands on successive deals.
Dealer may be the banker
(1)
A casino key employee of a level higher than a floor manager may
direct the dealer calling the game to be the banker during a game
of baccarat.
(2)
While a direction given under subsection (1) is in force—
(a)
the dealer calling the game must be the banker and is
responsible for dealing the cards in accordance with this
rule; and
(b)
a player must not touch or handle the cards other than to cut
the cards or if permitted by a dealer; and
(c)
this section applies despite any other provision of this rule.
Dealing of first 2 cards to each hand
(1)
There must be 2 hands dealt in the game of baccarat 1 of which
must be designated the player’s hand and the other designated the
banker’s hand.
(2)
At the start of each round of play—
(3)
(a)
the dealer calling the game must announce ‘no more bets’;
and
(b)
the dealer must announce ‘cards’; and
(c)
the banker must then start dealing the cards.
The banker must deal 4 cards from the shoe, all face up or all face
down.
34
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
21
22
(4)
The first and third cards dealt are the first and second cards of the
player’s hand.
(5)
The second and fourth cards dealt are the first and second cards of
the banker’s hand.
(6)
After the cards are dealt to each hand, the cards must be placed
face up in front of the dealer, if the cards were dealt face down.
Announcement of point count of each hand after first 4 cards
(1)
After the first 4 cards have been dealt, the dealer calling the game
announces the point count of the player’s hand and then the
banker’s hand.
(2)
Following the announcement of the point counts of each hand, the
banker deals a third card to each hand as required by sections 24 to
26.
Dealing of additional cards
If both the player’s hand and the banker’s hand require a third card
to be dealt to them—
23
(a)
the player’s hand is to be dealt to first; and
(b)
only 1 additional card may be dealt to either hand.
Appearance of cutting card during play
(1)
When the cutting card appears during play, it must be removed,
and the round of play completed.
(2)
When the round of play is completed, the dealer must tell the
players the last round is about to be played, and a further round is
then played.
(3)
When the further round is completed, no more cards may be dealt
until the cards are shuffled or new cards are brought into play.
(4)
However, if the cutting card is the first card out of the shoe at the
start of a round, the dealer must tell the players the last round is
about to be played, and only that round may be played before the
cards are shuffled or new cards are brought into play.
35
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
24
No additional cards may be drawn in certain circumstances
If the point count of either the player’s hand or the banker’s hand
after the first 2 cards are dealt to each is an 8 or 9 (a natural), no
more cards may be dealt to either hand.
25
26
When player’s hand must draw or stay
(1)
If the point count of the banker’s hand on the first 2 cards is 0 to 7
and the point count of the player’s hand is 0 to 5, the player’s hand
must draw.
(2)
If the point count of the banker’s hand on the first 2 cards is 0 or 7
and the point count of the player’s hand is 6 or 7, the player’s hand
must stay.
Additional cards for banker’s hand in certain circumstances
(1)
The banker’s hand must draw or stay as required by diagram 1.2.
(2)
The first vertical column in the diagram labelled ‘point count of
banker’s hand’ refers to the point count of the banker’s hand after
the first 2 cards have been dealt to it.
(3)
The first horizontal column at the top of the diagram labelled
‘third card drawn by player’s hand’ refers to the value of the third
card drawn by the player’s hand not the point count of the player’s
hand.
(4)
The letter ‘D’ used in the diagram means the banker’s hand must
draw and the letter ‘S’ used in the diagram means the banker’s
hand must stay.
(5)
To use the diagram, a person finds the point count of the banker’s
hand in the first vertical column and traces it horizontally across
the diagram until it intersects the third card drawn by the player’s
hand.
(6)
The box at which the intersection takes place shows whether the
banker’s hand must draw or stay.
36
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
27
28
29
Deciding the results of the round and dealing with wagers
(1)
After each hand has received all the cards it is entitled to under
this rule, the dealer announces the final point count of each hand
indicating which hand has won the round.
(2)
If the 2 hands have equal point counts, the dealer announces ‘tie
hand’.
(3)
After the result of the round is announced, the dealer or dealers
responsible for the wagers on the table collect all losing wagers,
pay all winning wagers and either collect or mark up any
commission owed.
Continuing as banker or selecting a new banker
(1)
After a round of play, the banker may elect to pass the shoe or
remain as banker.
(2)
However—
(a)
the banker must pass the shoe whenever the banker’s hand
loses; and
(b)
the dealer or a floor manager may order the banker to pass
the shoe if the banker unreasonably delays the game,
repeatedly makes invalid deals or violates the rules of the
game.
(3)
When a voluntary or compulsory relinquishment of the shoe
occurs, the dealer calling the game must offer the shoe to the
player immediately to the right of the previous banker.
(4)
If the player does not accept the shoe or there is no player in that
position, the dealer must offer the shoe to each of the other seated
players in turn anticlockwise around the table.
(5)
The first person to accept the shoe becomes the new banker.
Irregularities
(1)
A third card dealt to the player’s hand when no third card is
authorised by this rule becomes the third card of the banker’s hand
if, under section 26, the banker’s hand must draw.
37
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(2)
If the banker’s hand is required to stay, the card dealt in error
becomes the first card of the next round of play unless it has been
disclosed.
(3)
A card drawn in error from the shoe if not disclosed is used as the
first card of the next round of play.
(4)
A card that would have been the first card of the next round of
play becomes the first card of a dummy round if the card—
(5)
(a)
has been disclosed; or
(b)
is found face up in the shoe.
A dummy round—
(a)
can only arise under subsection (4); and
(b)
must be played in accordance with sections 20 to 26.
(6)
A player must not make a wager on a dummy round.
(7)
If, after the start of a round of play, a card is found face up in the
shoe, the card—
(a)
is taken to be a live card; and
(b)
must be played as if it were found face down.
(8) If there are not enough cards remaining in the shoe to complete a
round of play—
(a) the round has no effect; and
(b)
a new round must start.
38
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Diagram 1.1—Baccarat table layout
sections 3(2) and 4
39
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 1 – Baccarat (continued)
Diagram 1.2—Baccarat table of play
section 26
40
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 2
Blackjack
Part 1
Preliminary
1
Conducting and playing blackjack
This schedule states the rules for conducting and playing the
casino game known as blackjack.
2
Definitions for sch 2
In this schedule—
blackjack means an ace and any card having a point value of 10
dealt as the first 2 cards to a player or a dealer.
blackjack wager see section 7(1).
dealer means the person responsible for dealing the cards at a
blackjack table.
double down see section 25.
hard total means the point total of a hand containing no aces or
containing aces that are each counted as 1 in value.
insurance wager means a wager under section 24.
madness 21 wager see section 45.
perfect pairs wager see section 53.
soft total means the point total of a hand containing an ace if the
ace is counted as 11 in value.
split, for cards or a hand of cards, means to split the cards or hand
of cards under section 26.
41
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
3
Table and layout
(1)
Blackjack is played at a table having a place for the dealer on 1
side and places for the players on the opposite side.
(2)
The layout cloth for the blackjack table must have printed on it the
name of, or logo for, the casino and—
(3)
4
(a)
rectangular, circular or oval areas to show boxes for wagers;
or
(b)
if the chief executive has approved a change to the boxes for
bonus blackjack wagers, madness 21 wagers, perfect pairs
wagers or super sevens wagers—the boxes as approved.
The following words must be printed on the layout cloth—
•
blackjack pays 3 to 2
•
dealer must stand on 17 and must draw to 16
•
insurance pays 2 to 1.
Drop box and discard rack
Each blackjack table must have a drop box and a discard rack
attached to it at approximately the positions shown in diagram 2.1.
Part 2
5
General rules
Number of decks
Blackjack is played with 5 to 8 decks of cards with backs of the
same colour and design and 2 additional cutting cards.
6
Value of cards
(1)
The value of the cards contained in each deck is as follows—
(a)
a card from 2 to 10 has its face value;
(b)
a jack, queen or king has a value of 10;
42
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(c)
(2)
7
If a value of 11 for an ace would give a player or the dealer a point
total of more than 21, the ace has a value of 1.
Winning and losing wagers
(1)
Before the first card is dealt for each round of play, each player at
a game of blackjack must make a wager (a blackjack wager)
against the dealer.
(2)
The wager—
(3)
8
3
unless subsection (2) or section 25(4)3 applies, an ace has a
value of 11.
(a)
wins if the player’s point total is not more than 21 and the
dealer’s point total is more than 21; or
(b)
wins if the player’s point total is more than the dealer’s point
total but neither is more than 21; or
(c)
wins if the player has a blackjack and the dealer does not
have a blackjack; or
(d)
loses if the dealer has a blackjack and the player does not
have a blackjack; or
(e)
is void if the player’s and the dealer’s point totals are the
same or the player and the dealer both have a blackjack; or
(f)
loses if the player’s point total is more than 21; or
(g)
loses if the dealer’s point total is more than the player’s
point total but neither is more than 21.
If the player has split cards and the dealer has a blackjack—
(a)
the player’s blackjack wager loses; and
(b)
the additional wager made by splitting the cards is void.
How wagers may be made
(1)
A wager at blackjack is made by placing chips in the appropriate
area of the layout.
(2)
A wager can not be made orally.
Section 25—
(4)
An ace in the first 2 cards of a double down has a value of 1, not 11.
43
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
9
10
11
12
Payout odds for winning wagers
(1)
Winning wagers, other than for a blackjack, are paid at odds of 1
to 1.
(2)
A blackjack is paid at odds of 3 to 2.
Time for wagering
(1)
After the first card of a round of play has been removed from the
shoe, a player must not handle, remove or alter the blackjack
wager on a hand until a decision about the wager has been made
and has taken effect.
(2)
After a wager on the insurance line, a wager to double down or a
wager to split cards has been made and confirmed by the dealer, a
player must not handle, remove or alter any wager until a decision
about the wager has been made and has taken effect.
Entry to or exclusion from game after first round
(1)
A casino operator may refuse to allow a person who has not made
a blackjack wager on the first round of play to enter a later round,
until the cards are reshuffled.
(2)
A casino operator who allows a person to enter a game after the
first round of cards is dealt from the dealing shoe may allow the
person to wager only the minimum wager for the table, until the
cards are reshuffled and a new shoe is started.
(3)
A casino operator may refuse to allow a person, who has placed a
blackjack wager on a round of play and declined to place a
blackjack wager on a later round, to place a further blackjack
wager until the shoe is completed and a new shoe is started.
Minimum and maximum wagers for tables
(1)
If the minimum wager permitted for a table is not more than $5,
the maximum wager permitted for the table must be at least $100.
(2)
Despite subsection (1), a casino key employee responsible for
managing table games may direct that—
(a)
a player may wager on only 1 box; and
(b)
the player may wager only the minimum wager for the table.
44
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
13
(3)
The employee may give the direction only if the employee
reasonably believes the player is playing the game in a way that
affects, or could potentially affect, the randomness of the outcome
of the game as intended by this rule.
(4)
The casino employee must notify an inspector of the direction.
Procedures for inspecting and shuffling cards
(1)
Cards must be inspected and shuffled—
(a)
under the provisions of this schedule; and
(b)
under the approved control system for the casino.
(2)
Before being used in play, the cards must be inspected to check for
marks and imperfections and that each deck of cards contains the
correct cards.
(3)
If a player asks to inspect the cards when the cards are first placed
on the table for play, the dealer must spread the cards face up on
the table to enable a person inspecting them to see if each deck of
cards is complete.
(4)
The cards must be shuffled—
(a)
before being brought into play; and
(b)
after the cutting card is reached in the dealing shoe, unless—
(c)
(5)
14
(i)
the cards are taken out of play; or
(ii)
the table is to close at the end of the last round of play;
and
after a round of play if directed by a casino employee higher
than a floor manager.
The dealer must reshuffle cards that have been preshuffled if a
player asks the dealer to reshuffle the cards before the first card is
removed from the dealing shoe.
Cutting of cards by player and dealer
(1)
After the cards have been shuffled, the cards must be cut.
(2)
Two cutting cards must be used.
45
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(3)
The dealer must offer the stack of cards, with backs facing away
from the dealer, to the players to be cut.
(4)
The player specified in section 15 must cut the cards by placing 1
of the cutting cards in the stack at least 10 cards from either end.
(i) if the cut is incorrect the dealer must remove the cutting card
and ask the player to re-cut the cards.
15
(5)
However, the player mentioned in subsection (4) may ask another
player to cut the cards.
(6)
The stack of cards must be cut only once by the player.
(7)
After the cutting card has been inserted into the stack by the
player, the dealer must take the cutting card and all cards in front
of the cutting card and place them to the back of the stack.
(8)
The dealer must insert the other cutting card in a position
approximately 1 deck or more in from the back of the stack or at
the discretion of a pit boss or assistant pit boss insert the cutting
card in a position between approximately 1 deck and
approximately two-thirds of the way in from the back of the stack.
(9)
The stack of cards must then be inserted in the dealing shoe for
start of play.
Selecting player to cut cards
(1)
(2)
The player to cut the cards must be—
(a)
the first player to the table immediately before the start of
play; or
(b)
the player on whose box the cutting card appeared during the
last round of play; or
(c)
if the cutting card appeared on the dealer’s hand during the
last round of play—the player at the farthest point to the
right of the dealer; or
(d)
if the reshuffle of the cards was under section 13(4)(c)—the
player at the farthest point to the right of the dealer.
If the player specified in subsection (1) refuses to cut, the cards
must be offered to each other player moving clockwise around the
table until a player accepts the cut.
46
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
16
(3)
A player specified in subsection (1) or a player who accepts the cut
under subsection (2) may ask another player to cut the cards.
(4)
If no player accepts the cut, the dealer must cut the cards.
Replacing the cards
A casino employee responsible for supervising table games may,
after a round of play, direct that the cards be replaced.
17
18
Using a dealing shoe
(1)
All cards used in the game of blackjack must be dealt from a
dealing shoe designed for the purpose and located on the table to
the left of the dealer.
(2)
The dealer must remove cards from the shoe with the left hand,
and then with the right hand place them, face up, on the
appropriate area of the layout.
Dealing the cards
(1)
At the start of each round of play, the dealer must, starting on the
dealer’s left and continuing around the table, deal the cards in the
following order—
(a)
one card face up to each box on the layout which contains a
blackjack wager;
(b)
one card face up to the dealer;
(c)
a second card face up to each box which contains a blackjack
wager.
(2)
After 2 cards have been dealt to each player and 1 card to the
dealer, the dealer, starting from the dealer’s left, must announce
each player’s point total and each player must indicate whether the
player wishes to double down, split cards, stand, or draw.
(3)
For subsection (2)—
(a)
a player must indicate whether the player wishes to double
down or split cards by placing an additional wager; and
(b)
a player must indicate whether the player wishes to stand or
draw by a hand signal.
47
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
19
(4)
As each player indicates his or her decision, the dealer must deal
face up the additional cards required and must announce the point
total of the player after each additional card is dealt.
(5)
After all additional cards have been dealt, the dealer must deal a
second card face up to the dealer.
(6)
Any additional cards dealt to the hand of the dealer must be dealt
face up after which the dealer must announce the dealer’s point
total.
Collecting and discarding cards after play
At the completion of a round of play, all cards still remaining on
the layout must be picked up by the dealer in order and placed face
down in the discard rack so that the cards can be easily arranged to
indicate each player’s hand if there is a question or dispute.
20
Procedure when cutting card is reached
When the cutting card is reached in a round of play, the dealer
must continue dealing the cards until the round of play is
completed and then reshuffle the cards.
21
Players not to handle cards
A player or spectator must not handle, remove or alter any cards
used in a game of blackjack.
22
Player responsible for own point total
Each player at the table is responsible for correctly computing the
point total of the player’s hand and may not rely on the point total
announced by the dealer.
23
Play if player has blackjack
(1)
If the first face up card dealt to the dealer is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9
and a player has blackjack, the dealer must announce and pay the
blackjack at odds of 3 to 2 and must remove the player’s cards
before any player receives a third card.
48
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(2)
If the first face up card dealt to the dealer is an ace, king, queen,
jack or 10 and a player has a blackjack, the dealer must announce
the blackjack but may make no payment nor remove any cards
until all other cards are dealt to the players and the dealer receives
a second card.
(3)
If the dealer’s second card does not give the dealer blackjack, the
dealer must complete his or her hand and any player with
blackjack must be paid at the odds of 3 to 2.
(4)
Despite any other provision of this rule, when a player has
blackjack and the dealer’s first card is an ace, the dealer must pay
the player immediately at odds of 1 to 1 in full settlement of the
player’s wager if requested by the player.
Part 3
24
Different types of wagers, extra
players and other matters
Insurance wagers
(1)
If the first card dealt to the dealer is an ace, each player may make
an insurance wager which wins if the dealer’s second card is a
king, queen, jack or 10 and loses if the dealer’s second card is an
ace, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9.
(2)
If subsection (1) applies, the dealer must call for insurance wagers
by calling ‘insurance’.
(3)
A player may make an insurance wager, immediately after the
second card is dealt to the player and before any additional card is
dealt, by placing on the insurance line an amount not more than
half the amount staked on the player’s blackjack wager.
(4)
However, the insurance wager may be more than half the amount
staked on the player’s blackjack wager by 25c to ensure an even
dollar payout, if the insurance wager wins.
(5)
All winning insurance wagers are paid at odds of 2 to 1.
49
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(6)
25
26
All losing insurance wagers must be collected by the dealer
immediately after the dealer draws a second face up card for the
dealer’s hand and before the dealer draws any additional cards.
Doubling down
(1)
If the point count of the first 2 cards dealt to a player or the first 2
cards of a hand made by splitting cards totals 9, 10 or 11, the
player may elect to make an additional wager of not more than the
amount of the player’s blackjack wager (to double down) on the
first 2 cards dealt to the player or the first 2 cards of a hand made
by splitting cards.
(2)
However, only 1 additional card may be dealt to the hand on which
the player has elected to double down.
(3)
The additional card must be dealt face up and placed sideways on
the layout.
(4)
An ace in the first 2 cards of a double down has a value of 1, not
11.
(5)
If the dealer obtains blackjack after a player doubles down, the
dealer may collect only the amount of the player’s blackjack wager
and not the additional amount wagered in doubling down.
Splitting cards
(1)
If the first 2 cards dealt to a player are identical in value, the player
may elect to split the hand, making each card the first card of a
separate hand.
Example—
If a player’s hand consists of a queen and a 10, the 2 cards may be split, making
the queen the first card of 1 hand and the 10 the first card of a separate hand.
(2)
However, the player must wager on each hand the amount wagered
on the original hand before it was split.
(3)
When a player splits cards, the dealer must deal a second card to
the first of the hands formed and must complete the player’s
decisions about the hand before proceeding to deal cards to the
second hand.
(4)
After a second card is dealt to a split card, the dealer must
announce the point total of the hand and the player must indicate
50
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
to the dealer whether the player wishes to stand, draw or double
down but—
(5)
27
a player may not split cards again; and
(b)
a player splitting aces may have only 1 card dealt to each ace
and may not elect to receive additional cards; and
(c)
a player splitting aces or 10 point value cards can not
achieve a blackjack.
If the dealer obtains a blackjack after a player splits cards, the
dealer may collect only the amount of the player’s blackjack wager
and may not collect the additional amount wagered in splitting
cards.
Additional cards for players
(1)
A player may elect to draw additional cards if the player’s point
total is less than 21.
(2)
However—
(3)
28
(a)
(a)
a player electing to double down may draw only 1 additional
card; and
(b)
a player splitting aces may have only 1 card dealt to each ace
and may not elect to receive additional cards.
A dealer may direct a player to draw an additional card if the
player’s point total is not more than 11, other than if—
(a)
the total includes an ace that has been given a value of 1; or
(b)
section 25 or 26 applies.
Additional cards for dealer
(1)
A dealer must draw additional cards to the dealer’s hand until the
dealer has a hard or soft total of 17 to 21 after which the dealer
must not draw any further cards to the dealer’s hand.
(2)
A dealer must not draw additional cards to the dealer’s hand,
regardless of the point total, if decisions have been made on all
players’ hands and the additional cards would have no effect on
the outcome of the round of play.
51
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
29
One player for each box
Subject to section 30 and part 7—
30
31
(a)
only 1 player may play on a box at a blackjack table; and
(b)
the dealer must not allow a player to place a wager on
another player’s hand.
More than 1 player for a box
(1)
A casino operator may permit up to 3 players to place a blackjack
wager on 1 box at a blackjack table.
(2)
The casino operator may direct that either—
(a)
the total of all players’ wagers on 1 box must not be more
than the table maximum; or
(b)
the separate wagers for each player must not be more than
the table maximum.
Relationship between players placing blackjack wagers on
the same box
(1)
This section applies—
(a)
if more than 1 player places a blackjack wager on a box; and
(b)
to each player who places a blackjack wager on the box.
(2)
The dealer must decide the player who controls the box.
(3)
The dealer must ensure the wager of the player who controls the
box is in the part of the box closest to the dealer’s side of the table.
(4)
Only the player controlling the box may make decisions about the
cards to be dealt to the box and all other players must place their
wagers immediately behind and in a straight line with the wager of
the player controlling the box.
(5)
All players may make an insurance wager.
(6)
If the player controlling the box doubles down, the other players
may also double down but—
(a)
are not required to do so; and
(b)
only 1 additional card may be dealt to the hand involved in
the double down.
52
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(7)
32
If the player controlling the box splits cards, the other players must
either make an additional wager to cover each split card or specify
to which of the split cards they wish their blackjack wager to
apply.
Circumstances when a player may wager on more than 1 box
(1)
A player may be permitted by a casino operator to place a
blackjack wager on more than 1 box at a blackjack table with the
understanding that, when there are not enough seats in the casino
to accommodate patron demand, a player wagering on more than 1
box must give up a box or boxes to accommodate other players.
(2)
If a player is permitted to place a blackjack wager on more than 1
box at a table, the player must make at least the minimum wager
on each hand played.
Part 4
33
Super sevens wagers
Additional super sevens wager
A player may choose to place an additional wager if the boxes for
wagers on the blackjack table layout provide for super sevens
wagers (a super sevens wager).
34
35
Placing a super sevens wager
(1)
For a round of play, a player may place a super sevens wager on
any box on which the player has placed a blackjack wager.
(2)
The wager must be placed before any cards are dealt in the round
of play.
Winning and losing super sevens wagers and payout odds
(1)
A super sevens wager wins if—
(a)
the first, second and third cards dealt to the player placing
the wager are all sevens; or
53
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(2)
(b)
the first and second cards dealt to the player placing the
wager are both sevens, but the wager does not win under
paragraph (a); or
(c)
the first card dealt to the player placing the wager is a seven,
but the wager does not win under paragraph (a) or (b).
Winning super sevens wagers have the following payouts—
(a)
(b)
(c)
(3)
36
for 3 sevens (see subsection (1)(a))—
(i)
if the 3 sevens are all the same suit—5000 to 1; or
(ii)
if the 3 sevens are not all the same suit—500 to 1;
for 2 sevens (see subsection (1)(b))—
(i)
if the 2 sevens are both the same suit—100 to 1; or
(ii)
if the 2 sevens are not both the same suit—50 to 1;
for 1 seven (see subsection (1)(c))—3 to 1.
A super sevens wager loses if the first card dealt to the player
placing the wager is not a seven.
Low super sevens wagers are dealt with
(1)
After each player has been dealt the player’s first 2 cards, the
dealer takes away all losing super sevens wagers.
(2)
The dealer then makes payouts to each player whose first card is a
seven but whose second card is not seven.
(3)
The dealer then goes on to deal with each player in the usual way
for blackjack.
(4)
If a player with 2 sevens declines a third card, the dealer
immediately makes a payout for the player’s winning super sevens
wager.
(5)
If a player with 2 sevens takes a third card and it is a seven, the
dealer immediately makes a payout for the player’s winning super
sevens wager.
(6)
If a player with 2 sevens takes a third card and it is not a seven, but
the player does not bust, the dealer immediately makes a payout
for the player’s winning super sevens wager.
(7)
If a player with 2 sevens takes a third card and busts, the dealer
takes away the player’s blackjack wager, then makes a payout for
54
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
the player’s winning super sevens wager, and lastly takes away the
player’s cards.
37
38
Splitting sevens
(1)
If a player who makes a super sevens wager splits 2 sevens, the
player’s super sevens result is decided from the 2 sevens that were
split and the next card dealt to the player as the second card to the
first of the split sevens.
(2)
The dealer makes a payout for the super sevens wager immediately
the result is decided.
Two or more players on a box
(1)
If 2 or more players place a blackjack wager on a box and the
player controlling the box is permitted to make super sevens
wagers, the other player or players may also make super sevens
wagers, but the right of the player controlling the box to make
decisions about the cards to be dealt is not affected.
(2)
If the player controlling the box splits a pair of sevens, the cards
that decide the super sevens result for the player controlling the
box also decide the super sevens result for another player placing a
blackjack wager on the box, whether or not the other player
chooses to make an additional wager to cover each split card.
Part 5
39
Bonus blackjack
Additional bonus blackjack wager
(1)
A player may place an additional $1 wager (a bonus blackjack
wager) if—
(a)
the boxes for wagers on the blackjack table layout provide
for bonus blackjack; and
(b)
a sign at the table shows the amounts of the bonus blackjack
payouts for the table.
55
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(2)
40
41
Bonus blackjack may be played only if either 6 or 8 decks of cards
are used for the game of blackjack.
Placing a bonus blackjack wager
(1)
Only the player controlling a box may make a bonus blackjack
wager.
(2)
The wager must be placed before any cards in a round are removed
from the shoe.
(3)
The wager is made by placing chips in the appropriate area of the
layout.
Winning bonus blackjack wagers and payouts
(1)
(2)
A bonus blackjack wager wins if—
(a)
4 cards are dealt to the player placing the wager, and 3 of the
4 cards are fives and the other card is a six; or
(b)
3 cards are dealt to the player placing the wager and they are
all sevens; or
(c)
3 cards are dealt to the player placing the wager and 1 card is
a six, 1 card is a seven, and 1 card is an eight; or
(d)
a nominated blackjack is dealt to the player placing the
wager.
Winning bonus blackjack wagers have the following payout
amounts—
(a)
(b)
(c)
for 3 fives and a six (see subsection (1)(a))—
(i)
if the 4 cards are all the same suit—$25000; or
(ii)
if the 4 cards are not all the same suit—$1500;
for 3 sevens (see subsection (1)(b))—
(i)
if the 3 cards are all the same suit—$5000; or
(ii)
if the 3 cards are not all the same suit—$500;
for a six, a seven and an eight (see subsection (1)(c))—
(i)
if the 3 cards are all the same suit—
(A) if 8 decks of cards are in use for the game of
blackjack—$750; or
56
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(B) if 6 decks of cards are in use for the game of
blackjack—$800; or
(ii)
(d)
(3)
if the 3 cards are not all the same suit—$50;
for a nominated blackjack (see subsection (1)(d))—$175.
In this section—
nominated blackjack means a blackjack consisting of an ace of a
suit nominated for the round of play on a sign on the table and
another card, also nominated on the sign, of the same suit as the
ace.
42
43
Dealing with bonus blackjack wagers
(1)
This section applies to a player who makes a bonus blackjack
wager in addition to the player’s blackjack wager.
(2)
If the dealer settles a winning blackjack wager for the player and
the player has blackjack, the dealer must—
(a)
if the player’s bonus blackjack wager is not a winning bonus
blackjack wager—take away the bonus blackjack wager; or
(b)
if the bonus blackjack wager is a winning bonus blackjack
wager—also settle the winning bonus blackjack wager.
(3)
If the player’s bonus blackjack wager can not be a winning bonus
blackjack wager, the dealer must take away the wager as soon as it
is evident no more cards are to be dealt to the player.
(4)
If the player’s bonus blackjack wager is a winning bonus blackjack
wager, but subsection (2) does not apply, the dealer must leave the
wager in place.
(5)
If the player’s bonus blackjack wager is left in place under
subsection (4), the dealer must settle it after all players’ blackjack
wagers have been settled.
Splitting cards
If a player who makes a bonus blackjack wager splits 2 cards, the
player’s bonus blackjack result is decided from the hand dealt to
the first of the split cards.
57
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 6
44
Madness 21 wagers
Definitions for pt 6
In this part—
controlling player, for a box, means the player whom the dealer
decides, under section 31, controls the box.
electronic prize meter means a meter for displaying the amount of
the prize for each $1 wager that is a madness 21 wager.
45
Additional madness 21 wager
A player may choose to place an additional wager (a madness 21
wager) if—
(a)
the boxes for wagers on the blackjack table layout provide
for madness 21 wagers; and
(b)
the table is fitted with the following equipment approved by
the chief executive—
(i)
a jackpot button;
(ii)
a random number generator;
(iii) an electronic prize meter.
46
4
Placing a madness 21 wager
(1)
A player may place a madness 21 wager on any box on which the
player has placed a blackjack wager.
(2)
The madness 21 wager must be placed before any cards in the
round of play are dealt.
(3)
The madness 21 wager must be at least the minimum amount, and
not more than the maximum amount, displayed on the sign at the
table about madness 21 wagers.4
Under section 64(1)(d) of the Act, a casino operator must display at each gaming table or
location for the playing of a game a sign showing the permissible minimum and maximum
wagers for the game played at the table or location.
58
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(4)
47
48
Subsection (1) does not apply if the madness 21 equipment for the
table has malfunctioned or is not operating.
Winning and losing madness 21 wagers and payouts
(1)
A madness 21 wager on a box wins if the controlling player for the
box has a blackjack, even if the dealer has a blackjack.
(2)
A madness 21 wager on a box loses if the controlling player for
the box does not have a blackjack.
(3)
Subject to subsection (4), after the jackpot button has been pressed
by a person eligible to press it under section 44E, each winning
madness 21 wager on a box must be paid, for each $1 wager that is
a madness 21 wager, the amount displayed on the electronic prize
meter for madness 21 wagers at the table.
(4)
If, during the round of play, the equipment for madness 21
malfunctions and can not be used to decide the amount payable for
a winning madness 21 wager, the winning madness 21 wager for
the round must be paid an amount equal to 25 times the amount of
the madness 21 wager.
Deciding who is eligible to press jackpot button
(1)
The person who may press the jackpot button for a winning
madness 21 wager on a box is decided under this section.
(2)
The controlling player for the box may press the jackpot button if
the controlling player placed a winning madness 21 wager on the
box.
(3)
The second player for the box may press the jackpot button if—
(4)
(a)
the controlling player for the box has not placed a madness
21 wager, is not present or refuses to press the jackpot
button; and
(b)
the second player has placed a winning madness 21 wager on
the box.
The third player for the box may press the jackpot button if—
(a)
no-one may press the jackpot button under subsection (2) or
(3) or the persons who may press the jackpot button under
59
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
either of the subsections are not present or refuse to press the
jackpot button; and
(b)
the third player has placed a winning madness 21 wager on
the box.
(5)
The floor manager may press the jackpot button if all persons who
may press the button under subsection (2), (3) or (4) are not
present or refuse to press the jackpot button.
(6)
In this section—
second player, for a box, means the player for a box whose
blackjack wager is directly behind the blackjack wager of the
controlling player for the box.
third player, for a box, means the player for a box whose
blackjack wager is directly behind the blackjack wager of the
second player for the box.
49
50
Pressing the jackpot button
(1)
A player may use only reasonable force to press the jackpot button.
(2)
If a casino key employee responsible for managing table games is
satisfied a player used more force than was reasonable to press the
jackpot button, the casino key employee may direct that the player
be excluded from placing madness 21 wagers at the casino.
How madness 21 wagers are dealt with
(1)
This section applies despite section 23.
(2)
After controlling players have been dealt their first 2 cards, the
dealer must take away all losing madness 21 wagers.
(3)
If a player has blackjack and the dealer’s first card is a 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
7, 8 or 9, the dealer must—
(a)
pay the player’s blackjack wager, push the controlling
player’s cards together and leave them on the layout on the
dealer’s side of the box; and
(b)
deal with each other player in the usual way for the game of
blackjack.
60
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
51
(4)
If a player has blackjack and the dealer’s first card is an ace, king,
queen, jack or 10, the dealer must deal with each player in the
usual way for a game of blackjack.
(5)
After the dealer has made payouts for the round of play but before
removing the cards from the layout, the dealer must, for each box
with a winning madness 21 wager, offer the jackpot button to the
persons who may press the jackpot button for the box under
section 48, starting from the dealer’s right, until one of the persons
presses the jackpot button.
(6)
After an amount is displayed on the electronic prize meter for a
box with a winning madness 21 wager, the dealer must pay, for
each $1 wager that is a madness 21 wager, the amount displayed
on the electronic prize meter for madness 21 wagers at the table,
before moving to the next box with a winning madness 21 wager.
(7)
After all winning madness 21 wagers have been paid, the dealer
must collect the players’ cards and place them in the discard rack.
(8)
To remove doubt, it is declared that—
(a)
the jackpot button may only be pressed once for each box
with a winning madness 21 wager; and
(b)
each player with a winning madness 21 wager on a box is to
be paid under subsection (6) or section 47(4).
Schedule of prizes
For each casino for which approval has been given for gaming
equipment that provides for madness 21 wagers as part of the
game of blackjack, the chief executive must approve a schedule of
prizes for each $1 wager that is a madness 21 wager as part of the
game at the casino.
61
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 7
52
Perfect pairs wagers
Definitions for pt 7
In this part—
coloured pair means a pair comprised of—
(a)
2 red cards of different suits; or
(b)
2 black cards of different suits.
face value, of a card, means—
(a)
the number of the card, namely 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10; or
(b)
the type of card, namely jack, queen, king or ace.
mixed pair means a pair comprised of 1 red card and 1 black card.
pair means 2 cards with the same face value.
perfect pair means a pair comprised of cards of the same suit.
53
Perfect pairs wager
A player may choose to place a wager (a perfect pairs wager) for a
round of play if the boxes for wagers on the blackjack table layout
provide for perfect pairs wagers.
54
Placing a perfect pairs wager
(1)
(2)
If a player places a blackjack wager on a box, perfect pairs wagers
may also be placed on the box. However –
(i)
the player placing the blackjack wager on the box must
be given an opportunity to place a perfect pairs wager
on before any other person is allowed to place a perfect
pairs wager on the box; and
(ii)
a maximum of 3 perfect pairs wagers may be placed on
a box.
A perfect pairs wager for a round of play must be placed before
any cards are dealt in the round of play.
62
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(3)
55
A perfect pairs wager must be at least the minimum amount, and
not more than the maximum amount, displayed on the sign at the
table about perfect pairs wagers.5
Winning and losing perfect pairs wagers and payouts
(1)
A perfect pairs wager wins if the first 2 cards dealt to the hand on
which the wager was placed are a pair.
(2)
Winning perfect pairs wagers must be paid as follows—
(a)
if the chief executive has approved the application of the No.
1 schedule of prizes for perfect pairs wagers as part of the
game of blackjack at the casino—
(i)
for a mixed pair—5 to 1; and
(ii)
for a coloured pair—10 to 1; and
(iii) for a perfect pair—30 to 1;
(b)
if the chief executive has approved the application of the No.
2 schedule of prizes for perfect pairs wagers as part of the
game of blackjack at the casino—
(i)
for a mixed pair—6 to 1; and
(ii)
for a coloured pair—12 to 1; and
(iii) for a perfect pair—25 to 1.
(3)
5
A perfect pairs wager loses if the first 2 cards dealt to the hand on
which the wager was placed do not comprise a pair.
Under section 64(1)(d) of the Act, a casino operator must display at each gaming table or
location for the playing of a game a sign showing the permissible minimum and maximum
wagers for the game played at the table or location.
63
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
56
Schedule of prizes
For each casino for which approval has been given for gaming
equipment that provides for perfect pairs wagers as part of the
game of blackjack, the chief executive must approve the
application of the No. 1 schedule of prizes or No. 2 schedule of
prizes for perfect pairs wagers as part of the game at the casino.
57
How perfect pairs wager dealt with
(1)
(2)
Part 8
58
After each player has been dealt the player’s first 2 cards, the
dealer must—
(a)
take away all losing perfect pairs wagers; and
(b)
make a payout to each player who has placed a winning
perfect pairs wager.
The dealer then goes on to deal with each player in the usual way
for blackjack.
Irregularities
Exposed card in rack
A card found face up in the shoe must be removed from play and
placed in the discard rack.
59
Card drawn in error to be used in play
(1)
A card drawn in error without its face being exposed must be used
as though it were the next card from the shoe.
(2)
After the first 2 cards have been dealt to each player and a card is
drawn in error and exposed to the players, the card must be dealt to
a player or the dealer as though it were the next card from the
shoe.
64
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Examples of a card drawn in error and exposed to players—
60
A dealer gives a card to a player who has not indicated for a card.
2
A dealer accidentally exposes a card when drawing it from a dealing shoe.
(3)
A player refusing to accept the card must not have any additional
cards dealt to that hand during the round.
(4)
If the card is refused by the players, it must become the dealer’s
second card.
Card drawn in error not to be used
(1)
(2)
61
1
Subsection (2) applies if the dealer—
(a)
has 17 or more points; and
(b)
accidentally deals another card to the dealer’s hand; and
(c)
exposes the face of the card to the players.
The card must be removed from play and placed in the discard
rack.
Not enough cards in shoe to complete round of play
If there are not enough cards remaining in the shoe to complete a
round of play, the dealer must shuffle and cut the cards in the
discard rack and complete the round of play.
62
Incorrect placement of card
(1)
If, during the original dealing of cards in a round of play, any of
the cards are incorrectly placed, and the incorrect placement is
noticed before the dealer acts on any hand, the cards must be
placed in the order they would have been in if the incorrect
placement had not happened.
(2)
For subsection (1), a dealer is taken to have acted on a hand if—
(a)
the dealer has received a hand signal from the player for the
first box in play at the table; or
(b)
the player for the first box in play at the table has decided to
double down and a third card has been delivered to the hand;
or
65
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
63
the player for the first box in play at the table has decided to
split the hand and a second card has been delivered to the
first of the hands formed; or
(d)
a player’s wager has been settled.
Dealer with too many cards
(1)
(2)
64
(c)
If, contrary to section 18(1)(b), the dealer has inadvertently dealt 2
or more cards to the dealer’s hand, and the dealer has started
acting on a player’s hand, the dealer must—
(a)
inform the players that the cards held by the dealer are taken
to have the point total usually counted after the dealer’s
cards have been dealt, but not a blackjack; and
(b)
give each player the choice of withdrawing the player’s
blackjack wager; and
(c)
finish acting on all players’ hands that have not been
withdrawn.
The dealer must finish hitting the dealer’s hand if there is at least 1
player—
(a)
who did not withdraw the player’s blackjack wager; and
(b)
whose point total is not more than 21.
No cards or only 1 card dealt to a player’s hand
(1)
If no cards are dealt to a player’s hand (player A), and the dealer
has started acting on another player’s hand, player A’s hand is
dead and player A must retract his or her blackjack wager.
(2)
If only 1 card is dealt to a player’s hand (player B) and the dealer
has started acting on another player’s hand, player B may—
(a)
retract player B’s blackjack wager; or
(b)
receive a second card when the dealer starts acting on player
B’s hand.
66
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
65
No second card to last player if dealer has no second card
(1)
(2)
66
This section applies to the player immediately before the dealer
if—
(a)
the dealer has not dealt a second card to the player; and
(b)
all other players have been dealt a second card and hit with
the additional cards each has requested; and
(c)
the dealer has not dealt the dealer’s hand a second card.
The player may choose—
(a)
to retract the player’s blackjack wager; or
(b)
to be dealt a second card and additional cards before the
dealer deals a second card to the dealer’s hand.
Additional cards not offered or dealt to a player
(1)
This section applies to a player if—
(a)
(b)
(2)
67
the dealer does not—
(i)
offer additional cards to the player; or
(ii)
deal additional cards to the player and the player has
indicated for additional cards; and
the player is not the player immediately before the dealer.
The player may retract his or her blackjack wager or play out his or
her hand after all other players have completed their hands and
before any other card is dealt.
No second card or additional cards to last player if dealer has
second card and more
(1)
(2)
This section applies to the player immediately before the dealer
if—
(a)
the dealer has not dealt a second card to the player, or
offered to hit the player with additional cards; and
(b)
the dealer has dealt himself or herself a second card and hit
the dealer’s hand with an additional card.
The dealer must separate out the dealer’s second card and any
additional cards in the order in which they were dealt.
67
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(3)
Before taking any other cards from the shoe, the dealer must use
the second card and any additional cards that have been separated
out in the order the cards were originally taken from the shoe.
(4)
The dealer must deal the player immediately before the dealer—
(5)
68
if the player was not dealt a second card—a second card; and
(b)
if the player indicates he or she wants to be hit with
additional cards—as many additional cards as the player
indicates.
The dealer must deal a second card to the dealer’s hand and may
hit the dealer’s hand in the usual way.
Dealer with no first card
(1)
(2)
(3)
69
(a)
If a dealer is acting on a player’s hand and discovers the dealer has
missed dealing a first card to the dealer’s hand, the dealer must—
(a)
give each player the choice of withdrawing the player’s
blackjack wager; and
(b)
finish acting on all players’ hands that have not been
withdrawn.
The dealer must take 2 cards and, if necessary, finish hitting the
dealer’s hand, if there is at least 1 player—
(a)
who did not withdraw the player’s blackjack wager; and
(b)
whose point total is not more than 21.
The dealer need not deal to the dealer’s hand if either of the
following applies to each of the players—
(a)
the player withdrew the player’s blackjack wager;
(b)
the player obtained a point total of more than 21.
Extra hand dealt
If the dealer has started acting on a player’s hand, an extra hand
dealt in error is void.
68
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
70
Player not acting on hand after wagering
If a player who has made a blackjack wager does not act on the
player’s hand within a reasonable time, or refuses to act or is not
present, a pit boss, assistant pit boss or floor manager may direct
that—
(a)
the first 2 cards must be dealt to the player’s hand; and
(b)
further cards must be dealt to the player’s hand, if the hard
total of the hand is not more than 11 or the soft total of the
hand is not more than 16.
Part 9
71
Use of card machine
Card machine
(1)
A card machine may be used for blackjack.
(2)
However, a card machine must not be used for a game of
blackjack if super sevens, bonus blackjack, madness 21 or perfect
pairs is offered with the game, unless the approved control system
for the casino states that a card machine may be used for a game of
blackjack with which super sevens, bonus blackjack, madness 21
or perfect pairs is offered.
(3)
If a card machine is used, the operation of parts 1 to 5 is changed
to the extent necessary for the following to have effect—
(a)
the number of decks used must be not less than the
minimum, and not more than the maximum (which in turn
must be not more than 8), number of decks approved by the
chief executive for use in the card machine;
(b)
when play is started, or if the cards in the card machine are
replaced under section 16, the cards must be inspected and
shuffled and then placed in the card machine;
(c)
the cards do not need to be cut before being placed in the
card machine;
69
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(4)
72
(d)
a cutting card may be used to conceal the bottom card of the
cards placed into the machine, but it must be removed from
the machine before cards for the first round of play are dealt;
(e)
cutting cards are not used for the game, other than in the way
mentioned in paragraph (d);
(f)
for dealing the cards, the card machine takes the place of the
dealing shoe;
(g)
cards that have been placed in the discard rack are placed in
the card machine to be mixed with the remaining cards in the
machine.
Section 11 does not apply if a card machine is used.
Card machine malfunction
(1)
This section applies if a card machine malfunctions during a round
of play.
(2)
A casino employee responsible for supervising table games must
ensure that the card machine is repaired or replaced in accordance
with the casino’s approved control system.
(3)
If the casino employee considers that the malfunction has
disadvantaged a player, each player must be given the opportunity
to have the player’s wagers for the round of play returned to the
player before the round of play is continued.
70
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 2 – Blackjack (continued)
Diagram 2.1—Blackjack table layout
section 4
71
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 3
Caribbean stud poker
section 3(2)
Part 1
1
Preliminary
Conducting and playing caribbean stud poker
This schedule states the rules for conducting and playing the
casino game known as caribbean stud poker.
2
Definitions for sch 3
In this schedule—
1 pair see section 6.
2 pairs see section 6.
3 of a kind see section 6.
4 of a kind see section 6.
ante wager means a wager made by a person to enable the person
to take part in a round of the game as a player.
bet wager means a wager made by a player after the cards have
been dealt and the player has had an opportunity to look at the
player’s hand.
closes a player’s hand see section 3.
continuing player means a player who has made an ante wager
and has not folded.
dead man’s hand means a hand with a pair of aces, a pair of eights
and 1 odd card.
dealer’s upcard see section 15.
face value, of a card, means—
72
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(a)
the number of the card, namely, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10; or
(b)
the type of card, namely, jack, queen, king or ace.
flush see section 6.
fold means to stop taking part in a round of the game.
full house see section 6.
game means caribbean stud poker.
jackpot prize, for the game at a casino, means an amount worked
out or stated for the game under the approved control system for
the casino.
jackpot wager means a wager made by a player by placing the
wager in the area for jackpot wagers on the table, or the
appropriate slot, before the cards for a round are dealt.
maximum payment, for a bet wager at a table, means the
maximum amount stated by the casino operator in the sign
mentioned in section 10(1)(b) for the table as the maximum
payment for a winning bet wager.
odd card, in relation to another card or cards, means a card with a
different face value to the other card or cards.
odd card hand see section 6.
poker ranking, of a hand, means the ranking of the hand worked
out under section 7.
qualifies, for a dealer’s hand, see section 4.
round, of the game, includes the wagering, dealing of cards,
playing the game with the cards as dealt, deciding the winning
hands, collecting losing wagers and paying for winning hands.
royal flush see section 6.
straight see section 6.
straight flush see section 6.
wager means an ante wager, bet wager or jackpot wager.
winning jackpot hand see section 5.
73
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
3
Meaning of closes a player’s hand
A dealer closes a player’s hand by—
4
(a)
collecting the player’s ante wager, jackpot wager and cards;
and
(b)
individually spreading out the collected cards, face down,
and counting them; and
(c)
placing the cards in the table’s discard rack.
Meaning of qualifies for a dealer’s hand
A dealer’s hand qualifies if it is—
5
(a)
an odd card hand and the combination of 5 cards includes an
ace and a king; or
(b)
a poker hand ranking higher than an odd card hand.
Meaning of winning jackpot hand
(1)
(2)
Each of the following is a winning jackpot hand—
•
flush
•
full house
•
4 of a kind
•
straight flush
•
royal flush.
Also, if a dead man’s hand is a winning jackpot hand under a
casino’s approved control system, a winning jackpot hand for the
casino includes a dead man’s hand.
74
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
6
Meaning of various poker hands
The following poker hands have the meaning given opposite the
hand—
Poker hand
Cards
odd card hand
any combination of 5 cards, other
than
another
poker
hand
mentioned in this section
1 pair
2 cards with the same face value
and 3 odd cards
2 pairs
2 cards with the same face value,
another 2 cards with the same face
value (other than the face value of
the first 2 cards) and 1 odd card
3 of a kind
3 cards with the same face value
and 2 odd cards
straight
5 cards of more than 1 suit running
consecutively in face value
flush
5 cards of the same suit but not
running consecutively in face
value
full house
3 cards with the same face value
and another 2 cards with same
face value (other than the face
value of the first 3 cards)
4 of a kind
4 cards with the same face value
and 1 odd card
straight flush
5 cards of the same suit running
consecutively in face value, other
than a royal flush
75
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
royal flush
7
10, jack, queen, king and ace of
the same suit.
Ranking of poker hands and cards
(1)
The ranking of poker hands, from lowest to highest, is as
follows—
•
odd card hand
•
1 pair
•
2 pairs
•
3 of a kind
•
straight
•
flush
•
full house
•
4 of a kind
•
straight flush
•
royal flush.
(2)
All suits of cards are of equal value.
(3)
Hands ranking the same, but with cards of different face values,
rank according to the cards’ face values.
(4)
The ranking of cards, from lowest to highest, is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9, 10, jack, queen, king and ace.
(5)
If a player has an ace, 2, 3, 4 and 5, the ace may rank as 1.
(6)
If the dealer’s hand and a player’s hand have the same poker
ranking and face values, it is a stand off.
Examples of application of section—
1
A 9, 10, jack, queen, king straight beats a 7, 8, 9, 10, jack straight.
2
If there are 2 hands, each containing 2 pairs, the hand holding the highest
pair in face values is ranked the higher. If each hand has an equally ranked
pair, the face values of the second pairs decide the outcome. If each hand
has 2 equally ranked pairs, the face value of the fifth card of each hand
decides the outcome. If each of the fifth cards is equally ranked, it is a
stand off.
76
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 2
8
Table and layout
(1)
Caribbean stud poker is played at a table with places for players on
1 side and a place for the dealer on the opposite side.
(2)
The layout cloth for the table must have printed on it—
(3)
(4)
9
6
Table, layout and equipment
(a)
the name of, or logo for, the casino; and
(b)
the words ‘dealer only plays with ace & king or higher’; and
(c)
rectangular, circular or oval areas for wagers.
The areas for wagers must be marked—
(a)
for ante wagers—by the word ‘ante’; and
(b)
for bet wagers—by the word ‘bet’; and
(c)
for jackpot wagers (if the table is not equipped with slots for
the wagers)—by the word ‘jackpot’ or, if another description
is stated under the approved control system for the casino,
the other description.
The layout for the table is the layout in diagram 3.1 or a similar
layout approved by the chief executive.6
Special jackpot equipment
(1)
A casino operator may link 2 or more tables together electronically
to form a progressive jackpot link arrangement, if the chief
executive has approved the arrangement.
(2)
The tables must have—
(a)
a slot for a jackpot wager by each player; and
(b)
a light for each slot that lights up if a chip is placed in the
slot by a player and is accepted; and
(c)
a meter or sign that shows the amount of the jackpot prize
for the table.
See section 62 (Gaming equipment and chips) of the Act.
77
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(3)
10
The arrangement must include a progressive jackpot meter that
shows the amount of the jackpot prize for all tables under the
arrangement.
Other equipment
(1)
(2)
A table for the game must also be equipped with—
(a)
a dealing shoe or mechanical shuffling device; and
(b)
a sign stating the maximum payment for the table; and
(c)
a drop box and discard rack at approximately the location
shown in diagram 3.1.
A casino operator may comply with subsection (1)(b) for a table
by stating the maximum payment on the sign required under
section 64(1)(d) of the Act.
Part 3
11
Preparing for the game at a table
Cards
(1)
Caribbean stud poker is played with 1 deck of cards with backs of
the same colour and design and 1 cutting card.
(2)
However, if a mechanical shuffling device is in use at a table—
(a)
the device may be loaded with 1 deck of cards while another
deck is used in play; and
(b)
the backs of the 2 decks of cards must have different
colours; and
(c)
the discard rack must only contain the cards from 1 deck at a
time.
78
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
12
Procedures for inspecting, shuffling and cutting cards
(1)
Cards must be inspected and shuffled—
(a)
under the provisions of this part; and
(b)
under the approved control system for the casino.
(2)
Before being used in play, the cards must be inspected to check for
marks and imperfections and that each deck of cards contains the
correct cards.
(3)
If a player asks to inspect the cards when the cards are first placed
on the table for play, the dealer must spread the cards face up on
the table to enable a person inspecting them to see if each deck of
cards is complete.
(4)
The cards must be shuffled—
(5)
(a)
before being used in play; and
(b)
at the end of each round of play.
If the cards have been shuffled manually by the dealer, the dealer
must cut the cards and place them with the cutting card into a
dealing shoe.
Part 4
13
Placing wagers and playing the
game
Placing ante and jackpot wagers
(1)
(2)
Before a round of the game starts, each player must—
(a)
make an ante wager; and
(b)
be given an opportunity to make a jackpot wager.
Subsection (1)(b) does not apply if the equipment for making a
jackpot wager malfunctions or is not operating.
79
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
14
How wagers are made
(1) All wagers must be made by placing chips in the appropriate areas
for wagers on the table.
15
(2)
However, if the table is equipped with slots for jackpot wagers, a
jackpot wager must be made by placing a chip of the correct
denomination in the appropriate slot.
(3)
If a player places a chip in a slot for a jackpot wager, the player
must check if the appropriate light is lit after the wager has been
placed in the slot and, if it is not lit, must tell the dealer
immediately.
(4)
A player must not wager on more than 1 hand in a round.
(5)
Only 1 wager may be accepted on each area for wagers.
(6)
After the first card of a round has been removed from the shoe, a
person must not change, take away or touch a wager until a
decision about the wager is made, and the wager is dealt with, by
the dealer.
Dealing the cards
(1)
After all ante wagers and jackpot wagers for a round of play have
been made, the dealer must deal the cards by starting from the
dealer’s left and continuing clockwise around the table.
(2)
The cards must be dealt in 1 of the following ways provided in the
approved control system for the casino—
(a)
by placing in turn—
(i)
one card to each area containing an ante wager; and
(ii)
one card to the dealer; and
(iii) a second, third, fourth and fifth card, in sequence, to
each area containing an ante wager; and
(iv) a second, third, fourth and fifth card to the dealer;
(b)
by placing in turn—
(i)
5 cards at a time to each area containing an ante wager;
and
(ii)
5 cards at a time to the dealer.
80
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(3)
16
17
All cards must be dealt face down, other than 1 of the dealer’s
cards (the dealer’s upcard).
Players may look at cards and fold or place a bet wager
(1)
After the cards for a round have been dealt, the players may look at
their cards.
(2)
If a player decides to fold, the player must place the cards face
down on the table.
(3)
If a player decides to continue to play in the round, the player must
place a bet wager in the appropriate area and place the cards face
down on the table.
(4)
A player’s bet wager must be twice the amount of the player’s ante
wager.
(5)
If a player folds, the dealer must close the player’s hand.
(6)
A player’s cards must be in full view of the dealer during a round
of play.
Declaration by dealer
After all continuing players have made bet wagers and placed their
cards face down on the table, the dealer must turn all the dealer’s
remaining cards face up and declare—
(a) whether or not the dealer’s hand qualifies; and
(b) if the dealer’s hand qualifies—the highest poker ranking of the
dealer’s hand.
18
If dealer’s hand does not qualify
(1)
This section applies if the dealer’s hand does not qualify.
(2)
After declaring that the dealer’s hand does not qualify, the dealer
must—
(3)
(a)
pay the ante wagers of the continuing players at the odds of 1
to 1; and
(b)
count and collect the cards of the continuing players and
place them in the discard rack.
The bet wagers are void.
81
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(4)
19
20
However, if a player has made a jackpot wager and has a winning
jackpot hand, the dealer must not collect the player’s cards until
the dealer has dealt with it under sections 23 to 25.
If dealer’s hand qualifies
(1)
This section applies if the dealer’s hand qualifies.
(2)
After declaring that the dealer’s hand qualifies, the dealer, starting
on the dealer’s right and continuing anticlockwise around the
table, must—
(a)
turn the cards of each continuing player face up; and
(b)
decide the highest poker ranking of the player’s hand.
Players must not exchange cards or communicate
A player must not—
(a) exchange cards; or
(b) exchange or communicate, or cause to be exchanged or
communicated, information about the player’s hand; or
(c) speak in a language other than English if directed by a dealer
or floor manager; or
(d) touch another player’s cards.
Part 5
21
Deciding the outcome of wagers
and paying winning wagers
Player’s hand—when it wins, loses or is a stand off
(1)
A player’s hand wins if the poker ranking of the player’s hand is
higher than the poker ranking of the dealer’s hand.
(2)
If a player’s hand wins, the dealer must—
(a)
pay the ante wager at the odds of 1 to 1; and
82
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(b)
pay the bet wager at the odds mentioned in section 22(1);
and
(c)
collect the player’s cards and place them in the discard rack.
(3)
A player’s hand loses if the poker ranking of the player’s hand is
lower than the poker ranking of the dealer’s hand.
(4)
If a player’s hand loses, the dealer must—
(a)
collect both the ante and bet wagers for the hand; and
(b)
collect the player’s cards and place them in the discard rack.
(5)
A player’s hand is a stand off if the poker ranking of the player’s
hand is equal to the poker ranking of the dealer’s hand.
(6)
If a player’s hand is a stand off, the dealer must close the player’s
hand.
(7)
However, if a player has made a jackpot wager and has a winning
jackpot hand, the dealer must not close the player’s hand until the
dealer has dealt with it under sections 23 to 25.
83
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
22
Payment odds for bet wagers
(1)
The payment odds for winning bet wagers are as follows—
Winning hand
odd card hand or 1 pair
1 to 1
2 pairs
2 to 1
3 of a kind
3 to 1
straight
4 to 1
flush
5 to 1
full house
7 to 1
4 of a kind
20 to 1
straight flush
50 to 1
royal flush
(2)
23
Payment odds
250 to 1.
However, the total payment for a bet wager at a table is limited to
the maximum payment for the table.
Winning jackpot hands
(1)
A player who has made a jackpot wager and has a winning jackpot
hand wins the payment mentioned in section 25 for the hand.
(2)
Subsection (1) applies whether or not the dealer’s hand qualifies.
(3)
Payments for winning jackpot hands are made after all ante and bet
wagers have been collected or paid.
(4)
A payment for a winning jackpot hand is in addition to a payment
for a winning ante wager or bet wager.
84
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(5)
(6)
24
Before a payment mentioned in section 24 is made for a winning
jackpot hand that is a straight flush or royal flush, the dealer
must—
(a)
notify the floor manager; and
(b)
count the cards in the deck in use at the table.
If the dealer finds the deck does not contain 52 cards—
(a)
a casino key employee responsible for managing table games
must notify an inspector; and
(b)
the round of play is void; and
(c)
all wagers placed for the round must be returned to the
players.
Payments for winning jackpot hands
(1)
(2)
The following amounts must be paid for each winning jackpot
hand—
Hand
Payment
dead man’s hand (if section 5(2)
applies to the casino)
$50
flush
$100
full house
$150
4 of a kind
$500
straight flush
the greater of $1000 or
10% of the jackpot prize
royal flush
the greater of $10000 or
100% of the jackpot
prize.
This section is subject to section 25.
85
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
25
More than 1 straight flush or royal flush as winning jackpot
hands in a round
(1)
This section applies to a player in a round of a game who has made
a jackpot wager for the round and has a straight flush or royal
flush.
(2)
The player shares the jackpot prize in the way stated under the
approved control system for the casino if—
(3)
(a)
another player has made a jackpot wager for the round and
has a straight flush or royal flush; and
(b)
the approved control system for the casino states a way
players share in the jackpot prize, other than the way
mentioned in section 24(1).
However, subsection (2) applies only if, when the round was
played, a sign was on the relevant table stating the way in which
the jackpot prize is to be shared if 2 or more players have winning
jackpot hands that are a straight flush or royal flush.
Part 6
26
Irregularities
Coin-in button pressed before jackpot wagers accepted
If a dealer presses the coin-in button on the console shown in
diagram 3.1 before allowing all players the opportunity to place a
jackpot wager—
(a)
marker buttons must be used to indicate the players who
have placed a jackpot wager; and
(b)
the dealer must press the game over button on the console;
and
(c)
the players who have not been given the opportunity to place
a jackpot wager may do so before the dealer presses the
coin-in button again.
86
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
27
Bet wager under or over twice the ante wager
If, while acting on the hands, the dealer becomes aware that a bet
wager is—
28
(a)
more than twice the amount of the ante wager—the dealer
must give the excess amount to the player and take or pay
the wager accordingly; or
(b)
less than twice the amount of the ante wager—the dealer
must take or pay according to the amount wagered and tell
the player that for subsequent rounds the player’s bet wager
must be twice the amount of the player’s ante wager.
Cards dealt when no ante wager
If a card or cards are dealt to a player who has not placed an ante
wager—
29
(a)
the player’s hand is void; and
(b)
any jackpot wager placed by the player for the round of play
must be returned to the player; and
(c)
all players at the table must be given the option of retracting
their wagers.
Player wagering on more than 1 betting area
If a player has been dealt more than 1 hand in a round of play—
30
(a)
the player’s hand, for the round, is the first hand dealt to the
player; and
(b)
other hands dealt to the player are void; and
(c)
all players at the table must be given the option of retracting
their wagers.
Incorrect number of cards
(1)
If an incorrect number of cards are dealt to a player or the dealer’s
hand and none of the players have looked at the players’ cards—
(a)
the round of play is void; and
(b)
the dealer must immediately tell a casino employee of the
level of floor manager or higher; and
87
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(c)
the employee must direct the dealer to count the cards to
verify there are 52; and
(d)
if the dealer finds the deck does not contain 52 cards—a
casino employee of the level of pit boss or higher must
notify an inspector.
If an incorrect number of cards are dealt to a player or the dealer’s
hand and any player has looked at the player’s cards—
(a)
the dealer must immediately tell a casino employee of the
level of floor manager or higher; and
(b)
the employee must direct the dealer to count the cards to
verify there are 52.
If the dealer finds the deck does not contain 52 cards—
(a)
a casino employee of the level of pit boss or higher must
notify an inspector; and
(b)
the round of play is void; and
(c)
all wagers placed for the round must be returned to the
players.
If the dealer finds the deck contains 52 cards and the dealer’s hand
has an incorrect number of cards—
(a)
the dealer must declare the dealer’s hand does not qualify;
and
(b)
the ante wager for other players who have folded must be
reinstated; and
(c)
all ante wagers must be paid even money; and
(d)
all bet wagers are void; and
(e)
jackpot wagers must be returned to the players; and
(f)
winning jackpot wagers must be paid to the players in the
usual way.
If the dealer finds the deck contains 52 cards and the player’s hand
has an incorrect number of cards—
(a)
the player’s hand is void; and
(b)
all wagers placed for the hand must be returned to the player;
and
88
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(c)
(6)
31
all players at the table must be given the option of retracting
their wagers.
If the dealer finds the deck contains 52 cards and both the player’s
and the dealer’s hands have an incorrect number of cards—
(a)
the player’s hand is void; and
(b)
all wagers placed for the hand must be returned to the player;
and
(c)
the dealer must declare the dealer’s hand does not qualify;
and
(d)
the ante wager for other players who have folded must be
reinstated; and
(e)
all ante wagers for other players must be paid even money;
and
(f)
all bet wagers for other players are void; and
(g)
jackpot wagers for other players must be returned to the
players; and
(h)
winning jackpot wagers for other players must be paid to the
players in the usual way.
Effect of cards being exposed during a deal
(1)
If 3 or more cards are exposed during a deal, the round of play is
void.
(2)
However, if 3 cards are exposed during a deal and 1 or more of the
exposed cards are dealt to the dealer—
(3)
(a)
the first exposed card dealt to the dealer must be used as the
dealer’s upcard; and
(b)
other exposed cards (whether dealt to the dealer or a player)
must be turned face down; and
(c)
play continues in the usual way.
If 2 cards are exposed during a deal and both of the cards are dealt
to the dealer—
(a)
the first exposed card dealt to the dealer must be used as the
dealer’s upcard; and
(b)
other exposed cards must be turned face down; and
89
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(c)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
32
play continues in the usual way.
If 2 cards are exposed during a deal and both of the cards are dealt
to players—
(a)
the exposed card or cards must be turned face down; and
(b)
play continues in the usual way.
If 2 cards are exposed during a deal and 1 of the cards is dealt to
the dealer and the other to a player—
(a)
the card dealt to the dealer must be used as the dealer’s
upcard; and
(b)
the card dealt to the player must be turned face down; and
(c)
play continues in the usual way.
If 1 card is exposed during a deal and the card is dealt to the
dealer—
(a)
the card must be used as the dealer’s upcard; and
(b)
play continues in the usual way.
If 1 card is exposed during a deal and the card is dealt to a
player—
(a)
the card must be turned face down; and
(b)
play continues in the usual way.
Card placed in incorrect position
If a card has been placed in an incorrect position on the layout and
no further cards have been dealt for the round of play—
(a)
the card must be moved to its correct position on the layout;
and
(b)
the round of play continues in the usual way.
90
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 3 – Caribbean stud poker (continued)
Diagram 3.1—Caribbean stud poker table layout
section 8(4)
91
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 4
Craps
section 3(2)
1
Conducting and playing craps
This schedule states the rules for conducting and playing the
casino game known as craps.
2
Definitions for sch 4
In this schedule—
7 out means a total of 7 thrown by the shooter after the shooter’s
establishment of a come out point.
come out point means a total of 4, 5, 6, 8, 9 or 10 thrown by the
shooter on the come out roll.
come out roll means the first roll of the dice at the opening of a
game or after a decision about a win bet and don’t win bet has
been made.
come point means a total of 4, 5, 6, 8, 9 or 10 thrown by the
shooter on the next roll after placement of a come bet or don’t
come bet.
dice cup the object that is used to retain the dice not being used in
play.
roll means the throw of the dice by the shooter.
shooter means the player who throws the dice.
stick means the object that is used to pass out and retrieve the dice.
total means the sum of the numbers shown on the high or
uppermost sides of the 2 dice on a roll.
3
Table and layout
(1)
Craps is played on an oblong table with rounded corners and high
walled sides.
92
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(2)
4
The cloth of the table must have the name of, or logo for, the
casino imprinted on it and must be marked as shown in diagram
4.1.
Permissible wagers and results
(1)
The wagers defined in this section are the permissible wagers by a
player at the game of craps.
(2)
In this schedule—
1 roll wager means a wager that is decided by the next throw of
the die.
4 the hardway means a wager made at any time that—
(a)
wins if a total of 4 is thrown with 2 appearing on each die
before 4 is thrown in any other way and before a 7 is thrown;
and
(b)
is void on a come out roll unless called ‘on’ by the player
and confirmed by the dealer through placement of an on
marker button on top of the player’s wager.
6 the hardway means a wager made at any time that—
(a)
wins if a total of 6 is thrown with 3 appearing on each die
before 6 is thrown in any other way and before a 7 is thrown;
and
(b)
is void on a come out roll unless called ‘on’ by the player
and confirmed by the dealer through placement of an on
marker button on top of the player’s wager.
8 the hardway means a wager made at any time that—
(a)
wins if a total of 8 is thrown with 4 appearing on each die
before 8 is thrown in any other way and before a 7 is thrown;
and
(b)
is void on a come out roll unless called ‘on’ by the player
and confirmed by the dealer through placement of an on
marker button on top of the player’s wager.
10 the hardway means a wager made at any time that—
(a)
wins if a total of 10 is thrown with 5 appearing on each die
before 10 is thrown in any other way and before a 7 is
thrown; and
93
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(b)
is void on a come out roll unless called ‘on’ by the player
and confirmed by the dealer through placement of an on
marker button on top of the player’s wager.
11 in 1 roll means a 1 roll wager made at any time that—
(a)
wins if a total of 11 is thrown on the roll immediately
following placement of the wager; and
(b)
loses if another total is thrown.
any 7 means a 1 roll wager made at any time that—
(a)
wins if a total of 7 is thrown on the roll immediately
following placement of the wager; and
(b)
loses if another total is thrown.
any craps means a 1 roll wager made at any time that—
(a)
wins if a total of 2, 3 or 12 is thrown on the roll immediately
following placement of the wager; and
(b)
loses if another total is thrown.
big 6 means a wager made at any time that—
(a)
wins if a total of 6 is thrown before a 7; and
(b)
loses if a 7 is thrown before a 6.
big 8 means a wager made at any time that—
(a)
wins if a total of 8 is thrown before a 7; and
(b)
loses if a 7 is thrown before an 8.
come bet means a wager made at any time after the come out roll
that—
(a)
(b)
wins if, on the roll immediately following placement of the
wager—
(i)
a total of 7 or 11 is thrown; or
(ii)
a total of 4, 5, 6, 8, 9 or 10 is thrown and that total is
again thrown before a 7 is thrown; and
loses if, on the roll immediately following placement of the
wager—
94
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(i)
a total of 2, 3 or 12 is thrown; or
(ii)
a total of 4, 5, 6, 8, 9 or 10 is thrown and a 7 is thrown
before that total is again thrown.
craps 2 means a 1 roll wager made at any time that—
(a)
wins if a total of 2 is thrown on the roll immediately
following placement of the wager; and
(b)
loses if another total is thrown.
craps 3 means a 1 roll wager made at any time that—
(a)
wins if a total of 3 is thrown on the roll immediately
following placement of the wager; and
(b)
loses if another total is thrown.
craps 12 means a 1 roll wager made at any time that—
(a)
wins if a total of 12 is thrown on the roll immediately
following placement of the wager; and
(b)
loses if another total is thrown.
don’t come bet means a wager made at any time after the come out
roll that—
(a)
(b)
(c)
wins if, on the roll immediately following placement of the
wager—
(i)
a total of 3 or 12 is thrown; or
(ii)
a total of 4, 5, 6, 8, 9 or 10 is thrown and a 7 is thrown
before that total is again thrown; and
loses if, on the roll immediately following placement of the
wager—
(i)
a total of 7 or 11 is thrown; or
(ii)
a total of 4, 5, 6, 8, 9 or 10 is thrown and that total is
again thrown before a 7 is thrown; and
is void if, on the roll immediately following placement of the
wager, a total of 2 is thrown.
don’t win bet means a wager made immediately before the come
out roll that—
(a)
wins if, on the come out roll—
(i)
a total of 3 or 12 is thrown; or
95
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(ii)
(b)
(c)
a total of 4, 5, 6, 8, 9 or 10 is thrown and a 7 is thrown
before that total is again thrown; and
loses if, on the come out roll—
(i)
a total of 7 or 11 is thrown; or
(ii)
a total of 4, 5, 6, 8, 9 or 10 is thrown and that total is
again thrown before a 7 is thrown; and
is void if, on the come out roll, a total of 2 is thrown.
field bet means a 1 roll wager made at any time that—
(a)
wins if a total of 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11 or 12 is thrown on the roll
immediately following placement of the wager; and
(b)
loses if a total of 5, 6, 7 or 8 is thrown.
horn bet means a 1 roll wager made at any time that—
(a)
wins if a total of 2, 3, 11 or 12 is thrown on the roll
immediately following placement of the wager; and
(b)
loses if another total is thrown.
horn high bet means a 1 roll wager made at any time—
(a)
in units of 5 with 4 units wagered as a horn bet and an
additional unit wagered on a total of 2, 3, 11 or 12; and
(b)
that—
(i)
wins if a total of 2, 3, 11 or 12 is thrown on the roll
immediately following placement of the wager; and
(ii)
loses if another total is thrown.
place bet means a wager made at any time on 4, 5, 6, 8, 9 or 10
that—
(a)
wins if the number on which the wager was placed is thrown
before a 7; and
(b)
loses if a 7 is thrown before the number; and
(c)
is void on a come out roll unless called ‘on’ by the player and
confirmed by the dealer through placement of an on marker
button on top of the player’s wager.
win bet means a wager made immediately before the come out roll,
that—
(a)
wins if, on the come out roll—
96
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(b)
5
6
(i)
a total of 7 or 11 is thrown; or
(ii)
a total of 4, 5, 6, 8, 9 or 10 is thrown and that total is
again thrown before a 7 is thrown; and
loses if, on the come out roll—
(i)
a total of 2, 3 or 12 is thrown; or
(ii)
a total of 4, 5, 6, 8, 9 or 10 is thrown and a 7 is thrown
before that total is again thrown.
Time and way for wagering
(1)
A wager must be made before the dice are thrown.
(2)
However, a wager may be made between when the dice leave the
shooter’s hand and the dice come to rest if the wager is confirmed
orally by the dealer and a boxperson.
(3)
A wager at craps is made by placing chips on the appropriate area
of the layout.
(4)
However, a wager made orally and accompanied by cash placed on
the layout may be accepted if—
(a)
the wager is confirmed orally by the dealer and a boxperson;
and
(b)
the cash is, as soon as practicable, replaced by chips placed
on the appropriate area of the layout.
(5)
A cash wager may be accepted only if there is not enough time to
convert the cash into gaming chips (that is, when the dice are in
the air).
(6)
If a cash wager wins, the cash must be immediately converted into
gaming chips before the winning wager is paid.
Removal or reduction of wager
(1)
A wager may be removed or reduced at any time before a roll that
decides the outcome of the wager.
(2)
However, a win bet and a come bet must not be removed or
reduced after a come out point or come point is established for the
bet.
97
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(3)
7
8
9
A don’t come bet or a don’t win bet may be removed or reduced at
any time but may not be replaced or increased after the removal or
reduction.
Circumstances when place bets inactive or active
(1)
All buy and place bets to win, come odds, and hardway wagers are
inactive on a come out roll unless called ‘on’ by the player and
confirmed by the dealer or boxperson through placement of an on
marker button on top of each player’s wager.
(2)
However, 1 wager marked with an on marker button indicates that
all similar wagers for that player are ‘on’ unless otherwise
specified by the players.
(3)
All other wagers are taken to be ‘on’.
Minimum and maximum wagers
(1)
If the minimum wager permitted for a table is not more than $5,
the maximum wager permitted for the table must be at least $200.
(2)
The maximum wager on win, don’t win, come, or don’t come
must not be an amount that stops a player from taking the odds or
laying the odds in accordance with this schedule.
Player responsible if wagering or giving instructions
(1)
A player is responsible for the correct positioning of the player’s
wagers on the craps layout regardless of whether the player is
assisted by the dealer or stickperson.
(2)
The player must ensure the instructions the player gives to the
dealer or stickperson about the placement of the player’s wagers
are correctly carried out.
98
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
10
Payout odds for winning wagers
(1)
Winning wagers at the game of craps must be paid at the following
odds—
Wager
Payout odds
win bet
1 to 1
don’t win bet
1 to 1
come bet
1 to 1
don’t come bet
1 to 1
place bet 4 to win
9 to 5
place bet 5 to win
7 to 5
place bet 6 to win
7 to 6
place bet 8 to win
7 to 6
place bet 9 to win
7 to 5
place bet 10 to win
9 to 5
big 6
1 to 1
big 8
1 to 1
4 the hardway
7.5 to 1
6 the hardway
9.5 to 1
8 the hardway
9.5 to 1
10 the hardway
7.5 to 1
field bet
1 to 1 on 3, 4, 9, 10, 11
99
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
2 to 1 on 2
2 to 1 on 12
(2)
11
any 7
4 to 1
any craps
7.5 to 1
craps 2
33 to 1
craps 3
16 to 1
craps 12
33 to 1
11 in 1 roll
16 to 1.
A horn bet or horn high bet must be paid as if it were 4 separate
wagers on 2, 3, 11 and 12.
True odds for buy bets
(1)
In addition to the payout odds mentioned in section 10 for place
bets to win on 4, 5, 6, 8, 9 and 10, a player is entitled to receive
true odds on the bets in return for the player paying to the casino
operator, when the player makes the bet, not more than 5% of the
amount the player wagers on the bet.
(2)
Winning wagers are paid at the following odds—
Wager
Payout odds
4 to win
2 to 1
5 to win
3 to 2
6 to win
6 to 5
8 to win
6 to 5
9 to win
3 to 2
10 to win
2 to 1.
100
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
12
13
14
True odds for lay bets
(1)
A player may wager on 4, 5, 6, 8, 9 or 10 to lose and is entitled to
receive true odds on the wagers in return for the player paying to
the casino operator, when the player makes the wager, not more
than 5% of the amount the player could win on the wager.
(2)
Winning wagers are paid at the following odds—
Wager
Payout odds
4 to lose
1 to 2
5 to lose
2 to 3
6 to lose
5 to 6
8 to lose
5 to 6
9 to lose
2 to 3
10 to lose
1 to 2.
Percentages, fees and other matters
(1)
A percentage, fee or vigorish paid by a player under section 11 or
12 must be returned to the player if the wager is removed before a
roll that decides the outcome of the wager.
(2)
No percentage, fee or vigorish (other than a percentage, fee or
vigorish mentioned in section 11 or 12) may be charged to a player
making a wager in the game of craps.
Supplemental wagers after come out roll for win bets
(1)
If a player makes a win bet and a total of 4, 5, 6, 8, 9 or 10 is
thrown on the come out roll, the player may make an additional
wager in support of the win bet.
(2)
The additional wager can not be more the amount of the original
win bet.
(3)
However, the additional wager may be—
101
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
15
(a)
an amount of more than the original win bet for the purpose
of effecting a payable unit; or
(b)
if the casino operator agrees—an amount of not more than
twice the amount of the original win bet.
(4)
If the amount of winnings for a wager mentioned in subsection
(3)(a) or (b) would include part of a dollar, the amount of the
winnings may be rounded up to the next whole dollar.
(5)
If, in the circumstances, the win bet wins, the original amount of
the win bet is paid at odds of 1 to 1 and the supplemental amount
is paid at odds of 2 to 1 if the come out point was 4 or 10, 3 to 2 if
the come out point was 5 or 9, or 6 to 5 if the come out point was
6 or 8.
Suplemental wagers after come out roll for don’t win bets
(1)
Whenever a player makes a don’t win bet and a total of 4, 5, 6, 8, 9
or 10 is thrown on the come out roll, the player may make an
additional wager in support of the don’t win bet.
(2)
The additional wager can not be more than an amount calculated
to provide winnings equal to the amount of the original don’t win
bet.
(3)
However, the additional wager may be—
(a)
an amount calculated to provide winnings of more than the
original don’t win bet for the purpose of effecting a payable
unit; or
(b)
if the casino operator agrees—an amount calculated to
provide winnings of not more than twice the amount of the
original don’t win bet.
(4)
If the amount of winnings mentioned in subsection (3)(a) or (b)
would include part of a dollar, the amount may be rounded up to
the next whole dollar.
(5)
If, in the circumstances, the don’t win bet wins, the original
amount of the don’t win bet is paid at odds of 1 to 1 and the
supplemental amount is paid at odds of 1 to 2 if the come out point
was 4 or 10, 2 to 3 if the come out point was 5 or 9, or 5 to 6 if the
come out point was 6 or 8.
102
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
16
17
Supplemental wagers after come out roll for come bets
(1)
Whenever a player makes a come bet and a total of 4, 5, 6, 8, 9 or
10 is thrown on the roll immediately following placement of the
bet, the player may make an additional wager in support of the
come bet.
(2)
The additional wager can not be more than the amount of the
original come bet.
(3)
However, the additional wager may be—
(a)
an amount of more than the original come bet for the
purpose of effecting a payable unit; or
(b)
if the casino operator agrees—an amount of not more than
twice the amount of the original come bet.
(4)
If the amount of winnings for a wager mentioned in subsection
(3)(a) or (b) would include part of a dollar, the amount of the
winnings may be rounded up to the next whole dollar.
(5)
If the come bet wins, the original amount of the come bet is paid at
odds of 1 to 1 and the supplemental amount is paid at odds of 2 to
1 if the come point was 4 or 10, 3 to 2 if the come point was 5 or
9, or 6 to 5 if the come point was 6 or 8.
(6)
All additional wagers in support of the come bet are inactive on a
come out roll unless called ‘on’ by the player and confirmed by the
dealer through placement of an on marker button on top of each
player’s wager.
(7)
All other wagers are taken to be ‘on’.
Supplemental wagers after come out roll for don’t come bets
(1)
Whenever a player makes a don’t come bet and a total of 4, 5, 6, 8,
9 or 10 is thrown on the roll immediately following placement of
the bet, the player may make an additional wager in support of the
don’t come bet.
(2)
The additional wager can not be more than an amount calculated
to provide winnings equal to the amount of the original don’t come
bet.
(3)
However, the additional wager may be—
103
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
18
19
(a)
an amount calculated to provide winnings of more than the
original don’t come bet for the purpose of effecting a
payable unit; or
(b)
if the casino operator agrees—an amount calculated to
provide winnings of not more than twice the amount of the
original don’t come bet.
(4)
If the amount of winnings mentioned in subsection (3)(a) or (b)
would include part of a dollar, the amount may be rounded up to
the next whole dollar.
(5)
If the don’t come bet wins, the original amount of the don’t come
bet is paid at odds of 1 to 1 and the supplemental amount is paid at
odds of 1 to 2 if the come point was 4 or 10, 2 to 3 if the come
point was 5 or 9, or 5 to 6 if the come point was 6 or 8.
Control of dice
(1)
A set of 5 dice must be present at the craps table at the start of
play.
(2)
The stickperson at the table must keep all dice, other than the dice
in active play, in a dice cup at the table.
Checking of dice during play.
In the following situations the dice must be checked by the boxperson.
20
(1)
when the stickperson loses sight of the dice;
(2)
when the dice are taken out of play; or
(3)
when the shooter hands the dice to another player.
Selecting the shooter and matters about inactive dice
(1)
At the start of play, the stickperson offers the set of dice to the
player immediately to the left of the boxperson at the table.
(2)
If the player rejects the dice, the stickperson offers the dice to each
of the other players in turn clockwise around the table until 1 of
the players accepts the dice.
(3)
The first player to accept the dice becomes the shooter who selects
and keeps 2 of the dice offered.
104
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(4)
21
The remaining dice of the set must be returned to the dice cup
which must be placed immediately in front of the stickperson.
Procedure if die goes off table
(1)
If a die or dice go off the table, the following procedures must be
followed—
(a)
an immediate effort must be made to retrieve the die or dice;
(b)
the remaining dice must be offered to the shooter to select
new dice;
(c)
if the missing die or dice are found, they must be checked by
the boxperson then—
(d)
22
(i)
if requested by the player—returned to the player; or
(ii)
if not requested by the player—placed back in the dice
cup;
if 2 dice are lost—a new set of dice must be promptly placed
at the table and the remaining dice of the set previously in
use must be removed from the table.
(2)
Despite subsection (1)(b), the shooter may ask for the original dice
to be returned.
(3)
Despite subsection (1)(d), the shooter when 2 dice are lost may, to
avoid delay in a game, continue with the remaining dice of the
original set until the win bet is lost by the shooter rolling a 7 out or
until the shooter’s wager wins and the shooter declines further
rolls of the dice.
Wagering and dice throwing by shooter
(1)
After selection of the dice, the shooter must make a win or don’t
win bet, and throw the 2 selected dice so that they—
(a)
leave the shooter’s hand simultaneously; and
(b)
strike the end of the table farthest from the shooter.
(2)
Following the come out roll, a player must continue to wager on
the win or don’t win line on each roll to be eligible to continue as
the shooter.
(3)
The shooter must use only 1 hand to handle or throw the dice.
105
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(4)
23
The shooter may authorise another person to throw the dice on
their behalf.
Invalid roll of the dice
(1)
(2)
(3)
A roll of the dice is invalid if—
(a)
either or both of the dice go off the table; or
(b)
one die comes to rest on top of the other; or
(c)
either or both of the dice come to rest on the chips
constituting the craps bank of chips located in front of the
boxperson; or
(d)
either or both of the dice come to rest in the dice cup in front
of the stickperson or on 1 of the rails surrounding the table;
or
(e)
more than 1 side of a die is resting on a stack of chips or
other object: or
(f)
a cheating crooked or fixed device or technique is used in
the roll of the dice; or
(g)
a dice other than those approved for the game are used in the
roll; or
(h)
either or both dice fall in or out of the dice cup after leaving
the shooter’s hand; or
(i)
either or both dice knock other dice from the dice cup, so
that the dice that land are not the original dice that the
shooter used in the thow.
A boxperson or stickperson may invalidate a roll of the dice by
calling ‘no roll’ if—
(a)
the dice do not leave the shooter’s hand simultaneously; or
(b)
either or both of the dice do not strike the end of the table
farthest from the shooter; or
(c)
for any other reason, the boxperson or stickperson considers
the throw to be improper.
The call of ‘no roll’ by the boxperson or stickperson under
subsection (2) must be made, whenever possible, before both dice
come to rest.
106
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(4)
24
25
A throw of the dice which causes the dice to come into contact
with chips on the table, other than the craps bank of chips located
in front of the boxperson is not a cause for a call of ‘no roll’.
Declaration may be overruled
(1)
The boxperson may overrule the stickperson if, in the boxperson’s
judgment, the stickperson has made an error in calling the throw of
the dice.
(2)
The floor manager may overrule the stickperson or boxperson if,
in the floor manager’s judgment, the stickperson or boxperson has
made an error in calling the throw of the dice.
(3)
A casino key employee responsible for managing table games may
overrule the stickperson, boxperson or floor manager if, in his or
her judgment, the stickperson, boxperson or floor manager has
made an error in calling the throw of the dice.
Calling the results of throw and dealing with wagers
(1)
When the dice come to rest from a valid throw, the stickperson
must call out the sum of the numbers on the high or uppermost
sides of the 2 dice.
(2)
Only 1 face on each die may be considered uppermost.
(3)
If either or both of the dice do not land flat on the table, the side
directly opposite the side that is resting on the chips or other object
is taken to be uppermost.
(4)
After calling the throw, the stickperson must collect the dice and
bring them to the centre of the table between the stickperson and
the boxperson.
(5)
All wagers decided by that throw must then be collected or paid,
after which the stickperson must pass the dice to the shooter for
the next throw.
(6)
When collecting the dice and passing them to the shooter, the
stickperson must use a stick designated for the purpose.
107
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
26
Continuing shooter or selecting new shooter
(1)
The shooter may, after a roll, either pass the dice or remain the
shooter.
(2)
However—
(a)
if the shooter throws a loser seven, the shooter must pass the
dice; or
(b)
if the shooter unreasonably delays the game, repeatedly
makes invalid rolls or contravenes the rules of the game, the
boxperson may order the shooter to pass the dice.
(3)
If the shooter, either voluntarily or compulsorily, relinquishes the
dice, the stickperson must offer the complete set of dice currently
in play to the player immediately to the left of the previous shooter
and, if the player does not accept, to each of the other players in
turn clockwise around the table.
(4)
The first player to accept the dice becomes the new shooter who
selects and keeps 2 of the dice offered.
(5)
The remaining dice of the set must be returned to the dice cup
which must be placed immediately in front of the stickperson.
108
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 4 – Craps (continued)
Diagram 4.1—Craps table and layout
section 3(2)
109
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 5
Manila poker
section 3(2)
Part 1
1
Preliminary
Conducting and playing manila poker
This schedule states the rules for conducting and playing the
casino game known as manila poker.
2
Definitions for sch 5
In this schedule—
1 pair see section 8.
2 pairs see section 8.
3 of a kind see section 8.
4 of a kind see section 8.
act, in a round of betting, means to check, fold, call, call and raise,
or raise.
active player, for a round of play, means a player who has not
folded or tapped out.
bet means an amount put out for a blind bet, an opening bet, a call
or a raise.
blind bet see section 20.
buck means the marker used to show the player who is to place the
blind bet and be dealt the first cards in a round of play.
buck position, for a round of play, means the position occupied by
a player who has the buck for the round of play.
call see section 3.
110
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
check see section 30.
closest player see section 10.
commission means the amount the dealer deducts from a pot for
payment to the casino.
communal cards see section 20.
designated player, for a round of play, means—
(a)
the player in the buck position for the round of play; or
(b)
if the player in the buck position is no longer an active player
for the round of play—the next player after the player in the
buck position who is still an active player for the round of
play.
face value, of a card, means—
(a)
the number of the card, namely, 7, 8, 9 or 10; or
(b)
the type of card, namely, jack, queen, king or ace.
flush see section 8.
fold, for a player in a round of play, means to indicate to the dealer
that the player wishes to stop taking part in the round of play.
full house see section 8.
game means the game made up of successive rounds of play of
manila poker.
hand see section 4.
hole card see section 20.
inactive player, for a round of play, means a player who has
tapped out or folded.
minimum table stake, for a game at a table, means the minimum
stake to enter the game at the table.
misdeal see section 33.
next player see section 10.
odd card, in relation to another card or cards, means a card with a
different face value to the other card or cards.
odd card hand see section 8.
111
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
opening bet, for a round of betting, means the bet with which a
player opens the betting for the round.
player means a player in a game of manila poker.
poker hand see section 8.
poker ranking see section 9.
pot means an accumulation of bets during a round of play.
raise see section 5.
reduced deck means a deck of 32 identically backed cards
containing an ace, king, queen, jack, 10, 9, 8 and 7 in each of
spades, hearts, diamonds and clubs.
round of betting means the betting that happens in a round of play
after each communal card is dealt.
round of play ordinarily includes dealing the cards, betting at the
successive rounds of betting, deciding the winning hand, deducting
the commission and the winner collecting the pot.
royal flush see section 8.
showdown see section 7.
straight see section 8.
straight flush see section 8.
table stake, of a player, means the amount (in chips) the player has
on the table, before a round of play of the game starts, for betting
in the round of play.
tap out see section 27.
3
Meaning of call and called
(1)
A player (player A) calls in a round of betting if player A makes
the bet needed to make the total bets by player A for the round of
betting equal to the total bets by the player (player B) who has bet
the highest total amount in the round of betting.
(2)
Under subsection (1), player B is the player who is called.
(3)
In the first round of betting for a round of play after the first
communal card is dealt, the first player entitled to call (or to call
and raise or to fold) calls if the player makes a bet equal to the
112
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
blind bet made by the designated player before the hole cards were
dealt for the round of play.
4
Meaning of player’s hand
A player’s hand is the best poker hand available from a
combination of—
5
6
7
(a)
the player’s hole cards; and
(b)
3 of the 5 communal cards.
Meaning of raise
(1)
A player raises in a round of betting if the player calls and then
bets an additional amount (a raise).
(2)
Additionally, if a player (player A) makes a blind bet and at least 1
other player calls the bet but no player raises, player A raises if
player A then bets an additional amount.
Meaning of round of betting
(1)
A round of betting is the betting that happens after each
communal card is dealt.
(2)
The first round of betting happens after the first communal card is
dealt, the second round of betting happens after the second
communal card is dealt, and so on until the final round of betting
which happens after the fifth communal card is dealt.
Meaning of showdown
A showdown happens when, for deciding the winning hand or
hands, 1 or more players show their hole cards after the final round
of betting.
113
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
8
Meaning of various poker hands
The following poker hands have the meaning given opposite the
hand—
Poker hand
Cards
odd card hand any combination of 5 cards, other than
another poker hand mentioned in this section
1 pair
2 cards with the same face value and 3 odd
cards
2 pairs
2 cards with the same face value, another 2
cards with the same face value (other than the
face value of the first 2 cards) and 1 odd card
3 of a kind
3 cards with the same face value and 2 odd
cards
straight
5 cards of more than 1 suit running
consecutively in face value
full house
3 cards with the same face value and another
2 cards with same face value
flush
5 cards of the same suit but not running
consecutively in face value
4 of a kind
4 cards with the same face value and 1 odd
card
straight flush
5 cards of the same suit running consecutively
in face value, other than a royal flush
royal flush
10, jack, queen, king and ace of the same suit.
114
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
9
Ranking of poker hands and cards
(1)
The ranking of poker hands (poker ranking), from lowest to
highest, is as follows—
•
odd card hand
•
1 pair
•
2 pairs
•
3 of a kind
•
straight
•
full house
•
flush
•
4 of a kind
•
straight flush
•
royal flush.
(2)
All suits of cards are equal.
(3)
Hands ranking the same, but with cards of different face values,
rank according to the cards’ face values.
(4)
The ranking of cards, from lowest to highest, is 7, 8, 9, 10, jack,
queen, king and ace.
(5)
However, if a player has an ace, 7, 8, 9 and 10, the ace ranks as the
lowest card of a straight having a 10 as its highest card if, before
the rounds of play for the game start, the dealer announces the ace
to be both high and low for the game.
(6)
If 2 or more players’ hands have identical poker ranking and face
values, the hands are of equal value.
Examples of application of section—
1
A 9, 10, jack, queen, king straight beats a 7, 8, 9, 10, jack straight.
2
If there are 2 hands, each containing 2 pairs, the hand holding the highest
pair in face values is ranked the higher. If each hand has an equally ranked
pair, the face values of the second pairs decide the outcome. If each hand
has 2 equally ranked pairs, the face value of the fifth card of each hand
decides the outcome. If each of the fifth cards is equally ranked, the 2
hands are of equal value.
115
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
10
Clockwise direction to be used
(1)
The next player to another player (the other player), means the
player seated next to, or the player positioned after, the other
player, going around the table in a clockwise direction.
(2)
The closest player to another player (the other player) means the
player seated closest to the other player, going around the table in
a clockwise direction.
(3)
If, in a round of play, the dealer has to deal with players in turn, or
the players have to act in turn, the dealer must deal with the
players, or the players must act, going around the table in a
clockwise direction.
Part 2
11
12
Table, layout and equipment
Table and layout
(1)
Manila poker is played at a table with places for not more than 13
players and 1 dealer.
(2)
The layout for the table is the layout approved by the chief
executive,7 but the layout must include—
(a)
a circle for discards; and
(b)
the name of, or logo for, the casino.
Equipment and information
A table for the game must be equipped with the following—
7
(a)
a buck;
(b)
a cutting card;
(c)
a dealing shoe;
(d)
a drop box.
See section 62 (Gaming equipment and chips) of the Act.
116
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 3
13
Preparation for the game at a table
Cards
Manila poker is played with a reduced deck.
14
Sorting, inspecting and shuffling cards
(1)
After receiving a complete deck of 52 cards at the table, the dealer
and a floor manager must sort and inspect the cards independently.
(2)
After the cards have been sorted and inspected and the cards not
forming part of a reduced deck have been removed, the dealer
must spread the remaining cards face up on the table to make it
easy for a person inspecting them to see if the cards form a
reduced deck.
(3)
After a player has been given an opportunity to look at the cards,
the cards must be turned face down on the table, washed, stacked
and shuffled by hand.
(4)
The dealer must receive a complete deck of cards at the table, and
act under subsections (1) to (3)—
(5)
15
(a)
before the rounds of play for a game start; and
(b)
if, after a round of play, the dealer, pit boss or floor manager
considers at least 1 of the cards in the deck used for the last
round of play is unfit for further use.
A floor manager may, after a round of play, ask the dealer to check
that the 32 cards required for the reduced deck are all present.
Seating positions
(1)
If, before the rounds of play start, 2 or more persons wish to sit at a
particular position at the table, the seating position must be
decided by a draw of the cards.
(2)
However, if a seat becomes vacant during the rounds of play—
(a)
the order of priority for filling the seat is the following—
117
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(i)
players who have been taking part in the game since
the rounds of play started at the table are first in
priority;
(ii)
other players are second in priority;
(iii) persons who wish to become players are third in
priority; and
(b)
16
17
if there are 2 or more persons having the same priority to fill
the vacant seat, and there is no-one with a higher priority, the
seating position must be decided by a draw of the cards.
Shuffling cards before each round of play
(1)
The dealer must shuffle the cards by hand immediately before the
start of a round of play.
(2)
After the dealer has shuffled the cards, the dealer must, in order—
(a)
cut the cards once at least 2 cards from either end of the
deck; and
(b)
place the cards that, before the cut, formed the top of the
deck squarely on top of the cutting card; and
(c)
place the cards that, before the cut, formed the bottom of the
deck squarely on top of the other cards and the cutting card;
and
(d)
place the deck and cutting card in a dealing shoe.
The buck
(1)
The player to the immediate left of the dealer receives the buck for
the first round of play.
(2)
At the start of each round of play after the first round of play, the
buck is passed to the next player after the player who had the buck
for the previous round of play.
(3)
A player may not decline to receive the buck when it is the
player’s turn to receive it.
118
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
18
Ace high and low or high only
Before the rounds of play for a game start, the dealer must
announce whether the ace is both high and low or high only.
19
Minimum table stake
(1)
Before a person becomes a player in the first round of play for a
game, or in a later round of play for the game if the person was not
a player for the immediately preceding round of play, the person
must place on the table, in full view of the dealer and all players or
intending players for the next round of play, the player’s table
stake in the form of chips, or in the form of cash to be immediately
converted into chips.
(2)
The table stake must be at least the minimum table stake.
(3)
Subsection (2) does not apply if a player—
(4)
20
(a)
leaves the table for a legitimate reason with the approval of a
casino employee of the level of floor manager or higher; and
(b)
rejoins the game in accordance with the approval.
A player must not add to or reduce (other than by taking part in a
round of betting) the player’s table stake during a round of play.
Play sequence
(1)
This section states the sequence for a round of play that includes
all steps.
(2)
The designated player makes a bet (the blind bet), equal to the
minimum permissible table wager.
(3)
The dealer deals 2 cards (hole cards), face down, to the designated
player, and then deals 2 cards (also hole cards), face down, to each
other player in turn, making sure each player is dealt both hole
cards before the next player is dealt cards.
(4)
The dealer then deals not more than 5 cards (communal cards)
face up in the middle of the table.
(5)
There is a round of betting after each communal card is dealt.
(6)
Finally, a showdown decides who wins the amounts bet.
119
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 4
21
22
23
Playing the game
How to wager
(1)
A player wagers in a round of play by placing gaming chips in the
appropriate area of the table layout.
(2)
A wager can not be made orally.
Placing the blind bet and dealing the first cards
(1)
Before a round of play can start, the designated player must make
the blind bet.
(2)
When the blind bet has been made, the dealer deals the hole cards
and the first communal card.
Sequence for first round of betting
(1)
(2)
After the first communal card is dealt, each player (other than the
designated player) in turn, starting with the player next to the
designated player—
(a)
calls; or
(b)
calls and raises; or
(c)
folds.
When all the players other than the designated player have called,
called and raised, or folded—
(a)
if all the other players have folded—the round of play is
completed, and the blind bet is returned to the designated
player; or
(b)
if none of the players has raised but at least 1 has called—the
designated player—
(c)
(i)
raises; or
(ii)
declines to raise; or
if 1 or more of the other players have raised, the designated
player—
(i)
calls; or
120
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(ii)
calls and raises; or
(iii) folds.
(3)
(4)
(5)
After the designated player has acted under subsection (2)(b) or
(c), each player (including the designated player) in turn, starting
with the player next to the designated player, and until the first
round of betting finishes—
(a)
calls; or
(b)
calls and raises; or
(c)
folds.
The first round of betting finishes when—
(a)
a player raises and no player calls; or
(b)
2 or more players have each contributed an equal amount to
the pot, and both of the following apply—
(i)
no other player has contributed a greater amount to the
pot;
(ii)
no player raises.
If subsection (4)(a) applies—
(a)
the dealer—
(i)
announces that the pot has been won; and
(ii)
returns the uncalled raise to the player so that the
uncalled raise does not form part of the pot; and
(iii) calculates the amount of the casino operator’s
commission; and
(iv) announces the amount of the pot and the amount of the
commission; and
(v)
deducts the commission from the pot; and
(vi) passes the pot, with the commission deducted, to the
player who raised; and
(b)
(6)
the round of play, as well as the first round of betting, is
completed.
If subsection (4)(b) applies, the dealer deals the second communal
card.
121
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
24
Sequence for second, third, fourth and final rounds of betting
(1)
This section explains the betting sequence for each of the second,
third, fourth and final rounds of betting.
(2)
For the second, third and fourth rounds of betting, the opening bet
must be equal to, or twice, the blind bet.
(3)
For the final round of betting, the opening bet be must equal to, or
twice, 3 times or 4 times, the blind bet.
(4)
After the communal card needed to start the round of betting has
been dealt, the designated player—
(5)
(a)
opens the betting by placing a bet in the pot; or
(b)
checks; or
(c)
folds.
If the designated player does not make an opening bet, each player
in turn, starting with the player next to the designated player—
(a)
opens the betting by placing a bet in the pot; or
(b)
checks; or
(c)
folds.
(6)
If each active player checks in the second, third or fourth round of
betting, the round of betting finishes and the next communal card
is dealt.
(7)
If no player makes an opening bet in the final round of betting—
(a)
the dealer—
(i)
announces that the pot has been won; and
(ii)
calculates the amount of the casino operator’s
commission; and
(iii) announces the amount of the pot and the amount of the
commission; and
(iv) deducts the commission from the pot; and
(v)
(b)
passes the pot, with the commission deducted, to the
player with the highest ranking poker hand; and
the round of play, as well as the round of betting, is
completed.
122
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(8)
(9)
After an opening bet has been made, each active player in turn,
starting with the player next to the player who made the opening
bet, and until the round of betting finishes—
(a)
calls; or
(b)
calls and raises; or
(c)
folds.
If a player makes an opening bet but no player calls—
(a)
the dealer—
(i)
announces that the pot has been won; and
(ii)
returns the uncalled opening bet to the player so that
the uncalled opening bet does not form part of the pot;
and
(iii) calculates the amount of the casino operator’s
commission; and
(iv) announces the amount of the pot and the amount of the
commission; and
(v)
deducts the commission from the pot; and
(vi) passes the pot, with the commission deducted, to the
player who made the uncalled opening bet; and
(b)
the round of play, as well as the round of betting, is
completed.
(10) If a player calls and raises and no player calls—
(a)
the dealer—
(i)
announces that the pot has been won; and
(ii)
returns the uncalled raise to the player so that the
uncalled raise does not form part of the pot; and
(iii) calculates the amount of the casino operator’s
commission; and
(iv) announces the amount of the pot and the amount of the
commission; and
(v)
deducts the commission from the pot; and
(vi) passes the pot, with the commission deducted, to the
player who raised; and
123
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(b)
the round of play, as well as the round of betting, is
completed.
(11) The round of betting, but not the round of play, finishes if 2 or
more players have each contributed an equal amount to the pot,
and both of the following apply—
(a)
no other player has contributed a greater amount to the pot;
(b)
no player raises.
(12) If subsection (11) applies, and not all of the communal cards have
been dealt, the dealer deals the next communal card.
25
Showdown
(1)
This section applies if—
(a)
the final round of betting is finished; but
(b)
no player has won the pot.
(2)
The last player to be called in the final round of betting (the called
player) shows the called player’s hole cards.
(3)
However, if all active players checked in the final round of betting,
the designated player for the final round of betting (the designated
player) shows the designated player’s hole cards.
(4)
If another active player (the other player) has a hand equal in
value to or of greater value than the called player’s hand (if
subsection (2) applies) or the designated player’s hand (if
subsection (3) applies), the other player shows the other player’s
hole cards.
(5)
The dealer—
(a)
announces the winning hand or winning hands; and
(b)
calculates the amount of the casino operator’s commission;
and
(c)
announces the amount of the pot and the amount of the
commission; and
(d)
deducts the commission from the pot; and
(e)
passes the pot, with the commission deducted, to the
winning player or players.
124
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(6)
For subsection (5)(e), if there are 2 or more winning players, the
pot is divided equally, in units of $1.
(7)
If there is an amount left over after the division under subsection
(6), the amount is given to the player who
(8)
26
27
(a)
shared in the pot; and
(b)
is seated closest to the designated player in the final round of
betting.
The pot must not be divided on the basis of an agreement between
2 or more players, and each round of play must be played to its
conclusion.
Raises
(1)
Not more than 3 players (not including a player who bets less than
the amount needed for a raise and taps out) may raise in a round of
betting.
(2)
If a player makes a raise in the first, second, third or fourth round
of betting, the raise must be equal to or twice the amount of the
blind bet.
(3)
If a player makes a raise in the final round of betting, the raise
must be equal to, or twice, 3 times or 4 times the amount of the
blind bet.
(4)
A raise made in a round of betting must not be less than any
previous raise made in the round.
(5)
Despite subsections (2) to (4), if only 2 players are contesting a
pot, each player may raise until the player has used the player’s
table stake.
Tapping out
(1)
A player taps out in a round of betting if the player—
(a)
wishes to stay in the round of play, but—
(i)
has some table stake remaining, but not enough to call;
or
(ii)
has only enough table stake remaining to call; or
125
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(iii) after calling, has some table stake remaining, but not
enough to raise; or
(iv) has only enough table stake remaining to call and
raise; and
(b)
bets the remaining amount of the player’s table stake by
putting all the chips remaining in the player’s table stake into
the pot.
(2)
If a player taps out, the player stays in the round of play until the
showdown, but takes no further part in the round of betting in
which the player taps out, and takes no part in a later round of
betting for the round of play.
(3)
Amounts bet by players that are more than the player who has
tapped out has bet are placed in a separate pot.
(4)
A player who taps out is eligible to win a pot only if it was formed
before the player tapped out.
(5)
Subsection (6) applies to a round of betting if, in the round of
betting—
(a)
a player (player A) raises when tapping out; and
(b)
the amount player A bets is less than the amount needed for
a raise; and
(c)
all other active players (the other players) have the
opportunity to act for the round of betting before player A
acts.
(6)
For the remainder of the round of betting after player A raises and
taps out, the other players may only call.
(7)
If a player (player B) taps out and another player (player C) makes
an uncalled opening bet or an uncalled raise for a round of betting,
entitlement to the pot formed before player B tapped out is decided
on a comparison of player B’s hand and player C’s hand.
(8)
If, when player B’s hand and player C’s hand are to be compared
under subsection (7), all 5 communal cards have not been dealt,
the remaining communal cards must be dealt before the
comparison is made.
(9)
The size of the pot is announced, and commission is deducted
from it, before it is handed over.
126
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Example of operation of section—
Player A taps out in the third round of betting. The final round of betting
finishes and there is a showdown. Players B and C are the only still active
players at the showdown, all other players (other than player A who tapped out)
have folded. Player A’s hand is greater in value than player B’s hand, which in
turn is greater in value than player C’s hand. Player A wins the pot formed
before player A tapped out. Player B wins the separate pot formed after player
A tapped out.
28
Commission
(1)
29
The commission to be deducted from a pot is as follows—
(a)
for a pot of not more than $19—nil;
(b)
for a pot of more than $19—5% of the highest amount of the
pot that is wholly divisible by 20.
(2)
However, for deducting commission from a pot that is more than
100 times the minimum permissible wager for the game, the pot is
taken to be 100 times the minimum permissible wager.
(3)
The casino operator may deduct less commission from a pot for a
game if the players are told, before the rounds of play start, about
the way the commission is to be calculated.
(4)
For calculating commission, if—
(a)
a player wins more than 1 pot in a round of play, the amount
of the pot is taken to be the total of all pots won; and
(b)
a player raises but is not called, the raise is taken not to be
part of a pot; and
(c)
2 or more players, holding hands of equal value, share a pot
for a round of play and no other player has contributed to the
pot, no commission is deducted from the pot.
Table stake
(1)
Before the dealer starts to deal the hole cards for a round of play
(the new round), a player who wishes to stay in the game but who
has no table stake remaining, or whose remaining table stake is
less than the minimum table stake, must be given the opportunity
to increase the player’s table stake to at least the minimum table
stake for the game.
127
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
30
31
(2)
If the player has no table stake remaining, and does not increase it
under subsection (1) to at least the minimum table stake, the player
must leave the game before the new round starts.
(3)
A player can not, in a round of play, bet for another player, or give
or loan chips to another player.
Checking
(1)
A player checks in a round of betting if the player declines to
make a bet but does not fold.
(2)
A player may check only in the second, third, fourth or final
rounds of betting.
(3)
When a player checks, the player is taken to indicate that the
player wishes to continue as an active player in the round of play,
but does not wish to make an opening bet.
(4)
The first player who may check in a round of betting is the player
who is entitled to make the opening bet for the round of betting.
(5)
If a player checks, the next active player may also check.
(6)
However, a player may not check if a player has made an opening
bet for the round of betting.
How to fold
(1)
A player folds in a round of play if, in a round of betting—
(a)
the player places the player’s hole cards face down on the
table; and
(b)
the player clearly indicates to the dealer that the player
wishes to stop taking part in the round of play; and
(c)
the cards are collected by the dealer and placed in the circled
area of the table layout.
(2)
Subsection (1) is the correct way under this rule for a player to fold
in manila poker.
(3)
However, a player is taken to have folded, even though the player
has not complied with this rule, if the player—
(a)
puts the player’s hole cards in the circled area of the table
layout; or
128
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(b)
Part 5
32
33
in some other way clearly indicates to the dealer that the
player wishes to stop taking part in the round of play.
Irregularities
Collusion
(1)
A player is required to play only in the player’s interest, and must
not help, or try to help, another player in a way that could
adversely affect a third player.
(2)
Only 1 player is allowed to play a hand, and the player must make
all decisions affecting the hand without help or advice from
another person.
(3)
In a round of play, a player must make sure no other person finds
out what the player’s hole cards are.
(4)
Subsection (3) applies even if the player becomes an inactive
player in the round of play.
(5)
Despite subsections (3) and (4), if information about the hole cards
of a player who has become an inactive player is gained, through
inadvertence or otherwise, by an active player, the active player
must make sure the information is given to all other active players.
(6)
If information about the hole cards of a player who has made a bet
and has not been called is gained by another player, the other
player must make sure the information is given to all other players.
(7)
A player may not look at the cards of a player who has folded, or
at any undealt cards, in or after a round of play.
Misdeals
(1)
A misdeal happens for a round of play only if—
(a)
a card is exposed when the cards are cut; or
(b)
the cards are not cut before the first card is dealt for the
round of play; or
129
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(c)
the dealer exposes a hole card during the deal; or
(d)
the card intended to be the second communal card is found
face up in the deck; or
(e)
the dealer—
(i)
deals a hole card out of turn; or
(ii)
deals no hole cards to a player; or
(iii) does not deal a second hole card to a player; or
(iv) deals too many hole cards to a player; or
(v)
34
deals a hole card to a position where there is not a
player for the round of play.
(2)
Only the dealer may declare a misdeal.
(3)
The dealer must declare a misdeal if the dealer becomes aware,
before the first round of betting for the round of play starts, that
the misdeal has happened.
(4)
However, the dealer must not declare a misdeal, and the round of
play may be continued, if an event mentioned in subsection (1)(e)
happens, but—
(a)
no player who has received a card the player should not have
received has looked at the card; and
(b)
the dealer reconstructs the deal and gives the players the
cards they should have received.
(5)
The dealer must reconstruct the deal under subsection (4)(b) unless
it is not practicable to reconstruct it.
(6)
If an event mentioned in subsection (1)(e)(v) happens, but a
misdeal can not be declared, the dealer, on becoming aware the
event has happened, must place each card that should not have
been dealt to the position into the circled area of the table layout.
(7)
If the dealer declares a misdeal for a round of play, the round of
play is taken not to have started, and the cards must be shuffled
and cut for a fresh round of play.
Betting out of turn
(1)
As soon as it is discovered in a round of betting that a player (the
out of turn player) has acted out of turn in the round of betting,
130
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
each player (a missed player) who should have had the opportunity
to act in the round of betting before the out of turn player acted
must be given the opportunity to act in the round of betting.
(2)
35
36
If, when acting out of turn, the out of turn player made a bet (the
out of turn bet), the out of turn bet stands if each missed player—
(a)
folds; or
(b)
checks; or
(c)
makes a bet of not more than the out of turn bet.
(3)
However, the out of turn player may fold, call or, if the round of
betting is limited to 3 raises and there has not already been 3 raises
in the round of betting, call and raise, if a missed player makes a
bet of more than the out of turn bet.
(4)
If the out of turn player folds under subsection (3), the out of turn
bet must be returned to the out of turn player.
(5)
Despite subsection (2), if the out of turn bet is more than the
betting limit, the difference between the out of turn bet and the
betting limit is returned to the out of turn player.
Premature exposure of communal cards
(1)
If it becomes evident to the dealer, after a round of betting (the
current round of betting) has started, but before it has finished,
that the dealer has exposed the card intended to be the communal
card to be exposed after the current round of betting is finished,
the current round of betting continues, but a player may call or
fold, but may not raise.
(2)
If the third, fourth or fifth communal card is exposed before,
respectively, the second, third or fourth round of betting has
started, the card is laid out with the previously exposed communal
cards and when the round of betting starts, betting is restricted to
the table minimum, and a player may call or fold, but may not
raise.
Holding the wrong number of hole cards
(1)
The dealer must declare a player’s hand dead for a round of play
if—
131
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
37
(a)
the dealer becomes aware the player holds too few or too
many hole cards; and
(b)
a misdeal is not declared for the round of play.
(2)
If a player’s hand is declared dead, the player is taken to have
folded, and all bets made by the player on the hand before the hand
is declared dead stay in the pot.
(3)
If a player’s hand is, or 2 or more players’ hands are, declared dead
at a showdown and there is only 1 active player remaining to
complete the showdown, the active player wins the pot.
(4)
If a player’s hand is, or 2 or more players’ hands are, declared dead
at a showdown and there is no active player remaining to complete
the showdown, the pot is won by the player who last folded (other
than a player who is taken to have folded because the player’s
hand was declared dead).
Players must not exchange cards or communicate
A player must not—
(a)
exchange cards; or
(b)
exchange or communicate, or cause to be exchanged or
communicated, information about the player’s hand; or
(c)
speak in a language other than English if directed by a dealer
or floor manager.
132
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 6
Mini-baccarat and premium minibaccarat
section 3(2)
Part 1
1
Preliminary
Conducting and playing mini-baccarat and premium minibaccarat
This schedule states the rules for conducting and playing the
casino game known as mini-baccarat and premium mini-baccarat.
2
Definitions for sch 6
In this schedule—
banker’s hand see section 20(1).
dragon bonus wager see section 32.
draw, for the banker’s or player’s hand, means take a third card.
mini-baccarat and premium mini-baccarat wager see section
9(1).
natural see section 23.
perfect pairs wager see section 29.
player’s hand see section 20(1).
player pair or banker pair wager see section 36.
standoff means the banker’s hand and the player’s hand are each a
natural and have the same point count.
133
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
stay, for the banker’s or player’s hand, means not take a third card.
super 6 wager see section 41.
3
Table and layout
(1)
Mini-baccarat and premium mini-baccarat is played at a table
having numbered places for up to 9 players. Mini-baccarat may
also be played on an electronic terminal.
(2)
The table layout must be substantially as shown in diagram 6.1 and
must include—
(3)
4
(a)
the name of, or logo for, the casino; and
(b)
3 betting areas for each player; and
(c)
if the chief executive has approved a change to the betting
areas for perfect pairs wagers, dragon bonus wagers, player
pair and banker pair wagers or super 6 wagers—the betting
areas as approved; and
(d)
a drop box; and
(e)
a discard holder.
Where a table is used solely for determining the result displayed
on an electronic terminal subsections (b) and (d) do not apply.
Electronic terminal for mini-baccarat
(1)
the electronic terminal must display a layout similar to the layouts
shown in diagram 6.2.
(2)
the electronic terminal must also display the following
information—
(a)
the minimum and maximum permissible wagers;
(b)
when a player may place bets;
(c)
the total number of credits available to the player;
(d)
the number of credits bet by the player for the current round
of play;
(e)
the result for the previous round of play.
134
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(3)
For each table for which electronic terminals are used, the chief
executive must approve the maximum number of electronic
terminals for that table.
Part 2
5
6
General rules
Standing players at a table
(1)
A person who is standing may participate in a game of minibaccarat or premium mini-baccarat even though all numbered
places at the table are not occupied by seated players.
(2)
Standing players—
(a)
may place a wager on any seated player’s betting areas; and
(b)
must not participate in the cut of the cards or touch or handle
the cards used in the game.
Maximum of 3 players for a numbered place at a table
Not more than 3 players may wager at a numbered place at a table.
7
8
Number of decks and way cards are dealt
(1)
Mini-baccarat and premium mini-baccarat is played with 6 or 8
decks of cards with backs of the same colour and design and 2
additional cutting cards.
(2)
All cards must be dealt from a dealing shoe designed for the
purpose.
Value of cards and point value of hand
(1)
The value of the cards in each deck is as follows—
(a)
a card from 2 to 9 has its face value;
(b)
a 10, jack, queen or king has a value of 0;
(c)
an ace has a value of 1.
135
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
9
(2)
The point count of a hand is a single digit number from 0 to 9 and
is decided by adding together the values of the cards in the hand.
(3)
If the total value of the cards in a hand is a two-digit number, the
left digit of the number is discarded and the right digit is the point
count of the hand.
Mini-baccarat and premium mini-baccarat wagers and results
(1)
For a mini-baccarat wager or a premium mini-baccarat wager, a
player wagers on the banker’s hand, the player’s hand or a tie bet.
(2)
A wager on the banker’s hand—
(3)
(4)
10
(a)
wins if the banker’s hand has a point count higher than the
player’s hand; and
(b)
loses if the banker’s hand has a point count lower than the
player’s hand; and
(c)
is void if the point counts of the banker’s hand and the
player’s hand are equal.
A wager on the player’s hand—
(a)
wins if the player’s hand has a point count higher than the
banker’s hand; and
(b)
loses if the player’s hand has a point count lower than the
banker’s hand; and
(c)
is void if the point counts of the banker’s hand and the
player’s hand are equal.
A tie bet wins if the point counts of the banker’s hand and the
player’s hand are equal and loses if the point counts are not equal.
How wagers are made at a table and when a wager can not be
placed, changed or withdrawn
(1)
A wager at mini-baccarat or premium mini-baccarat is made by
placing gaming chips on the appropriate betting area of the minibaccarat or premium mini-baccarat layout.
(2)
A wager can not be made orally.
136
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(3)
11
A wager can not (a)
for mini-baccarat, be placed, changed or withdrawn after the
first card for a round has been removed from the shoe; and
(b)
for premium mini-baccarat, be placed, changed or withdrawn
after the first card for a round has been exposed.
How wagers are made at an electronic terminal and when a
wager can not be placed, changed or withdrawn
(1) The player makes a wager by touching the layout on an electronic
terminal.
(2) A player may make, change or withdraw a wager until the words
‘no more bets’ are displayed on the electronic terminal.
12
13
Minimum and maximum wagers
(1)
The amount of the minimum wager for a game of mini-baccarat or
premium mini-baccarat must be the same for each player, when a
player plays the game at a mini-baccarat or premium mini-baccarat
table.
(2)
The amount of the minimum wager for a game of mini-baccarat
when a player plays the game at an electronic terminal may be
different between each electronic terminal.
(3)
If the minimum wager permitted for a table or electronic terminal
is not more than $5, the maximum wager permitted for the table or
electronic terminal must be at least $200.
(4)
A tie bet must not be more than one-eighth of the maximum wager
permitted for the table or electronic terminal.
Free hand at a table
(1)
A (free hand) means a round of play, for which the players must
not make a wager.
(2)
The dealer will place a marker on the layout to indicate that a free
hand is being dealt.
(3)
Upon request by a player, a floor manager may direct the banker to
deal a free hand, if —
137
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(3)
(4)
14
15
(a)
all of the players at the table must agree to play a free hand;
and
(b)
a floor manager can limit the number of free hands to be
dealt.
If there are no players at a table, and with a floor manager’s
authorisation, a banker may—
(a)
deal a maximum of 10 free hands; or
(b)
continue dealing free hands with a floor manager’s
authorisation.
A free hand must be played under sections 20 to 25, 26(1) and (2),
and 44.
Payout odds for winning mini-baccarat and premium minibaccarat wagers
(1)
A winning mini-baccarat or premium mini-baccarat wager made
on the player’s hand is paid at odds of 1 to 1.
(2)
A winning mini-baccarat or premium mini-baccarat wager made
on the banker’s hand is paid at odds of 19 to 20.
(3)
Despite subsection (2), the payout for a winning mini-baccarat or
premium mini-baccarat wager made on the banker’s hand may be
rounded down to the nearest sum consisting of a multiple of 50c.
(4)
A winning tie bet is paid at odds of 8 to 1.
No commission mini-baccarat and no commission premium
mini-baccarat
(1)
A casino operator may, at any time, offer a variation of the game
of mini-baccarat or premium mini-baccarat known as ‘no
commission mini-baccarat or no commission premium minibaccarat’.
(2)
In no commission mini-baccarat or no commission premium minibaccarat, a winning wager on the banker’s hand is paid—
(a)
for a banker’s hand with a point count of 6—at odds of 1 to
2; and
(b)
for any other banker’s hand—at odds of 1 to 1.
138
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 3
16
Playing the game
Procedures for inspecting and shuffling cards
(1)
Cards must be inspected and shuffled—
(a)
under the provisions of this schedule; and
(b)
under the approved control system for the casino.
(2)
Before being used in play the cards must be inspected to check for
marks and imperfections and that each deck of cards contains the
correct cards.
(3)
If a player asks to inspect the cards when the cards are first placed
on the table for play, the dealer must spread the cards face up on
the table to enable a person inspecting them to see if each deck of
cards is complete.
(4)
The cards must be shuffled—
(a)
before being brought into play; and
(b)
after the cutting card is reached in the dealing shoe, unless—
(c)
(5)
17
(i)
the cards are taken out of play; or
(ii)
the table is to close at the end of the last round of play;
and
after a round of play if directed by a casino employee higher
than a floor manager.
The dealer, with approval of the floor manager, must reshuffle
cards that have been preshuffled if a player asks the dealer to
reshuffle the cards before the first card is removed from the
dealing shoe.
Cutting the cards
(1)
After the cards have been shuffled, the dealer must offer the stack
of cards, with backs facing away from the dealer, to the seated
players to be cut.
(2)
The dealer starts with the player seated at the lowest numbered
place at the table and working clockwise around the table, offers
the stack to each player until a player accepts the cut.
139
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(3)
The player who accepts the cut may ask another player to cut the
cards.
(4)
If no player accepts the cut, the dealer cut the cards.
(5)
The cards must be cut by placing the cutting card in the stack at
least 10 cards in from either end.
(6)
After the cutting card has been inserted into the stack, the dealer
takes all cards in front of the cutting card and places them to the
back of the stack.
(7)
The dealer then inserts the second cutting card at least 14 cards in
from the back of the stack and leaves the other cutting card at the
end of the stack.
(8)
The stack of cards is then inserted into the dealing shoe for start of
play.
(9)
Before starting play, the dealer must remove the first card from the
shoe face down and place it in the discard holder.
(10) However, if a player asks, the dealer must show the face of the
card to the players.
(11) If a player asks and all other players at the table agree, a casino key
employee may direct the dealer to remove an additional number of
cards equal to the face value of the first card drawn and to place
them in the discard holder after the faces of all cards drawn have
been shown to the players.
(12) For subsection (11)—
(a)
a 10, jack, queen or king card has a face value of 10; and
(b)
an ace card has a face value of 1.
(13) For electronic terminals a dealer must cut the cards and
subsections (1) – (4) and (10) – (12) do not apply.
18
Banker
(1)
The dealer is the banker unless a player is the banker under this
rule.
(2)
If a casino key employee of a level higher than floor manager
directs the dealer to offer the dealing shoe to a player seated at the
table, the dealer must, before the start of play, offer the shoe to the
player in seat number 1 at the table.
140
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
19
20
(3)
If the player rejects the dealing shoe or if there is no-one in seat
number 1, the dealer must offer the shoe to each of the other seated
players in turn, in ascending seat number order until the shoe is
accepted by a player or has been rejected by all of the players.
(4)
If a player accepts the dealing shoe, the player is the banker and
must deal the cards under this rule and the instructions of the
dealer.
(5)
If no player accepts the dealing shoe, the dealer must deal the
cards.
Banker must make minimum wagers
(1)
This section applies to a player who is the banker.
(2)
The player must wager at least the permissible minimum wager on
either the banker’s hand or the player’s hand for a round of play.
(3)
If the player does not wish to make a mini-baccarat or premium
mini-baccarat wager for a round of play, the player stops being the
banker and must surrender the dealing shoe.
Dealing first 2 cards to each hand
(1)
There are 2 hands (the player’s hand and the banker’s hand) dealt
in mini-baccarat and premium mini-baccarat.
(2)
At the start of each round of play, ‘no more bets’ is announced
before the cards are dealt.
(i)
for premium mini-baccarat, a player may change their wager
in accordance with section 10(3)(b) before the first card for a
round of play is exposed.
(3)
The banker must deal 4 cards from the shoe.
(4)
The first and third cards dealt are the first and second cards of the
player’s hand and are placed on the player box.
(5)
The second and fourth cards dealt are the first and second cards of
the banker’s hand and are placed on the banker box.
(6)
All cards must be dealt either face up or face down.
(i) where a table is used solely for determining the result displayed
on an electronic terminal the cards will be dealt face up.
141
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(7)
21
22
After all the cards are dealt to each hand, the cards must be placed
face up in front of the dealer, if the cards were dealt face down.
Announcing point count of each hand after first 2 cards and
dealing additional cards
(1)
The point count of the player’s hand and the banker’s hand will be
announced immediately after the first 2 cards for each hand have
been exposed.
(2)
Following the announcement of the point counts of both hands, a
third card, if required, is dealt to each hand under sections 23 to
25.
(3)
Only 1 additional card may be dealt to either hand.
Appearance of cutting card during play
(1)
When the cutting card appears during play or is the first card out of
the shoe at the start of a round of play, it must be removed and the
round of play completed.
(2)
When the round is completed, the dealer must announce to players
a last round is about to be played.
(i) where a table is used solely for determining the result displayed
on an electronic terminal subsection (2) does not apply.
(3)
23
When the further round is completed, no more cards may be dealt
until the cards are shuffled or new cards are brought into play.
No additional cards may be drawn in certain circumstances
If the point count of either the player’s hand or the banker’s hand
after the first 2 cards are dealt to each is an 8 or 9 (a natural), no
more cards may be dealt to either hand.
24
When player’s hand must draw or stay
(1)
If the point count of the banker’s hand on the first 2 cards is 0 to 7
and the point count of the player’s hand is 0 to 5, the player’s hand
must draw.
142
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(2)
25
26
If the point count of the banker’s hand on the first 2 cards is 0 to 7
and the point count of the player’s hand is 6 or 7, the player’s hand
must stay.
Additional card for banker’s hand in certain circumstances
(1)
The banker’s hand must draw or stay as required by diagram 6.3.
(2)
The first vertical column in the diagram labelled ‘point count of
banker’s hand’ refers to the point count of the banker’s hand after
the first 2 cards have been dealt to it.
(3)
The first horizontal column at the top of the diagram labelled
‘third card drawn by player’s hand’ refers to the value of the third
card drawn by the player’s hand as distinguished from the point
count of the player’s hand.
(4)
The letter ‘D’ used in the diagram means the banker’s hand draws
and the letter ‘S’ used in the diagram means the banker’s hand
stays.
(5)
To use the diagram, a person finds the point count of the banker’s
hand in the first vertical column and traces it horizontally across
the diagram until it intersects the third card drawn by the player’s
hand.
(6)
The box at which the intersection takes place shows whether the
banker’s hand draws or stays.
Deciding the round and dealing with wagers
(1)
After each hand has received all the cards it is entitled to under
this rule, the dealer announces the final point count of each hand
indicating which hand has won the round.
(2)
If the 2 hands have equal point counts, the dealer announces ‘tie
hand’.
(3)
If a dragon bonus wager has been made and there is a standoff the
dealer announces ‘standoff’.
(i) an electronic terminal will display the word ‘standoff’
(4)
After the result of the round is announced, the dealer at a table
must collect all losing wagers and then pay all winning wagers.
143
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(5)
27
After the result of the round is announced at an electronic terminal
–
(a)
the layout displayed on the electronic terminal must be
cleared of losing wagers; and
(b)
if the player has made a winning wager –
the wager and the player’s winnings must be displayed
on the electronic terminal; and
(ii)
the wager and the player’s winnings must be added to
the player’s credits and the total of the credits must be
displayed on the electronic terminal.
Electronic terminal payments
(1)
This section applies when a player collects the player’s credits
from an electronic terminal.
(2)
The electronic terminal may dispense a ticket for the value of
credits due to the player.
(3)
If the electronic terminal does not dispense a ticket, the casino
operator must give the player a ticket for the value of credits due to
the player.
(4)
The player may redeem a ticket mentioned in subsection (2) or (3)
with the casino operator for an amount equivalent to the value of
the credits stated in the ticket.
Part 4
28
(i)
Perfect pairs wagers
Definitions for pt 4
In this part—
coloured pair means a pair comprised of—
(a)
2 red cards of different suits; or
(b)
2 black cards of different suits.
144
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
face value, of a card, means—
(a)
the number of the card, namely 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10; or
(b)
the type of card, namely jack, queen, king or ace.
mixed pair means a pair comprised of 1 red card and 1 black card.
pair means 2 cards with the same face value.
perfect pair means a pair comprised of cards of the same suit.
29
Perfect pairs wager
For a perfect pairs wager, a player wagers that—
30
31
(a)
if the wager is placed on the betting area for the banker’s
hand, the first 2 cards dealt to the banker’s hand will be a
pair; or
(b)
if the wager is placed on the betting area for the player’s
hand, the first 2 cards dealt to the player’s hand will be a
pair.
Placing a perfect pairs wager
(1)
A player may place a perfect pairs wager if the betting areas for
wagers on the layout provide for perfect pairs wagers.
(2)
A perfect pairs wager must be at least the minimum amount, and
not more than the maximum amount, displayed on the sign at the
table or electronic terminal for perfect pairs wagers.
(3)
At a table – a maximum of 3 perfect pairs wagers may be allowed
and preference for placing a perfect pairs wager is given to the
players who have also placed a mini-baccarat or premium minibaccarat wager.
Winning and losing perfect pairs wagers and payouts
(1)
A perfect pairs wager on the banker’s hand wins if the first 2 cards
dealt to the banker’s hand are a pair.
(2)
A perfect pairs wager on the player’s hand wins if the first 2 cards
dealt to the player’s hand are a pair.
(3)
Winning perfect pairs wagers in a game of mini-baccarat or
premium mini-baccarat must be paid as follows—
145
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(a)
if the game is played with 6 decks—
(i)
for a mixed pair—5 to 1; and
(ii)
for a coloured pair—10 to 1; and
(iii) for a perfect pair—30 to 1;
(b)
if the game is played with 8 decks—
(i)
for a mixed pair—6 to 1; and
(ii)
for a coloured pair—12 to 1; and
(iii) for a perfect pair—25 to 1.
(4)
A perfect pairs wager on the banker’s hand loses if the first 2 cards
dealt to the banker’s hand are not a pair.
(5)
A perfect pairs wager on the player’s hand loses if the first 2 cards
dealt to the player’s hand are not a pair.
Part 5
32
Dragon bonus wager
Dragon bonus wagers
For a dragon bonus wager, a player wagers that—
(a)
(b)
if the wager is placed on the betting area for the banker’s
hand, either of the following will happen—
(i)
the banker’s hand will be a natural and win;
(ii)
the banker’s hand will not be a natural and win with a
point count 4 or more points greater than the player’s
hand point count; or
if the wager is placed on the betting area for the player’s
hand, either of the following will happen—
(i)
the player’s hand will be a natural and win;
(ii)
the player’s hand will not be a natural and win with a
point count 4 or more points greater than the banker’s
hand point count.
146
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
33
34
Placing a dragon bonus wager
(1)
A player may place a dragon bonus wager if the betting areas for
wagers on the layout provide for dragon bonus wagers.
(2)
Also, a player may place a dragon bonus wager in any player’s
betting area at the table.
(3)
A dragon bonus wager must be at least the minimum amount, and
not more than the maximum amount, displayed on the sign at the
table or electronic terminal for dragon bonus wagers.
(4)
At a table – a maximum of 3 dragon bonus wagers may be allowed
and preference for placing a dragon bonus wager is given to the
players who have also placed a mini-baccarat or premium minibaccarat wager.
Winning and losing dragon bonus wagers
(1)
A dragon bonus wager on the banker’s hand—
(a)
(b)
(c)
(2)
wins if the banker’s hand has a point count higher than the
player’s hand and—
(i)
is a natural; or
(ii)
is not a natural and has 4 or more points higher than
the point count of the player’s hand; and
loses if the banker’s hand—
(i)
has a point count lower than the player’s hand; or
(ii)
is not a natural and has a point count less than 4 points
higher than the player’s hand; and
is void if there is a stand off.
A dragon bonus wager on the player’s hand—
(a)
(b)
wins if the player’s hand has a point count higher than the
banker’s hand and—
(i)
is a natural; or
(ii)
is not a natural and has 4 or more points higher than
the point count of the banker’s hand; and
loses if the player’s hand—
(i)
has a point count lower than the banker’s hand; or
147
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(ii)
(c)
(3)
35
is not a natural and has a point count less than 4 points
higher than the banker’s hand; and
is void if there is a stand off.
A dragon bonus wager that is void under subsection (1)(c) or
(2)(c) is returned to the player who made the wager.
Payouts
A winning dragon bonus wager in a game of mini-baccarat or
premium mini-baccarat must be paid as follows—
(a)
for a winning hand that is a natural—1 to 1;
(b)
for a winning hand that is not a natural and wins by—
(i)
9 points—30 to 1; or
(ii)
8 points—10 to 1; or
(iii) 7 points—6 to 1; or
(iv) 6 points—4 to 1; or
(v)
5 points—2 to 1; or
(vi) 4 points—1 to 1.
Part 6
36
Player pair or banker pair wagers
Definitions for pt 6
In this part—
face value, of a card, means—
(a)
the number of the card, namely 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10; or
(b)
the type of card, namely jack, queen, king or ace.
pair means 2 cards with the same face value.
player pair or banker pair means the first two cards of either the
player hand or the banker hand and the two cards form a pair.
148
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
37
Player pair or banker pair wager
For a player pair or banker pair wager, a player wagers that—
38
39
(a)
if the wager is placed on the betting area for the banker pair,
the first 2 cards dealt to the banker’s hand will be a pair; or
(b)
if the wager is placed on the betting area for the player pair,
the first 2 cards dealt to the player’s hand will be a pair.
Placing a player pair or banker pair wager
(1)
A player may place a player pair or banker pair wager if the betting
areas for wagers on the layout provide for player pair or banker
pair wagers.
(2)
A player pair or banker pair wager must be at least the minimum
amount, and not more than the maximum amount, displayed on the
sign at the table or electronic terminal for player pair or banker
pair wagers.
(3)
At a table – a maximum of 3 player pair or banker pair wagers may
be allowed and preference for placing a player pair or banker pair
wager is given to the players who have also placed a mini-baccarat
or premium mini-baccarat wager.
Winning and losing player pair or banker pair wagers and
payouts
(1)
A banker pair wager on the banker’s hand wins if the first 2
cards dealt to the banker’s hand are a pair.
(2)
A player pair wager on the player’s hand wins if the first 2
cards dealt to the player’s hand are a pair.
(3)
Winning player pair or banker pair wagers in a game of
mini-baccarat or premium mini-baccarat must be paid as
follows—
(a)
for a player pair—11 to 1;
(b)
for a banker pair—11 to 1.
(4)
A banker pair wager on the banker’s hand loses if the first 2
cards dealt to the banker’s hand are not a pair.
(5)
A player pair wager on the player’s hand loses if the first 2
cards dealt to the player’s hand are not a pair.
149
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 7
40
Super 6 wager
Definitions for part 7
In this part—
face value, of a card, means—
(a)
the number of the card, namely 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10; or
(b)
the type of card, namely jack, queen, king or ace.
super 6 means the banker’s hand wins with a point count of six.
41
Super 6 wager
For a super 6 wager, a player wagers on the banker’s hand to win
with a point count of 6, with any other outcome being a loss.
42
43
Placing a super 6 wager
(1)
A player may place a super 6 wager if the betting areas for wagers
on the layout provide for super 6 wagers.
(2)
A super 6 wager must be at least the minimum amount, and
not more than the maximum amount, displayed on the sign
at the table or electronic terminal for super 6 wagers.
(3)
At a table – a maximum of 3 super 6 wagers may be allowed and
preference for placing a super 6 wager is given to the players who
have also placed a mini-baccarat or premium mini-baccarat wager.
Winning and losing super 6 wagers and payouts
(1)
A super 6 wager wins if the banker’s hand wins with a point count
of 6.
(2)
Winning super 6 wagers in a game of mini-baccarat or premium
mini-baccarat must be paid at 15 to 1.
(3)
A super 6 wager loses if the (a)
banker’s hand wins with a point count other than 6; or
(b)
the player’s hand wins; or
150
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(c)
the result is a tie.
Part 8
44
Irregularities
Irregularities
(1)
A third card dealt to the player’s hand when no third card is
authorised by this rule becomes the third card of the banker’s hand
if, under section 25, the banker’s hand must draw.
(2)
If the banker’s hand is required to stay, the card dealt in error
becomes the first card of the next hand unless it has been
disclosed.
(3)
A card that would have been the first card of the next hand
becomes the first card of a dummy round if the card—
(4)
(5)
(6)
(a)
has been disclosed; or
(b)
is found face up in the shoe.
If the dealer –
(a)
deals the player’s card/s to the banker area and/or the
banker’s card/s to the player’s area; or
(b)
deals the player’s card/s to the player or patron accepting the
banker’s hand and/or the banker’s card/s are dealt to the
player accepting the player’s hand; or
(c)
exposes any card that should have been exposed by a player
then either –
(i)
all players at a table are given the option to retract or
reduce their wager if one or more wagers remain; or
(ii)
becomes a dummy round if no wagers remain.
A dummy round—
(a)
can only arise under subsection (3); and (4)
(b)
must be played in accordance with sections 20 to 25.
A player must not make a wager on a dummy round.
151
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(7)
(8)
45
If, after the start of a hand, a card is found face up in the shoe, the
card—
(a)
is taken to be a live card; and
(b)
must be played as if it were found face down.
If there are not enough cards remaining in the shoe to complete a
round of play—
(a)
the round has no effect; and
(b)
a new round must start.
Irregularities— electronic terminal
(1)
If a card/s are misread or not read by the shoe or the shoe is
displaying an error message a casino key employee will direct the
dealer to manually enter the correct card/s.
(2) If an incorrect result has been confirmed on an electronic terminal
a casino key employee must ensure the correct result is displayed
on the electronic terminal and wagers will be dealt with using the
correct result.
152
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 6 – Mini-baccarat and premium mini-baccarat (continued)
Diagram 6.1—Mini-baccarat and premium mini-baccarat table layout
section 3
153
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 6 – Mini-baccarat and premium mini-baccarat (continued)
Diagram 6.2— Mini-baccarat electronic terminal layouts
section 4
154
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 6 – Mini-baccarat and premium mini-baccarat (continued)
Diagram 6.3 – Mini-baccarat and premium mini-baccarat table of
play
section 25
155
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 7
Mini-dice
section 3(2)
1
Conducting and playing mini-dice
This schedule states the rules for conducting and playing the
casino game known as mini-dice.
2
Table layout, dice number and 3 identical dice
(1)
Mini-dice is played at a table having places for players on 1 side
and a place for the dealer on the opposite side.
(2)
A layout cloth covering the mini-dice table must have imprinted
on it the name of, or logo for, the casino and boxes for wagers.
(3)
The boxes must be marked as shown in diagram 7.1.
(4)
The mini-dice table must have attached to it—
(5)
3
(a)
a drop box; and
(b)
a dice tumbler containing 3 identical dice.
The 3 dice must remain in the dice tumbler under seal.
Inspecting dice tumbler and seal before opening table for
gaming
Before opening a mini-dice table for gaming, a floor manager
must—
(a)
inspect the dice tumbler and ensure it is functioning correctly
by spinning the dice; and
(b)
ensure the 3 dice in the dice tumbler are properly under seal
and the seal has not been interfered with.
156
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
4
Permissible wagers and results
(1)
The wagers defined in this section are the permissible wagers by a
player at the game of mini-dice.
(2)
In this schedule—
field means a wager that wins if a total of 5, 6, 7, 8, 13, 14, 15 or
16 appears in any combination of the 3 dice and loses if any other
total appears.
individual die face values, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, means a wager on 1 of
the numbers that wins if the number appears on 1 or more of the
dice and loses if the number does not appear.
total’s means the total of the uppermost sides of the 3 dice in any
spin of the dice tumbler.
5
6
7
(3)
The win or loss of a wager is decided by the numbers appearing on
the uppermost sides of the dice.
(4)
Only 1 face of each die is taken to be uppermost.
How wagers may be made
(1)
A wager at mini-dice is made by placing gaming chips in the
appropriate wager area of the mini-dice layout.
(2)
A wager can not be made orally.
Player responsible when wagering or giving instructions
(1)
Each player is responsible for the correct positioning of the
player’s wagers on the layout whether or not the player is helped
by the dealer.
(2)
Each player must ensure instructions the player gives to the dealer
about placement of the player’s wagers are carried out correctly.
Time for wagering
(1)
If the dice tumbler is not covered, the dealer must call ‘no more
bets’ before activating the dice tumbler.
(2)
If the dice tumbler is covered, the dealer must call ‘no more bets’
before the dealer removes the cover to reveal the result.
157
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(3)
8
A wager must not be placed, changed or withdrawn after the dealer
has called ‘no more bets’.
How wagers are dealt with
Each wager must be settled strictly in accordance with its position
on the layout when the result is decided or revealed.
9
Change to application of ss 6 and 8 if unfair
(1)
This section applies if—
(a)
(b)
(2)
10
either of the following happens—
(i)
a player’s chip is moved from its original position by
another person to another position on the table layout
and the chip and its original position can be identified
by the casino operator;
(ii)
a dealer does not place a chip for a player’s wager as
instructed by the player, or incorrectly places the chip,
and the instructions can be confirmed by the dealer;
and
the casino operator is satisfied the application of sections 6
and 8 would be unfair to the player.
Despite sections 6 and 8, the casino operator may settle the
player’s wager as if the chip were in the original or correct
position.
Use of non-value chips
(1)
The dealer must not issue players with identically coloured nonvalue chips unless all the players who are issued with the chips
agree to the issue.
(2)
A non-value chip may be used only at the table at which it was
issued.
(3)
The dealer may accept a non-value chip in exchange for a value
chip only if—
(a)
the non-value chip was issued at the dealer’s table; or
158
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(b)
11
the non-value chip was issued at a table that is closed when a
player asks for the non-value chip to be redeemed.
Payout odds for winning wagers
Winning wagers at the game of mini-dice are paid at the following
odds—
Wager
Payout odds
(a)
field
1 to 1
(b)
individual die
face values
if number
appears
on 1 die
if number
if number
appears on 2 appears
dice
on 3 dice
1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
1 to 1
2 to 1
12
12 to 1.
Use of dice tumbler
The dice tumbler must be activated so that—
13
the bottom of the dice tumbler is brought to the top at least 3
times; or
(b)
the dice are spun within the dice tumbler at least 3 times.
Announcing the result
(1)
8
(a)
If, when the 3 dice have come to rest in the bottom section of the
dice tumbler, the dice are all lying flat,8 the dealer must
announce—
(a)
the result by calling the numbers on the uppermost face of
each die in order from the smallest number to the highest;
and
(b)
the total of the numbers on the 3 uppermost faces of the dice.
Section 15 explains what happens if 1 or more of the dice are not lying flat.
159
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Example—
2, 3, 6; total 11
(2)
Doubles and triples and the total must be called in a similar way.
Example—
double 3, 4; total 10
triple 5; total 15
14
No unauthorised interference with gaming equipment
A person, other than a casino employee or a casino key employee
who is responsible for the operation of the game, must not activate
the dice tumbler or interfere with the operation of the dice tumbler.
15
15
Irregularities
(1)
After the dice have been spun as required by section 12, if any of
the 3 dice are not lying flat in the bottom section of the tumbler,
the dealer must announce ‘no spin’ in a clearly audible voice.
(2)
If the dice tumbler after being activated does not operate correctly,
the dealer must announce ‘no spin’ in a clearly audible voice.
160
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 7 – Mini-dice (continued)
Diagram 7.1—Mini-dice table layout
section 2(3)
161
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 8
Pai gow
section 3(2)
Part 1
1
Preliminary
Conducting and playing pai gow
This schedule states the rules for conducting and playing the
casino game known as pai gow.
2
Definitions for sch 8
In this schedule—
chong ranking 3 see section 3.
chung see section 9.
co-banker means a player banking in equal partnership with the
house.
exceptions see section 35.
first player for a box, see section 15.
game means the game of pai gow described in this schedule.
hand means a 2 tile setting.
high hand, for a player or banker, means—
(a)
the player or banker’s hand that has a ranking or point count
higher than the ranking or point count of the player or
banker’s other hand; or
(b)
if the player or banker has 2 hands of equal ranking or point
count—the hand containing the highest individually ranked
tile.
house means the casino operator.
162
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
house way means the way the dealer sets the house’s tiles.
la ja see section 22.
low hand, for a player or banker, means—
(a)
the player or banker’s hand that has a ranking or point count
lower than the ranking or point count of the player or
banker’s other hand; or
(b)
if the player or banker has 2 hands of equal ranking or point
count—the hand that does not contain the highest
individually ranked tile.
off marker see section 12.
player/banker means a player who has taken over the bank and
who is covering the declared wagers of all other players.
priority set marker see section 14.
round of play, for a game, includes the following—
(a)
shuffling and stacking the tiles;
(b)
placing wagers;
(c)
dealing the tiles;
(d)
setting the players’ tiles;
(e)
setting the bank’s tiles;
(f)
deciding and paying the winning wagers, deciding and
collecting the losing wagers, deciding stand offs and
deducting commission.
shuffle means to turn the tiles face down on the table and mix
thoroughly by hand.
standoff means a wager—
(a)
in which a player and the banker have the same point count;
and
(b)
that neither wins nor loses.
tiles means the dominos with pai gow markings used for playing
pai gow.
tumbler means a non-transparent cover in the shape of a cup, used
to contain and shake the 3 dice used in pai gow.
163
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
3
4
Meaning of chong ranking 3
(1)
Chong ranking 3 is made up of 2 tiles with a total point count of
3.
(2)
The higher ranking tile of the 2 tiles must have a ranking of high 6
(chong).
How to achieve chong ranking 3 or better
(1)
To achieve chong ranking 3 or better, a low hand must have a
point count of 3 or higher.
(2)
However, if the point count is 3, the hand must include a tile with
a ranking of high 6 (chong) or higher (that is, 12, 2, high 8 or high
4).
Part 2
5
Table, layout, tiles and tile ranking
Table and layout
(1)
Pai gow is played at a table having places for the players on 1 side
and a place for the dealer on the opposite side.
(2)
The layout for the table—
(a)
is the layout in diagram 8.1 or a similar layout approved by
the chief executive; and
(b)
must include the following—
(i)
the name of, or logo for, the casino;
(ii)
not more than 8 numbered circular areas to indicate
boxes for wagers;
(iii) 2 circular areas in front of the dealer for placing
winning and losing wagers;
(iv) a drop box.
164
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
6
Tiles
Pai gow is played with 32 tiles with—
7
(a)
faces bearing the markings shown in diagram 8.2; and
(b)
backs of the same colour and design.
Tile ranking
(1)
(2)
The ranking of pairs from highest to lowest is shown in diagram
8.2, and is as follows—
•
gee jun or 3/6
•
teen or 12
•
day or 2
•
yun or high 8
•
gor or high 4
•
mooy or high 10
•
chong or high 6
•
bon or low 4
•
foo or 11
•
ping or low 10
•
tit or high 7
•
look or low 6
•
chop gow or 9
•
chop bot or low 8
•
chop chit or low 7
•
chop ng or 5.
The ranking of wongs, gongs and high 9s from highest to lowest is
as follows—
•
teen wong (a 12 (teen) tile with any 9 tile)
•
day wong (a 2 (day) tile with any 9 tile)
•
teen gong (a 12 (teen) tile with any 8 tile)
•
day gong (a 2 (day) tile with any 8 tile)
165
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
8
•
teen high 9 (a 12 (teen) tile with any 7 tile)
•
day high 9 (a 2 (day) tile with any 7 tile).
(3)
Examples of wongs, gongs and high 9s are shown in diagram 8.3.
(4)
The ranking of individual tiles from highest to lowest is shown in
diagram 8.4, and is as follows—
•
12
•
2
•
high 8
•
high 4
•
high 10
•
high 6
•
low 4
•
11
•
low 10
•
high 7
•
low 6
•
9
•
low 8
•
low 7
•
5
•
3/6.
Tile point counts
(1)
The point count of a hand, if no ranking hand is to be played, is
decided by adding together the point counts of the 2 tiles forming
the hand.
(2)
If the total of the tiles in a hand is a 2 digit number, the left digit of
the number is discarded as having no value, and the right digit
(from 0 to 9) becomes the point count of the hand.
166
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 3
9
10
11
12
Other equipment and its use
Chung
(1)
A marker (a chung) is used to indicate the banker, or the cobanker, in a round of play.
(2)
If a player and the house are co-bankers, a chung or a co-bank
marker is used to indicate the co-bankers.
Tumbler, dice and cover
(1)
Three identical dice are used to decide which box receives the first
set of tiles.
(2)
A tumbler is used to shake the dice.
Use of dice
(1)
After the tiles are cut, the dice are shaken to ensure all dice
tumble.
(2)
The total of the 3 dice decides which box receives the first set of
tiles.
(3)
The dealer—
(a)
counts in an anticlockwise direction, starting with the box
identified by the chung as 1, 9 or 17; and
(b)
counts by box until the dealer reaches the box with the same
number as the total of the dice; and
(c)
delivers the first set of tiles to the box.
Off marker
(1)
A casino operator may take a box out of play by placing an off
marker on the box before a round of play.
(2)
If an off marker is placed on a box, a player is not permitted to
wager on the box.
167
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 4
13
14
Wagers
Placing wagers
(1)
After the dealer starts pushing the tiles out to the first player, a
player must not handle, remove or change a wager, or place an
additional wager, until the wager has been decided and dealt with.
(2)
A wager at pai gow is made by placing gaming chips in the
appropriate wager area of the pai gow layout.
Minimum and maximum wagers
(1)
In accepting a wager, a player/banker must consider the
player/banker’s ability to meet the maximum liability that might
arise to the player/banker from other players’ wagers.
(2)
If the house is co-banker—
(a)
the maximum house liability, for the table, must be
displayed at or near the table; and
(b)
wagers must be placed in a way that ensures—
(i)
the house’s maximum liability is not more than the
amount displayed; and
(ii)
the co-banker’s maximum liability is not more than the
amount the co-banker is able to meet.
(3)
If, under an arrangement under section 64A of the Act, a player
wagers more than the permissible maximum wager for the table,
the player is the only player allowed to wager on the box the player
is using.
(4)
If the total of all wagers on a box is at least half the permissible
maximum wager for the table—
(5)
(a)
a marker (a priority set marker) must be placed at the box
before the tiles are dealt for the round of play; and
(b)
the tiles for the box must be set before players at other boxes
look at or start setting their tiles.
However, it is not necessary to place a priority set marker at a box
if—
168
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
15
16
(a)
there is only 1 box in play at the game; or
(b)
all boxes in play have total wagers of at least half the
permissible maximum wager for the table.
Number of players for a box
(1)
Not more than 3 players may wager on each box.
(2)
If more than 1 player wagers on a box, the decision about setting
the tiles is called by—
(a)
the player who has wagered on the box for the longest time
(the first player); or
(b)
at the discretion of the first player—another player with a
wager on the box; or
(c)
if the first player is not present—the player whose wager is
closest to the dealer.
Number of hands for a player
(1)
A player may set the tiles for only 1 box in a round of play.
(2)
However, a player may wager on 2 boxes and set the tiles for both
boxes against the house if—
(a)
the player is the only player wagering on that round of play;
and
(b)
the total wagered on 1 box is at least twice the amount
wagered on the other box; and
(c)
the player first sets the tiles for the box with the higher
wager before looking at the tiles for the other box; and
(d)
the player does not change the setting of the tiles for the box
with the higher wager after they have been set.
169
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 5
17
18
The bank
Use of the chung
(1)
If a player is banker for a round of play, a chung is placed in front
of the player’s box to show that the player is banker.
(2)
If the house is banker for a round of play, a chung is placed in
front of the area designated for the game as box 1 to show that the
house is banker.
(3)
If a player and the house are co-bankers, a chung or a co-bank
marker is placed to show that the player and the house are cobankers.
Appointment as banker
(1)
The house is banker exclusively unless a player is a player/banker
or co-banker.
(2)
For a player to be a player/banker or co-banker, the player must
have played the previous round of play on the box on which the
player intends to take the bank.
(3)
However, if a player is player/banker or co-banker for the round of
play immediately after a round of play for which the house was
banker, the player may be player/banker or co-banker on the box
designated as box 1.
(4)
For a player to be player/banker, the player must be able to cover
all other players’ wagers.
(5)
A player qualified to be player/banker may choose to be co-banker.
(6)
Two or more players may combine their chips to become
player/banker.
(7)
If subsection (6) applies, the players who are player/banker—
(8)
(a)
must choose a player or players to handle the tiles; and
(b)
must not wager on another hand for the round of play for
which they are player/banker.
The house, through the dealer, is banker for the first round of play
after—
170
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(9)
(a)
the start of play for the game; or
(b)
the game is restarted after a break in play.
After the first round of play mentioned in subsection (8), the bank
is offered around the table to the first player at each box, starting
with the first player at the box designated as box 2, and moving
around the table from box to box in an anticlockwise direction.
(10) A player (player A) may be player/banker or co-banker for not
more than 2 consecutive rounds of play.
(11) After player A has been player/banker or co-banker for 2
consecutive rounds of play, the bank is again offered around the
table in an anticlockwise direction, starting with the player next to
player A.
(12) If the bank is offered under subsection (11) but no player, or only
player A, wishes to be player/banker or co-banker, the house must
take over the bank for at least 1 round of play.
(13) If the house is banker for a round of play, the tiles for the bank’s
hand are delivered to box 1 and another player must not wager on
box 1 for the round of play.
Part 6
19
Payout odds and commission
Winning wagers and commission
(1)
A winning wager on a player’s hand is paid at the odds of even
money, but 5% is deducted from the payout for commission.
(2)
However, the commission may be rounded up to the nearest
multiple of 50c.
(3)
A player who is player/banker or co-banker for a round of play is
charged 5% commission on any profits made after all players’
losing wagers have been collected and all players’ winning wagers
have been paid.
(4)
However, the commission may be rounded down to the nearest
multiple of 50c.
171
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Example for subsection (4)—
If the amount on which a co-banker is to pay commission is $97.50, the
commission is paid on $90.
Part 7
20
Sorting, inspecting and shuffling the tiles
(1)
After receiving the 32 tiles at the table, the dealer and the floor
manager must inspect the tiles independently.
(2)
After the tiles have been inspected, the dealer must arrange the
tiles face up on the table in ranking pairs for visual inspection by
the first player or players to arrive at the table.
(3)
A player must be given an opportunity to look at the tiles before
the tiles are shuffled and stacked in preparation for the first round
of play.
Part 8
21
22
Opening of table for gaming
Shuffling and cutting the tiles
Shuffling and stacking for each round of play
(1)
The dealer must shuffle the tiles face down on the table by a
thorough washing motion and stack the tiles at the start of each
round of play.
(2)
The dealer must stack the tiles into 8 groups of 4.
La ja
(1)
After the tiles have been stacked, the dealer may perform an
additional form of shuffle known as a ‘la ja’, but only if asked
by—
172
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(2)
23
24
(a)
a player/banker; or
(b)
if the house is banker—a player; or
(c)
if a player is co-banker—the player.
The dealer must perform a la ja in a way approved by the chief
executive.
Cutting the tiles
(1)
Tiles must be cut in a way approved by the chief executive.
(2)
The approved cuts must be displayed on a sign on or near the
table.
(3)
If the house is banker, the tiles must be cut in an approved way.
(4)
If a player is player/banker or co-banker, the player may choose
the approved cut to be used.
(5)
A player must not touch a tile during the shuffle or cut of the tiles
for a round of play.
Replacing the tiles
(1)
If a casino employee of the level of floor manager or higher
decides a tile is unfit for further use, the tile or all the tiles must be
replaced after a round of play.
(2)
If it is decided to replace all the tiles rather than a tile, the new tiles
must be checked, shuffled and cut in the way stated in sections 20
and 21.
(3)
The casino operator may, at the completion of a round of play but
before dealing the tiles for the next round of play, check the tiles,
arrange them in rank order and, if appropriate, remove tiles from
the table and replace them with new tiles.
173
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 9
25
26
Dealing the tiles
Dealing the tiles
(1)
After the dealer decides which box is to receive the first tiles, a
group of 4 tiles is dealt to each box in turn, going around the table
in an anticlockwise direction.
(2)
However, if a box does not contain a wager, it is not necessary for
the dealer to deliver the tiles for that box directly to the box.
Controlling the tiles
(1)
When a player sets the player’s tiles, the player must keep the
faces of the tiles concealed from all other players.
(2)
A player must keep all tiles under the player’s control—
(a)
in the playing area; and
(b)
in view of the dealer and the floor manager.
(3)
Only the player who is to set the tiles for a box may handle the
tiles.
(4)
However, if 2 players are player/banker, both may handle the tiles.
(5)
If more than 2 players are player/banker, only 2 of the players may
handle the tiles.
Part 10
27
Setting the hands
Hands
Each player and the banker must form a low hand and a high hand
from the group of 4 tiles dealt to the player or banker.
174
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
28
Setting the hands
(1)
A player to whom tiles are dealt must set the player’s tiles into a
low hand and a high hand.
(2)
Each player must work out the point count of the player’s hand.
(3)
After a player’s tiles have been set into a low hand and a high
hand, the tiles must be placed face down on the table as 2 separate
hands.
(4)
The 2 tiles forming a hand must be set and positioned with 1 tile
on top of the other.
(5)
The setting of a player’s hand must not be changed once the
banker turns and starts setting the bank’s tiles.
(6)
The hands of all the players must be set before any of the players’
tiles are exposed to other players or the banker.
(7)
However, the tiles of a player who has asked for a house way set
may be set after the bank’s tiles are set if—
(8)
(9)
29
(a)
a house way marker is placed near the player’s tiles before
the banker’s tiles are exposed; and
(b)
a computer or house way document is available at or near the
table to confirm the setting is correct.
After all players (other than a player who is a player/banker or a
co-banker) have set their tiles, the banker—
(a)
exposes the bank’s tiles; and
(b)
sets the bank’s hands.
The dealer or a player may view unplayed tiles only if—
(a)
the settlement of all wagers is completed; and
(b)
the casino operator allows it.
Particular settings
(1)
A player or player/banker may ask the dealer to set the tiles of the
player or player/banker in the house way.
(2)
After the tiles are exposed, the dealer must show—
(a)
the low hand by placing the low hand tiles horizontally to the
dealer; and
175
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(b)
(3)
the high hand by placing the high hand tiles vertically to the
dealer.
When the house is banker or co-banker, the dealer must set the
bank’s tiles the house way.
Part 11
30
31
Setting hands the house way
Setting hands the house way
(1)
The provisions of this part apply for setting hands the house way.
(2)
Subject to section 35, the provisions apply in priority order.
(3)
If hands are set in the house way and higher play is possible, the
hands must be set for the higher play.
Play the pairs
(1)
Only the following pairs may be split—
(a)
12s (teens);
(b)
2s (days);
(c)
7s, 8s and 9s.
(2)
However, the pairs may not be split if higher play is possible.
(3)
The pairs are split in the following ways—
(a)
split teens and days—
(i)
to make 6 and 8 or better; or
(ii)
with a 9 tile and 11 tile;
(b)
split 9s to make 9 and 9 or better;
(c)
split 8s to make 8 and 8, or 7 and 9 or better;
(d)
split 7s to make 7 and day 9 or better.
176
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
32
Wongs, gongs and high 9s
If no pair play is possible, tiles are set by—
33
(a)
playing a high 9, gong or wong in that order if chong ranking
3 or better is achieved on the low hand; or
(b)
playing a wong, gong or high 9 in that order if chong ranking
3 or better is not achieved on the low hand.
Maximise point count
If no pair play or wong, gong or high 9 play is possible, tiles are
set way by—
34
maximising the point count of the low hand if the low hand
achieves chong ranking 3 or better; and
(b)
if it is not possible to set the low hand at chong ranking 3 or
better—maximising the point count of the high hand if a
high hand of 7 or better can be achieved; and
(c)
if a high hand of 7 or better can not be achieved—
maximising the point count of the low hand.
High ranking tiles
(1)
(2)
35
(a)
High ranking tiles are played in the following way only if the
playing does not alter the point count of the hands—
(a)
the high ranking tile is played on the low hand when the high
hand is 7 or less;
(b)
the high ranking tile is played on the high hand when the
high hand is 8 or more.
However, if there is a choice, the 2 highest ranking tiles are not
played on the same hand.
Exceptions
(1)
This section states exceptions for setting tiles under this part.
(2)
With a 7, high 8, high 10 and 11, play 7 and 9.
(3)
With a 3/6, 5, 6 and a 2 or 12, play 7 and 9 instead of 8 and 8.
(4)
With a 3/6, 4, 5 and any tile not making a pair, play the 9.
177
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 12
36
Payment and collection of wagers
Deciding on hands
(1)
(2)
(3)
A player’s wager wins if—
(a)
the player’s low hand tiles are higher ranking than the bank’s
low hand tiles; and
(b)
the player’s high hand tiles are higher ranking than the
bank’s high hand tiles.
A player’s wager loses if—
(a)
the player’s low hand tiles are lower ranking than the bank’s
low hand tiles; and
(b)
the player’s high hand tiles are lower ranking than the bank’s
high hand tiles.
A stand off happens between a player and the bank if—
(a)
the player’s low hand tiles are higher ranking than the bank’s
low hand tiles, but the player’s high hand tiles are lower
ranking than the bank’s high hand tiles; or
(b)
the player’s high hand tiles are higher ranking than the
bank’s high hand tiles, but the player’s low hand tiles are
lower ranking than the bank’s low hand tiles.
(4)
If a player and the banker have the same high hand total or the
same low hand total, the highest ranking tile from each hand is
considered for deciding the winning hand.
(5)
If the bank and a player have high hands of the same value and the
bank’s highest ranking high hand tile is of equal ranking to the
player’s highest ranking high hand tile, the bank’s high hand is
taken to be higher than the player’s high hand.
(6)
If the bank and a player have low hands of the same value and the
bank’s highest ranking low hand tile is of equal ranking to the
player’s highest ranking low hand tile, the bank’s low hand is
taken to be higher than the player’s low hand.
(7)
Despite subsection (6), if both the bank and a player have low
hands that total 0, the bank’s low hand wins regardless of who
holds the highest ranking tile.
178
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
36
Wagers and commission
After the result of a round of play is decided, the dealer must
collect all losing wagers, pay all winning wagers and collect any
commission owed.
Part 13
37
38
Irregularities
Dice
If, after the dice have been shaken 1 or more of the 3 dice are not
lying flat on the base of the dice cup—
38
39
(a)
the shake of the dice is taken to have been ineffective; and
(b)
the dice cup must be shaken again.
Dealing irregularities
(1)
If the dealer distributes tiles incorrectly, and the incorrect
distribution is noticed before any player has handled the player’s
tiles, the dealer must re-distribute the tiles correctly.
(2)
However, if the dealer is unsure of the correct distribution or is
unable to re-distribute the tiles correctly, the tiles must be shuffled,
stacked and dealt again.
(3)
If the incorrect distribution is not noticed before the tiles are
handled, the round of play must be completed as if the distribution
were correct.
Exposed tiles
(1)
If the dealer exposes a tile while shuffling or stacking the tiles
(including while performing a la ja or setting the cut), the dealer
must shuffle the tiles again.
(2)
If the dealer exposes 1 of a player’s tiles (including a
player/banker’s tiles), the tiles must be played.
179
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(3)
(4)
40
41
If the dealer exposes 2 or more of a player’s tiles (other than a
player/banker’s tiles), and the player has not looked at any tile the
dealer did not expose, the player may choose to—
(a)
have the player’s tiles removed from play and retrieve the
player’s wager; or
(b)
play the tiles as dealt.
If the dealer exposes 2 or more of a player/banker’s tiles and the
player/banker has not looked at any tile the dealer did not expose,
the player/banker may choose to—
(a)
require the tiles to be shuffled, stacked and dealt again; or
(b)
play the tiles as dealt.
(5)
If a player/banker exposes the player/banker’s own tiles, the tiles
must be played.
(6)
If tiles in the house’s or co-banker’s hand are exposed, the tiles
must be played.
Incorrect setting of tiles
(1)
If tiles should be set in the house way but are not, the tiles must be
rearranged so that they are set in the house way.
(2)
If a wager has been decided before the tiles are re-arranged, the
wager must be decided again after the tiles are re-arranged.
Abandoned round of play
If a round of play (including the dealing for the round) is not
completed because the tiles must be reshuffled, the players may
retrieve the wagers they have made for the round of play.
42
Failure to wager
If a player fails to make a wager for 3 consecutive rounds of play,
the dealer may require the player to vacate the player’s seat at the
table before a new round of play starts.
180
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 8 – Pai gow (continued)
Diagram 8.1—Table layout
section 5
181
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 8 – Pai gow (continued)
Diagram 8.2—Ranking pairs
sections 6 and 7
182
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 8 – Pai gow (continued)
Diagram 8.3—Wongs, gongs and high 9s
section 7
183
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 8 – Pai gow (continued)
Diagram 8.4—Ranking tiles
section 7
184
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 9
Roulette
section 3(2)
Part 1
1
Preliminary
Conducting and playing roulette
This schedule states the rules for conducting and playing the
casino game known as roulette.
Part 2
2
Equipment for roulette
Roulette wheel and ball
(1)
A roulette wheel must be not less than 0.75m in diameter and have
37 equally spaced compartments around the wheel.
(2)
One of the compartments on a roulette wheel must be marked with
‘0’ and coloured green and the other compartments must be
marked with a number from 1 to 36, with 18 of the compartments
coloured red and 18 coloured black.
(3)
The numbers and colours on a roulette wheel must be arranged
around the wheel in the way approved by the chief executive.
(4)
However, it is not necessary to obtain the chief executive’s
approval under subsection (3) for the arrangement of numbers and
colours shown in diagram 9.1
185
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
3
4
Roulette table and layout
(1)
A roulette table must have a roulette wheel at 1 end of the table
and a roulette layout imprinted on the opposite end of the table on
a layout cloth.
(2)
The layout cloth of each roulette table must have the name of, or
logo for, the casino imprinted on it and must be marked similarly
to the way shown in diagram 9.2.
Electronic terminal
(1)
An electronic terminal must display a roulette layout similar to the
layout shown in diagram 9.2.
(2)
An electronic terminal also must display the following
information—
(a)
the minimum and maximum permissible wagers;
(b)
when a player may place bets;
(c)
the total number of credits available to the player;
(d)
the number of credits bet by the player for the current round
of play;
(e)
the winning number for the previous round of play.
(3) For each roulette wheel for which electronic terminals are used,
the chief executive must approve the maximum number of
electronic terminals for that wheel.
Part 3
5
General rules
Playing roulette
A player plays roulette using a roulette table or electronic
terminal.
186
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
6
7
Rotating the wheel and ball and controlling wagering
(1)
The roulette ball must be spun by the dealer in the opposite
direction to the rotation of the wheel and must complete at least 4
revolutions around the track of the wheel to be a valid spin.
(2)
While the ball is still rotating around the wheel—
(a)
the dealer must announce ‘no more bets’; and
(b)
if a player is using an electronic terminal—the words ‘no
more bets’ must be displayed on the electronic terminal and
the electronic terminal must not accept a wager or a change
or withdrawal of a wager.
Announcing the winning number, placing the crown and
dealing with wagers
(1)
After the ball comes to rest in a compartment around the wheel,
the dealer must announce the number of the compartment and
must place a point marker to be known as a crown on that number
on the roulette layout.
(2)
After placing the crown on the layout, the dealer must collect all
losing wagers and then pay all winning wagers.
(3)
If a player is using an electronic terminal—
(a)
the winning number must be displayed on the electronic
terminal after the ball comes to rest; and
(b)
the layout displayed on the electronic terminal must be
cleared of losing wagers; and
(c)
if the player has made a winning wager—
(i)
the wager and the player’s winnings must be displayed
on the electronic terminal; and
(ii)
the wager and the player’s winnings must be added to
the player’s credits and the total of the credits must be
displayed on the electronic terminal.
187
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
8
No unauthorised interference with gaming equipment
During play a person, other than a casino key employee or a casino
employee involved in the conduct of the game, must not interfere
with the following—
9
(a)
the wheel;
(b)
the ball;
(c)
the rotation of the wheel or ball;
(d)
the operation of an electronic terminal;
(e)
any other gaming equipment used for the game.
Permissible wagers and results
(1)
The wagers defined in this section are the permissible wagers by a
player at the game of roulette.
(2)
In this schedule—
1 number or straight up means a wager that wins if a single
number from 0 to 36 is wagered and spun and loses if another
number is spun.
2 numbers or split means a wager that wins if either of the 2
numbers wagered is spun and loses if another number is spun.
3 numbers or street means a wager that—
(a) wins if—
(i)
one of the 3 numbers in the row wagered is spun; or
(ii)
0 and 1 and 2 are wagered and 1 of them is spun; or
(iii) 0 and 2 and 3 are wagered and 1 of them is spun; and
(b) loses if another number is spun.
4 numbers or corner means a wager that wins if 1 of the 4
numbers wagered is spun and loses if another number is spun.
6 numbers or 6-line means a wager that wins if 1 of the 6 numbers
in the 2 rows wagered is spun and loses if another number is spun.
black means a wager that wins if the colour of the number
wagered and spun is black and loses if another colour is spun.
188
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
column means a wager that wins if 1 of the 12 numbers in the
column wagered is spun and loses if another number is spun.
dozen means a wager that wins if 1 of the 12 numbers in the 12
wagered (1–12, 13–24, or 25–36) is spun and loses if another
number is spun.
even means a wager that wins if the number wagered and spun is
an even number and loses if the number spun is an odd number or
0.
high—(19–36) means a wager that wins if 1 of the 18 numbers
wagered is spun and loses if another number is spun.
low—(1–18) means a wager that wins if 1 of the 18 numbers
wagered is spun and loses if another number is spun.
odd means a wager that wins if the number wagered and spun is an
odd number and loses if the number spun is an even number or 0.
red means a wager that wins if the colour of the number wagered
and spun is red and loses if another colour is spun.
10
11
How wagers are made and changed at a table
(1)
A player makes a wager by placing gaming chips in the
appropriate wager position on the roulette layout or by having
someone else place the gaming chips in the appropriate position on
the player’s behalf.
(2)
A wager may be made orally, but it has no effect as a wager until
the chips have been placed under subsection (1).
(3)
Diagram 9.3 shows the correct placement of wagers on the roulette
layout.
(4)
No wagers may be placed, changed or withdrawn after the dealer
has called ‘no more bets’.
(5)
A winning wager may be withdrawn before the next spin.
How wagers are made and changed—electronic terminal
(1)
The player makes a wager by touching the layout on an electronic
terminal.
(2)
Diagram 9.4 shows the correct placement of wagers on the layout
for an electronic terminal.
189
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(3)
12
13
14
The player may make, change or withdraw a wager until the words
‘no more bets’ are displayed on the electronic terminal.
Use of non-value chips at a table
(1)
The dealer must give a non-value chip a value before issuing the
chip to a player at the table.
(2)
A non-value chip has the value given by the dealer under
subsection (1).
(3)
The dealer must not issue the same coloured non-value chips to
more than 1 player unless all the players issued with the chips
agree to the issue.
(4)
A non-value chip may be used only at the table at which it was
issued.
(5)
The dealer may accept a non-value chip in exchange for a value
chip only if—
(a)
the non-value chip was issued at the dealer’s table; or
(b)
the non-value chip was issued at a table that is closed when
the player asks for the non-value chip to be redeemed.
Player responsible for placing wagers at a table
(1)
Each player is responsible for correctly positioning the player’s
wager or wagers on the layout regardless of whether the player is
helped by the dealer.
(2)
Each player must ensure instructions the player gives to the dealer
about placing the player’s wager or wagers are correctly carried
out.
Wagers dealt with when ball falls to rest
(1)
Each wager must be settled strictly in accordance with its position
on the layout when the ball falls to rest in a compartment of the
wheel.
(2)
Subsection (1) does not apply for electronic terminals.
190
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
15
Change to application of ss 13 and 14 if unfair
(1)
This section applies if—
(a)
(b)
(2)
16
either of the following happens—
(i)
a player’s chip is moved from its original position by
another person to another position on the table layout
and the chip and its original position can be identified
by the casino operator;
(ii)
a dealer does not place a player’s wager as instructed
by the player, or incorrectly places the wager, and the
instructions can be confirmed by the dealer; and
the casino operator is satisfied the application of sections 13
and 14 would be unfair to the player.
Despite sections 13 and 14, the casino operator may settle the
player’s wager as if the chip were in the original or correct
position.
Minimum and maximum wagers
(1)
The amount of the minimum wager for a game of roulette must be
the same for each player, when a player plays the game at a
roulette table.
(2)
The amount of the minimum wager for a game of roulette when a
player plays the game at an electronic terminal may be different
between each electronic terminal.
(3)
If the minimum wager for a type of wager mentioned in column 1
is not more than the amount in column 2 for the wager—
(a)
for a player playing at a roulette table—the maximum wager
must be at least the amount in column 3 for the wager; and
(b)
for a player playing at an electronic terminal—the maximum
wager must be at least the amount in column 4 for the wager.
191
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
17
Column 1
Column 2
Column 3
Column 4
Type of wager
Minimum
wager
Maximum
wager
(roulette
table)
Maximum
wager
(electronic
terminal)
1 number or straight up
$5
$20
$10
2 numbers or split
$5
$40
$20
3 numbers or street
$5
$60
$30
4 numbers or corner
$5
$80
$40
6 numbers or 6-line
$5
$120
$60
column
$25
$250
$50
dozen
$25
$250
$50
low—(1–18)
$25
$500
$100
high—(19–36)
$25
$500
$100
even
$25
$500
$100
odd
$25
$500
$100
red
$25
$500
$100
black
$25
$500
$100
Use of value chips
The casino operator may permit, limit or prohibit the use of value
chips by a player at the roulette table.
192
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
18
Payout odds for winning wagers
(1)
Winning wagers at the game of roulette are paid at the following
odds—
Wager
Payout odds
1 number or straight up
35 to 1
2 numbers or split
17 to 1
3 numbers or street
11 to 1
4 numbers or corner
8 to 1
6 numbers or 6-line
5 to 1
column
2 to 1
dozen
2 to 1
low—(1–18)
1 to 1
high—(19–36)
1 to 1
even
1 to 1
odd
1 to 1
red
1 to 1
black
1 to 1.
(2)
When the ball comes to rest in the compartment of the wheel
marked ‘zero’ or ‘0’, all wagers lose other than the wagers made
straight up on the zero or 0 or made in any combination of the zero
or 0 and the numbers 1, 2 and 3.
(3)
Winning wagers made straight up on the zero or 0 or made in any
combination of the zero or 0 and the numbers 1, 2 and 3, are paid
the same odds as would apply to the same type of wager involving
any other numbered square on the layout.
193
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
19
Electronic terminal payments
(1)
This section applies when a player collects the player’s credits
from an electronic terminal.
(2)
The electronic terminal may dispense a ticket for the value of
credits due to the player.
(3)
If the electronic terminal does not dispense a ticket, the casino
operator must give the player a ticket for the value of credits due to
the player.
(4) The player may redeem a ticket mentioned in subsection (2) or (3)
with the casino operator for an amount equivalent to the value of
the credits stated on the ticket.
Part 4
20
Irregularities
Irregularities and announcing no spin
(1)
If the ball is spun in the same direction as the wheel, the dealer,
another casino employee, or a casino key employee must
immediately announce ‘no spin’ and the dealer must attempt to
remove the ball from the wheel before it comes to rest in 1 of the
compartments.
(2)
If the dealer anticipates that the ball will not complete 4
revolutions around the track of the wheel, the dealer, another
casino employee, or a casino key employee must immediately
announce ‘no spin’ and the dealer must attempt to remove the ball
from the wheel before it comes to rest in 1 of the compartments.
(3)
If a foreign object enters the wheel before the ball comes to rest, or
if the ball is unduly hung up in an air pocket, the dealer, another
casino employee, or a casino key employee must immediately
announce ‘no spin’ and the dealer must attempt to remove the ball
from the wheel before it comes to rest in 1 of the compartments.
(4)
If the ball is propelled or falls out of the wheel head during a spin,
the dealer, another casino employee, or a casino key employee
must announce ‘no spin’.
194
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
21
(5)
After the dealer, another casino employee, or a casino key
employee has announced ‘no spin’, it is an invalid spin whether or
not the ball comes to rest in 1 of the compartments before the
dealer’s attempt to remove the ball from the wheel.
(6)
If ‘no spin’ is announced under this section and a player is using
an electronic terminal, the words ‘no spin’ or other words
indicating ‘no spin’ has been announced, must immediately be
displayed on the electronic terminal.
Irregularities—electronic terminal
(1)
(2)
This section applies to an electronic terminal if, after the ball
comes to rest in a compartment—
(a)
the winning number is not displayed on the electronic
terminal; or
(b)
a number is incorrectly displayed on the electronic terminal
as the winning number.
A casino key employee must ensure the correct winning number is
displayed on the electronic terminal.
195
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 9 – Roulette (continued)
Diagram 9.1—Roulette wheel
Section 3(4)
196
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 9 – Roulette (continued)
Diagram 9.2—Layout for roulette table and electronic terminal
sections 4(2) and 5(1)
*Approximate casino name or logo location
197
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 9 – Roulette (continued)
Diagram 9.3—Illustration of manner of placement of wagers at a
roulette table
section 11(3)
198
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 9 – Roulette (continued)
Diagram 9.4—Illustration of manner of placement of wagers at an
electronic terminal
section 12(3)
199
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 10
Sic-bo
section 3(2)
1
Conducting and playing sic-bo
This schedule states the rules for conducting and playing the
casino game known as sic-bo.
2
Table layout, dice tumbler and 3 identical dice
(1)
Sic-bo is played at a table having places for players on 1 side and a
place for the dealer on the opposite side or on an electronic
terminal.
(2)
The table must –
(3)
(4)
3
(a)
have a dice tumbler containing 3 identical dice and an entry
terminal; and
(b)
the dice tumbler and entry terminal must be attached to the
table; and
(c)
the 3 dice must remain in the dice tumbler under seal.
The table layout must be substantially as shown in diagram 10.1
and must include –
(a)
the name of, or logo for, the casino; and
(b)
the wagers and their respective payout odds; and
(c)
a drop box.
Where a table is used solely for determining the result displayed
on an electronic terminal subsections 3(b) and (c) do not apply.
Electronic terminal for sic-bo
(1)
The electronic terminal must display a layout similar to the layout
shown in diagram 10.2.
200
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(2)
(3)
4
5
The electronic terminal must also display the following
information—
(a)
the wagers and their respective payout odds;
(b)
when a player may place bets;
(c)
the total number of credits available to the player;
(d)
the number of credits bet by the player for the current round
of play;
(e)
the result for the previous round of play;
For each table for which electronic terminals are used, the chief
executive must approve the maximum number of electronic
terminals for that table.
Electronic equipment and entry terminal for results at a table
(1)
Electronic equipment must be located directly below the glass top
of the table.
(2)
The equipment must be programmed to illuminate all winning
areas of the layout when 3 numbers corresponding to a declared
result of the game are entered into it.
(3)
An entry terminal attached to the top of the table must be linked to
the electronic equipment.
(4)
The entry terminal must have—
(a)
a display which gives visual verification of the 3 numbers
entered into the electronic equipment; and
(b)
either—
(i)
a touch screen console; or
(ii)
6 buttons, numbered from 1 to 6, and an entry button.
Uppermost sides of dice used to decide results
The win or loss of a wager is decided by the numbers appearing on
the high or uppermost sides of the dice.
201
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
6
Permissible wagers
(1)
The permissible wagers by a player in a game of sic-bo are defined
in subsection (2).
(2)
In this schedule—
3 dice totals, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 or 17, means
a wager on any 1 of these totals which wins if the total appears in
any combination of the 3 dice and loses if any other total appears.
any triple means a wager which wins if triple 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 or 1
appears and loses if any other combination appears.
big means a wager which wins if a total of 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 or
17 appears in any combination of the 3 dice, other than a triple 4
or triple 5, and loses if any other total appears or if the totals of 12
or 15 are decided because of the combination of the dice showing
triple 4 or triple 5 respectively.
dice combinations means a wager on 1 of the following
combinations which wins if the combination appears and loses if
any other combination appears—
•
1 and 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
•
2 and 3, 4, 5 or 6
•
3 and 4, 5 or 6
•
4 and 5 or 6
•
5 and 6.
double, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 or 1, means a wager on 1 of these doubles
which wins if the double appears and loses if the double does not
appear.
even means a wager which wins if a total of 4, 6, 8, 10,12,14 or 16
appears in any combination of the three dice, other than a triple 2
or triple 4.
202
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
four number combination means a wager on the specific
combinations of:
1,2,3 and 4
2,3,4 and 5
2,3,5 and 6
3,4,5 and 6
which wins once if any three of the four numbers appear on the
dice.
individual die face values, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, means a wager on 1 of
these numbers which wins if the number appears on 1 or more of
the dice and loses if the number does not appear.
odd means a wager which wins if any of the totals of
5,7,9,11,13,15 or 17 appears in any combination of the three dice
with the exception of triple 3 or triple 5.
small means a wager which wins if a total of 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10
appears in any combination of the 3 dice other than a triple 2 or
triple 3 and loses if any other total appears or if the totals of 6 or 9
are decided because of the combination of the dice showing triple
2 or triple 3 respectively.
total means the total of the high or uppermost sides of the 3 dice in
a spin of the dice in the dice tumbler.
triple, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 or 1, means a wager on 1 of these triples which
wins if the triple appears and loses if any other combination
appears.
7
8
How wagers are made at a table
(1)
A wager at a sic-bo table is made by placing gaming chips on the
appropriate wager area of the sic-bo layout.
(2)
A wager can not be made orally.
How wagers are made at an electronic terminal
(1)
A player makes a wager by touching the layout on an electronic
terminal.
203
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(2)
9
10
11
A player may make, change or withdraw a wager until the words
‘no more bets’ are displayed on the electronic terminal.
Player responsible for placing wagers at a table
(1)
Each player is responsible for correctly positioning the player’s
wager or wagers on the layout regardless of whether the player is
helped by the dealer.
(2)
Each player must ensure instructions the player gives to the dealer
about placing the player’s wager or wagers are correctly carried
out.
Time for wagering
(1)
If the dice tumbler is not covered, the dealer must call ‘no more
bets’ before activating the dice tumbler.
(2)
If the dice tumbler is covered, the dealer must call ‘no more bets’
before the dealer removes the cover to reveal the result.
(3)
A wager must not be placed, changed or withdrawn after the dealer
has called ‘no more bets’.
How wagers are dealt with
(1)
Each wager must be settled strictly in accordance with its position
on the layout when the result is decided or revealed.
(2)
If a player is using an electronic terminal—
(a)
the layout displayed on the
cleared of losing wagers; and
electronic terminal must be
(b)
if the player has made a winning wager—
(i)
the wager and the player’s winnings must be displayed
on the electronic terminal; and
(ii)
the wager and the player’s winnings must be added to
the player’s credits and the total of the credits must be
displayed on the electronic terminal.
204
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
12
Change to application of ss 9 and 11 if unfair
(1)
This section applies if—
(a)
(b)
(2)
13
either of the following happens at a table—
(i)
a player’s chip is moved from its original position by
another person to another position on the table layout
and the chip and its original position can be identified
by the casino operator;
(ii)
a dealer does not place a player’s wager as instructed
by the player, or incorrectly places the wager, and the
instructions can be confirmed by the dealer; and
the casino operator is satisfied the application of sections 9
and 11 would be unfair to the player.
Despite sections 9 and 11, the casino operator may settle the
player’s wager as if the chip were in the original or correct
position.
Use of non-value chips at a table
(1)
The dealer must give a non-value chip a value before issuing the
chip to a player at the table.
(2)
A non-value chip has the value given by the dealer under
subsection (1).
(3)
The dealer must not issue players with identically coloured nonvalue chips unless all the players who are issued with the chips
agree to the issue.
(4)
A non-value chip may be used only at the table at which it was
issued.
(5)
The dealer may accept a non-value chip in exchange for a value
chip only if—
(a)
the non-value chip was issued at the dealer’s table; or
(b)
the non-value chip was issued at a table that is closed when a
player asks for the non-value chip to be redeemed.
205
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
14
Payout odds for winning wagers
Winning wagers at the game of sic-bo are paid at the following
odds—
Wager
Payout odds
(a) small
1 to 1
(b) big
1 to 1
(c) triples—
triple 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 or 1
180 to 1
(d) doubles—
double 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 or 1
11 to 1
(e) any triple
31 to 1
(f) 3 dice totals—
total 4 or 17
62 to 1
total 5 or 16
31 to 1
total 6 or 15
18 to 1
total 7 or 14
12 to 1
total 8 or 13
8 to 1
total 9 or 12
7 to 1
total 10 or 11
6 to 1
(g) dice combinations—
1 and 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
6 to 1
2 and 3, 4, 5 or 6
6 to 1
3 and 4, 5 or 6
6 to 1
4 and 5 or 6
6 to 1
5 and 6
6 to 1
(h) individual die
face values
1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
if number
appears on
1 die
if number if number
appears appears on
on 2 dice 3 dice
1 to 1
2 to 1
12 to 1.
206
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
15
(i) even
1 to 1
(j) four number combination
1,2,3 and 4
2,3,4 and 5
2,3,5 and 6
3,4,5 and 6
7 to 1
7 to 1
7 to 1
7 to 1
(k) odd
1 to 1
Use of dice tumbler
The dice tumbler must be activated so that—
16
(a)
the bottom of the dice tumbler is brought to the top at least 3
times; or
(b)
the dice are spun within the dice tumbler at least 3 times.
Announcing result of spin
(1)
(2)
Subsection (2) applies—
(a)
if a covered dice tumbler is used—after the dice tumbler has
been activated, the 3 dice have come to rest in the bottom
section of the dice tumbler, and the dice tumbler’s cover has
been taken off; or
(b)
if a dice tumbler other than a covered dice tumbler is used—
after the dice tumbler has been activated and the 3 dice have
come to rest in the bottom section of the dice tumbler.
If all the dice are lying flat,9 the dealer must announce—
(a)
the result by calling the numbers on the uppermost face of
each die in order from the smallest number to the highest;
and
(b)
the total of the numbers on the 3 uppermost faces of the dice.
(3) Doubles and triples and the total must be called in a similar way.
Example—
double 3, 4; total 10
triple 5; total 15
9
Section 17 explains what happens if 1 or more of the dice are not lying flat.
207
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(4)
17
18
Subsections 1(b), (2) (a) and (3) above do not apply to an
electronic terminal.
Entering results into the electronic equipment
(1)
The dealer must enter the result into the electronic equipment.
(2)
When the result is entered, all winning areas are illuminated.
(3)
A result is valid even if a winning area does not illuminate.
(4)
If an incorrect result is entered, the incorrect result must be cleared
and the correct result must be entered into the electronic
equipment.
No unauthorised operation of dice tumbler or entry terminal
A person, other than a casino employee or a casino key employee
who is responsible for the operation of the game, must not activate
the dice tumbler or operate the entry terminal.
19
Electronic terminal payments
(1)
This section applies when a player collects the player’s credits
from an electronic terminal.
(2)
The electronic terminal may dispense a ticket for the value of
credits due to the player.
(3)
If the electronic terminal does not dispense a ticket, the casino
operator must give the player a ticket for the value of credits due to
the player.
(4)
The player may redeem a ticket mentioned in subsection (2) or (3)
with the casino operator for an amount equivalent to the value of
the credits stated in the ticket.
208
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 4
20
21
Irregularities
Irregularities
(1)
If any of the 3 dice are not lying flat in the bottom section of the
tumbler after the dice have been spun, the dealer must announce
‘no spin’.
(2)
If the dice tumbler does not operate correctly after being activated,
the dealer must announce ‘no spin’.
Irregularities – electronic terminal
If an incorrect result has been confirmed on an electronic terminal
a casino key employee must ensure the correct result is displayed
on the electronic terminal and wagers will be dealt with using the
correct result.
209
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 10 – Sic-bo (continued)
Diagram 10.1—Sic-bo table layout
section 2(2)
(Wagers and payout odds available to players are marked (a) to (h) on this diagram
and correspond with the wagers described in section 5 and payout odds specified in
section 12.)
210
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Diagram 10.2—Sic-bo electronic terminal layout
211
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 11
Spanish blackjack
section 3(2)
Part 1
1
Preliminary
Conducting and playing spanish blackjack
This schedule states the rules for conducting and playing the
casino game known as spanish blackjack.
2
Definitions for sch 11
In this schedule—
5 card 21 means 5 cards with a point total of 21.
6 card 21 means 6 cards with a point total of 21.
7 (or more) card 21 means 7 (or more) cards with a point total of
21.
blackjack means an ace and any card having a point value of 10
dealt as the first 2 cards to a player or a dealer.
dealer means the person responsible for dealing the cards at a
spanish blackjack table.
double down see section 26.
hard total means the point total of a hand containing no aces or
containing aces that are each counted as 1 in value.
insurance wager see section 25.
perfect pairs wager see section 35.
212
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
soft total means the point total of a hand containing an ace if the
ace is counted as 11 in value.
spanish blackjack wager see section 7(1).
split, for cards or a hand of cards, see section 27.
Part 2
3
Table, layout and equipment
Table and layout
(1)
Spanish blackjack is played at a table having a place for the dealer
on 1 side and places for the players on the opposite side.
(2)
The layout cloth for the spanish blackjack table must have printed
on it—
(a)
the name of, or logo for, the casino; and
(b)
rectangular, circular or oval areas to indicate boxes for
wagers; and
(c)
if the chief executive has approved a change to the boxes for
perfect pairs wagers—the boxes as approved; and
(d)
the following words—
(i)
spanish blackjack pays 3 to 2;
(ii)
dealer must stand on hard 17 or soft 18 and must draw
to hard 16 or soft 17;
(iii) insurance pays 2 to 1.
(3)
4
The layout for the table is the layout in diagram 11.1 or a similar
layout approved by the chief executive.
Drop box and discard rack
Each spanish blackjack table must have a drop box and a discard
rack attached to it at approximately the positions shown in
diagram 11.1.
213
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 3
5
General rules of spanish blackjack
Number of decks
Spanish blackjack is played with—
(a)
(b)
6
5 to 8 decks of cards with—
(i)
backs of the same colour and design; and
(ii)
the 10 of hearts, diamonds, clubs and spades removed
from the packs; and
2 cutting cards.
Value of cards
The value of the cards contained in each deck is as follows—
7
(a)
a card from 2 to 9 has its face value;
(b)
a jack, queen or king has a value of 10;
(c)
an ace has a value of 11 unless—
if a value of 11 for the ace would give a player or the
dealer a point total of more than 21—the ace has a
value of 1; or
(ii)
section 26(4)10 applies.
Winning and losing wagers
(1)
Before the first card is dealt for each round of play, each player at
a game of spanish blackjack must make a wager (a spanish
blackjack wager) against the dealer.
(2)
The wager—
(a)
10
(i)
wins if the player’s point total is not more than 21 and the
dealer’s point total is more than 21; or
Section 26—
(4) If a player elects to double down, any aces dealt to the player’s hand before the double
down have a value of 1, not 11.
214
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
8
9
(b)
wins if the player’s point total is more than the dealer’s point
total but neither is more than 21; or
(c)
wins if the player has a blackjack; or
(d)
wins if the player’s point total is 21; or
(e)
is void if the player’s and the dealer’s point totals are the
same unless paragraph (c) or (d) applies; or
(f)
loses if the player’s point total is more than 21; or
(g)
loses if the dealer’s point total is more than the player’s
point total but neither is more than 21.
How wagers may be made
(1)
A wager at spanish blackjack is made by placing chips in the
appropriate area of the layout.
(2)
A wager can not be made orally.
Payout odds for winning wagers
(1)
Winning wagers with the following results are paid at the odds
stated—
Results
Payout odds
blackjack
3 to 2
5 card 21
3 to 2
6, 7, 8 mixed suits
3 to 2
7, 7, 7 mixed suits
3 to 2
6 card 21
2 to 1
6, 7, 8 same suit (other than spades)
2 to 1
7, 7, 7 same suit (other than spades)
2 to 1
7 or more card 21
3 to 1
215
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
10
11
6, 7, 8 all spades
3 to 1
7, 7, 7 all spades
3 to 1
(2)
All other winning wagers are paid at odds of 1 to 1.
(3)
The following super bonus payouts are made if a player has three
7s of the same suit and the dealer’s first card is a 7 of any suit—
(a)
if the player’s spanish blackjack wager is not more than
$24—$1000;
(b)
if the player’s spanish blackjack wager is at least $25—
$5000;
(c)
all other players who have made spanish blackjack wagers in
the round of play—$50.
Time for wagering
(1)
After the first card of a round of play has been removed from the
shoe, a player must not handle, remove or alter the spanish
blackjack wager on the hand until a decision about the wager has
been made and has taken effect.
(2)
After a wager on the insurance line, a wager to double down or a
wager to split cards has been made and confirmed by the dealer, a
player must not handle, remove or alter any wager until a decision
about the wager has been made and has taken effect.
Entry to or exclusion from game after first round
(1)
A casino operator may refuse to allow a person who has not made
a spanish blackjack wager on the first round of play to enter a later
round, until the cards are reshuffled.
(2)
A casino operator who allows a person to enter a game after the
first round of cards is dealt from the dealing shoe may allow the
person to wager only the minimum wager for the table, until the
cards are reshuffled and a new shoe is started.
(3)
A casino operator may refuse to allow a person, who has placed a
spanish blackjack wager on a round of play and declined to place a
spanish blackjack wager on a later round, to place a further spanish
216
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
blackjack wager until the shoe is completed and a new shoe is
started.
12
13
Minimum and maximum wagers for tables
(1)
If the minimum wager permitted for a table is not more than $5,
the maximum wager permitted for the table must be at least $100.
(2)
Despite subsection (1), a casino key employee responsible for
managing table games may direct that—
(a)
a player may wager on only 1 box; and
(b)
the player may wager only the minimum wager for the table.
(3)
The employee may give the direction only if the employee
reasonably believes the player is playing the game in a way that
affects, or could potentially affect, the randomness of the outcome
of the game as intended by this rule.
(4)
The casino employee must notify an inspector of the direction.
Procedures for inspecting and shuffling cards
(1)
Cards must be inspected and shuffled—
(a)
under the provisions of this schedule; and
(b)
under the approved control system for the casino.
(2)
Before being used in play, the cards must be inspected to check for
marks and imperfections and that each deck of cards contains the
correct cards.
(3)
If a player asks to inspect the cards when the cards are first placed
on the table for play, the dealer must spread the cards face up on
the table to enable a person inspecting them to see if each deck of
cards is complete.
(4)
The cards must be shuffled—
(a)
before being brought into play; and
(b)
after the cutting card is reached in the dealing shoe, unless—
(i)
the cards are taken out of play; or
(ii)
the table is to close at the end of the last round of play;
and
217
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(c)
(5)
14
The dealer must reshuffle cards that have been preshuffled if a
player asks the dealer to reshuffle the cards before the first card is
removed from the dealing shoe.
Cutting of cards by player and dealer
(1)
After the cards have been shuffled, the cards must be cut.
(2)
Two cutting cards must be used.
(3)
The dealer must offer the stack of cards, with backs facing away
from the dealer, to the players to be cut.
(4)
The player specified in section 15 must cut the cards by placing 1
of the cutting cards in the stack at least 10 cards from either end.
(i)
15
after a round of play if directed by a casino employee higher
than a floor manager.
if the cut is incorrect the dealer must remove the cutting card
and ask the player to re-cut the cards.
(5)
The stack of cards must be cut only once by the player.
(6)
After the cutting card has been inserted into the stack by the
player, the dealer must take the cutting card and all cards in front
of the cutting card and place them to the back of the stack.
(7)
The dealer must insert the other cutting card in a position
approximately 1 deck or more in from the back of the stack or at
the discretion of a pit boss or assistant pit boss insert the cutting
card in a position between approximately 1 deck and
approximately two-thirds of the way in from the back of the stack.
(8)
The stack of cards must then be inserted in the dealing shoe for the
start of play.
Selecting player to cut cards
(1)
The player to cut the cards must be—
(a)
the first player to the table immediately before the start of
play; or
(b)
the player on whose box the cutting card appeared during the
last round of play; or
218
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
16
(c)
if the cutting card appeared on the dealer’s hand during the
last round of play—the player at the farthest point to the
right of the dealer; or
(d)
if the reshuffle of the cards was under section 13(4)(c)—the
player at the farthest point to the right of the dealer.
(2)
If the player specified in subsection (1) refuses to cut, the cards
must be offered to each other player moving clockwise around the
table until a player accepts the cut.
(3)
If no player accepts the cut the dealer must cut the cards.
Replacing the cards
A casino key employee responsible for managing table games
may, after a round of play, direct that the cards be replaced.
17
18
Using a dealing shoe
(1)
All cards used in the game of spanish blackjack must be dealt from
a dealing shoe designed for the purpose and located on the table to
the left of the dealer.
(2)
The dealer must remove cards from the shoe with the left hand,
and then with the right hand place them, face up, on the
appropriate area of the layout.
Dealing the cards
(1)
(2)
At the start of each round of play, the dealer must, starting on the
dealer’s left and continuing around the table, deal the cards in the
following order—
(a)
one card face up to each box on the layout which contains a
spanish blackjack wager;
(b)
one card face up to the dealer;
(c)
a second card face up to each box which contains a spanish
blackjack wager.
After 2 cards have been dealt to each player and 1 card to the
dealer, the dealer, starting from the dealer’s left, must announce
219
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
each player’s point total and each player must indicate whether the
player wishes to double down, split cards, stand, or draw.11
(3)
19
For subsection (2)—
(a)
a player must indicate whether the player wishes to double
down or split cards by placing an additional wager; and
(b)
a player must indicate whether the player wishes to stand or
draw by a hand signal.
(4)
As each player indicates his or her decision, the dealer must deal
face up the additional cards required and must announce the point
total of the player’s hand after each additional card is dealt.
(5)
After all additional cards have been dealt, the dealer must deal a
second card face up to the dealer’s hand.
(6)
Any additional cards dealt to the hand of the dealer must be dealt
face up after which the dealer must announce the dealer’s point
total.
Collecting and discarding cards after play
At the completion of a round of play, all cards still remaining on
the layout must be picked up by the dealer in order and placed face
down in the discard rack so that the cards can be easily arranged to
indicate each player’s hand if there is a question or dispute.
20
11
Procedure when cutting card is reached
(1)
When the cutting card is reached in a round of play, the dealer
must continue dealing the cards until the round of play is
completed.
(2)
When the cutting card is drawn as the first card of a new round of
play, the cards must be immediately reshuffled.
(3)
Subsection (4) applies if, before a new round of play starts, and
before the cutting card has been dealt, a casino key employee
responsible for managing table games directs that only 3 more
rounds be played before the table is closed.
See also sections 24 (Surrender) and 25 (Insurance wagers).
220
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(4)
21
Despite subsections (1) and (2), if the cutting card is dealt in 1 of
the 3 rounds of play mentioned in subsection (3), the 3 rounds may
be completed without a card reshuffle.
Players not to handle cards
A player or spectator must not handle, remove or alter any cards
used in a game of spanish blackjack.
22
Player responsible for own point total
Each player at the table is responsible for correctly working out the
point total of the player’s hand and may not rely on the point total
announced by the dealer.
23
Play if player has blackjack or a point total of 21
If a player has blackjack or a point total of 21, the dealer must
announce and pay the hand and must remove the player’s cards
before any further cards are dealt.
Part 4
24
Different types of wagers, extra
players and other matters
Surrender
(1)
If 2 cards have been dealt to each player and the dealer’s first card
is a jack, queen, king or ace, the dealer must offer each player who
has a point count of less than 21 the opportunity to surrender half
the player’s spanish blackjack wager.
(2)
If a player indicates to the dealer that the player wishes to
surrender, the dealer must place a marker button on top of the
player’s wager and not deal any further cards to the player’s hand.
(3)
If the dealer obtains blackjack, the surrender is void and the player
loses the whole wager.
221
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(4)
25
26
If the dealer does not obtain blackjack, the dealer must complete
the hand and take half the surrendered wager.
Insurance wagers
(1)
If the first card dealt to the dealer is an ace, the dealer must call for
insurance wagers by calling ‘insurance’.
(2)
Each player may make an insurance wager which wins if the
dealer’s second card is a king, queen or jack and loses if the
dealer’s second card is an ace, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9.
(3)
Immediately after the second card is dealt to each player and
before any additional cards are dealt to the players, an insurance
wager may be made by placing on the insurance line an amount
not more than half the amount staked on the player’s spanish
blackjack wager.
(4)
However, to ensure an even dollar payout if the insurance wager
wins, the insurance wager may be up to 25c more than half the
amount staked on the player’s spanish blackjack wager.
(5)
All winning insurance wagers are paid at odds of 2 to 1.
(6)
All losing insurance wagers must be collected by the dealer
immediately after the dealer draws a second face up card for the
dealer’s hand and before the dealer draws any additional cards.
Doubling down
(1)
A player, other than a player who has blackjack or a point total of
21, may elect to make an additional wager of not more than the
amount of the player’s spanish blackjack wager (to double down)
on the first 2 or more cards dealt to the player or the first 2 or more
cards of a hand made by splitting cards.
(2)
However, only 1 additional card may be dealt to the hand on which
the player has elected to double down.
(3)
The additional card must be dealt face up and placed sideways on
the layout.
(4)
If a player elects to double down, any aces dealt to the player’s
hand before the double down have a value of 1, not 11.
222
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(5)
If the dealer obtains blackjack after a player doubles down, the
dealer may collect only the amount of the player’s spanish
blackjack wager and not the additional amount wagered in
doubling down.
(6)
Despite section 9, a winning double down wager may be paid only
at odds of 1 to 1 for both the spanish blackjack wager and the
double down wager.
(7)
A player who has doubled down forfeits the amount of the spanish
blackjack wager if—
(8)
27
(a)
the point count of the hand on which the player has doubled
down is not more than 21; and
(b)
the player elects to withdraw the doubled portion of the
wager.
If a player elects to withdraw the doubled portion of the wager, the
dealer must, before the player withdraws the doubled portion of
the wager and before any further cards are dealt—
(a)
remove the amount of the spanish blackjack wager; and
(b)
if all the players for the box have elected to withdraw the
doubled portion of their wagers—remove the players’ cards.
Splitting cards
(1)
If the first 2 cards dealt to a player are identical in value, the player
may elect to split the hand, making each card the first card of a
separate hand.
Example—
If a player’s hand consists of a queen and a jack, the 2 cards may be split,
making the queen the first card of 1 hand and the jack the first card of a separate
hand.
(2)
However, the player must wager on each hand the amount wagered
on the original hand before it was split.
(3)
When a player splits cards, the dealer must deal a second card to
the first of the hands formed and must complete the player’s
decisions about the hand before proceeding to deal cards to the
second hand.
(4)
After a second card is dealt to a split card, the dealer must
announce the point total of the hand and the player must indicate
223
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
to the dealer whether the player wishes to stand, draw or double
down but—
(a)
a player may not split cards again; and
(b)
a player splitting aces may have only 1 card dealt to each ace
and may not elect to receive additional cards; and
(c)
a player splitting aces or 10 point value cards can not
achieve a blackjack.
(5)
If the dealer obtains a blackjack after a player splits cards, the
dealer may collect only the amount of the player’s original wager
and may not collect the additional amount wagered in splitting
cards.
(6)
If the first 2 cards dealt to a player are 7s of the same suit, a super
bonus is not payable on either of the hands formed after the split.
(7)
In this section—
player’s original wager means—
28
(a)
the spanish blackjack wager on the first of the hands formed
by splitting cards; or
(b)
if the player has a point total of 21 on the first of the hands
formed by splitting cards—the wager on the other hand; or
(c)
if the player doubles down and forfeits on the first of the
hands formed by splitting cards—the wager on the other
hand if the point total on the other hand is not more than 20.
Additional cards for players
(1)
A player may elect to draw additional cards if the player’s point
total is less than 21.
(2)
However, a player may draw only 1 additional card if—
(3)
(a)
the player has doubled down; or
(b)
the player’s hand was formed by splitting aces.
A player may elect to stand on any 2 or more cards.
224
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
29
30
Additional cards for dealer
(1)
A dealer must draw additional cards to the dealer’s hand until the
dealer has a hard total of 17 to 21 or a soft total of 18 to 21, after
which the dealer must not draw any further cards to the dealer’s
hand.
(2)
A dealer must not draw additional cards to the dealer’s hand,
regardless of the point total, if decisions have been made on all
players’ hands and the additional cards would have no effect on
the outcome of the round of play.
One player for each box
Subject to section 31 and part 5—
31
32
(a)
only 1 player may play on a box at a spanish blackjack table;
and
(b)
the dealer must not allow a player to place a wager on
another player’s hand.
More than 1 player for a box
(1)
A casino operator may permit up to 3 players to place a spanish
blackjack wager on 1 box at a spanish blackjack table.
(2)
The casino operator may direct that either—
(a)
the total of all players’ wagers on 1 box must not be more
than the table maximum; or
(b)
the separate wagers for each player must not be more than
the table maximum.
Relationship between players placing spanish blackjack
wagers on the same box
(1)
(2)
This section applies—
(a)
if more than 1 player places a spanish blackjack wager on a
box; and
(b)
to each player who places a spanish blackjack wager on the
box.
The dealer must decide the player who controls the box.
225
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(3)
The dealer must ensure the wager of the player who controls the
box is in the part of the box closest to the dealer’s side of the table.
(4)
Only the player controlling the box may make decisions about the
cards to be dealt to the box and all other players must place their
wagers immediately behind and in a straight line with the wager of
the player controlling the box.
(5)
Despite section 24(1), if the player controlling the box does not
surrender, other players wagering on the box can not surrender.
(6)
If the player controlling the box surrenders, the dealer must not
deal any further cards to the box.
(7)
All players may make an insurance wager.
(8)
If the player controlling the box doubles down, the other players
may also double down but—
(9)
33
(a)
are not required to do so; and
(b)
only 1 additional card may be dealt to the hand involved in
the double down.
If the player controlling the box splits cards, the other players must
either make an additional wager to cover each split card or specify
to which of the split cards they wish their spanish blackjack wager
to apply.
When a player may wager on more than 1 box
(1)
A casino operator may permit a player to place a spanish blackjack
wager on more than 1 box at a spanish blackjack table with the
understanding that, when there are not enough betting positions in
the casino to accommodate patron demand, a player wagering on
more than 1 box must give up a box or boxes to accommodate
other players.
(2)
If a player is permitted to place a spanish blackjack wager on more
than 1 box at a table, the player must make at least the minimum
wager on each hand played.
226
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 5
34
Perfect pairs wagers
Definitions for pt 5
In this part—
coloured pair means a pair comprised of—
(a)
2 red cards of different suits; or
(b)
2 black cards of different suits.
face value, of a card, means—
(a)
the number of the card, namely 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9; or
(b)
the type of card, namely jack, queen, king or ace.
mixed pair means a pair comprised of 1 red card and 1 black card.
pair means 2 cards with the same face value.
perfect pair means a pair comprised of cards of the same suit.
35
Perfect pairs wager
A player may choose to place a wager (a perfect pairs wager) for a
round of play if the boxes for wagers on the spanish blackjack
table layout provide for perfect pairs wagers.
36
Placing a perfect pairs wager
(1)
(3)
If a player places a spanish blackjack wager on a box, perfect
pairs wagers may also be placed on the box. However –
(i)
the player placing the spanish blackjack wager on the box
must be given an opportunity to place a perfect pairs wager
before any other person is allowed to place a perfect pairs
wager on the box; and
(ii)
a maximum of 3 perfect pairs wagers may be placed on a
box.
A perfect pairs wager for a round of play must be placed before
any cards are dealt in the round of play.
227
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(4)
37
A perfect pairs wager must be at least the minimum amount, and
not more than the maximum amount, displayed on the sign at the
table about perfect pairs wagers.12
Winning and losing perfect pairs wagers and payouts
(1)
A perfect pairs wager wins if the first 2 cards dealt to the hand on
which the wager was placed are a pair.
(2)
Winning perfect pairs wagers must be paid as follows—
(a)
if the chief executive has approved the application of the No.
1 schedule of prizes for perfect pairs wagers as part of the
game of spanish blackjack at the casino—
(i)
for a mixed pair—5 to 1; and
(ii)
for a coloured pair—10 to 1; and
(iii) for a perfect pair—25 to 1;
(b)
if the chief executive has approved the application of the No.
2 schedule of prizes for perfect pairs wagers as part of the
game of spanish blackjack at the casino—
(i)
for a mixed pair—6 to 1; and
(ii)
for a coloured pair—12 to 1; and
(iii) for a perfect pair—20 to 1.
(3)
38
A perfect pairs wager loses if the first 2 cards dealt to the hand on
which the wager was placed do not comprise a pair.
Schedule of prizes
For each casino for which approval has been given for gaming
equipment that provides for perfect pairs wagers as part of the
game of spanish blackjack, the chief executive must approve the
application of the No. 1 schedule of prizes or No. 2 schedule of
prizes for perfect pairs wagers as part of the game at the casino.
12
Under section 64(1)(d) of the Act, a casino operator must display at each gaming table or
location for the playing of a game a sign showing the permissible minimum and maximum
wagers for the game played at the table or location.
228
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
39
How perfect pairs wager dealt with
(1)
(2)
After each player has been dealt the player’s first 2 cards, the
dealer must—
(a)
take away all losing perfect pairs wagers; and
(b)
make a payout to each player who has placed a winning
perfect pairs wager.
The dealer then goes on to deal with each player in the usual way
for spanish blackjack.
Part 6
40
Madness 21 wagers
Definitions for pt 6
In this part—
controlling player, for a box, means the player whom the dealer
decides, under section 32, controls the box.
electronic prize meter means a meter for displaying the amount of
the prize for each $1 wager that is a madness 21 wager.
madness 21 wager see section 41.
41
Additional madness 21 wager
A player may choose to place an additional wager (a madness 21
wager) if—
(a)
the boxes for wagers on the spanish blackjack table layout
provide for madness 21 wagers; and
(b)
the table is fitted with the following equipment approved by
the chief executive—
(i)
a jackpot button;
(ii)
a random number generator;
(iii) an electronic prize meter.
229
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
42
43
44
Placing a madness 21 wager
(1)
A player may place a madness 21 wager on any box on which the
player has placed a spanish blackjack wager.
(2)
The madness 21 wager must be placed before any cards in the
round of play are dealt.
(3)
The madness 21 wager must be at least the minimum amount, and
not more than the maximum amount, displayed on the sign at the
table about madness 21 wagers.13
(4)
Subsection (1) does not apply if the madness 21 equipment for the
table has malfunctioned or is not operating.
Winning and losing madness 21 wagers and payouts
(1)
A madness 21 wager on a box wins if the controlling player for the
box has a blackjack, even if the dealer has a blackjack.
(2)
A madness 21 wager on a box loses if the controlling player for
the box does not have a blackjack.
(3)
Subject to subsection (4), after the jackpot button has been pressed
by a person eligible to press it under section 44, each winning
madness 21 wager on a box must be paid, for each $1 wager that is
a madness 21 wager, the amount displayed on the electronic prize
meter for madness 21 wagers at the table.
(4)
If, during the round of play, the equipment for madness 21
malfunctions and can not be used to decide the amount payable for
a winning madness 21 wager, the winning madness 21 wager for
the round must be paid an amount equal to 25 times the amount of
the madness 21 wager.
Deciding who is eligible to press jackpot button
(1)
13
The person who may press the jackpot button for a winning
madness 21 wager on a box is decided under this section.
Under section 64(1)(d) of the Act, a casino operator must display at each gaming table or
location for the playing of a game a sign showing the permissible minimum and maximum
wagers for the game played at the table or location.
230
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(2)
The controlling player for the box may press the jackpot button if
the controlling player placed a winning madness 21 wager on the
box.
(3)
The second player for the box may press the jackpot button if—
(4)
(a)
the controlling player for the box has not placed a madness
21 wager, is not present or refuses to press the jackpot
button; and
(b)
the second player has placed a winning madness 21 wager on
the box.
The third player for the box may press the jackpot button if—
(a)
no-one may press the jackpot button under subsection (2) or
(3) or the persons who may press the jackpot button under
either of the subsections are not present or refuse to press the
jackpot button; and
(b)
the third player has placed a winning madness 21 wager on
the box.
(5)
The floor manager may press the jackpot button if all persons who
may press the button under subsection (2), (3) or (4) are not
present or refuse to press the jackpot button.
(6)
In this section—
second player, for a box, means the player for a box whose
spanish blackjack wager is directly behind the spanish blackjack
wager of the controlling player for the box.
third player, for a box, means the player for a box whose spanish
blackjack wager is directly behind the spanish blackjack wager of
the second player for the box.
45
Pressing the jackpot button
(1)
A player may use only reasonable force to press the jackpot button.
(2)
If a casino key employee responsible for managing table games is
satisfied a player used more force than was reasonable to press the
jackpot button, the casino key employee may direct that the player
be excluded from placing madness 21 wagers at the casino.
231
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
46
How madness 21 wagers are dealt with
(1)
This section applies despite section 23.
(2)
After controlling players have been dealt their first 2 cards, the
dealer must take away all losing madness 21 wagers.
(3)
If a player has blackjack and the dealer’s first card is a 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
7, 8 or 9, the dealer must—
(a)
pay the player’s spanish blackjack wager, push the
controlling player’s cards together and leave them on the
layout on the dealer’s side of the box; and
(b)
deal with each other player in the usual way for the game of
spanish blackjack.
(4)
If a player has blackjack and the dealer’s first card is an ace, king,
queen or jack, the dealer must deal with each player in the usual
way for a game of spanish blackjack.
(5)
After the dealer has made payouts for the round of play but before
removing the cards from the layout, the dealer must, for each box
with a winning madness 21 wager, offer the jackpot button to the
persons who may press the jackpot button for the box under
section 44, starting from the dealer’s right, until 1 of the persons
presses the jackpot button.
(6)
After an amount is displayed on the electronic prize meter for a
box with a winning madness 21 wager, the dealer must pay, for
each $1 wager that is a madness 21 wager, the amount displayed
on the electronic prize meter for madness 21 wagers at the table,
before moving to the next box with a winning madness 21 wager.
(7)
After all winning madness 21 wagers have been paid, the dealer
must collect the players’ cards and place them in the discard rack.
(8)
To remove doubt, it is declared that—
(a)
the jackpot button may only be pressed once for each box
with a winning madness 21 wager; and
(b)
each player with a winning madness 21 wager on a box is to
be paid under subsection (6) or section 43(4).
232
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
47
Schedule of prizes
For each casino for which approval has been given for gaming
equipment that provides for madness 21 wagers as part of the
game of spanish blackjack, the chief executive must approve a
schedule of prizes for each $1 wager that is a madness 21 wager as
part of the game at the casino.
Part 7
48
Irregularities
Exposed card in rack
A card found face up in the shoe must be removed from play and
placed in the discard rack.
49
Card drawn in error to be used in play
(1)
A card drawn in error without its face being exposed must be used
as though it were the next card from the shoe.
(2)
After the first 2 cards have been dealt to each player and a card is
drawn in error and exposed to the players, the card must be dealt to
a player or the dealer as though it were the next card from the
shoe.
Examples of a card drawn in error and exposed to players—
1
A dealer gives a card to a player who has not indicated for a card.
2
A dealer accidentally exposes a card when drawing it from a dealing shoe.
(3)
A player refusing to accept the card must not have any additional
cards dealt to the player’s hand during the round.
(4)
If the card is refused by the players, it must become the dealer’s
second card.
233
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
50
Card drawn in error not to be used
(1)
(2)
51
This section applies if the dealer—
(a)
has a hard total of 17 or more points or a soft total of 18 or
more points; and
(b)
accidentally deals another card to the dealer’s hand; and
(c)
exposes the face of the card to the players.
The card must be removed from play and placed in the discard
rack.
Not enough cards in shoe to complete round of play
If there are not enough cards remaining in the shoe to complete a
round of play, the dealer must shuffle and cut the cards in the
discard rack and complete the round of play.
52
Incorrect placement of card
(1)
If, during the original dealing of cards in a round of play, any of
the cards are incorrectly placed, and the incorrect placement is
noticed before the dealer acts on any hand, the cards must be
placed in the order they would have been in if the incorrect
placement had not happened.
(2)
For subsection (1), a dealer is taken to have acted on a hand if—
(a)
the dealer has received a hand signal from the player for the
first box in play at the table; or
(b)
the player for the first box in play at the table has decided to
double down and a third card has been delivered to the hand;
or
(c)
the player for the first box in play at the table has decided to
split the hand and a second card has been delivered to the
first of the hands formed; or
(d)
a player’s wager has been settled.
234
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
53
Dealer with too many cards
(1)
(2)
54
55
If, contrary to section 18(1)(b), the dealer has inadvertently dealt 2
or more cards to the dealer’s hand, and the dealer has started
acting on a player’s hand, the dealer must—
(a)
inform the players the cards held by the dealer are taken to
have the point total usually counted after the dealer’s cards
have been dealt, but not a blackjack; and
(b)
give each player the choice of withdrawing the player’s
spanish blackjack wager; and
(c)
finish acting on all players’ hands that have not been
withdrawn.
The dealer must finish hitting the dealer’s hand if there is at least 1
player—
(a)
who did not withdraw the player’s spanish blackjack wager;
and
(b)
whose point total is not more than 20.
No cards or only 1 card dealt to a player’s hand
(1)
If no cards are dealt to a player’s hand (player A), and the dealer
has started acting on another player’s hand, player A’s hand is
dead and player A must retract player A’s spanish blackjack
wager.
(2)
If only 1 card is dealt to a player’s hand (player B) and the dealer
has started acting on another player’s hand, player B may—
(a)
retract player B’s spanish blackjack wager; or
(b)
receive a second card when the dealer starts acting on player
B’s hand.
No second card to last player if dealer has no second card
(1)
This section applies to the player immediately before the dealer
if—
(a)
the dealer has not dealt a second card to the player; and
(b)
all other players have been dealt a second card and hit with
the additional cards each has requested; and
235
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(c)
(2)
56
The player may choose—
(a)
to retract the player’s spanish blackjack wager; or
(b)
to be dealt a second card and additional cards before the
dealer deals a second card to the dealer’s hand.
Additional cards not offered or dealt to a player
(1)
This section applies to a player if—
(a)
(b)
(2)
57
the dealer has not dealt the dealer’s hand a second card.
the dealer does not—
(i)
offer additional cards to the player; or
(ii)
deal additional cards to the player and the player has
indicated for additional cards; and
the player is not the player immediately before the dealer.
The player may retract his or her spanish blackjack wager or play
out his or her hand after all other players have completed their
hands and before any other card is dealt.
No second card or additional cards to last player if dealer has
second card and more
(1)
This section applies to the player immediately before the dealer
if—
(a)
the dealer has not dealt a second card to the player, or
offered to hit the player with additional cards; and
(b)
the dealer has dealt the dealer’s hand a second card and hit
the dealer’s hand with an additional card.
(2)
The dealer must separate out the dealer’s second card and any
additional cards in the order in which they were dealt.
(3)
Before taking any other cards from the shoe, the dealer must use
the second card and any additional cards that have been separated
out in the order the cards were originally taken from the shoe.
(4)
The dealer must deal the player immediately before the dealer
(player A)—
(a)
if player A was not dealt a second card—a second card; and
236
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(b)
(5)
58
The dealer must deal a second card to the dealer’s hand and may
hit the dealer’s hand in the usual way.
Dealer with no first card
(1)
(2)
(3)
59
if player A indicates player A wants to be hit with additional
cards—as many additional cards as player A indicates.
If a dealer is acting on a player’s hand and discovers the dealer has
missed dealing a first card to the dealer’s hand, the dealer must—
(a)
give each player the choice of withdrawing the player’s
spanish blackjack wager; and
(b)
finish acting on all players’ hands that have not been
withdrawn.
The dealer must take 2 cards and, if necessary, finish hitting the
dealer’s hand, if there is at least 1 player—
(a)
who did not withdraw the player’s spanish blackjack wager;
and
(b)
whose point total is not more than 20.
However, the dealer can not obtain blackjack from the 2 cards
dealt to the dealer’s hand under subsection (2), even if the 2 cards
are an ace and a card with a point value of 10.
Extra hand dealt
If the dealer has started acting on a player’s hand, an extra hand
dealt in error is void.
60
Player not acting on hand after wagering
If a player who has made a spanish blackjack wager does not act
on the player’s hand within a reasonable time, or refuses to act or
is not present, a pit boss, assistant pit boss or floor manager may
direct—
(a)
the first 2 cards must be dealt to the player’s hand; and
(b)
further cards must be dealt to the player’s hand, until the
hard total of the hand is more than 11 or the soft total of the
hand is more than 16.
237
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 8
61
Use of card machine
Card machine
(1)
A card machine may be used for spanish blackjack.
(2)
However, a card machine must not be used for a game of spanish
blackjack if perfect pairs is offered with the game, unless the
approved control system for the casino states that a card machine
may be used for a game of spanish blackjack with which perfect
pairs is offered.
(3)
If a card machine is used, the operation of parts 1 to 7 is changed
to the extent necessary for the following to have effect—
(4)
(a)
the number of decks used must be not less than the minimum
and not more than the maximum number of decks (which in
turn must be not more than 8) approved by the chief
executive for use in the card machine;
(b)
when play is started, or if the cards in the card machine are
replaced under section 16, the cards must be inspected and
shuffled and then placed in the card machine;
(c)
the cards do not need to be cut before being placed in the
card machine;
(d)
a cutting card may be used to conceal the bottom card of the
cards placed into the machine, but it must be removed from
the machine before cards for the first round of play are dealt;
(e)
cutting cards are not used for the game, other than in the way
mentioned in paragraph (d);
(f)
for dealing the cards, the card machine takes the place of the
dealing shoe;
(g)
cards that have been placed in the discard rack are placed in
the card machine to be mixed with the remaining cards in the
machine.
Section 11 does not apply if a card machine is used.
238
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
62
Card machine malfunction
(1)
This section applies if a card machine malfunctions during a round
of play.
(2)
A casino employee responsible for supervising table games must
ensure that the card machine is repaired or replaced in accordance
with the casino’s approved control system.
(3)
If the casino employee considers that the malfunction has
disadvantaged a player, each player must be given the opportunity
to have the player’s wagers for the round of play returned to the
player before the round of play is continued.
239
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 11 – Spanish blackjack (continued)
Diagram 11.1—Spanish blackjack table layout
sections 3(3) and 4
240
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 12
Wheel of fortune
section 3(2)
Part 1
1
Preliminary
Conducting and playing wheel of fortune
This schedule states the rules for conducting and playing the
casino game known as wheel of fortune.
Part 2
2
Rules for wheel with 50 spaces
Wheel and layout
(1)
Wheel of fortune is played with a circular wheel which is at least
1.5m in diameter.
(2)
The rim of the wheel is divided into the following 50 equally
spaced sections—
(a)
24 sections showing 1 symbol;
(b)
8 sections showing a second symbol;
(c)
8 sections showing a third symbol;
(d)
4 sections showing a fourth symbol;
(e)
2 sections showing a fifth symbol;
(f)
2 sections showing a sixth symbol;
241
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
‘2A
(g)
1 section showing a seventh symbol;
(h)
1 section showing an eighth symbol.
(3)
The sections are arranged around the rim of the wheel as shown in
diagram 12.1.
(4)
Each wheel of fortune table layout must have the name of, or logo
for, the casino, the 8 symbols and the odds that apply to each
symbol displayed on it in the way shown in diagram 12.2 or
approved by the chief executive.
(5)
Each symbol must be displayed in a clearly defined area of the
table layout, which is used by the players in placing wagers at this
game.
Electronic equipment and entry terminal for results
(1)
A casino operator may install electronic equipment—
(a)
directly below the table layout; and
(b)
as a results display for the table.
(2)
The equipment directly below the table layout must be
programmed to illuminate all winning areas of the table layout
when a symbol corresponding to a declared result of the game is
entered into it.
(3)
The results display equipment must be programmed to indicate—
(a)
the winning symbol when a symbol corresponding to the
declared result of the game is entered into it; and
(b)
the most recent winning symbol if historical results are
displayed at the table.
(4)
An entry terminal attached to the top of the table must be linked to
the electronic equipment.
(5)
An entry terminal must have—
(a)
a touch screen console with a display representing symbols
on the wheel and table layout; or
(b)
buttons representing symbols on the wheel and table layout.’.
242
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
3
4
Spinning the wheel
(1)
The direction of each spin of the wheel may be alternated.
(2)
The wheel must be spun by the dealer grasping the rim of the
wheel or the spinning knobs and not the spokes or pegs.
(3)
To be a valid spin, at least 3 revolutions of the wheel must be
completed after the dealer has called ‘no more bets’.
Announcing the winning symbol and dealing with wagers
After the indicator comes to rest in a slot—
4A
(a)
the dealer must announce the winning symbol of the slot;
and
(b)
the dealer must collect all losing wagers and then pay all
winning wagers.
Entering results into electronic equipment
(1)
This section applies if a casino operator has electronic equipment
in use for the game of wheel of fortune.
(2)
As well as announcing the result, the dealer must enter the result
into the electronic equipment.
(3)
When the result is entered—
(a)
all winning areas of the table layout are illuminated; and
(b)
if a results display is in use at the table, the winning symbol
is displayed on the results display.
(4)
A result is valid even if a winning area does not illuminate.
(5)
If an incorrect result is entered, the incorrect result must be cleared
and the correct result must be entered into the electronic
equipment.’.
243
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
5
No unauthorised interference with gaming equipment
During play a person, other than a casino key employee or a casino
employee who is responsible for the operation and integrity of the
game, must not—
6
(a)
interfere with the wheel or its rotation; or
(b)
operate the entry terminal.
Permissible wagers and results
A permissible wager by a player at the game of wheel of fortune is
a wager on a symbol that wins if the symbol is spun and loses if
any other symbol is spun.
7
8
9
How wagers may be made or withdrawn
(1)
All wagers at wheel of fortune are made by placing gaming chips
on the appropriate area of the table layout.
(2)
A wager can not be made orally.
(3)
A wager must not be placed, changed or withdrawn after the
revolutions of the wheel necessary to constitute a valid spin have
commenced.
(4)
A winning wager may be withdrawn before the next spin.
Player responsible when wagering
(1)
Each player is responsible for correctly positioning the player’s
wager or wagers on the table layout regardless of whether the
player is helped by the dealer.
(2)
Each player must ensure instructions the player gives to the dealer
about placing the player’s wager or wagers are correctly carried
out.
Wagers dealt with when indicator rests in slot
Each wager must be settled strictly in accordance with its position
on the table layout when the indicator falls to rest in a slot of the
wheel.
244
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
10
Change to application of ss 8 and 9 if unfair
(1)
This section applies if—
(a)
(b)
(2)
11
either of the following happens—
(i)
a player’s chip is moved from its original position by
another person to another position on the table layout
and the chip and its original position can be identified
by the casino operator;
(ii)
a dealer does not place a player’s wager as instructed
by the player, or incorrectly places the wager, and the
instructions can be confirmed by the dealer; and
the casino operator is satisfied the application of sections 8
and 9 would be unfair to the player.
Despite sections 8 and 9, the casino operator may settle the
player’s wager as if the chip were in the original or correct
position.
Minimum and maximum wagers
If the minimum wager permitted for a table is not more than $5,
the maximum wager permitted for the table must be at least—
(a)
if the payout odds are 1 to 1—$400; or
(b)
if the payout odds are 5 to 1—$80; or
(c)
if the payout odds are 11 to 1—$40; or
(d)
if the payout odds are 22 to 1—$20; or
(e)
if the payout odds are 44 to 1—$10.
245
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
12
Payout odds for winning wagers
(1)
Winning wagers at wheel of fortune are paid at the odds listed
below—
Wager
Payout odds
symbol a
1 to 1
symbol b
5 to 1
symbol c
5 to 1
symbol d
11 to 1
symbol e
22 to 1
symbol f
22 to 1
symbol g
44 to 1
symbol h
44 to 1.
(2)
If the indicator comes to rest between 2 symbols (that is, stops on a
peg), the symbol that last passed the indicator is the winning
symbol.
(3)
Each wheel of fortune table must have the following notice posted
in full view of the public—
‘If the indicator stops on a peg, the previous symbol is the winner
and not the oncoming symbol.’
13
Irregularities
(1)
If a mechanical malfunction of the wheel occurs the dealer or floor
manager must announce ‘no spin’.
(2)
If a person othan than a dealer or floor manager responsbile for the
operation and integrity of the game interferes with the gaming
equipment, the dealer or floor manager must announce ‘no spin’.
246
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(3)
After the dealer or floor manager has announced ‘no spin’, it is an
invalid spin whether or not the indicator comes to rest in 1 of the
slots on the wheel.
(4)
If ‘no spin’ is annnounced under this section, all wagers are void
on the spin.
Part 3
14
Changed rules for wheel with 52
spaces
Wheel and layout
(1)
If the chief executive approves, an alternative wheel of fortune
may be played with a circular wheel which is at least 1.5m in
diameter.
(2)
The rim of the wheel must be divided into 52 equally spaced
sections as follows—
(a)
24 sections showing 1 symbol;
(b)
12 sections showing a second symbol;
(c)
8 sections showing a third symbol;
(d)
4 sections showing a fourth symbol;
(e)
2 sections showing a fifth symbol;
(f)
1 section showing a sixth symbol;
(g)
1 section showing a seventh symbol.
(3)
The sections must be arranged around the rim of the wheel as
shown in diagram 12.3.
(4)
Each alternative wheel of fortune table layout must have the name
of, or logo for, the casino, the 7 symbols and the odds that apply to
each symbol displayed on it in the way shown in diagram 12.4 or
approved by the chief executive.
(5)
Section 2(5) applies to the alternative wheel of fortune.
247
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
15
Wheel and equipment
Sections 2A to 5 apply to the alternative wheel of fortune.
16
Permissible wagers and results
Sections 6 to 10 apply to the alternative wheel of fortune.
17
Minimum and maximum wagers
(1)
(2)
18
If the minimum wager permitted for a table is not more than $5,
the maximum wager permitted for the table must be at least—
(a)
if the payout odds are 1 to 1—$200; or
(b)
if the payout odds are 3 to 1—$80; or
(c)
if the payout odds are 5 to 1—$40; or
(d)
if the payout odds are 11 to 1—$20.
Also, if the minimum wager permitted for a table is not more than
$2, the maximum wager permitted for the table must be at least—
(a)
if the payout odds are 23 to 1—$10; or
(b)
if the payout odds are 47 to 1—$5.
Payout odds for winning wagers
(1)
(2)
Winning wagers at the alternative wheel of fortune are paid at the
following odds—
Wager
Payout odds
symbol a
1 to 1
symbol b
3 to 1
symbol c
5 to 1
symbol d
11 to 1
symbol e
23 to 1
symbol f
47 to 1
symbol g
47 to 1.
Section 12(2) and (3) applies to the alternative wheel of fortune.
248
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
19
Irregularities
Section 13 applies to the alternative wheel of fortune.
249
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 12 – Wheel of fortune (continued)
Diagram 12.1—Arrangement of wheel of fortune
section 2(3)
250
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 12 – Wheel of fortune (continued)
Diagram 12.2—Wheel of fortune table layout
section 2(4)
*Approximate location for casino name or logo
251
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 12 – Wheel of fortune (continued)
Diagram 12.3—Arrangement of alternative wheel of fortune
section 14(3)
*Approximate location for casino name or logo
252
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 12 – Wheel of fortune (continued)
Diagram 12.4—Alternative wheel of fortune table layout
section 14(4)
*Approximate location for casino name or logo
253
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 13
Two-up dice
section 3(2)
Part 1
1
Preliminary
Conducting and playing two-up dice
This schedule states the rules for conducting and playing the
casino game known as two-up dice.
2
Definitions for sch 13
In this schedule—
heads means 2 dice lying on the table with ‘H’ showing on the top
side of each die.
invalid spin means a spin declared invalid by the dealer under
section 20.
odds means 2 dice lying on the table with ‘H’ showing on the top
side of 1 die and ‘T’ showing on the top side of the other die.
player’s wager see section 11(1).
spin, in relation to dice, means to throw the dice.
spinner means the player or dealer who spins the dice.
spinner’s wager see section 6(1).
tails means 2 dice lying on the table with ‘T’ showing on the top
side of each die.
valid spin means a spin that is not an invalid spin.
254
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 2
3
Table and layout
(1)
Two-up dice is played on an oblong table with rounded corners
and high walled sides having places for players and places for the
dealers.
(2)
The layout cloth covering the two-up dice table must be
substantially as shown in diagram 13.1 and must include—
(3)
4
Table, layout and equipment
(a)
the name of, or logo for, the casino; and
(b)
areas for placing the spinner’s wager and players’ wagers.
The two-up dice table must have a drop box attached to it.
Dice to be used in the game
(1)
Each die used in the game must have—
(a)
6 equal sides; and
(b)
3 of the sides marked ‘H’ and 3 sides marked ‘T’; and
(c)
the sides arranged so that each side marked ‘H’ is opposite a
side marked ‘T’.
(2)
A set of 5 dice must be at the table at the start of play.
(3)
However, only 2 dice may be spun for playing the game.
(4)
The dealer must keep the dice, other than the dice in play, in a dice
cup at the table.
(5)
A player may not ask for new dice for a game.
255
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 3
5
6
The spinner
Selecting the spinner and the dice for spinning
(1)
This section states the procedures for offering the dice to players to
act as spinner.
(2)
At the start of the first game after the table is opened for play, the
dealer must offer the 5 dice at the table to the first player on the
dealer’s left hand side.
(3)
At the start of a subsequent game, if a spinner must be selected,
the dealer must offer the 5 dice at the table to the next player at the
table, going in a clockwise direction, from the place at the table
occupied by the spinner for the previous game.
(4)
If the player offered the dice under subsection (2) or (3) declines to
spin the dice, the dealer must offer the dice to each of the other
players in turn, going clockwise around the table, until a player
accepts the dice or all players have declined to spin the dice.
(5)
If a player accepts the dice, the player is the spinner.
(6)
If all of the players decline to spin the dice, the dealer is the
spinner.
(7)
The spinner must select 2 dice from the 5 dice offered, to use in
play.
(8)
If the dealer is the spinner under subsection (6), the dealer must
spin the dice until the dealer spins heads or tails once, or odds 5
times consecutively, after which the dealer may stop being the
spinner or continue as the spinner.
Spinner’s wager
(1)
The spinner must place a wager (the spinner’s wager) on either
heads or tails.
(2)
However, a dealer acting as the spinner must not place a wager.
(3)
The spinner’s wager may only be placed by placing chips on the
area of the layout for the spinner’s wager.
256
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(4)
7
8
Spinning the dice
(1)
The spinner must spin the dice after the dealer calls ‘no more
bets’.
(2)
The spinner must use only 1 hand to handle or spin the dice.
(3)
The spinner must spin the dice, so that they—
(a)
leave the spinner’s hand simultaneously; and
(b)
strike the end of the table farthest from the spinner.
Results of the spinner’s wager
(1)
(2)
9
The spinner’s wager must remain unchanged on the layout until
the result of the wager has been decided.
A spinner’s wager on heads—
(a)
wins if the spinner spins heads 3 times, without spinning
tails, and without spinning odds 5 times consecutively; and
(b)
loses if the spinner spins tails; and
(c)
loses if the spinner spins odds 5 times consecutively.
A spinner’s wager on tails—
(a)
wins if the spinner spins tails 3 times, without spinning
heads, and without spinning odds 5 times consecutively; and
(b)
loses if the spinner spins heads; and
(c)
loses if the spinner spins odds 5 times consecutively.
Payout odds for a spinner’s wager
A winning spinner’s wager is paid at odds of 7.5 to 1.
10
Changing the spinner
(1)
If the spinner’s wager wins, the spinner may stop being the spinner
or continue as the spinner.
(2)
If the spinner’s wager loses, the spinner must stop being the
spinner.
257
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(3)
If the spinner stops being the spinner under subsection (1) or (2), a
spinner must be selected for the next game.
(4)
If the spinner stops spinning the dice before the result of the
spinner’s wager is decided—
(a)
the dealer must take over as spinner and spin the dice until
the result of the spinner’s wager is decided; and
(b)
a spinner must be selected for the next game.
Part 4
11
12
Players
Player’s wager
(1)
A player, including a player who is the spinner, may place a wager
(a player’s wager) on heads or tails and may place separate
player’s wagers on heads and tails.
(2)
A player’s wager may only be placed by placing chips on the area
of the layout for players’ wagers.
(3)
A player’s wager must remain unchanged on the layout until the
result of the wager has been decided.
Results of a player’s wager
(1)
(2)
A player’s wager on heads—
(a)
wins, if the spinner spins heads; and
(b)
loses, if the spinner spins—
(i)
tails; or
(ii)
odds 5 times consecutively.
A player’s wager on tails—
(a)
wins, if the spinner spins tails; and
(b)
loses, if the spinner spins—
(i)
heads; or
258
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(ii)
13
odds 5 times consecutively.
Payout odds for a player’s wager
A winning player’s wager is paid at odds of 1 to 1.
Part 5
14
Other matters about wagers
Minimum and maximum wagers
If the minimum wager permitted at a table for a game of two-up
dice is not more than $5, the maximum wager permitted for the
table must be at least $100.
15
16
Player responsible for placing wagers
(1)
Each player is responsible for the correct positioning of his or her
wagers on the layout, whether or not the player is helped by the
dealer.
(2)
Each player must ensure that the instructions the player gives to
the dealer about positioning chips for his or her wagers are carried
out correctly.
Wagers to remain after dealer calls ‘no more bets’
No wager may be placed, changed or withdrawn after the dealer
has called ‘no more bets’.
17
How wagers are dealt with
Each wager must be settled strictly in accordance with its position
on the layout when the result of the wager is decided.
18
Change to application of ss 15 and 17 if unfair
(1)
This section applies if—
259
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(a)
any of the following happen—
(i)
a player’s chip is moved from its original position by
another person to another position on the table layout
and the chip and its original position can be identified
by the casino operator;
(ii)
a dealer does not place a chip for a wager as instructed
by a player, or incorrectly places the chip, and the
instructions can be confirmed by the dealer;
(iii) a player’s chip is struck by a die during a spin causing
the chip to move from its original position to another
position on the table layout, and the chip and its
original position can be identified by the casino
operator; and
(b)
(2)
19
the casino operator is satisfied the application of sections 15
and 17 would be unfair to the player.
Despite sections 15 and 17, the casino operator may settle the
wager made by the player as if the chip were in the original or
correct position.
Results of spins to be displayed
(1)
(2)
The result of each spin must be shown—
(a)
if the spin is heads—by switching on 1 light in a set of 3
lights that are all the same colour; or
(b)
if the spin is tails—by switching on 1 light in a set of 3 lights
that are all a second colour; or
(c)
if the spin is odds—by switching on 1 light in a set of 5
lights that are all a third colour.
If a light fails, a card showing the result of the spin must be shown
instead of the light.
260
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 6
20
Irregularities
Invalid spins
(1)
The dealer—
(a)
must declare a spin invalid if—
(i)
the spinner uses both hands to handle or spin the dice;
or
(ii)
the dice do not
simultaneously; or
leave
the
spinner’s
hand
(iii) the dice do not strike the end of the table farthest from
the spinner; or
(iv) either or both of the dice come to rest in the table’s
chip tray; or
(v)
1 die comes to rest on top of the other die; or
(vi) either or both of the dice come to rest in the dice cup
or on the rail of the table; or
(vii) a die does not come to rest evenly on the table,
including, for example, because the die comes to rest
entirely or partially on a chip or other object, or a
corner of the die comes to rest against the table wall;
or
(viii) either or both of the dice go off the table; and
(b)
may declare a spin invalid if the dealer otherwise considers
the spin is invalid.
(2)
Subject to subsection (1)(a)(iv) and (vii), the dealer must not
declare a spin invalid only because a die contacts a chip during the
spin.
(3)
The dealer declares a spin invalid by calling ‘no spin’ or
‘barred’—
(a)
if possible, before the dice come to rest; or
(b)
otherwise, as soon as possible after the dice come to rest.
261
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(4)
21
Dealer may take over as spinner if there are consecutive or
numerous invalid spins
(1)
(2)
(3)
22
If the dealer declares a spin invalid, a casino key employee
responsible for managing table games may overrule the dealer if
the casino key employee considers the dealer has made an error in
declaring the spin invalid.
A spinner must stop being the spinner if—
(a)
the spinner spins 3 consecutive invalid spins; or
(b)
the dealer considers the spinner has spun an unreasonably
high proportion of invalid to valid spins.
If a spinner stops being the spinner under subsection (1)—
(a)
the dealer must spin the dice until the result of the spinner’s
wager is decided; and
(b)
a spinner must be selected for the next game.
Despite subsection (2)(b), if a spinner stops being the spinner
because the spinner’s first 3 spins are invalid spins, the spinner
may, if he or she wishes, continue as the spinner after the result of
the spinner’s wager is decided.
Procedure if a die goes off the table
(1)
If a die or dice go off the table, the following procedures must be
followed—
(a)
an immediate effort must be made to retrieve the die or dice;
(b)
the remaining dice must be offered to the spinner to select
new dice;
(c)
if the missing die or dice are found, they must be checked by
the dealer, then—
(d)
(i)
if requested by the spinner—returned to the spinner; or
(ii)
if not requested by the spinner—placed back in the
dice cup;
if 2 dice are lost—a new set of dice must be promptly placed
at the table and the remaining dice of the set previously in
use must be removed from the table.
262
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(2)
Despite subsection (1)(b), the spinner may ask for the original dice
to be returned.
(3)
Despite subsection (1)(d), to avoid delay in a game, the spinner
may continue to use the remaining dice of the original set until—
(a)
the spinner’s wager loses; or
(b)
the spinner’s wager wins and the spinner decides to stop
being the spinner.
263
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 13 – Two-up dice (continued)
Diagram 13.1—Two-up dice table and layout
section 3(2)
264
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 14
Texas hold’em poker and omaha
poker
section 3(2)
Part 1
1
Preliminary
Conducting and playing texas hold’em poker and omaha
poker
This schedule states the rules for conducting and playing the
casino games known as texas hold’em poker and omaha poker.
2
Definitions for sch 14
In this schedule—
absent player means a player who is absent with approval under
section 21(2)(a).
act, in a round of betting, means to fold, call, call and raise, or
check.
active player, for a round of play, means a player who has not
folded or gone all-in but does not include an absent player.
all-in or going all-in see section 29(1).
bet means an amount put out for a blind bet, an opening bet, a call
or a call and raise.
blind bet means a first blind bet or second blind bet.
burn card means the card dealt immediately before the flop, turn
card or river card.
265
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
buy-in, for a game at a table, means the player’s table stake at the
commencement of the first round of play.
calls or called see section 3.
checks see section 4(1).
commission means the amount the dealer deducts from a pot for
payment to the casino operator under section 30.
community card, without indicating a particular community card,
means a card from the flop, or the turn card or river card.
dead button see section 17(5).
dealer button, for a round of play, means the marker used to
indicate the last player to receive the hole cards in the round of
play.
designated player, for a round of play, means the player who has
the dealer button for the round of play.
face value, of a card, means—
(a)
the number of the card, namely, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10; or
(b)
the type of card, namely, jack, queen, king or ace.
first active player, for a round of play, means the first player who
is an active player, going in a clockwise direction from the
designated player for the round of play.
first blind bet see section 23(1).
first round of betting means the betting that happens in a round of
play immediately after each player has been dealt the hole cards
for the round of play.
flop, or the first 3 community cards, means the 3 cards that are
dealt face down and simultaneously exposed after the first round
of betting.
fold see section 5.
folding line means the line indicated on Diagram 14.1 used to
determine if a player folds in a round of play.
game means a table game made up of successive rounds of play of
texas hold’em poker.
hand, of a player, means the poker hand with the highest poker
ranking that is made up of—
266
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
for texas hold’em poker:
(a)
the player’s hole cards and 3 community cards; or
(b)
1 of the player’s hole cards and 4 community cards; or
(c)
all 5 community cards.
for omaha poker:
(a)
2 of the player’s hole cards and 3 community cards.
hole cards see section 20(4).
inactive player, for a round of play, means a player who has gone
all-in or folded.
misdeal see section 32(1).
muck means the circled area of the table layout for the placement
of discarded cards.
new player see section 21(1).
next to, a player, see section 6.
odd card, in relation to another card or cards, means a card that
has a different face value to the other card or cards.
opening bet, for a round of betting, means the bet, other than the
first blind bet, with which a player opens the betting for the round.
participation fee see section 19(1).
player means a player in a game of texas hold’em poker or omaha
poker.
poker hands see section 7.
poker ranking see section 8.
pot means an accumulation of bets during a round of play.
raise or raises see section 9.
returning player see section 21(2).
river card, or the fifth community card, means the card that is
dealt face down and exposed after the third round of betting.
round of betting, for a round of play, means the first, second,
third, or final round of betting for the round of play.
267
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
round of play includes the steps in the sequence of play described
in section 20 from paying the participation fee, if any, to paying
the pot to the winner.
second blind bet see section 23(2).
showdown means the procedure under section 27 for deciding the
winning hand or hands in which 1 or more players show their
hands.
table stake, of a player, means the amount (in chips) the player has
on the table, before a round of play starts, for betting in the round
of play.
turn card, or the fourth community card, means the card that is
dealt face down and exposed after the second round of betting.
3
4
Meaning of calls and called
(1)
A player (player A) calls another player (player B) in a round of
play if player A makes the bet needed to make the total bets by
player A in the round of play equal to the total bets made by player
B in the round of play.
(2)
Under subsection (1), player B is the player who is called.
Meaning of check
(1) A player checks in a round of betting if the player does not fold
and—
(a)
in the first round of betting, having placed a second blind bet
or a wager under section 23A equal to the value of the
second blind bet, declines to increase the wager; or
(b)
in the second, third or final rounds of betting declines to
make an opening bet.
(2)
The first player who may check in a round of betting is the first
active player.
(3)
If the first active player folds or checks, each active player in turn
may also check until either—
(a)
a player makes an opening bet for the round of betting; or
(b)
the round of betting ends.
268
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
5
Meaning of fold
(1)
6
A player folds in a round of play if, in a round of betting, the
player—
(a)
releases the player’s hole cards face down beyond the
folding line; or
(b)
clearly indicates to the dealer that the player wishes to stop
taking part in the round of play.
(2)
If a player folds, the dealer must collect the player’s cards and
place them in the muck.
(3)
Despite subsection (2), if a called player folds during a showdown
and 2 or more active players remain, the dealer shall only collect
the called player’s cards and place them in the muck after the
winning hand or hands have been announced.
Meaning of being next to a player
A player (player A) is next to another player (player B) if, going
around the table in a clockwise direction from player B, player A
is the nearest player positioned after player B.
7
Meaning of poker hands
(1)
The poker hands for texas hold’em poker and omaha poker are
stated in column 1 of the table.
(2)
Each poker hand is made up of the cards mentioned opposite the
poker hand in column 2 of the table.
Column 1
Column 2
Poker hand
Cards
odd card hand
any combination of 5 cards, other than
another poker hand mentioned in this
section
1 pair
2 cards with the same face value and 3
odd cards
269
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
8
2 pairs
2 cards with the same face value, another
2 cards with the same face value (other
than the face value of the first 2 cards) and
1 odd card
3 of a kind
3 cards with the same face value and 2
odd cards
straight
5 cards of more than 1 suit running
consecutively in face value
flush
5 cards of the same suit but not running
consecutively in face value
full house
3 cards with the same face value and
another 2 cards with the same face value
4 of a kind
4 cards with the same face value and 1
odd card
straight flush
5 cards of the same suit running
consecutively in face value, other than a
royal flush
royal flush
10, jack, queen, king and ace of the same
suit.
Ranking of poker hands and cards
(1)
The ranking of poker hands (poker ranking) from lowest to
highest, is as follows—

odd card hand

1 pair

2 pairs

3 of a kind

straight

flush

full house
270
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________

4 of a kind

straight flush

royal flush.
(2)
All suits of cards are equal.
(3)
Hands ranking the same, but with cards of different face values,
rank according to the cards’ face values.
(4)
The ranking of cards, from lowest to highest, is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9, 10, jack, queen, king and ace.
(5)
An ace may rank in a straight as high.
Example for subsection (5)—
a straight consisting of 10, jack, queen, king and ace
(6)
An ace may also rank in a straight as low.
Example for subsection (6)—
a straight consisting of ace, 2, 3, 4 and 5
(7)
If 2 or more players’ hands have identical poker ranking and face
values, the hands are of equal ranking.
Examples of application of this section—
9
1
A 9, 10, jack, queen, king straight beats a 7, 8, 9, 10, jack straight.
2
If there are 2 hands, each containing 2 pairs, the hand holding the highest
pair in face values is ranked the higher. If each hand has an equally ranked
pair, the face values of the second pairs decide the outcome. If each hand
has 2 equally ranked pairs, the face value of the fifth card of each hand
decides the outcome. If each of the fifth cards is equally ranked, the 2
hands are of equal value.
Meaning of raise and raises
(1) A player raises in a round of betting if the player makes a wager,
in accordance with the limits outlined in section 28, for an amount
greater than the player’s call.
(2)
The amount by which the player’s wager exceeds the player’s call
is the raise.
(3)
The casino operator may decide the maximum number of raises
allowed in each round of betting.
271
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
10
Clockwise direction to be used
If, in a round of play, the dealer has to deal with players in turn, or
the players have to act in turn, the dealer must deal with the
players, or the players must act, going around the table in a
clockwise direction.
Part 2
11
12
Table, layout and equipment
Table and layout
(1)
Texas hold’em poker and omaha poker is played at a table with
places for not more than 10 players and 1 dealer.
(2)
The layout for the table is the layout in diagram 14.1 or a similar
layout approved by the chief executive, but must include—
(a)
a muck; and
(b)
the name of, or logo for, the casino.
Equipment
(1)
A table for texas hold’em poker and omaha poker must be
equipped with the following—
(a)
a dealer button;
(b)
a cutting card;
(c)
a dealing shoe;
(d)
a drop box unless the pit is provided with a buy-in desk;
(e)
a sign stating the following—
(i)
the minimum and maximum buy-in;
(ii)
betting limits and structure;
(iii) that there are 2 blind bets;
(iv) the value of each blind bet;
272
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(v)
(2)
A table may also be equipped with a mechanical shuffling device
approved by the chief executive for use in texas hold’em poker
and omaha poker.
(3)
A table may also have a commission box attached to temporarily
hold the commission collected during gaming.
Part 3
13
the rate of commission or the amount of the
participation fee.
Preparing for the game
Cards
Texas hold’em poker and omaha poker is played with a complete
deck of 52 cards with backs of the same colour and design and 1
cutting card.
14
Procedures for inspecting, shuffling and cutting cards
(1)
(2)
Cards must be inspected and shuffled—
(a)
under the provisions of this part; and
(b)
under the approved control system for the casino.
Before being used in play, the cards must be inspected to check—
(a)
for marks and imperfections; and
(b)
that each deck of cards being used for the game is correct
and complete.
(3)
If a player asks to inspect the cards when the cards are first placed
on the table for play, the dealer must spread the cards face up on
the table to enable a person inspecting them to see if the cards
form a complete deck.
(4)
The cards must be shuffled—
(a)
immediately prior to the start of a round of play; and
(b)
at the end of each round of play; and
273
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(c)
(5)
(6)
15
If a mechanical shuffling device is in use at a table—
(a)
the device may be loaded with 1 deck of cards while another
deck is used in play; and
(b)
the backs of the deck of cards being used in play must be of
a different colour to the backs of the deck of cards in the
device.
If the cards have been shuffled manually by the dealer, the dealer
must cut the cards and place them with the cutting card into a
dealing shoe.
Notice of change to game
(1)
16
immediately prior to the recommencement of play following
any period that the table has been vacant.
The minimum and maximum buy-in, betting limits, structure and
the method and amount of commission to be charged may be
changed at the discretion of the pit manager provided—
(a)
prior notice of at least three hands has been given to the
players; and
(b)
the signage is changed to reflect the change of game; and
(c)
the minimum wager may only be changed to a higher
minimum, if a sign indicating the new minimum wager and
proposed time of change has been displayed at the table at
least 20 minutes before the change.
(2)
Changes made pursuant to subsection (1) shall only be made at the
completion of a round of play.
(3)
If all players are in agreement, changes may be made pursuant to
subsection (1) without prior notice.
(4)
Despite subsection (3), the signage must be changed to reflect the
change of the game at the completion of the round of play.
Seating positions
(1)
If, before a game starts, 2 or more persons wish to sit at a
particular position at the table, the seating position must be
decided by a draw of the cards.
274
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(2)
17
18
If a seat at a table becomes vacant during a game, the order of
priority for filling the seat is as follows—
(a)
players who have been taking part in the game since it
started are first in priority;
(b)
other players are second in priority;
(c)
persons who wish to become players are third in priority.
(3)
If 2 or more persons have the same priority to fill a vacant seat
under subsection (2), and no-one has a higher priority, the seating
position must be decided by a draw of the cards.
(4)
For a draw of the cards under subsection (1) or (3), the player who
has the card with the highest ranking wins the draw.
The dealer button
(1)
The player to the immediate right of the dealer receives the dealer
button for the first round of play.
(2)
At the end of each round of play, the dealer button is passed in a
clockwise direction around the table.
(3)
A player must accept the dealer button when it is the player’s turn
to receive it.
(4)
If it is an absent player’s turn to receive the dealer button, the next
active player receives the dealer button instead.
(5)
However, if in a preceding round of play the player who placed the
first blind bet leaves, or there was only one blind bet in play—
(a)
the dealer button will move to the vacant position to the right
of the second blind bet from the preceding round of play and
be known as a dead button; and
(b)
the player to the right of the dead button will become the
designated player.
Minimum table stake
(1)
Subsections (2) and (3) apply if a person is about to become a new
player in a round of play.
(2)
The person must place the person’s buy-in on the table, in full
view of the dealer and all the players.
275
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(3)
19
20
The buy-in must be—
(a)
at least the minimum buy-in and no greater than the
maximum buy-in; and
(b)
in the form of chips, or if it is placed on the table in cash,
immediately converted into chips.
(4)
A player must not add to the player’s table stake during a round of
play.
(5)
A player must not reduce the player’s table stake after the
commencement of the player’s first round of play, other than by
taking part in a round of betting.
(6)
A returning player may continue to play with the table stake the
player had when the player left the table, even if the table stake is
less than the minimum buy-in or greater than the maximum buyin.
Participation fee
(1)
A casino operator may charge each player a fee (a participation
fee) for taking part in a round of play.
(2)
If a participation fee is payable, the player must pay the fee before
the round of play starts.
(3)
However, the casino operator must not charge a participation fee
for a round of play if commission is to be deducted from any pots
for the round of play.
Play sequence
(1)
This section states the steps that may occur for a round of play.
(2)
If a participation fee is charged, the players pay the participation
fee for the round of play.
(3)
There is blind betting before any cards are dealt.
(4)
After the blind betting is completed –
(a)
for texas hold’em poker – the dealer deals 2 cards (the hole
cards) face down to each player.
(b)
for omaha poker – the dealer deals 4 cards (the hole cards)
face down to each player.
276
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(5)
There is a first round of betting after each player has received the
player’s hole cards.
(6)
The dealer deals a burn card face down before dealing the flop
face down.
(7)
The dealer exposes the flop and there is a second round of betting.
(8)
The dealer deals a burn card face down before dealing the turn
card face down.
(9)
The dealer exposes the turn card and there is a third round of
betting.
(10) The dealer deals a burn card face down before dealing the river
card face down.
(11) The dealer exposes the river card and there is a fourth and final
round of betting.
(12) Finally, if a player has not already won the round of play, a
showdown decides who wins the round of play.
(13) The pot is paid to the winner or winners of the round of play.
21
New and returning players
(1)
(2)
(3)
A person is a new player if—
(a)
he or she is about to become a player in a round of play for a
game and they were not a player in the preceding round of
play; and
(b)
he or she were not directed by a floor manager to move from
a table to another table.
A player (the returning player) may return to a game if—
(a)
he or she left the game with the approval of a casino
employee of the level of floor manager or higher; and
(b)
he or she rejoins the game in accordance with the approval.
However, a new or returning player may only join a round of play
before the hole cards are dealt and shall not be dealt a hand at the
position on the table where the new or returning player is—
(a)
the designated player; or
(b)
in the first blind position.
277
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 4
22
Playing the game
How to wager
(1)
A verbal declaration made by a player in turn will be binding.
(2)
A player wagers in a round of play by placing gaming chips
beyond the folding line.
(3)
A player’s action under subsection (2) will be binding if it is
completed before the player makes a verbal declaration.
(4)
Where a player intends to call and raise and the player has not yet
made a verbal declaration—
(5)
(a)
the player must place the wager in a single motion beyond
the folding line; or
(b)
only the call wager will stand if the wager is made in more
than one motion.
If a player who has not gone all-in declares or places a wager for
less than the amount required to call, the player must—
(a)
increase the wager to the amount of the call; or
(b)
go all-in, where the player has insufficient table stake
remaining to call; or
(c)
fold and surrender the wager to the pot.
(6)
If a player who has not gone all-in declares or places a wager
which is greater than the call and the excess amount is less than
50% of the amount required to constitute a raise, the wager shall
be accepted for the amount of the call and the excess amount is to
be returned to the player.
(7)
If a player who has not gone all-in declares or places a wager
which is greater than the call and the excess amount is 50% or
more of the amount required to constitute a raise, the player
must—
(a)
increase the wager to the minimum raise; or
(b)
go all-in where the player has insufficient table stake
remaining to raise.
278
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
23
23A
Placing the blind bets and dealing the hole cards
(1)
At the start of a round of play, the player next to the designated
player for the round of play must make a blind bet (the first blind
bet) equal to the value displayed on the sign at the table.
(2)
The player next to the player who made the first blind bet must
also make a blind bet (the second blind bet) equal to the minimum
wager for the table.
(3)
If it is an absent player’s turn to make a blind bet under subsection
(1) or (2) the next active player must make the blind bet.
(4)
Despite subsection (3), if the player who placed the second blind
bet from the preceding round of play leaves the table with or
without approval, there will be no first blind bet for the new round
of play and the next active player must make the second blind bet.
(5)
However, despite subsections (1) and (4), if only 2 players are
wagering in a round of play the first blind bet will be placed by the
designated player.
(6)
After the second blind bet has been made and all wagers under
section 23A have been made, the dealer must deal the hole cards
to each player.
(7)
To deal the hole cards, the dealer must deal 1 card face down to
each player starting with the player until –
(a)
for texas hold’em poker – each player has 2 cards.
(b)
for omaha poker – each player has 4 cards.
Wagers for new and returning players
(1)
(2)
A new player must—
(a)
make a wager equal to the value of the second blind bet for
the current round of play; or
(b)
not be dealt a hand until it is their turn to place the second
blind bet.
If a returning player was absent during their turn to make a blind
bet, they must —
(a)
make a wager for the current round of play equal to the value
of all missed blind bets that the returning player would
otherwise have been required to make, up to a maximum
279
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
value of the first blind bet plus the second blind bet for the
round of play; or
(b)
24
not be dealt a hand until it is their turn to place the second
blind bet.
(3)
The wager mentioned in subsections (1) and (2) must be made
before the hole cards are dealt.
(4)
If the wager under subsection (2)(a) is in excess of the value of the
second blind bet, the excess amount is placed directly into the pot
and does not form part of the player’s contribution to the first
round of betting.
Sequence for the first round of betting
(1)
This section explains the sequence for the first round of betting.
(2)
After each player has been dealt the hole cards, the player (player
B) who is next to the player who made the second blind bet may—
(3)
(4)
(a)
call; or
(b)
call and raise; or
(c)
fold;or
(d)
go all-in.
After player B has completed an action under subsection (2), each
player in turn may—
(a)
call; or
(b)
call and raise; or
(c)
fold; or
(d)
go all-in.
However, if the call remains equal to the value of the second blind
bet, each player who has placed a blind bet or a wager under
section 23A equal to the value of the second blind bet may—
(a)
check; or
(b)
call and raise; or
(c)
fold; or
(d)
go all-in.
280
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
25
The first round of betting and the round of play ends if—
(a)
no player calls the second blind; or
(b)
a player makes an uncalled raise.
If no player calls the second blind bet—
(a)
the player who made the second blind bet is the winner of
the round of play; and
(b)
the dealer must announce the pot has been won and pay out
under section 26.
If a player makes an uncalled raise—
(a)
the player is the winner of the round of play; and
(b)
the dealer must announce the pot has been won and pay out
under section 26.
The first round of betting ends and the round of play continues
if—
(a)
2 or more players (the contributing players) have each
contributed an equal amount to the pot; and
(b)
no other player has contributed a greater amount to the pot
than each of the contributing players.
Sequence for the second, third and final rounds of betting
(1)
This section explains the sequence for the second, third and final
rounds of betting.
(2)
After the dealer has exposed the appropriate community card or
cards for the round of betting, the first active player may—
(3)
(a)
make an opening bet for the round of betting; or
(b)
check; or
(c)
fold.
If the first active player checks or folds under subsection (2), each
player in turn may, if an opening bet has not already been made—
(a)
make an opening bet; or
(b)
check; or
(c)
fold.
281
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(4)
An opening bet must not be—
(a)
less than the minimum wager for the round of betting; or
(b)
more than the maximum wager for the round of betting.
(5)
Subsection (4)(a) shall not apply in the event of a player going allin.
(6)
If a player (the opening player) makes an opening bet, each active
player in turn starting with the player next to the opening player,
may—
(a) call; or
(7)
(8)
(9)
(b)
call and raise; or
(c)
fold; or
(d)
go all-in.’.
The round of betting and the round of play ends if either of the
following happens—
(a)
a player makes an uncalled opening bet;
(b)
a player makes an uncalled raise.
If a player makes an uncalled opening bet or uncalled raise—
(a)
the player is the winner of the round of play; and
(b)
the dealer must announce that the pot has been won and pay
out the pot under section 26.
The round of betting ends and the round of play continues if—
(a)
2 or more players (the contributing players) have each
contributed an equal amount to the pot; and
(b)
no other player has contributed a greater amount to the pot
than each of the contributing players.
(10) However, if the final round of betting ends under subsection (9), a
showdown happens for the round of play.
(11) In this section—
appropriate community card or cards, for a round of betting,
means—
(a)
for the second round of betting—the flop; or
(b)
for the third round of betting—the turn card; or
282
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(c)
26
27
for the final round of betting—the river card.
Payment of pot and commission at end of round of betting
(1)
This section applies if a round of play ends when a round of
betting ends.
(2)
However, this section does not apply if a showdown happens for
the round of play.
(3)
If commission is to be deducted for the round of play, the dealer
must—
(a)
if the winning player has made an uncalled opening bet or an
uncalled raise—return the uncalled opening bet or raise to
the winning player; and
(b)
calculate and announce the amount of the pot; and
(c)
calculate and announce the amount of the commission; and
(d)
deduct the commission from the pot; and
(e)
announce the amount of the pot, less the commission
deducted; and
(f)
pass the pot, less the commission deducted, to the winning
player.
(4)
If a participation fee has been charged for the round of play, the
dealer must pass the entire pot to the winning player.
(5)
Subsections (3) and (4) apply subject to section 29.
Showdown
(1)
This section explains the sequence for a showdown in a round of
play.
(2)
Where a round of betting ends with 1 active player and 1 or more
all-in players, the dealer will deal any remaining community cards
and the last player to be called (the called player) will be the first
player required to expose their cards.
(3)
Where 2 or more active players remain at the completion of the
final round of betting, the first player required to expose their
cards (also the called player) will be either—
283
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(a)
the first active player if no player made an opening bet for
the final round of betting; or
(b)
the last player to be called if paragraph (a) does not apply.
(4)
The called player must expose their cards at this time to be eligible
to win the pot subject to subsection (11).
(5)
If the called played elects to fold and 2 or more players remain, the
next active player in a clockwise direction will become the called
player.
(6)
If another active player (a responding player) or an eligible all-in
player for the showdown (also a responding player) has a hand
that is equal in poker ranking to, or higher in poker ranking than,
the called player’s hand, the responding player must show the
responding player’s hand.
(7)
When the called player and each responding player, if any, have
shown their hands, the round of play and the final round of betting
ends.
(8)
If only 1 of the hands has the highest poker ranking, the hand is
the winning hand.
(9)
If 2 or more hands each have the highest poker ranking, the hands
are the winning hands.
(10) However, if the called player has elected to fold during a
showdown and the discarded cards have not yet been placed in the
muck, an active player may request to view the called player’s
cards.
(11) If a request is made pursuant to subsection (10) by an active player
—
(a)
not holding the highest poker ranking hand, the dealer shall
tap the cards in the muck before exposing the cards on the
table; or
(b)
with the highest poker ranking hand, the dealer shall expose
the cards on the table and the called player shall be eligible
to win the pot.
(12) Despite subsection (10), a request may not be made by an active
player with the highest poker ranking hand when 2 or more hands
share the highest poker ranking.
284
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(13) After the winning hand or hands have been established, the dealer
must announce the winning hand or hands.
(14) If commission is to be deducted for the round of play, the dealer
must—
(a)
calculate and announce the amount of the pot; and
(b)
calculate and announce the amount of the commission; and
(c)
deduct the commission from the pot; and
(d)
announce the amount of the pot, less the commission
deducted; and
(e)
either—
(i)
pass the pot, less the commission deducted, to the
player with the winning hand; or
(ii)
divide the pot equally, to the lowest chip denomination
at the table, among the players with the winning hands.
(15) If a participation fee has been charged, the dealer must—
(a)
pass the entire pot to the player with the winning hand; or
(b)
divide the pot equally, to the lowest chip denomination at the
table, among the players with the winning hands.
(16) If there is an amount left over after a division under subsections
(14)(e)(ii) or (15)(b), the amount is given to the player with a
winning hand who is next to the designated player for the round of
play.
(17) The pot must not be divided on the basis of an agreement among
players.
(18) This section applies subject to section 29.
(19) In this section—
eligible all-in player, for a showdown in a round of play, means a
player who—
(a)
has gone all-in during the round of play; and
(b)
is eligible to win the pot.
285
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
28
Betting structure and raises
(1)
Full pot betting, half pot betting, no limit betting or structured
betting applies to betting at a table.
(2)
A player may make a raise that is—
(a)
not less than the minimum raise under subsection (4) for a
round of betting and not more than the maximum raise under
the betting structure that applies to the round; or
(b)
if structured betting applies at the table—in the amount
provided for under subsection (8).
(3)
Despite subsection (2)(a), if the minimum raise under subsection
(4) for a round of betting would be more than the maximum raise
under the betting structure that applies to the round, the raise must
be equal to the maximum raise.
(4)
For a round of betting, a player (player A) must not make a raise
less than—
(5)
(a)
if player A’s call is less than the minimum wager—the
amount of the minimum wager; or
(b)
if there has been no previous raise and paragraph (a) does
not apply—the amount of the opening bet; or
(c)
if there has been a previous raise—the amount of the
previous raise.
If full pot betting applies for the round of betting, a player’s raise
must not be more than the total amount of the pot as it is
immediately before the player raises.
Example of full pot betting—
If the pot has $200 in it and a player’s call brings it to $250, the player may
raise up to $250.
(6)
If half pot betting applies for the round of betting, a player’s raise
must not be more than half the total amount of the pot as it is
immediately before the player raises.
Example of half pot betting—
If the pot has $200 in it and a player’s call brings it to $240, the player may
raise up to $120.
(7)
If no limit betting applies for the round of betting, a player’s
maximum raise is the player’s remaining table stake.
286
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(8)
(9)
If structured betting applies at the table, a player’s raise must be—
(a)
in the first and second rounds of betting—the minimum
wager for the table; and
(b)
in the third and final rounds of betting—the maximum wager
for the table.
A table for Texas hold’em poker or omaha poker must have a sign
at the table that states the betting structure that applies at the table.
(10) In this section—
betting structure means full pot betting, half pot betting, no limit
betting or structured betting.
29
Going all-in
(1)
A player goes all-in if the player bets the remaining amount of the
player’s table stake.
(2)
A player may go all-in only if the player wishes to stay in the
round of play and 1 of the following applies—
(a)
the player has some table stake remaining, but not enough to
make an opening bet or call;
(b)
the player has only enough table stake remaining to call;
(c)
after calling, the player has some table stake remaining, but
not enough to raise;
(d)
the player has only enough table stake remaining to call and
raise.
(3)
A player goes all-in by putting all the chips remaining in the
player’s table stake into the pot.
(4)
If a player goes all-in during a round of betting, the player stays in
the round of play but must take no further part in the round of
betting or a later round of betting for the round of play.
(5)
If a player bets an amount (an additional amount) that is more
than the amount bet by a player who has gone all-in, the additional
amount must be placed in a separate pot.
(6)
A player who goes all-in is eligible to win a pot only if the pot was
formed before the player went all-in.
287
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Example for subsection (6)—
Player A goes all-in during the first round of betting. The final round of betting
finishes and there is a showdown. Players B and C are the only active players at
the showdown and all other players (other than player A) have folded. Player
A’s hand has a higher poker ranking than player B’s hand, which in turn has a
higher poker ranking than player C’s hand. Player A wins the pot formed before
player A went all-in. Player B wins the separate pot formed after player A went
all-in.
(7)
If a player (player B) goes all-in and another player (player C)
makes an uncalled opening bet or an uncalled raise, the entitlement
to the pot formed before player B went all-in must be decided by
comparing player B’s and player C’s hands.
(8)
A player who goes all-in during a round of play may take part in a
showdown to decide the winner of a pot only if the player is
eligible to win the pot.
(9)
For the rules for texas hold’em poker and omaha poker, other than
this section, if the context permits, 2 or more pots formed under
this section during a round of play may be taken to be 1 pot.
Example for subsection (9)—
For calculating the amount of a maximum raise under full pot betting, 2 pots
formed under this section are taken to be 1 pot containing the total amount of
the 2 pots formed.
(10) The amount bet by a player under subsection (2)(c) is taken not to
be a raise.
30
Commission
(1)
Under this section—
(a)
the casino operator may deduct commission only from a pot
that is more than $19; and
(b)
the commission that may be deducted is not more than 10%
of the highest amount of the pot that is wholly divisible by
10.
(2)
However, for deducting commission from a pot that is more than
100 times the minimum wager for the table, the pot is to be taken
to be 100 times the minimum wager.
(3)
The casino operator may deduct less commission for a game than
the commission provided for under subsection (1)(b) or (2) if the
288
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
players are told, before the game starts, about the way the
commission is to be calculated.
(4)
(5)
31
For calculating commission—
(a)
where separate pots are won by either the same player or the
same combination of players, they shall be combined and
commission is to be calculated on the total amount of all the
pots won by the same player or the same combination of
players; and
(b)
where separate pots are won by different players or a
different combination of players, commission shall be
calculated and deducted from the first pot formed, then in
order from pots subsequently formed cumulatively up to the
maximum amount allowed under subsections (2) and (3);
and
(c)
if a player makes an uncalled opening bet, the wager is taken
not to be part of the pot; and
(d)
if a player raises but is not called, the raise is taken not to be
part of the pot; and
(e)
if 2 or more players, holding hands of equal value, share the
pot for a round of play and no other player contributed to the
pot, no commission shall be deducted from the pot.
If the casino operator has charged a participation fee for a round of
play, the casino operator must not deduct commission from a pot
for the round of play.
Table stake for continuing players
(1)
This section applies if a player has taken part in a round of play
(the preceding round) and wishes to take part in the next round of
play (the new round).
(2)
Subsections (3) and (4) apply if the player—
(3)
(a)
has no table stake remaining from the preceding round; or
(b)
has a table stake remaining from the preceding round that is
less than the minimum wager for the table.
Before the new round starts, the player must increase the player’s
table stake to at least the minimum buy-in for the game without
exceeding the maximum buy-in.
289
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(4)
If the player does not increase the player’s table stake under
subsection (3) to at least the minimum buy-in, the player must
leave the game before the new round starts.
(5)
Subsection (6) applies if the player has a table stake remaining
from the preceding round that is less than the maximum buy-in but
not less than the minimum wager for the table.
(6)
The player may increase the player’s table stake to at least the
minimum buy-in for the game, but no greater than the maximum
buy-in, and must do so before the new round starts.
Part 5
32
Irregularities
Misdeals
(1)
A misdeal happens for a round of play if—
(a)
the cards are not shuffled before the first card is dealt for the
round of play; or
(b)
a card is exposed when the cards are cut; or
(c)
the cards are not cut before the first card is dealt for the
round of play; or
(d)
in dealing the hole cards—
(e)
(i)
the dealer exposes two or more cards; or
(ii)
a card is found face up in the deck; or
in dealing the hole cards, the dealer—
(i)
deals a card out of turn; or
(ii)
does not deal any cards to a player; or
(iii) does not deal the correct number of cards to a player;
or
(iv) deals a card to a position (a vacant position) where
there is no player for the round of play.
290
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(2)
If, before the first round of betting for the round of play starts, the
floor manager, pit boss or dealer becomes aware a misdeal has
happened, the floor manager, pit boss or dealer must declare a
misdeal for the round of play.
(3)
If a misdeal is declared for a round of play—
(4)
32A
(a)
the round of play is taken not to have started; and
(b)
the dealer must shuffle and cut the cards for a new round of
play.
However, a misdeal must not be declared, and the round of play
must be continued, if—
(a)
an event mentioned in subsection (1)(e) happens; and
(b)
no player has looked at a card that the player should not have
received; and
(c)
the dealer is able to reconstruct the deal and give the players
the cards they should have received.
(5)
The dealer must reconstruct the deal under subsection (4)(c) unless
it is not practicable to reconstruct it.
(6)
If an event mentioned in subsection (1)(e)(iv) happens, but a
misdeal can not be declared under subsection (2), the dealer, on
becoming aware the event has happened, must place each card that
should not have been dealt to the vacant position into the muck.
Single card exposed in dealing the hole cards
If a single card is exposed by the dealer in dealing the hole cards,
the dealer must—
(a)
complete the initial deal; and
(b)
exchange the exposed card with the card that was to be the
first burn card before the flop; and
(c)
give all players the opportunity to view the exposed card;
and
(d)
use the exposed card as the first burn card.
291
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
33
Holding the wrong number of hole cards
(1)
33A
The dealer must declare a player’s hand void for a round of play
if—
(a)
the dealer becomes aware the player holds too few or too
many hole cards; and
(b)
a misdeal is not declared for the round of play.
(2)
If a player’s hand is declared void for a round of play, the player is
taken to have folded, and all bets made by the player on the hand
shall be returned to the player.
(3)
If a player’s hand is declared void for a round of play at a
showdown and there is only 1 active player remaining to complete
the showdown, the active player wins the pot.
(4)
If only 1 player remains in the game and that player has the
incorrect number of cards, the round of play shall be declared void
and all wagers shall be returned to the players.
(5)
However, subsection (3) applies subject to section 29 if a player
has gone all-in during the round of play and is eligible to win the
pot.
Missing or foreign cards
In the event that a card is found to be missing from, or a foreign
card is found in, the shuffled cards for the round of play—
(a)
the results of all rounds of play previously completed shall
stand; and
(b)
the round of play where the missing or foreign card is
discovered shall be declared void and all wagers returned to
the players for that round of play; and
(c)
a new set of cards will be introduced to the table and the
dealer will inspect, shuffle and cut the cards in accordance
with section 14 prior to the new round of play.
292
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
33B
34
35
Card found face up in the shoe once first round of betting has
commenced
If a card is found face up in the shoe after the first round of betting
for the round of play has commenced—
(a)
the card shall be immediately placed in the muck and shall
not be used for the round of play; and
(b)
play will continue with the remaining cards in the shoe; and
(c)
the dealer must give all players the opportunity to view the
face up card.
Burn card exposed in error
(1)
Subsection (2) applies if, when dealing the flop or turn card, the
dealer exposes in error a card that would otherwise have been dealt
as the burn card after the next round of betting.
(2)
The card exposed in error must be used as the burn card and dealt
before the next community card is dealt.
(3)
If, when dealing the river card, the dealer exposes another card in
error, the dealer must place the card exposed in error in the muck.
(4)
The dealer must give all players the opportunity to view a card
exposed in error under subsection (1) or (3).
Burn card not dealt before a community card
(1)
(2)
If the dealer does not deal a burn card before dealing a card in the
flop—
(a)
the first card dealt in the flop must be used as the burn card;
and
(b)
the dealer must deal another card to make up the flop.
If the dealer does not deal a burn card before dealing the turn card
or river card—
(a)
the turn card or river card must be used as the burn card; and
(b)
the dealer must deal another card to replace the turn card or
river card.
293
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
36
37
Community card exposed in error
(1)
This section applies if, during any of the first 3 rounds of betting,
the dealer exposes in error a card that would otherwise have been
dealt as a community card after the round of betting.
(2)
The card exposed in error must remain in play and be dealt as as
the community card after the round of betting.
(3)
The maximum bet allowed for the round of betting must not be
more than—
(a)
if a bet has already been made in the round of betting—the
highest bet made; or
(b)
if no bets have been made in the round of betting—the
minimum wager for the round of betting.
Betting out of turn
(1)
This section applies if a player (an out of turn player) has acted
out of turn in a round of betting.
(2)
As soon as the dealer becomes aware that the player has acted out
of turn, the dealer must give an opportunity to act to each player (a
missed player) who should have had an opportunity to act in the
round of betting before the out of turn player acted.
(3)
If, when acting out of turn, the out of turn player made a bet (an
out of turn bet), the out of turn bet shall—
(a)
stand if each missed player folds or makes a bet that is not
more than the out of turn bet; or
(b)
be returned to the player if each missed player checks.
(4)
However, the out of turn player may fold, call, or call and raise if a
missed player makes a bet that is more than the out of turn bet.
(5)
If the out of turn player folds under subsection (4), the out of turn
bet shall stand and remain in the pot.
(6)
Despite subsection (3)(a), if the out of turn bet is more than the
maximum wager for the round of betting, the difference between
the out of turn bet and the maximum wager must be returned to the
out of turn player.
(7)
Where a player is directed in error by a dealer to act out of turn,
that player, or any of the following players who act in those
294
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
circumstances, shall retract their action and then act in the correct
sequence.
38
39
Collusion
(1)
A player must play only in the player’s interest, and must not help,
or try to help, another player in a way that could adversely affect a
third player.
(2)
A player must not bet for another player, or give or loan chips to
another player.
(3)
Only 1 player is allowed to play a hand, and the player must make
all decisions affecting the hand without help or advice from
another person.
(4)
In a round of play, a player must make sure no other person finds
out what the player’s hole cards are, except as expressly permitted
under the rules for texas hold’em poker and omaha poker.
(5)
Subsection (4) applies even if the player becomes an inactive
player in the round of play.
(6)
Subject to section 27(10), a player must not, during or after a
round of play, look at—
(a)
the cards of a player who has folded; or
(b)
any undealt cards.
(7)
If an active player obtains information about an inactive player’s
cards, whether accidentally or deliberately, the active player must
give the information to all other active players.
(8)
If an active player (player A) obtains information about the hand
of another player who has made a bet and has not been called,
player A must give the information to all other players.
Players must not exchange cards or communicate
A player must not—
(a)
exchange cards; or
(b)
communicate, or cause to be communicated, information
about the player’s hand; or
295
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(c)
speak in a language other than English, if directed by a dealer or floor
manager.
296
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 14 – Texas hold’em poker (continued)
Diagram 14.1—Texas hold’em poker table and omaha poker layout
section 11(2)
Muck
Folding line
Approximate
location of
casino
name/logo
Drop box
297
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 15
Texas hold’em bonus poker
section 3(2)
Part 1
1
Preliminary
Conducting and playing texas hold’em bonus poker
This schedule states the rules for conducting and playing the
casino game known as texas hold’em bonus poker.
2
Definitions for sch 15
In this schedule—
ante wager means a wager made by a person to enable the person
to take part in a round of play of the game as a player.
bonus wager means a wager made by a player by placing the
wager in the appropriate area for bonus wagers on the table.
checks see section 3.
closes a player’s hand see section 4.
community card, without indicating a particular community card,
means—
(a)
a card from the flop; or
(b)
the turn card or river card.
continuing player means a player who has made an ante wager
and has not folded.
dealer’s cards means the 2 cards dealt to the dealer, under section
16, after the first round of betting.
298
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
dealer’s hand means the poker hand with the highest poker
ranking that is available from—
(a)
the dealer’s cards and 3 community cards; or
(b)
one of the dealer’s cards and 4 community cards; or
(c)
the 5 community cards.
face value, of a card, means—
(a)
the number of the card, namely, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10; or
(b)
the type of card, namely, jack, queen, king or ace.
first round of betting means the betting that happens in a round of
play before each player has been dealt the hole cards for the round
of play.
flop see section 17(6).
flop wager see section 17(4).
folds see section 5.
game means texas hold’em bonus poker.
hole cards means the 2 cards dealt to each player, under section
16, after the first round of betting.
odd card, in relation to another card or cards, means a card with a
different face value to the other card or cards.
opening bet, for a round of betting, means the bet with which a
player opens the betting for the round.
player’s hand, means the poker hand with the highest poker
ranking that is available from—
(a)
the player’s hole cards and 3 community cards; or
(b)
one of the player’s hole cards and 4 community cards; or
(c)
the 5 community cards.
poker hands see section 7.
poker ranking, of a hand, means the ranking of the hand worked
out under section 8.
river card see section 19(3).
river wager see section 19(1)(b).
round of play, of the game, includes the following—
299
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(a)
wagering;
(b)
dealing of cards;
(c)
playing the game with the cards as dealt;
(d)
deciding the winning hands;
(e)
collecting losing wagers;
(f)
paying for winning hands.
stand off see section 8(6).
turn card see section 18(3).
turn wager see section 18(1)(b).
wager means an ante wager, flop wager, turn wager, river wager or
bonus wager.
winning bonus hand see section 6.
3
Meaning of checks
A player checks, in a round of betting, if the player declines to
make an opening bet for the round of betting but does not fold.
4
Meaning of closes a player’s hand
A dealer closes a player’s hand by—
5
(a)
collecting the player’s wagers and cards; and
(b)
individually spreading out the collected cards face down and
counting them; and
(c)
placing the cards in the table’s discard rack.
Meaning of folds
A player folds in a round of play if the player—
(a)
places the player’s hole cards face down on the table; and
(b)
clearly indicates to the dealer that the player wishes to stop
taking part in the round of play.
300
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
6
Meaning of winning bonus hand
Each of the following is a winning bonus hand—
7

2 aces

ace and king of the same suit

ace and queen, or ace and jack, of the same suit

ace and king of different suits

2 kings, 2 queens or 2 jacks

ace and queen, or ace and jack, of different suits

any pair, other than a pair of aces, kings, queens or jacks.
Meaning of poker hands
(1)
The poker hands for texas hold’em bonus poker are stated in
column 1 of the table.
(2)
Each poker hand is made up of the cards mentioned opposite the
poker hand in column 2 of the table.
Column 1
Column 2
Poker hand
Cards
odd card hand
any combination of 5 cards, other than
another poker hand mentioned in this
section
1 pair
2 cards with the same face value and 3
odd cards
2 pairs
2 cards with the same face value,
another 2 cards with the same face value
(other than the face value of the first 2
cards) and 1 odd card
3 of a kind
3 cards with the same face value and 2
odd cards
301
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
8
straight
5 cards of more than 1 suit running
consecutively in face value
flush
5 cards of the same suit but not running
consecutively in face value
full house
3 cards with the same face value and
another 2 cards with the same face value
(other than the face value of the first 3
cards)
4 of a kind
4 cards with the same face value and 1
odd card
straight flush
5 cards of the same suit running
consecutively in face value, other than a
royal flush
royal flush
10, jack, queen, king and ace of the
same suit
Ranking of poker hands and cards
(1)
(2)
The ranking of poker hands, from lowest to highest, is as
follows—

odd card hand

1 pair

2 pairs

3 of a kind

straight

flush

full house

4 of a kind

straight flush

royal flush.
All suits of cards are of equal value.
302
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(3)
Hands ranking the same, but with cards of different face values,
rank according to the cards’ face values.
(4)
The ranking of cards, from lowest to highest, is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9, 10, jack, queen, king and ace.
(5)
If the dealer or a player has an ace, 2, 3, 4 and 5, the ace must rank
as 1.
(6)
If the dealer’s hand and a player’s hand have the same poker
ranking and face values, it is a stand off.
Examples of application of this section—
1
A 9, 10, jack, queen, king straight beats a 7, 8, 9, 10, jack straight.
2
If there are 2 hands, each containing 2 pairs, the hand holding the highest
pair in face values is ranked the higher. If each hand has an equally ranked
pair, the hand holding the highest second pair in face values is ranked the
higher. If each hand has 2 equally ranked pairs, the hand whose fifth card
has the higher face value is ranked the higher. If each hand has 2 equally
ranked pairs and the fifth cards of the hands have the same face value, it is
a stand off.
Part 2
9
Table, layout and equipment
Table and layout
(1)
Texas hold’em bonus poker is played at a table with places for
players on 1 side and a place for the dealer on the opposite side.
(2)
The layout cloth for the table must have printed on it—
(3)
(a)
the name of, or logo for, the casino; and
(b)
areas for the dealer’s cards and community cards; and
(c)
rectangular, circular or oval areas for wagers.
The areas for wagers must be marked—
(a)
for ante wagers—by the word ‘ante’; and
(b)
for flop wagers—by the word ‘flop’; and
(c)
for turn wagers—by the word ‘turn’; and
303
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(4)
10
(d)
for river wagers—by the word ‘river’; and
(e)
for bonus wagers—by the word ‘bonus’ or, if another
description is stated under the approved control system for
the casino, the other description.
The layout for the table is the layout in diagram 15.1 or a similar
layout approved by the chief executive.
Equipment
A table for the game must be equipped with—
(a)
(b)
Part 3
11
either—
(i)
a dealing shoe; or
(ii)
a mechanical shuffling device approved by the chief
executive for use in texas hold’em bonus poker; and
a drop box and discard rack at approximately the locations
shown in diagram 15.1.
Preparing for the game
Cards
(1)
Texas hold’em bonus poker is played with 1 deck of cards with
backs of the same colour and design and 1 cutting card.
(2)
However, if a mechanical shuffling device is in use at a table—
(a)
the device may be loaded with 1 deck of cards while another
deck is used in play; and
(b)
the backs of the 2 decks of cards must have different
colours; and
(c)
the table’s discard rack must only contain the cards from 1
deck at a time.
304
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
12
Procedures for inspecting, shuffling and cutting cards
(1)
Cards must be inspected and shuffled—
(a)
under the provisions of this part; and
(b)
under the approved control system for the casino.
(2)
Before being used in play, the cards must be inspected to check for
marks and imperfections and that each deck of cards contains the
correct cards.
(3)
If a player asks to inspect the cards when the cards are first placed
on the table for play, the dealer must spread the cards face up on
the table to enable a person inspecting them to see if each deck of
cards is complete.
(4)
The cards must be shuffled—
(5)
(a)
before being used in play; and
(b)
at the end of each round of play.
If the cards have been shuffled manually by the dealer, the dealer
must cut the cards and place them with the cutting card into a
dealing shoe.
Part 4
13
Placing wagers and playing the
game
Placing ante and bonus wagers
Before a round of play starts, each player must—
14
(a)
make an ante wager; and
(b)
be given an opportunity to make a bonus wager.
How wagers are made
(1)
All wagers must be made by placing chips in the areas for wagers
on the table.
(2)
A player must not wager on more than 1 hand in a round of play.
305
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
15
(3)
Only 1 wager may be accepted on each area for wagers.
(4)
After the first card of a round of play has been removed from the
dealing shoe or mechanical shuffling device, a person must not
change, take away or touch a wager until a decision about the
wager is made, and the wager is dealt with, by the dealer.
Player’s cards to be in full view of dealer
A player’s cards must be in full view of the dealer during a round
of play.
16
Dealing the hole cards and dealer’s cards
(1)
After all ante wagers and bonus wagers for a round of play have
been made, the dealer must deal cards by starting from the dealer’s
left and continuing clockwise around the table.
(2)
The cards must be dealt in 1 of the following ways provided for
under the approved control system for the casino—
(a)
by placing in turn—
(i)
1 card to each area containing an ante wager; and
(ii)
1 card to the dealer; and
(iii) a second card, in sequence, to each area containing an
ante wager; and
(iv) a second card to the dealer;
(b)
(3)
17
by placing in turn—
(i)
2 cards at a time to each area containing an ante wager;
and
(ii)
2 cards at a time to the dealer.
The cards must be dealt face down.
Players may look at hole cards and fold or place a flop wager
(1)
After all the hole cards have been dealt, the players may look at
their cards.
(2)
A player may fold after looking at the player’s hole cards.
(3)
If a player folds, the dealer must close the player’s hand.
306
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
18
(4)
If a player decides to continue to play in the round of play, the
player must place a wager (the flop wager) in the appropriate area
for flop wagers on the table and place the cards face down on the
table.
(5)
A player’s flop wager must be twice the amount of the player’s
ante wager.
(6)
After a continuing player has placed a flop wager under subsection
(4), the dealer must deal 3 cards (the flop) face down and
simultaneously expose the cards.
Player may check or place a turn wager
(1)
19
After the flop has been dealt, a player may—
(a)
check; or
(b)
place a wager (the turn wager) in the appropriate area for
turn wagers on the table.
(2)
A player’s turn wager must be equal to the amount of the player’s
ante wager.
(3)
After all continuing players have checked or placed a turn wager
under subsection (1), the dealer must deal 1 card (the turn card)
face down and expose the card.
Player may check or place a river wager
(1)
After the turn card has been dealt, a player may—
(a)
check; or
(b)
place a wager (the river wager) in the appropriate area for
river wagers on the table.
(2)
A player’s river wager must be equal to the amount of the player’s
ante wager.
(3)
After all continuing players have checked or placed a river wager
under subsection (1), the dealer must deal 1 card (the river card)
face down and expose the card.
307
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
20
Declaration of highest poker ranking of dealer’s hand
After the river card has been dealt, the dealer must turn the
dealer’s cards face up and declare the highest poker ranking of the
dealer’s hand.
21
Deciding the highest poker ranking of player’s hand
After declaring the highest poker ranking of the dealer’s hand, the
dealer, starting on the dealer’s right and continuing anticlockwise
around the table, must—
22
(a)
turn the hole cards of each continuing player face up; and
(b)
decide the highest poker ranking of the player’s hand.
Players must not exchange cards or communicate
A player must not—
(a)
exchange cards; or
(b)
exchange or communicate, or cause to be exchanged or
communicated, information about the player’s hand; or
(c)
speak in a language other than English if directed by a dealer
or floor manager; or
(d)
touch another player’s cards.
Part 5
23
Deciding the outcome of wagers
and paying winning wagers
Player’s hand—when it wins, loses or is a stand off
(1)
A player’s hand wins if the poker ranking of the player’s hand is
higher than the poker ranking of the dealer’s hand.
(2)
If a player’s hand wins, the dealer must—
(a)
if the winning hand is a flush or higher—pay the ante wager
at the odds mentioned in section 24; and
308
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
pay the flop, turn and river wagers at the odds mentioned in
section 24; and
(c)
collect the player’s cards and place them in the table’s
discard rack.
(3)
A player’s hand loses if the poker ranking of the player’s hand is
lower than the poker ranking of the dealer’s hand.
(4)
If a player’s hand loses, the dealer must—
(5)
(6)
24
(b)
(a)
collect the ante, flop, turn and river wagers for the hand; and
(b)
collect the player’s cards and place them in the table’s
discard rack.
If a player’s hand is a stand off—
(a)
the player’s wagers for the hand neither win nor lose under
this section; and
(b)
the dealer must close the player’s hand.
However, if a player has made a bonus wager and has a winning
bonus hand, the dealer must deal with the player’s hand under
sections 25 and 26.
Payment odds for winning ante, flop, turn and river wagers
The payment odds for winning ante, flop, turn and river wagers are
as follows—
Winning wager
Payment odds
ante wager
1 to 1
flop wager
1 to 1
turn wager
1 to 1
river wager
1 to 1.
309
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
25
26
Winning bonus hand
(1)
If a player has made a bonus wager and the player’s hole cards
comprise a winning bonus hand, the dealer must pay the winning
bonus hand at the corresponding payment odds mentioned in
section 26.
(2)
Subsection (1) applies whether or not the player’s hand is a
winning hand under section 23.
(3)
Payments for winning bonus hands are made immediately after the
dealer has decided the highest poker ranking of the player’s hand
and before paying any other wager.
Payment odds for winning bonus hands
The payment odds for winning bonus hands are as follows—
Winning bonus hand
Payment odds
2 aces
30 to 1
ace and king of the same suit
25 to 1
ace and queen, or ace and jack, of the 20 to 1
same suit
ace and king of different suits
15 to 1
2 kings, 2 queens or 2 jacks
10 to 1
ace and queen, or ace and jack, of
different suits
5 to 1
any pair, other than a pair of aces,
kings, queens or jacks
3 to 1.
310
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 6
27
Irregularities
Flop wager under or over twice the ante wager
If, while acting on the hands, the dealer becomes aware that a flop
wager is—
28
(a)
more than twice the amount of the ante wager—the dealer
must give the excess amount to the player and take or pay
the wager accordingly; or
(b)
less than twice the amount of the ante wager—the dealer
must take or pay according to the amount wagered and tell
the player that for subsequent rounds of play the player’s
flop wager must be twice the amount of the player’s ante
wager.
Turn wager or river wager under or over the ante wager
If, while acting on the hands, the dealer becomes aware that a turn
or river wager is—
29
(a)
more than the amount of the ante wager—the dealer must
give the excess amount to the player and take or pay the
wager accordingly; or
(b)
less than the amount of the ante wager—the dealer must take
or pay according to the amount wagered and tell the player
that for subsequent rounds of play the player’s turn wager or
river wager must be equal to the amount of the player’s ante
wager.
Cards dealt when no ante wager
If 1 or more cards are dealt to a player who has not placed an ante
wager—
(a)
the player’s hand is void; and
(b)
any bonus wager placed by the player for the round of play
must be returned to the player; and
(c)
all players at the table must be given the option of retracting
their wagers.
311
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
30
Player wagering on more than 1 betting area
If a player has been dealt more than 1 hand in a round of play—
31
(a)
the player’s hand, for the round of play, is the first hand dealt
to the player; and
(b)
other hands dealt to the player are void; and
(c)
all players at the table must be given the option of retracting
their wagers.
Incorrect number of cards
(1)
(2)
(3)
If an incorrect number of cards are dealt to a player or the dealer
and none of the players have looked at the players’ cards—
(a)
the round of play is void; and
(b)
the dealer must immediately tell a casino employee of the
level of floor manager or higher; and
(c)
the employee must direct the dealer to count the cards to
verify there are 52; and
(d)
if the dealer finds the deck does not contain 52 cards—a
casino employee of the level of pit boss or higher must
notify an inspector.
If an incorrect number of cards are dealt to a player or the dealer’s
hand and any player has looked at the player’s cards—
(a)
the dealer must immediately tell a casino employee of the
level of floor manager or higher; and
(b)
the employee must direct the dealer to count the cards to
verify there are 52.
If the dealer finds the deck does not contain 52 cards—
(a)
a casino employee of the level of pit boss or higher must
notify an inspector; and
(b)
the round of play is void; and
(c)
all wagers placed for the round of play must be returned to
the players.
312
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(4)
(5)
(6)
If the dealer finds the deck contains 52 cards and the dealer’s hand
has an incorrect number of cards—
(a)
the ante wagers for the players who have folded must be
reinstated; and
(b)
all ante wagers must be paid even money; and
(c)
all flop, turn and river wagers are void; and
(d)
bonus wagers must be returned to the players; and
(e)
winning bonus wagers must be paid to the players in the
usual way.
If the dealer finds the deck contains 52 cards and the player’s hand
has an incorrect number of cards—
(a)
the player’s hand is void; and
(b)
all wagers placed for the hand must be returned to the player;
and
(c)
all players at the table must be given the option of retracting
their wagers.
If the dealer finds the deck contains 52 cards and both the player’s
hand and the dealer’s hand have an incorrect number of cards—
(a)
the player’s hand is void; and
(b)
all wagers placed for the hand must be returned to the player;
and
(c)
the ante wagers for other players who have folded must be
reinstated; and
(d)
all ante wagers for other players must be paid even money;
and
(e)
all flop, turn and river wagers for other players are void; and
(f)
bonus wagers for other players must be returned to the
players; and
(g)
winning bonus wagers for other players must be paid to the
players in the usual way.
313
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
32
32
Effect of card being exposed during initial deal
If any card is exposed during the initial deal, the round of play is
void.
33
34
35
Community card exposed in error
(1)
This section applies if, during a round of betting, the dealer
exposes in error a card that would otherwise have been dealt as a
community card after the round of betting.
(2)
The card exposed in error must remain in play and be dealt as the
community card after the round of betting.
Another card exposed when dealing river card
(1)
If, when dealing the river card, the dealer exposes another card in
error, the dealer must place the card exposed in error in the table’s
discard rack.
(2)
The dealer must give all the players the opportunity to view a card
exposed in error under subsection (1).
Card placed in incorrect position
If a card has been placed in an incorrect position on the layout and
no further cards have been dealt for the round of play—
(a)
the card must be moved to its correct position on the layout;
and
(b)
the round of play continues in the usual way.
314
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 15 – Texas hold’em bonus poker (continued)
Diagram 15.1—Texas hold’em bonus poker table layout
sections 9(4) and 10(b)
315
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 16
Three card poker
section 3(2)
Part 1
1
Preliminary
Conducting and playing three card poker
This schedule states the rules for conducting and playing the
casino game known as three card poker.
2
Definitions for sch 16
In this schedule—
ante bonus payment means a payment made on a winning ante
bonus hand under section 23.
ante wager means a wager made by a person to enable the person
to take part in a round of play of the game as a player.
bet wager means a wager made by a player after the cards have
been dealt and the player has had an opportunity to look at the
player’s hand.
closes a player’s hand see section 3.
continuing player means a player who has made an ante wager
and has not folded.
face value, of a card, means—
(a)
the number of the card, namely, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10; or
(b)
the type of card, namely, jack, queen, king or ace.
folds see section 4.
game means three card poker.
316
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
odd card, in relation to another card or cards, means a card with a
different face value to the other card or cards.
pair plus wager means a wager made by a player by placing the
wager in the appropriate area for pair plus wagers on the table
before the cards for a round of play are dealt.
poker hands see section 8.
poker ranking, of a hand, means the ranking of the hand worked
out under section 9.
qualifies, for a dealer’s hand, see section 5.
round of play, of the game, includes the following—
(a)
wagering;
(b)
dealing of cards;
(c)
playing the game with the cards as dealt;
(d)
deciding the winning hands;
(e)
collecting losing wagers;
(f)
paying for winning hands.
stand off see section 9(6).
wager means an ante wager, bet wager or pair plus wager.
winning ante bonus hand see section 6.
winning pair plus hand see section 7.
3
Meaning of closes a player’s hand
A dealer closes a player’s hand by—
4
(a)
collecting the player’s wagers and cards; and
(b)
individually spreading out the collected cards face down and
counting them; and
(c)
placing the cards in the table’s discard rack.
Meaning of folds
A player folds in a round of play if the player—
(a)
places the player’s cards face down on the table; and
317
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(b)
5
clearly indicates to the dealer that the player wishes to stop
taking part in the round of play.
Meaning of qualifies for a dealer’s hand
A dealer’s hand qualifies if it—
6
(a)
is an odd card hand and the combination of 3 cards includes
a queen, king or ace; or
(b)
has a poker ranking higher than an odd card hand.
Meaning of winning ante bonus hand
Each of the following is a winning ante bonus hand—
7

straight

of a kind

straight flush.
Meaning of winning pair plus hand
Each of the following is a winning pair plus hand—
8

pair

flush

straight

of a kind

straight flush.
Meaning of poker hands
(1)
The poker hands for three card poker are stated in column 1 of the
table.
(2)
Each poker hand is made up of the cards mentioned opposite the
poker hand in column 2 of the table.
318
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
9
Column 1
Column 2
Poker hand
Cards
odd card hand
any combination of 3 cards, other than
another poker hand mentioned in this
section
pair
2 cards with the same face value and 1
odd card
3 of a kind
3 cards with the same face value
straight
3 cards of more than 1 suit running
consecutively in face value
flush
3 cards of the same suit but not running
consecutively in face value
straight flush
3 cards of the same suit running
consecutively in face value
Ranking of poker hands and cards
(1)
The ranking of poker hands, from lowest to highest, is as
follows—

odd card hand

pair

flush

straight

of a kind

straight flush.
(2)
All suits of cards are of equal value.
(3)
Hands ranking the same, but with cards of different face values,
rank according to the cards’ face values.
319
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(4)
The ranking of cards, from lowest to highest, is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9, 10, jack, queen, king and ace.
(5)
If the dealer or a player has an ace, 2 and 3, the ace must rank as 1.
(6)
If the dealer’s hand and a player’s hand have the same poker
ranking and face values, it is a stand off.
Examples of application of this section—
1
A jack, queen, king straight beats a 9, 10, jack straight.
2
If there are 2 hands, each containing a pair, the hand holding the highest
pair in face values is ranked the higher. If each hand has an equally ranked
pair, the hand whose third card has the higher face value is ranked the
higher. If each hand has an equally ranked pair and the third cards of the
hands have the same face value, it is a stand off.
Part 2
10
Table, layout and equipment
Table and layout
(1)
Three card poker is played at a table with places for players on 1
side and a place for the dealer on the opposite side.
(2)
The layout cloth for the table must have printed on it—
(3)
(4)
(a)
the name of, or logo for, the casino; and
(b)
the words ‘dealer only plays with queen or higher’; and
(c)
rectangular, circular, diamond or oval areas for wagers.
The areas for wagers must be marked—
(a)
for ante wagers—by the word ‘ante’; and
(b)
for bet wagers—by the word ‘bet’; and
(c)
for pair plus wagers—by the words ‘pair plus’ or, if another
description is stated under the approved control system for
the casino, the other description.
The layout for the table is the layout in diagram 16.1 or a similar
layout approved by the chief executive.
320
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
11
Equipment
A table for the game must be equipped with—
(a)
(b)
Part 3
12
13
either—
(i)
a dealing shoe; or
(ii)
a mechanical shuffling device approved by the chief
executive for use in three card poker; and
a drop box and discard rack at approximately the locations
shown in diagram 16.1.
Preparing for the game
Cards
(1)
Three card poker is played with 1 deck of cards with backs of the
same colour and design and 1 cutting card.
(2)
However, if a mechanical shuffling device is in use at a table—
(a)
the device may be loaded with 1 deck of cards while another
deck is used in play; and
(b)
the backs of the 2 decks of cards must have different
colours; and
(c)
the table’s discard rack must only contain the cards from 1
deck at a time.
Procedures for inspecting, shuffling and cutting cards
(1)
(2)
Cards must be inspected and shuffled—
(a)
under the provisions of this part; and
(b)
under the approved control system for the casino.
Before being used in play, the cards must be inspected to check for
marks and imperfections and that each deck of cards contains the
correct cards.
321
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(3)
If a player asks to inspect the cards when the cards are first placed
on the table for play, the dealer must spread the cards face up on
the table to enable a person inspecting them to see if each deck of
cards is complete.
(4)
The cards must be shuffled—
(5)
(a)
before being used in play; and
(b)
at the end of each round of play.
If the cards have been shuffled manually by the dealer, the dealer
must cut the cards and place them with the cutting card into a
dealing shoe.
Part 4
14
Placing wagers and playing the
game
Placing ante and pair plus wagers
Before a round of play starts, each player must—
15
(a)
make an ante wager; and
(b)
be given an opportunity to make a pair plus wager.
How wagers are made
(1)
All wagers must be made by placing chips in the areas for wagers
on the table.
(2)
A player must not wager on more than 1 hand in a round of play.
(3)
Only 1 wager may be accepted on each area for wagers on the
table.
(4)
After the first card of a round of play has been removed from the
dealing shoe or mechanical shuffling device, a person must not
change, take away or touch a wager until a decision about the
wager is made, and the wager is dealt with, by the dealer.
322
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
16
Dealing the cards
(1)
After all ante wagers and pair plus wagers for a round of play have
been made, the dealer must deal the cards by starting from the
dealer’s left and continuing clockwise around the table.
(2)
The cards must be dealt in 1 of the following ways provided for
under the approved control system for the casino—
(a)
by placing in turn—
(i)
1 card to each area containing an ante wager; and
(ii)
1 card to the dealer; and
(iii) a second and third card, in sequence, to each area
containing an ante wager; and
(iv) a second and third card to the dealer;
(b)
(3)
17
by placing in turn—
(i)
3 cards at a time to each area containing an ante wager;
and
(ii)
3 cards at a time to the dealer.
The cards must be dealt face down.
Players may look at cards and fold or place a bet wager
(1)
After the cards for a round of play have been dealt, the players
may look at their cards.
(2)
A player may fold after looking at the player’s cards.
(3)
If a player folds, the dealer must close the player’s hand.
(4)
If a player decides to continue to play in the round of play, the
player must place a bet wager in the appropriate area for bet
wagers on the table and place the cards face down on the table.
(5)
A player’s bet wager must be equal to the amount of the player’s
ante wager.
(6)
A player’s cards must be in full view of the dealer during a round
of play.
323
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
18
Declaration by dealer
After all continuing players have made bet wagers and placed their
cards face down on the table, the dealer must turn all the dealer’s
cards face up and declare—
19
20
(a)
whether or not the dealer’s hand qualifies; and
(b)
if the dealer’s hand qualifies—the highest poker ranking of
the dealer’s hand.
If dealer’s hand does not qualify
(1)
This section applies if the dealer’s hand does not qualify.
(2)
After declaring that the dealer’s hand does not qualify, the dealer
must—
(a)
pay the ante wagers of the continuing players at the odds of 1
to 1; and
(b)
count and collect the cards of the continuing players and
place them in the table’s discard rack.
(3)
The bet wagers are void.
(4)
However, if a player has made an ante wager and has a winning
ante bonus hand, the dealer must not collect the player’s cards
until the dealer has dealt with the hand under sections 23 and 24.
(5)
Also, if a player has made a pair plus wager and has a winning pair
plus hand, the dealer must not collect the player’s cards until the
dealer has dealt with the hand under sections 25 and 26.
If dealer’s hand qualifies
(1)
This section applies if the dealer’s hand qualifies.
(2)
After declaring that the dealer’s hand qualifies, the dealer, starting
on the dealer’s right and continuing anticlockwise around the
table, must—
(a)
turn the cards of each continuing player face up; and
(b)
decide the highest poker ranking of the player’s hand.
324
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
21
Players must not exchange cards or communicate
A player must not—
(a)
exchange cards; or
(b)
exchange or communicate, or cause to be exchanged or
communicated, information about the player’s hand; or
(c)
speak in a language other than English if directed by a dealer
or floor manager; or
(d)
touch another player’s cards.
Part 5
22
Deciding the outcome of wagers
and paying winning wagers
Player’s hand—when it wins, loses or is a stand off
(1)
A player’s hand wins if the poker ranking of the player’s hand is
higher than the poker ranking of the dealer’s hand.
(2)
If a player’s hand wins, the dealer must—
(a)
pay the ante and bet wagers at the odds of 1 to 1; and
(b)
if the player has made an ante wager and has a winning ante
bonus hand, deal with the player’s hand as stated in sections
23 and 24; and
(c)
pay the ante wager at odds of 1 to 1; and
(d)
if the player has made a pairs plus wager and has a winning
pair plus hand, deal with the player’s hand as stated in
sections 25 and 26; and
(d)
collect the player’s cards and place them in the table’s
discard rack..
(3)
A player’s hand loses if the poker ranking of the player’s hand is
lower than the poker ranking of the dealer’s hand.
(4)
If a player’s hand loses, the dealer must—
(a)
collect the bet wager; and
325
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(b)
if the player has made an ante wager and has a winning ante
bonus hand, deal with the player’s hand as stated in sections
23 and 24; and
(c)
collect the ante wager; and
(d)
if the player has made a pairs plus wager and has a winning
pair plus hand, deal with the player’s hand as stated in
sections 25 and 26; and
(e)
collect the player’s cards and place them in the table’s
discard rack.
(5) If a player’s hand is a stand off—
23
24
(a)
the player’s wagers for the hand neither win nor lose under
this section; and
(b)
the dealer must close the player’s hand.
Winning ante bonus hand
(1)
If a player has made an ante wager and has a winning ante bonus
hand, the dealer must pay the winning ante bonus hand at the
corresponding payment odds mentioned in section 24.
(2)
Subsection (1) applies—
(a)
whether or not the player’s hand is a winning hand under
section 22; and
(b)
whether or not the dealer’s hand qualifies.
Payment odds for winning ante bonus hands
The payment odds for winning ante bonus hands are as follows—
Winning ante bonus hand
Payment odds
straight
1 to 1
3 of a kind
4 to 1
straight flush
5 to 1.
326
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
25
26
Winning pair plus hand
(1)
If a player has made a pair plus wager and has a winning pair plus
hand, the dealer must pay the winning pair plus hand at the
corresponding payment odds mentioned in section 26.
(2)
Subsection (1) applies—
(a)
whether or not the player’s hand is a winning hand under
section 22; and
(b)
whether or not the dealer’s hand qualifies.
Payment odds for winning pair plus hands
The payment odds for winning pair plus hands are as follows—
Winning pair plus hand
Payment odds
pair
1 to 1
flush
4 to 1
straight
6 to 1
3 of a kind
25 to 1
straight flush
40 to 1.
Part 6
27
Irregularities
Bet wager under or over the ante wager amount
If, while acting on the hands, the dealer becomes aware that a bet
wager is—
(a)
more than the amount of the ante wager—the dealer must
give the excess amount to the player and take or pay the
wager accordingly; or
327
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(b)
28
less than the amount of the ante wager—the dealer must take
or pay according to the amount wagered and tell the player
that for subsequent rounds of play the player’s bet wager
must be equal to the amount of the player’s ante wager.
Card dealt when no ante wager
If a card is dealt to a player who has not placed an ante wager—
29
(a)
the player’s hand is void; and
(b)
any pair plus wager placed by the player for the round of
play must be returned to the player; and
(c)
all players at the table must be given the option of retracting
their wagers.
Player wagering on more than 1 betting area
If a player has been dealt more than 1 hand in a round of play—
30
(a)
the player’s hand, for the round of play, is the first hand dealt
to the player; and
(b)
other hands dealt to the player are void; and
(c)
all players at the table must be given the option of retracting
their wagers.
Incorrect number of cards
(1)
(2)
If an incorrect number of cards are dealt to a player or the dealer
and none of the players have looked at the players’ cards—
(a)
the round of play is void; and
(b)
the dealer must immediately tell a casino employee of the
level of floor manager or higher; and
(c)
the employee must direct the dealer to count the cards to
verify there are 52; and
(d)
if the dealer finds the deck does not contain 52 cards—a
casino employee of the level of pit boss or higher must
notify an inspector.
If an incorrect number of cards are dealt to a player or the dealer’s
hand and any player has looked at the player’s cards—
328
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(a)
the dealer must immediately tell a casino employee of the
level of floor manager or higher; and
(b)
the employee must direct the dealer to count the cards to
verify there are 52.
If the dealer finds the deck does not contain 52 cards—
(a)
a casino employee of the level of pit boss or higher must
notify an inspector; and
(b)
the round of play is void; and
(c)
all wagers placed for the round of play must be returned to
the players.
If the dealer finds the deck contains 52 cards and the dealer’s hand
has an incorrect number of cards—
(a)
the dealer must declare the dealer’s hand does not qualify;
and
(b)
the ante wagers for the players who have folded must be
reinstated; and
(c)
all ante wagers must be paid even money; and
(d)
all ante bonus payments must be made to the players in the
usual way; and
(e)
all bet wagers are void; and
(f)
pair plus wagers must be returned to the players; and
(g)
winning pair plus wagers must be paid to the players in the
usual way.
If the dealer finds the deck contains 52 cards and the player’s hand
has an incorrect number of cards—
(a)
the player’s hand is void; and
(b)
all wagers placed for the hand must be returned to the player;
and
(c)
all players at the table must be given the option of retracting
their wagers.
If the dealer finds the deck contains 52 cards and both the player’s
hand and the dealer’s hand have an incorrect number of cards—
(a)
the player’s hand is void; and
329
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
31
(b)
all wagers placed for the hand must be returned to the player;
and
(c)
the dealer must declare the dealer’s hand does not qualify;
and
(d)
the ante wager for other players who have folded must be
reinstated; and
(e)
all ante wagers for other players must be paid even money;
and
(f)
all ante bonus payments must be made to the other players in
the usual way; and
(g)
all bet wagers for other players are void; and
(h)
pair plus wagers for other players must be returned to the
players; and
(i)
winning pair plus wagers for other players must be paid to
the players in the usual way.
Effect of card being exposed during a deal
If any card is exposed during a deal, the round of play is void.
32
Card placed in incorrect position
If a card has been placed in an incorrect position on the layout and
no further cards have been dealt for the round of play—
(a)
the card must be moved to its correct position on the layout;
and
(b)
the round of play continues in the usual way.
330
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 16 – Three card poker (continued)
Diagram 16.1—Three card poker table layout
sections 10(4) and 11(b)
331
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 17
Four card poker
section 3(2)
Part 1
1
Preliminary
Conducting and playing four card poker
This schedule states the rules for conducting and playing the
casino game known as four card poker.
2
Definitions for sch 17
In this schedule—
aces up wager means a wager made by a player by placing the
wager in the appropriate area for aces up wagers on the table.
ante bonus payment means a payment made on a winning ante
bonus hand under section 21.
ante wager means a wager made by a person to enable the person
to take part in a round of play of the game as a player.
bet wager means a wager made by a player after the cards have
been dealt and the player has had an opportunity to look at the
player’s hand.
closes a player’s hand see section 3.
continuing player means a player who has made an ante wager
and has not folded.
dealer’s upcard see section 15(2)(a)(v) or (2)(b)(iii).
face value, of a card, means—
332
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(a)
the number of the card, namely, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10; or
(b)
the type of card, namely, jack, queen, king or ace.
folds see section 4.
game means four card poker.
odd card, in relation to another card or cards, means a card with a
different face value to the other card or cards.
poker hands see section 7.
poker ranking, of a hand, means the ranking of the hand worked
out under section 8.
round of play, of the game, includes the following—
(a)
wagering;
(b)
dealing of cards;
(c)
playing the game with the cards as dealt;
(d)
deciding the winning hands;
(e)
collecting losing wagers;
(f)
paying for winning hands.
wager means an ante wager, bet wager or aces up wager.
winning aces up hand see section 6.
winning ante bonus hand see section 5.
3
Meaning of closes a player’s hand
A dealer closes a player’s hand by—
4
(a)
collecting the player’s wagers and cards; and
(b)
individually spreading out the collected cards face down and
counting them; and
(c)
placing the cards in the table’s discard rack.
Meaning of folds
A player folds in a round of play if the player—
(a)
places the player’s cards face down on the table; and
333
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(b)
5
clearly indicates to the dealer that the player wishes to stop
taking part in the round of play.
Meaning of winning ante bonus hand
Each of the following is a winning ante bonus hand—
6

of a kind

straight flush

of a kind.
Meaning of winning aces up hand
Each of the following is a winning aces up hand—
7

pair of aces

2 pairs

flush

straight

of a kind

straight flush

of a kind.
Meaning of poker hands
(1)
The poker hands for four card poker are stated in column 1 of the
table.
(2)
Each poker hand is made up of the cards mentioned opposite the
poker hand in column 2 of the table.
334
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
8
Column 1
Column 2
Poker hand
Cards
odd card hand
any combination of 4 cards, other than
another poker hand mentioned in this
section
1 pair
2 cards with the same face value and 2
odd cards
2 pairs
2 cards with the same face value and
another 2 cards with the same face value
(other than the face value of the first 2
cards)
straight
4 cards of more than 1 suit running
consecutively in face value
flush
4 cards of the same suit but not running
consecutively in face value
3 of a kind
3 cards with the same face value and 1
odd card
straight flush
4 cards of the same suit running
consecutively in face value
4 of a kind
4 cards with the same face value
Ranking of poker hands and cards
(1)
The ranking of poker hands, from lowest to highest, is as
follows—

odd card hand

1 pair

2 pairs

straight
335
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________

flush

3 of a kind

straight flush

4 of a kind.
(2)
All suits of cards are of equal value.
(3)
Hands ranking the same, but with cards of different face values,
rank according to the cards’ face values.
(4)
The ranking of cards, from lowest to highest, is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9, 10, jack, queen, king and ace.
(5)
If the dealer or a player has an ace, 2, 3 and 4, the ace must rank as
1.
(6)
If the dealer’s hand and a player’s hand have the same poker
ranking and face values, the player wins.
Examples of application of this section—
1
A jack, queen, king, ace straight beats a 9, 10, jack, queen straight.
2
If there are 2 hands, each containing 1 pair, the hand holding the highest
pair in face values is ranked the higher. If each hand has an equally ranked
pair with the same face values, the hand whose third card has the higher
face value is ranked the higher. If the third cards of the hands have the
same face value, the hand whose fourth card has the higher face value is
ranked the higher. If the third cards of the hands have the same face value
and the fourth cards of the hands have the same face value, the player wins.
Part 2
9
Table, layout and equipment
Table and layout
(1)
Four card poker is played at a table with places for players on 1
side and a place for the dealer on the opposite side.
(2)
The layout cloth for the table must have printed on it—
(a)
the name of, or logo for, the casino; and
336
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(3)
(4)
10
(b)
the words ‘dealer always qualifies’ and ‘player wins ties’;
and
(c)
rectangular, circular or oval areas for wagers.
The areas for wagers must be marked—
(a)
for ante wagers—by the word ‘ante’; and
(b)
for bet wagers—by the words ‘play 1x to 3x ante’; and
(c)
for aces up wagers—by the words ‘aces up’ or, if another
description is stated under the approved control system for
the casino, the other description.
The layout for the table is the layout in diagram 17.1 or a similar
layout approved by the chief executive.
Equipment
A table for the game must be equipped with—
(a)
(b)
Part 3
11
either—
(i)
a dealing shoe; or
(ii)
a mechanical shuffling device approved by the chief
executive for use in four card poker; and
a drop box and discard rack at approximately the locations
shown in diagram 17.1.
Preparing for the game
Cards
(1)
Four card poker is played with 1 deck of cards with backs of the
same colour and design and 1 cutting card.
(2)
However, if a mechanical shuffling device is in use at a table—
(a)
the device may be loaded with 1 deck of cards while another
deck is used in play; and
337
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
12
(b)
the backs of the 2 decks of cards must have different
colours; and
(c)
the table’s discard rack must only contain the cards from 1
deck at a time.
Procedures for inspecting, shuffling and cutting cards
(1)
Cards must be inspected and shuffled—
(a)
under the provisions of this part; and
(b)
under the approved control system for the casino.
(2)
Before being used in play, the cards must be inspected to check for
marks and imperfections and that each deck of cards contains the
correct cards.
(3)
If a player asks to inspect the cards when the cards are first placed
on the table for play, the dealer must spread the cards face up on
the table to enable a person inspecting them to see if each deck of
cards is complete.
(4)
The cards must be shuffled—
(5)
(a)
before being used in play; and
(b)
at the end of each round of play.
If the cards have been shuffled manually by the dealer, the dealer
must cut the cards and place them with the cutting card into a
dealing shoe.
Part 4
13
Placing wagers and playing the
game
Placing ante and aces up wagers
Before a round of play starts, each player must—
(a)
make an ante wager; and
(b)
be given an opportunity to make an aces up wager.
338
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
14
15
How wagers are made
(1)
All wagers must be made by placing chips in the areas for wagers
on the table.
(2)
A player must not wager on more than 1 hand in a round of play.
(3)
Only 1 wager may be accepted on each area for wagers on the
table.
(4)
After the first card of a round of play has been removed from the
dealing shoe or mechanical shuffling device, a person must not
change, take away or touch a wager until a decision about the
wager is made, and the wager is dealt with, by the dealer.
Dealing the cards
(1)
After all ante wagers and aces up wagers for a round of play have
been made, the dealer must deal the cards by starting from the
dealer’s left and continuing clockwise around the table.
(2)
The cards must be dealt in 1 of the following ways provided for
under the approved control system for the casino—
(a)
by placing in turn—
(i)
1 card face down to each area containing an ante
wager; and
(ii)
1 card face down to the dealer; and
(iii) a second, third, fourth and fifth card, face down in
sequence, to each area containing an ante wager; and
(iv) a second, third, fourth and fifth card, face down in
sequence, to the dealer; and
(v)
(b)
a sixth card (the dealer’s upcard) face up to the dealer;
by placing in turn—
(i)
5 cards at a time face down to each area containing an
ante wager; and
(ii)
5 cards at a time face down to the dealer; and
(iii) a sixth card (also the dealer’s upcard) face up to the
dealer.
339
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
16
17
Players may look at cards and fold or place a bet wager
(1)
After the cards for a round of play have been dealt, the players
may look at their cards.
(2)
A player may fold after looking at the player’s cards.
(3)
If a player folds, the dealer must close the player’s hand.
(4)
If a player decides to continue to play in the round of play, the
player must discard 1 card face down on the table, place a bet
wager in the appropriate area for bet wagers on the table and place
the remaining cards face down on the table.
(5)
A player’s bet wager must be equal to, twice, or 3 times, the
amount of the player’s ante wager.
(6)
A player’s cards must be in full view of the dealer during a round
of play.
Declaration by dealer
After all continuing players have made bet wagers and placed their
cards face down on the table, the dealer must turn all the dealer’s
remaining cards face up and declare the highest poker ranking of
the dealer’s hand.
18
Deciding the highest poker ranking of player’s hand
The dealer, starting on the dealer’s right and continuing
anticlockwise around the table, must—
19
(a)
turn the cards of each continuing player face up; and
(b)
decide the highest poker ranking of the player’s hand.
Players must not exchange cards or communicate
A player must not—
(a)
exchange cards; or
(b)
exchange or communicate, or cause to be exchanged or
communicated, information about the player’s hand; or
(c)
speak in a language other than English if directed by a dealer
or floor manager; or
340
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(d)
Part 5
20
21
touch another player’s cards.
Deciding the outcome of wagers
and paying winning wagers
Player’s hand—when it wins or loses
(1)
A player’s hand wins if the poker ranking of the player’s hand is
higher than, or equal to, the poker ranking of the dealer’s hand.
(2)
If a player’s hand wins, the dealer must—
(a)
pay the ante and bet wagers at the odds of 1 to 1; and
(b)
collect the player’s cards and place them in the table’s
discard rack.
(3)
A player’s hand loses if the poker ranking of the player’s hand is
lower than the poker ranking of the dealer’s hand.
(4)
If a player’s hand loses, the dealer must—
(a)
collect the ante and bet wagers for the hand; and
(b)
close the player’s hand.
(5)
However, if a player has made an ante wager and has a winning
ante bonus hand, the dealer must deal with the player’s hand under
sections 21 and 22.
(6)
Also, if a player has made an aces up wager and has a winning
aces up hand, the dealer must deal with the player’s hand under
sections 23 and 24.
Winning ante bonus hand
(1)
If a player has made an ante wager and has a winning ante bonus
hand, the dealer must pay the winning ante bonus hand at the
corresponding payment odds mentioned in section 22.
(2)
Subsection (1) applies whether or not the player’s hand is a
winning hand under section 20.
341
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(3)
22
Payments for winning ante bonus hands are made after all ante and
bet wagers have been collected or paid.
Payment odds for winning ante bonus hands
The payment odds for winning ante bonus hands are as follows—
Winning ante bonus hand
23
24
Payment odds
3 of a kind
2 to 1
straight flush
20 to 1
4 of a kind
25 to 1.
Winning aces up hand
(1)
If a player has made an aces up wager and has a winning aces up
hand, the dealer must pay the winning aces up hand at the
corresponding payment odds mentioned in section 24.
(2)
Subsection (1) applies whether or not the player’s hand is a
winning hand under section 20.
(3)
Payments for winning aces up hands are made after all ante and
bet wagers have been collected or paid.
Payment odds for winning aces up hands
The payment odds for winning aces up hands are as follows—
Winning aces up hand
Payment odds
pair of aces
1 to 1
2 pairs
2 to 1
straight
5 to 1
flush
6 to 1
3 of a kind
7 to 1
342
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
straight flush
30 to 1
4 of a kind
50 to 1.
Part 6
25
Irregularities
Bet wager under, or more than 3 times, the ante wager
amount
If, while acting on the hands, the dealer becomes aware that a bet
wager is—
26
(a)
more than 3 times the amount of the ante wager—the dealer
must give the excess amount to the player and take or pay
the wager accordingly; or
(b)
less than the amount of the ante wager—the dealer must take
or pay according to the amount wagered and tell the player
that for subsequent rounds of play the player’s bet wager
must be equal to, twice, or 3 times, the amount of the
player’s ante wager.
Card dealt when no ante wager
If a card is dealt to a player who has not placed an ante wager—
27
(a)
the player’s hand is void; and
(b)
any aces up wager placed by the player for the round of play
must be returned to the player; and
(c)
all players at the table must be given the option of retracting
their wagers.
Player wagering on more than 1 betting area
If a player has been dealt more than 1 hand in a round of play—
(a)
the player’s hand, for the round of play, is the first hand dealt
to the player; and
343
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
28
(b)
other hands dealt to the player are void; and
(c)
all players at the table must be given the option of retracting
their wagers.
Incorrect number of cards
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
If an incorrect number of cards are dealt to a player or the dealer
and none of the players have looked at the players’ cards—
(a)
the round of play is void; and
(b)
the dealer must immediately tell a casino employee of the
level of floor manager or higher; and
(c)
the employee must direct the dealer to count the cards to
verify there are 52; and
(d)
if the dealer finds the deck does not contain 52 cards—a
casino employee of the level of pit boss or higher must
notify an inspector.
If an incorrect number of cards are dealt to a player or the dealer’s
hand and any player has looked at the player’s cards—
(a)
the dealer must immediately tell a casino employee of the
level of floor manager or higher; and
(b)
the employee must direct the dealer to count the cards to
verify there are 52.
If the dealer finds the deck does not contain 52 cards—
(a)
a casino employee of the level of pit boss or higher must
notify an inspector; and
(b)
the round of play is void; and
(c)
all wagers placed for the round of play must be returned to
the players.
If the dealer finds the deck contains 52 cards and the dealer’s hand
has an incorrect number of cards—
(a)
the ante wagers for the players who have folded must be
reinstated; and
(b)
all ante wagers must be paid even money; and
(c)
all ante bonus payments must be made to the players in the
usual way; and
344
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(5)
(6)
29
(d)
all bet wagers are void; and
(e)
aces up wagers must be returned to the players; and
(f)
winning aces up wagers must be paid to the players in the
usual way.
If the dealer finds the deck contains 52 cards and the player’s hand
has an incorrect number of cards—
(a)
the player’s hand is void; and
(b)
all wagers placed for the hand must be returned to the player;
and
(c)
all players at the table must be given the option of retracting
their wagers.
If the dealer finds the deck contains 52 cards and both the player’s
hand and the dealer’s hand have an incorrect number of cards—
(a)
the player’s hand is void; and
(b)
all wagers placed for the hand must be returned to the player;
and
(c)
the ante wager for other players who have folded must be
reinstated; and
(d)
all ante wagers for other players must be paid even money;
and
(e)
all ante bonus payments must be made to the other players in
the usual way; and
(f)
all bet wagers for other players are void; and
(g)
aces up wagers for other players must be returned to the
players; and
(h)
winning aces up wagers for other players must be paid to the
players in the usual way.
Effect of card being exposed during a deal
(1)
If any card is exposed during a deal, the round of play is void.
(2)
However, if 1 card is exposed during the deal and the card is dealt
to the dealer—
(a)
the card must be used as the dealer’s upcard; and
345
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(b)
30
play continues in the usual way.
Card placed in incorrect position
If a card has been placed in an incorrect position on the layout and
no further cards have been dealt for the round of play—
(a)
the card must be moved to its correct position on the layout;
and
(b)
the round of play continues in the usual way.
346
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 17 – Four card poker table layout
Diagram 17.1—Four card poker table layout
sections 9(4) and 10(b)
347
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 18
Casino war
section 3(2)
Part 1
1
Preliminary
Conducting and playing casino war
This schedule states the rules for conducting and playing the
casino game known as casino war.
2
Definitions for sch 18
In this schedule—
casino war wager see section 7(2).
go to war means when the player’s first card and the dealer’s first
card are of equal rank and the player elects to continue the game.
go to war wager see section 7(2).
surrender means when the player’s first card and the dealer’s first
card are of equal rank and the player elects to forfeit half of their
casino war wager.
tie wager see section 7(2).
3
Table and layout
(1)
Casino war is played at a table having a place for the dealer on 1
side and places for the players on the opposite side.
(2)
The layout cloth for the casino war table must have printed on it—
(a)
the name of, or logo for, the casino; and
348
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(b)
(3)
(4)
4
rectangular, circular or oval areas to show boxes for casino
war wagers, go to war wagers and tie wagers.
The areas for wagers must be marked—
(a)
for casino war wagers—by the word ‘bet’; and
(b)
for go to war wagers—by the word ‘war’; and
(c)
for tie wagers—by the word ‘tie’ or, if another description is
stated under the approved control system for the casino, the
other description.
The layout for the table is the layout in diagram 18.1 or a similar
layout approved by the chief executive.
Drop box and discard holder
The casino war table must have a drop box and a discard holder
attached to it at approximately the position shown in diagram 18.1.
Part 2
5
6
General rules
Number of decks and way cards are dealt
(1)
Casino war is played with 6 or 8 decks of cards with backs of the
same colour and design and 2 additional cutting cards.
(2)
All cards must be dealt from a dealing shoe designed for the
purpose and located on the table to the left of the dealer.
Value of cards
(1)
All suits of cards are of equal value.
(2)
The ranking of cards, from lowest to highest, is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9, 10, jack, queen, king and ace.
349
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
7
Permissible wagers and results
(1)
The wagers defined in this section are the permissible wagers by a
player at a game of casino war.
(2)
In this schedule—
casino war wager means a wager that —
(a)
wins if the player’s first card is of a higher rank than the
dealer’s first card; and
(b)
loses if the player’s first card is of a lower rank than the
dealer’s first card; and
(c)
is surrendered if the player’s first card and the dealer’s first
card are of equal rank and the player declines to go to war;
and
(d)
is void if the player has elected to go to war and the player’s
additional card is of equal rank to or higher rank than the
dealer’s additional card; and
(e)
loses if the player has elected to go to war and the player’s
additional card is of a lower rank than the dealer’s additional
card.
tie wager means a wager that—
(a)
wins if the player’s first card and the dealer’s first card are of
equal rank; and
(b)
loses if the player’s first card and the dealer’s first card are
not of equal rank.
go to war wager means the additional wager of an amount equal to
the player’s casino war wager that —
8
(a)
wins if the player’s additional card is of equal rank to or
higher rank than the dealer’s additional card; and
(b)
loses if the player’s additional card is of a lower rank than
the dealer’s additional card.
How wagers may be made
(1)
A wager at casino war is made by placing gaming chips on the
appropriate wager area of the casino war layout.
(2)
A wager can not be made orally.
350
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
9
10
11
(3)
Only 1 wager may be accepted on each area for wagers.
(4)
Each player at a game of casino war must make a casino war
wager against the dealer prior to any cards being dealt for a round
of play.
(5)
A player at a game of casino war may also make a tie wager only if
the player has made a casino war wager.
(6)
A player’s tie bet must not be more than three times their casino
war wager.
(7)
A go to war wager may only be made in accordance with section
17.
When wagers can not be placed, changed or withdrawn
(1)
After the first card of a round of play has been removed from the
shoe, a player must not handle, remove or alter their casino war
wager or tie wager until a decision about the wager has been made
and has taken effect.
(2)
After a go to war wager has been made by a player and confirmed
by the dealer, the player must not handle, remove or alter any
wager until a decision about the wager has been made and has
taken effect.
Circumstances when a player may wager on more than 1 box
(1)
A player may be permitted to place a casino war wager and tie
wager on more than 1 box at a casino war table with the
understanding that, when there are not enough seats in the casino
to accommodate patron demand, a player wagering on more than 1
box must give up a box or boxes to accommodate other players.
(2)
If a player is permitted to place a casino war wager and tie wager
on more than 1 box at a table, the player must make at least the
minimum wager on each hand played.
Minimum and maximum wagers
(1)
If the minimum wager permitted for a table is not more than $10,
the maximum wager permitted for the table must be at least $500.
351
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(2)
12
13
A tie wager must not be more than one-tenth of the maximum
wager permitted for the table.
Payout odds
(1)
A winning casino war wager is paid at odds of 1 to 1.
(2)
A winning tie wager is paid at odds of 10 to 1.
(3)
A winning go to war wager is paid at—
(a)
odds of 1 to 1 when the player’s additional card is of a
higher rank than the dealer’s additional card; and
(b)
odds of 2 to 1 when the player’s additional card is of equal
rank to the dealer’s additional card.
Procedures for inspecting and shuffling cards
(1)
Cards must be inspected and shuffled—
(a)
under the provisions of this schedule; and
(b)
under the approved control system for the casino.
(2)
Before being used in play, the cards must be inspected to check for
marks and imperfections and that each deck of cards contains the
correct cards.
(3)
If a player asks to inspect the cards when the cards are first placed
on the table for play, the dealer must spread the cards face up on
the table to enable a person inspecting them to see if each deck of
cards is complete.
(4)
The cards must be shuffled—
(a)
before being brought into play; and
(b)
after the cutting card is reached in the dealing shoe, unless—
(c)
(5)
(i)
the cards are taken out of play; or
(ii)
the table is to close at the end of the last round of play;
and
after a round of play if directed by a floor manager.
The dealer must reshuffle cards that have been preshuffled if a
player asks the dealer to reshuffle the cards before the first card is
removed from the dealing shoe.
352
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
14
15
Cutting the cards
(1)
After the cards have been shuffled, the cards must be cut.
(2)
Two cutting cards must be used.
(3)
The dealer must offer the stack of cards, with backs facing away
from the dealer, to the players to be cut.
(4)
The player specified in section 15 must cut the cards by placing 1
of the cutting cards in the stack at least 10 cards from either end.
(5)
The stack of cards must be cut only once by the player.
(6)
After the cutting card has been inserted into the stack by the
player, the dealer must take the cutting card and all cards in front
of the cutting card and place them to the back of the stack.
(7)
The dealer must insert the other cutting card in a position
approximately 1 deck or more in from the back of the stack or at
the discretion of a pit manager insert the cutting card in a position
between approximately half of the way in from the back of the
stack.
(8)
The stack of cards must then be inserted in the dealing shoe for
start of play.
Selecting player to cut cards
(1)
(2)
The player to cut the cards must be—
(a)
the first player to the table immediately before the start of
play; or
(b)
the player on whose box the cutting card appeared during the
last round of play; or
(c)
if the cutting card appeared on the dealer’s hand during the
last round of play—the player at the farthest point to the
right of the dealer; or
(d)
if the reshuffle of the cards was under section 13(4)(c)—the
player at the farthest point to the right of the dealer.
If the player specified in subsection (1) refuses to cut, the cards
must be offered to each other player moving clockwise around the
table until a player accepts the cut.
353
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
16
(3)
A player specified in subsection (1) or a player who accepts the cut
under subsection (2) may ask another player to cut the cards.
(4)
If no player accepts the cut, the floor manager or the dealer must
cut the cards.
Replacing the cards
A floor manager may, after a round of play, direct that the cards be
replaced.
17
Initial deal
(1)
(2)
At the start of each round of play, the dealer must, starting on the
dealer’s left and continuing around the table, deal the cards in the
following order—
(a)
one card face up to each box on the layout which contains a
casino war wager;
(b)
one card face up to the dealer.
After 1 card has been dealt to each player and 1 card to the dealer,
the dealer must, starting from the dealer’s right, settle in the
following order—
(a)
all tie wagers;
(b)
all winning and losing casino war wagers.
(3)
Once the dealer has settled all winning or losing casino war
wagers, the dealer must place the card dealt to the wagers in the
discard rack.
(4)
After the dealer has settled all winning and losing casino war
wagers, each player whose first card is of equal rank to the dealer’s
first card must indicate whether they wish to surrender or go to
war.
(5)
For subsection (4), if a player elects to—
(a)
surrender, the dealer must take half of the player’s casino
war wager and place the player’s card in the discard rack
(b)
go to war, the player must place a go to war wager beside
their casino war wager.
354
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
18
Subsequent deal
(1)
(2)
(3)
19
After the dealer has settled all wagers described in section 17 and
has acknowledged the decisions of players who have elected to go
to war, the dealer must, starting on the dealer’s left and continuing
around the table, deal the cards in the following order—
(a)
one card face up to each box on the layout which contains a
go to war wager;
(b)
one card face up to the dealer.
At the end of the subsequent deal, the dealer must, starting from
the dealer’s right—
(a)
settle each player’s go to war wager and casino war wager;
and
(b)
place the player’s cards in the discard rack.
After all the player’s cards have been discarded, the dealer must
place their cards in the discard rack.
Procedure when cutting card is reached
When the cutting card is reached in a round of play, the dealer
must continue dealing the cards until the round of play is
completed and then reshuffle the cards.
20
Players not to handle cards
A player or spectator must not handle, remove or alter any cards
used in a game of casino war.
21
Player responsible for own card rank
Each player at the table is responsible for correctly computing the
ranking of their hand and may not rely on the rank announced by
the dealer.
355
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 3
22
Irregularities
Exposed card in rack
A card found face up in the shoe must be removed from play and
placed in the discard rack.
23
Card drawn in error to be used in play
A card drawn in error from the shoe if not disclosed is used as the
next card from the shoe.
24
Card drawn in error not to be used in play
(1)
(2)
25
This section applies if—
(a)
during the subsequent deal, it is noticed that a card has been
dealt to a betting area without a wager after the dealer has
acted on a hand; or
(b)
a card is drawn in error from the shoe to the dealer’s
completed hand.
The card must be removed from play and placed in the discard
rack.
Not enough cards in shoe to complete a round of play
If there are not enough cards remaining in the shoe to complete a
round of play, the dealer must shuffle and cut the cards in the
discard rack and complete the round of play.
26
Incorrect placement of card
(1)
If, during the initial dealing of cards in a round of play, any of the
cards are incorrectly placed, and the incorrect placement is noticed
before the dealer acts on any hand, the cards must be placed in the
order they would have been in if the incorrect placement had not
happened.
(2)
For subsection (1), a dealer is taken to have acted on a hand if—
356
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
27
28
(a)
the dealer has accepted a player’s go to war wager; or
(b)
has acted on a player’s decision to surrender by collecting
half of the player’s casino war wager; or
(c)
a player’s wager has been settled.
No second card dealt to a player’s hand
(1)
If, during the subsequent dealing of cards in a round of play, a
second card has not been dealt to a player (Player A) who has
placed a go to war wager and the dealer has acted on another
player’s hand (Player B), Player A’s casino war wager and go to
war wager will be void.
(2)
If, during the subsequent dealing of cards in a round of play, a
second card has not been dealt to a player (Player A) who has
placed a go to war wager and this error is noticed before the dealer
acts on another player’s hand (Player B), all cards dealt during the
subsequent deal must be placed in the order they would have been
in if Player A was dealt a second card.
(3)
For subsection (1) and (2), a dealer is taken to have acted on a
hand if the go to war wager has been settled.
Player not acting on hand after wagering
If a player makes a casino war wager in accordance with section
8(1) and is not present to make a decision to go to war or
surrender, then the player shall be deemed to have surrendered.
29
No cards dealt to the dealer’s hand
If, after the initial deal, it is noticed that the dealer has not been
dealt a card, a card will be dealt to the dealer.
30
Misdeals
(1)
A misdeal happens for a round of play if—
(a)
a player’s hand contains too many cards; or
(b)
an incorrect number of cards were dealt to the dealer's hand.
357
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(2)
If a dealer declares a misdeal for a round of play, all wagers will
be void.
Part 4
31
Use of card machine
Card machine
(1)
A card machine may be used for casino war.
(2)
Section 5(2) does not apply if a card machine is used.
(3)
If a card machine is used, the operation of parts 1 to 3 is changed
to the extent necessary for the following to have effect—
(a)
the number of decks used must be not less than the
minimum, and not more than the maximum (which in turn
must be not more than 8), number of decks approved by the
chief executive for use in the card machine;
(b)
when play is started, or if the cards in the card machine are
replaced under section 16, the cards must be inspected and
shuffled and then placed in the card machine;
(c)
the cards do not need to be cut before being placed in the
card machine;
(d)
a cutting card may be used to conceal the bottom card of the
cards placed into the machine, but it must be removed from
the machine before cards for the first round of play are dealt;
(e)
cutting cards are not used for the game, other than in the way
mentioned in paragraph (d);
(f)
for dealing the cards, the card machine takes the place of the
dealing shoe;
(g)
cards that have been placed in the discard rack are placed in
the card machine to be mixed with the remaining cards in the
machine.
358
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
32
Card machine malfunction
(1)
This section applies if a card machine malfunctions during a round
of play.
(2)
A casino employee responsible for supervising table games must
ensure that the card machine is repaired or replaced in accordance
with the casino’s approved control system.
(3)
If the casino employee considers that the malfunction has
disadvantaged a player, each player must be given the opportunity
to have their wagers for the round of play returned to the player
before the round of play is continued.
359
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 18 – Casino war (continued)
Diagram 18.1—Casino war table layout
section 4
360
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 19
Double deck blackjack
section 3(2)
Part 1
1
Preliminary
Conducting and playing double deck blackjack
This schedule states the rules for conducting and playing the
casino game known as double deck blackjack.
2
Definitions for sch 19
In this schedule—
blackjack means an ace and any card having a point value of 10
dealt as the first 2 cards to a player or a dealer.
dealer means the person responsible for dealing the cards at a
double deck blackjack table.
double down see section 24.
double deck blackjack wager see section 7(1).
hard total means the point total of a hand containing no aces or
containing aces that are counted as 1 in value.
insurance wager means a wager under section 23.
soft total means the point total of a hand containing an ace if the
ace is counted as 11 in value.
split, for cards or a hand of cards, means to split the cards or hand
of cards under section 25.
361
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
3
Table and layout
(1)
Double deck blackjack is played at a table having a place for the
dealer on 1 side and places for the players on the opposite side.
(2)
The layout cloth for the double deck blackjack table must have
printed on it—
(3)
4
(a)
the name of, or logo for, the casino; and
(b)
rectangular, circular or oval areas to show boxes for wagers.
The following words must be printed on the layout cloth—
•
blackjack pays 3 to 2
•
dealer must stand on 17 and must draw to 16
•
insurance pays 2 to 1.
Drop box and discard rack
Each double deck blackjack table must have a drop box and a
discard rack attached to it at approximately the positions shown in
diagram 19.1.
Part 2
5
6
General rules
Number of decks
(1)
Double deck blackjack is played with 2 decks of cards with backs
of the same colour and design and 2 additional cutting cards.
(2)
However, if a mechanical shuffling device is in use at a table, the
device may be loaded with 2 additional decks of cards with backs
of a different colour to the 2 decks of cards being used in play.
Value of cards
(1)
The value of the cards contained in each deck is as follows—
(a)
a card from 2 to 10 has its face value;
(b)
a jack, queen or king has a value of 10;
362
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(c)
(2)
7
14
If a value of 11 for an ace would give a player or the dealer a point
total of more than 21, the ace has a value of 1.
Winning and losing wagers
(1)
Before the first card is dealt for each round of play, each player at
a game of double deck blackjack must make a wager (a double
deck blackjack wager) against the dealer.
(2)
The wager—
(3)
8
unless subsection (2) or section 24(4)14 applies, an ace has a
value of 11.
(a)
wins if the player’s point total is not more than 21 and the
dealer’s point total is more than 21; or
(b)
wins if the player’s point total is more than the dealer’s point
total but neither is more than 21; or
(c)
wins if the player has a blackjack and the dealer does not
have a blackjack; or
(d)
loses if the dealer has a blackjack and the player does not
have a blackjack; or
(e)
is void if the player’s and the dealer’s point totals are the
same or the player and the dealer both have a blackjack; or
(f)
loses if the player’s point total is more than 21; or
(g)
loses if the dealer’s point total is more than the player’s
point total but neither is more than 21.
If the player has split cards and the dealer has a blackjack—
(a)
the player’s double deck blackjack wager loses; and
(b)
the additional wager made by splitting the cards is void.
How wagers may be made
(1)
A wager at double deck blackjack is made by placing chips in the
appropriate area of the layout.
(2)
A wager can not be made orally.
Section 24—
(4)
An ace in the first 2 cards of a double down has a value of 1, not 11.
363
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
9
10
11
12
Payout odds for winning wagers
(1)
Winning wagers, other than for a blackjack and an insurance
wager, are paid at odds of 1 to 1.
(2)
A blackjack is paid at odds of 3 to 2.
(3)
A winning insurance wager is paid at odds of 2 to 1.
Time for wagering
(1)
After the first card of a round of play has been removed from the
shoe, a player must not handle, remove or alter the double deck
blackjack wager on hand until a decision about the wager has been
made and has taken effect.
(2)
After a wager on the insurance line, a wager to double down or a
wager to split cards has been made and confirmed by the dealer, a
player must not handle, remove or alter any wager until a decision
about the wager has been made and has taken effect.
Entry to or exclusion from game
(1)
A floor manager may refuse to allow a person who has not made a
double deck blackjack wager on the first round of play to enter a
later round, until the cards are reshuffled.
(2)
A floor manager may refuse to allow a person, who has placed a
double deck blackjack wager on a round of play and declined to
place a double deck blackjack wager on a later round, to place a
further double deck blackjack wager until the shoe is completed
and a new shoe is started.
(3)
If a player draws a further card despite holding a hand with a point
total of more than 21, the floor manager may—
(a)
give the player a warning; or
(b)
direct the player to cease play.
Minimum and maximum wagers for tables
(1)
If the minimum wager permitted for a table is not more than $5,
the maximum wager permitted for the table must be at least $100.
(2)
Despite subsection (1), a floor manager may direct that—
364
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
13
(a)
a player may wager on only 1 box; and
(b)
the player may wager only the minimum wager for the table.
(3)
The floor manager may give a direction under subsection (2) only
if the floor manager reasonably believes the player is playing the
game in a way that affects, or could potentially affect, the
randomness of the outcome of the game as intended by this rule.
(4)
The floor manager must notify an inspector of the direction.
Procedures for inspecting and shuffling cards
(1)
Cards must be inspected and shuffled—
(a)
under the provisions of this schedule; and
(b)
under the approved control system for the casino.
(2)
Before being used in play, the cards must be inspected to check for
marks and imperfections and that each deck of cards contains the
correct cards.
(3)
If a player asks to inspect the cards when the cards are first placed
on the table for play, the dealer must spread the cards face up on
the table to enable a person inspecting them to see if each deck of
cards is complete.
(4)
The cards must be shuffled—
(a)
before being brought into play; and
(b)
after the cutting card is reached in the dealing shoe, unless—
(i)
the cards are taken out of play; or
(ii)
the table is to close at the end of the last round of play;
and
(c)
after a round of play if directed by a floor manager; and
(d)
immediately prior to the recommencement of play following
any period that the table has been vacant.
(5)
The dealer must reshuffle cards that have been preshuffled if a
player asks the dealer to reshuffle the cards before the first card is
removed from the dealing shoe.
(6)
If a mechanical shuffling device is being used, it may be loaded
only with 2 decks of cards.
365
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
14
15
Cutting of cards by dealer
(1)
After the cards have been shuffled, the cards must be cut.
(2)
Two cutting cards must be used.
(3)
The dealer must, in order—
(a)
cut the cards once at least 10 cards from either end of the
deck; and
(b)
place the cards that, before the cut, formed the top of the
deck squarely on top of the cutting card; and
(c)
place the cards that, before the cut, formed the bottom of the
deck squarely on top of the other cards and the cutting card;
and
(c)
insert the other cutting card in a position approximately half
a deck in from the back of the stack or at the discretion of a
pit manager insert the cutting card in a position
approximately 1 deck in from the back of the stack; and
(d)
insert the stack of cards in the dealing shoe for the start of
play.
Replacing the cards
A floor manager may, after a round of play, direct that the cards be
replaced.
16
Using a dealing shoe
All cards used in the game of double deck blackjack must be dealt
from a dealing shoe designed for the purpose and located on the
table to the left of the dealer.
17
Dealing the cards
(1)
A player may elect to have their cards dealt to them face up or face
down.
(2)
At the start of each round of play, the dealer must, starting on the
dealer’s left and continuing around the table, deal the cards in the
following order—
366
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(3)
(4)
(a)
one card face up or face down to each box on the layout
which contains a double deck blackjack wager;
(b)
one card face down to the dealer;
(c)
a second card face up or face down to each box which
contains a double deck blackjack wager.
After 2 cards have been dealt to each player and 1 card to the
dealer, the dealer must—
(a)
turn their card face up and
(b)
starting from the dealer’s left, act on each player’s hand as
each player indicates whether the player wishes to double
down, split cards, stand or draw.
For subsection (3)(b)—
(a)
if a player’s cards were dealt face up, the player must
indicate an intention to—
(i)
double down or split cards by making an additional
wager; or
(ii)
draw by scratching on the table behind their double
blackjack wager; or
(iii) stand by moving their hand horizontally.
(b)
if a player’s cards were dealt face down, the player must
indicate an intention to—
(i)
double down or split cards by making an additional
wager and placing their cards face up on the table; or
(ii)
draw by scraping the bottom right hand corner of their
cards against the table or by scratching on the table
behind their wager; or
(iii) stand by sliding the bottom corner of their cards under
their wager or by moving their hand horizontally.
(5)
As each player indicates his or her decision, the dealer must deal
the additional cards required face up.
(6)
After all additional cards have been dealt, the dealer must deal a
second card face up to the dealer.
367
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
18
(7)
Any additional cards dealt to the hand of the dealer must be dealt
face up after which the dealer must announce the dealer’s point
total.
(8)
Commencing from the dealer’s right, the dealer will turn the
player’s cards face up and act on the outcome of the hand before
moving to the next hand.
Collecting and discarding cards after play
At the completion of a round of play, all cards still remaining on
the layout must be picked up by the dealer in order and placed face
down in the discard rack so that the cards can be easily arranged to
indicate each player’s hand if there is a question or dispute.
19
Procedure when cutting card is reached
When the cutting card is reached in a round of play, the dealer
must continue dealing the cards until the round of play is
completed and then reshuffle the cards.
20
21
Players handling cards
(1)
A player may only handle the initial two cards dealt to the player’s
wager.
(2)
Subject to section 23(2), if a player has more than one wager, the
player must only handle one hand of cards at a time and complete
acting on the first wager before acting on the next wager.
(3)
A player must handle their cards with one hand.
(4)
A player must not handle any cards dealt to the player’s wager if
the player has elected to have their cards dealt face up.
Player responsible for own point total
Each player at the table is responsible for correctly calculating the
point total of the player’s hand.
368
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
22
Play if player has blackjack
(1)
If the first card dealt to the dealer is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9 and a
player has a blackjack, the dealer must announce and pay the
blackjack at odds of 3 to 2 and must remove the player’s cards.
(2)
If the first face up card dealt to the dealer is an ace, king, queen,
jack or 10 and a player has a blackjack, the dealer must announce
the blackjack but may make no payment nor remove any cards
until all other cards are dealt to the players and the dealer receives
a second card.
(3)
If the dealer’s second card does not give the dealer blackjack, the
dealer must complete their hand and any player with blackjack
must be paid at the odds of 3 to 2.
(4)
Despite any other provision of this rule, when a player has
blackjack and the dealer’s first card is an ace, the dealer must pay
the player immediately at odds of 1 to 1 in full settlement of the
player’s wager if requested by the player.
(5)
If a player is wagering on more than one box, the dealer will pay
the player’s blackjack, subject to 22(2), after the player has viewed
their cards and revealed them to the dealer.
Part 3
23
Different types of wagers, extra
players and other matters
Insurance wagers
(1)
If the first card dealt to the dealer is an ace, each player may make
an insurance wager which wins if the dealer’s second card is a
king, queen, jack or 10 and loses if the dealer’s second card is an
ace, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9.
(2)
A player wagering on more than one hand, may look at each hand
in turn to determine whether to make an insurance wager.
(3)
If subsection (1) applies, the dealer must call for insurance wagers
by calling ‘insurance’.
369
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
24
25
(4)
A player may make an insurance wager immediately after the
second card is dealt to the player and before any additional card is
dealt, by placing on the insurance line an amount not more than
half the amount staked on the player’s double deck blackjack
wager.
(5)
However, the insurance wager may be more than half the amount
staked on the player’s double deck blackjack wager by 25c to
ensure an even dollar payout, if the insurance wager wins.
(6)
All losing insurance wagers must be collected by the dealer
immediately after the dealer draws a second face up card for the
dealer’s hand and before the dealer draws any additional cards.
Doubling down
(1)
If the point count of the first 2 cards dealt to a player or the first 2
cards of a hand made by splitting cards totals 9, 10 or 11, the
player may elect to make an additional wager of not more than the
amount of the player’s double deck blackjack wager (to double
down) on the first 2 cards dealt to the player or the first 2 cards of
a hand made by splitting cards.
(2)
However, only 1 additional card may be dealt to the hand on which
the player has elected to double down.
(3)
The additional card must be dealt face up and placed sideways on
the layout.
(4)
An ace in the first 2 cards of a double down has a value of 1, not
11.
(5)
If the dealer obtains blackjack after a player doubles down, the
dealer may collect only the amount of the player’s double deck
blackjack wager and not the additional amount wagered in
doubling down.
Splitting cards
(1)
If the first 2 cards dealt to a player are identical in value, the player
may elect to split the hand, making each card the first card of a
separate hand.
Example—
370
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
If a player’s hand consists of a queen and a 10, the 2 cards may be split,
making the queen the first card of 1 hand and the 10 the first card of a separate
hand.
(2)
However, the player must wager on each hand the amount wagered
on the original hand before it was split.
(3)
When a player splits cards, the dealer must deal a second card to
the first of the hands formed and must complete the player’s
decisions about the hand before proceeding to deal cards to the
second hand.
(4)
After a second card is dealt to a split card, the dealer must
announce the point total of the hand and the player must indicate
to the dealer whether the player wishes to stand, draw or double
down but—
(5)
26
(a)
a player may not split cards again; and
(b)
a player splitting aces may have only 1 card dealt to each ace
and may not elect to receive additional cards; and
(c)
a player splitting aces or 10 point value cards can not
achieve a blackjack.
If the dealer obtains a blackjack after a player splits cards, the
dealer may collect only the amount of the player’s blackjack wager
and may not collect the additional amount wagered in splitting
cards.
Additional cards for players
(1)
A player may elect to draw additional cards if the player’s point
total is less than 21.
(2)
However—
(a)
a player electing to double down may draw only 1 additional
card; and
(b)
a player splitting aces may have only 1 card dealt to each ace
and may not elect to receive additional cards.
371
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
27
28
29
Additional cards for dealer
(1)
A dealer must draw additional cards to the dealer’s hand until the
dealer has a hard or soft total of 17 to 21 after which the dealer
must not draw any further cards to the dealer’s hand.
(2)
A dealer must not draw additional cards to the dealer’s hand,
regardless of the point total, if decisions have been made on all
players’ hands and the additional cards would have no effect on
the outcome of the round of play.
One player for each box
(1)
Only one player may play on a box at a double deck blackjack
table.
(2)
The dealer must not allow a player to place a wager on another
player’s hand.
Circumstances when a player may wager on more than 1 box
(1)
A player may be permitted by a floor manager to place a double
deck blackjack wager on more than 1 box at a double deck
blackjack table with the understanding that, when there are not
enough seats in the casino to accommodate patron demand, a
player wagering on more than 1 box must give up a box or boxes
to accommodate other players.
(2)
If a player is permitted to place a double deck blackjack wager on
more than 1 box at a table—
(a)
the player must make at least the minimum wager on each
hand played; and
(b)
the boxes must be played consecutively.
372
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 4
30
Irregularities
Exposed card in rack
A card found face up in the shoe must be removed from play and
placed in the discard rack.
31
Card drawn in error to be used in play
(1)
A card drawn in error without its face being exposed must be used
as though it were the next card from the shoe.
(2)
After the first 2 cards have been dealt to each player and a card is
drawn in error and exposed to the players, the card must be dealt to
a player or the dealer as though it were the next card from the
shoe.
Examples of a card drawn in error and exposed to players—
32
1
A dealer gives a card to a player who has not indicated for a card.
2
A dealer accidentally exposes a card when drawing it from a dealing shoe.
(3)
A player refusing to accept the card must not have any additional
cards dealt to that hand during the round.
(4)
If the card is refused by the players, it must become the dealer’s
second card.
Card drawn in error not to be used
(1)
(2)
Subsection (2) applies if the dealer—
(a)
has 17 or more points; and
(b)
accidentally deals another card to the dealer’s hand; and
(c)
exposes the face of the card to the players.
The card must be removed from play and placed in the discard
rack.
373
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
33
Not enough cards in shoe to complete round of play
If there are not enough cards remaining in the shoe to complete a
round of play, the dealer must shuffle and cut the cards in the
discard rack and complete the round of play.
34
35
Incorrect placement of card
(1)
If, during the original dealing of cards in a round of play, any of
the cards are incorrectly placed, and the incorrect placement is
noticed before the dealer acts on any hand or before any player has
handled their cards, the cards must be placed in the order they
would have been in if the incorrect placement had not happened.
(2)
If, pursuant to subsection (1), it is not possible to place the cards in
the correct order, the round of play will be void.
(3)
For subsection (1), the dealer is taken to have acted on a hand if—
(a)
the dealer has received a hand signal from the player for the
first box in play at the table; or
(b)
the player for the first box in play at the table has decided to
double down and a third card has been delivered to the hand;
or
(c)
the player for the first box in play at the table has decided to
split the hand and a second card has been delivered to the
first of the hands formed; or
(d)
a player’s wager has been settled.
Dealer with too many cards
(1)
If, contrary to section 17(2)(b), the dealer has inadvertently dealt 2
or more cards to the dealer’s hand, and the dealer has started
acting on a player’s hand, the dealer must—
(a)
inform the players that the cards held by the dealer are taken
to have the point total usually counted after the dealer’s
cards have been dealt, but not a blackjack; and
(b)
give each player the choice of withdrawing the player’s
double deck blackjack wager; and
(c)
finish acting on all players’ hands that have not been
withdrawn.
374
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(2)
36
The dealer must finish hitting the dealer’s hand if there is at least 1
player—
(a)
who did not withdraw the player’s double deck blackjack
wager; and
(b)
whose point total is not more than 21.
Player point count more than 21
If a player draws a further card despite holding a hand with a point
total of 21 or more—
37
38
(a)
a pit manager must be notified immediately; and
(b)
all cards dealt to the hand must be placed in the discard rack.
No cards or only 1 card dealt to a player’s hand
(1)
If no cards are dealt to a player’s hand (player A), and the dealer
has started acting on another player’s hand or the players have
picked up their cards, player A’s hand is dead and player A must
retract their double deck blackjack wager.
(2)
If only 1 card is dealt to a player’s hand (player B) and the dealer
has started acting on another player’s hand or the players have
picked up their cards, player B may—
(a)
retract player B’s double deck blackjack wager; or
(b)
receive a second card when the dealer starts acting on player
B’s hand.
No second card to last player if dealer has no second card
(1)
(2)
This section applies to the player immediately before the dealer
if—
(a)
the dealer has not dealt a second card to the player; and
(b)
all other players have been dealt a second card and hit with
the additional cards each has requested; and
(c)
the dealer has not dealt the dealer’s hand a second card.
The player may choose—
(a)
to retract the player’s double deck blackjack wager; or
375
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(b)
39
to be dealt a second card and additional cards before the
dealer deals a second card to the dealer’s hand.
Additional cards not offered or dealt to a player
(1)
This section applies to a player if—
(a)
(b)
(2)
the dealer does not—
(i)
offer additional cards to the player; or
(ii)
deal additional cards to the player and the player has
indicated for additional cards; and
the player is not the player immediately before the dealer.
The player may retract their double deck blackjack wager or play
out their hand after all other players have completed their hands
and before any other card is dealt.
40
No second card or additional cards to last player if dealer has
second card and more
(1)
This section applies to the player immediately before the dealer
if—
(a)
the dealer has not dealt a second card to the player, or
offered to hit the player with additional cards; and
(b)
the dealer has dealt himself or herself a second card and hit
the dealer’s hand with an additional card.
(2)
The dealer must separate out the dealer’s second card and any
additional cards in the order in which they are dealt.
(3)
Before taking any other cards from the shoe, the dealer must use
the second card and any additional cards that have been separated
out in the order the cards were originally taken from the shoe.
(4)
The dealer must deal the player immediately before the dealer—
(5)
(a)
if the player was not dealt a second card—a second card; and
(b)
if the player indicates he or she wants to be hit with
additional cards—as many additional cards as the player
indicates.
The dealer must deal a second card to the dealer’s hand and may
hit the dealer’s hand in the usual way.
376
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
41
Dealer with no first card
(1)
(2)
(3)
42
If a dealer is acting on a player’s hand or the players have picked
up their cards and the dealer discovers they have missed dealing a
first card to their hand, the dealer must—
(a)
give each player the choice of withdrawing the player’s
double deck blackjack wager; and
(b)
finish acting on all players’ hand that have not been
withdrawn.
The dealer must take 2 cards and, if necessary, finish hitting the
dealer’s hand, if there is at least 1 player—
(a)
who did not withdraw the player’s double deck blackjack
wager; and
(b)
whose point total is not more than 21.
The dealer need not deal to the dealer’s hand if either of the
following applies to each of the players—
(a)
the player withdrew the player’s double deck blackjack
wager;
(b)
the player obtained a point total of more than 21.
Extra hand dealt
If the dealer has started acting on a player’s hand or the players
have picked up their cards, an extra hand dealt in error is void.
43
Player not acting on hand after wagering
If a player who has made a double deck blackjack wager does not
act on the player’s hand within a reasonable time, or refuses to act
or is not present, a floor manager may direct that—
(a)
the first 2 cards must be dealt to the player’s hand and
exposed; and
(b)
further cards must be dealt to the player’s hand, if the hard
total of the hand is not more than 11 or the soft total of the
hand is not more than 16.
377
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 19 – Double deck blackjack (continued)
Diagram 19.1—Double deck blackjack table layout
section 4
Discard
Rack
CHIP TRAY
DOUBLEDECK BLACKJACK
Drop Box
378
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 20
Blackjack switch
section 3(2)
Part 1
1
Preliminary
Conducting and playing blackjack switch
This schedule states the rules for conducting and playing the
casino game known as blackjack switch.
2
Definitions for sch 20
In this schedule—
3 of a kind means 3 cards with the same face value.
4 of a kind means 4 cards with the same face value.
blackjack means an ace and any card having a point value of 10
dealt as the first 2 cards to a hand.
blackjack switch wager see section 7(1).
dealer means the person responsible for dealing the cards at a
blackjack switch table.
double down see section 25.
face value, of a card, means—
(a)
the number of the card, namely 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10; or
(b)
the type of card, namely jack, queen, king or ace.
hard total means the point total of a hand containing no aces or
containing aces that are each counted as 1 in value.
379
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
insurance wager means a wager under section 24.
pair means 2 cards with the same face value.
picture card means a card that has point value of 10 and is a jack,
queen or king.
super match wager see section 7(1).
soft total means the point total of a hand containing an ace if the
ace is counted as 11 in value.
split, for a hand of cards, means to split the hand of cards under
section 26.
switch means to swap the second card of the first hand dealt to a
player’s box with the second card of the second hand dealt to the
player’s box.
switched blackjack means an ace and any card having a point
value of 10 after a player has switched their cards.
3
Table and layout
(1)
Blackjack switch is played at a table having a place for the dealer
on one side and places for the players on the opposite side.
(2)
The layout cloth for the blackjack switch table must have printed
on it—
(3)
(a)
the name of, or logo for, the casino; and
(b)
2 blackjack switch betting areas for each player; and
(c)
1 super match betting area for each player.
The following words must be printed on the layout cloth—
•
blackjack pays 1 to 1
•
dealer must draw to a soft 17 or hard 16 and will stand on
hard 22
•
insurance pays 2 to 1.
380
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
4
Drop box and discard rack
Each blackjack switch table must have a drop box and a discard
rack attached to it at approximately the positions shown in
diagram 20.1.
Part 2
5
General rules
Number of decks
Blackjack switch is played with 6 to 8 decks of cards with backs of
the same colour and design and 2 additional cutting cards.
6
Value of cards
(1)
(2)
7
The value of the cards contained in each deck is as follows—
(a)
a card from 2 to 10 has its face value;
(b)
a jack, queen or king has a value of 10;
(c)
unless subsection (2) or section 25(4) applies, an ace has a
value of 11.
If a value of 11 for an ace would give a player or the dealer a point
total of more than 21, the ace has a value of 1.
Winning and losing wagers
(1)
Before the first card is dealt for a round of play, each player at a
game of blackjack switch must—
(a)
make a wager (a blackjack switch wager) on each blackjack
switch betting area of their box against the dealer; and
(b)
be given an opportunity to make a wager (a super match
wager) on the super match betting area of their box.
(2)
For subsection (1)(a), the two blackjack switch wagers must be of
equal value.
(3)
A blackjack switch wager—
381
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(4)
(5)
(6)
(a)
wins if the player’s point total is not more than 21 and the
dealer’s point total is more than 22; and
(b)
wins if the player’s point total is more than the dealer’s point
total but neither is more than 21; and
(c)
wins if the player has a blackjack and the dealer does not
have a blackjack; and
(d)
loses if the dealer has a blackjack and the player does not
have a blackjack; and
(e)
loses if the player’s point total is more than 21; and
(f)
loses if the dealer’s point total is more than the player’s
point total but neither is more than 21; and
(g)
loses if the player has a switched blackjack and the dealer
has a blackjack; and
(h)
is void if the player’s point total and the dealer’s point total
are the same; and
(i)
is void if the dealer’s point total is 22 and the player does not
have a blackjack; and
(j)
is void if the player and the dealer both have a blackjack.
If a dealer obtains a blackjack after a player splits their cards—
(a)
the player’s blackjack switch wager loses; and
(b)
the additional wager made by the player in splitting their
cards is void.
If a dealer obtains a blackjack after a player doubles down—
(a)
the player’s blackjack switch wager loses; and
(b)
the additional wager made by the player in doubling down is
void.
A super match wager—
(a)
wins if the first 4 cards dealt to the box on which the wager
was placed are a pair, 3 of a kind or 4 of a kind; and
(b)
loses if the first 4 cards dealt to the box on which the wager
was placed do not comprise a pair, 3 of a kind or 4 of a kind.
382
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
8
9
10
11
How wagers may be made
(1)
A wager in blackjack switch is made by placing chips in the
appropriate areas of the layout.
(2)
If a player places a blackjack switch wager on each blackjack
switch betting area of their box, the player may also place a super
match wager.
(3)
A player must be given an opportunity to place a super match
wager on their own hands before any other person is allowed to
place a super match wager on the player’s hands.
(4)
A wager can not be made orally.
Payout odds for winning wagers
(1)
A winning blackjack switch wager is paid at odds of 1 to 1.
(2)
A winning insurance wager is paid at odds of 2 to 1.
(3)
A winning super match wager is paid—
(a)
for a pair — at odds of 1 to 1; and
(b)
for 2 pairs — at odds of 8 to 1; and
(c)
for 3 of a kind — at odds of 5 to 1; and
(d)
for 4 of a kind — at odds of 40 to 1.
Time for wagering
(1)
After the first card of a round of play has been removed from the
shoe, a player must not handle, remove or alter any blackjack
switch wager or super match wager on a hand until a decision
about the wager has been made and has taken effect.
(2)
After a wager on the insurance line, a wager to double down or a
wager to split cards has been made and confirmed by the dealer, a
player must not handle, remove or alter any wager until a decision
about the wager has been made and has taken effect.
Entry to or exclusion from game after first round
(1)
A floor manager may refuse to allow a person who has not made a
blackjack switch wager on the first round of play to enter a later
round, until the cards are reshuffled.
383
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
12
13
(2)
A floor manager who allows a person to enter a game after the first
round of cards is dealt from the dealing shoe may allow the person
to wager only the minimum wager for the table, until the cards are
reshuffled and a new shoe is started.
(3)
A floor manager may refuse to allow a person, who has placed a
blackjack switch wager on a round of play and declined to place a
blackjack switch wager on a later round, to place a further
blackjack switch wager until the shoe is completed and a new shoe
is started.
Minimum and maximum wagers for tables
(1)
If the minimum wager permitted for a table is not more than $5,
the maximum wager permitted for the table must be at least $100.
(2)
A super match wager must be at least the minimum amount, and
not more than the maximum amount, displayed on the sign at the
table about super match wagers.
(3)
Despite subsection (1), a floor manager may direct that—
(a)
a player may wager on only 1 box; and
(b)
the player may wager only the minimum wager for the table.
(4)
The floor manager may give the direction only if the floor manager
reasonably believes the player is playing the game in a way that
affects, or could potentially affect, the randomness of the outcome
of the game as intended by this rule.
(5)
The floor manager must notify inspector of the direction.
Procedures for inspecting and shuffling cards
(1)
Cards must be inspected and shuffled—
(a)
under the provisions of this schedule; and
(b)
under the approved control system for the casino.
(2)
Before being used in play, the cards must be inspected to check for
marks and imperfections and that each deck of cards contains the
correct cards.
(3)
If a player asks to inspect the cards when the cards are first placed
on the table for play, the dealer must spread the cards face up on
384
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
the table to enable a person inspecting them to see if each deck of
cards is complete.
(4)
The cards must be shuffled—
(a)
before being brought into play; and
(b)
after the cutting card is reached in the dealing shoe, unless—
(c)
(5)
14
(i)
the cards are taken out of play; or
(ii)
the table is to close at the end of the last round of play;
and
after a round of play if directed by a pit manager.
The dealer must reshuffle cards that have been preshuffled if a
player asks the dealer to reshuffle the cards before the first card is
removed from the dealing shoe.
Cutting of cards by player and dealer
(1)
After the cards have been shuffled, the cards must be cut.
(2)
Two cutting cards must be used.
(3)
The dealer must offer the stack of cards, with backs facing away
from the dealer, to the players to be cut.
(4)
The player specified in section 15 must cut the cards by placing 1
of the cutting cards in the stack at least 10 cards from either end.
(5)
The stack of cards must be cut only once by the player.
(6)
After the cutting card has been inserted into the stack by the
player, the dealer must take the cutting card and all cards in front
of the cutting card and place them to the back of the stack.
(7)
The dealer must insert the other cutting card in a position
approximately 1 deck or more in from the back of the stack or at
the discretion of a pit manager insert the cutting card in a position
between approximately 1 deck and approximately two-thirds of the
way in from the back of the stack.
(8)
The stack of cards must then be inserted in the dealing shoe for
start of play.
385
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
15
Selecting player to cut cards
(1)
16
The player to cut the cards must be—
(a)
the first player to the table immediately before the start of
play; or
(b)
the player on whose box the cutting card appeared during the
last round of play; or
(c)
if the cutting card appeared on the dealer’s hand during the
last round of play—the player at the farthest point to the
right of the dealer; or
(d)
if the reshuffle of the cards was under section 13(4)(c)—the
player at the farthest point to the right of the dealer.
(2)
If the player specified in subsection (1) refuses to cut, the cards
must be offered to each other player moving clockwise around the
table until a player accepts the cut.
(3)
A player specified in subsection (1) or a player who accepts the cut
under subsection (2) may ask another player to cut the cards.
(4)
If no player accepts the cut, the floor manager or the dealer must
cut the cards.
Replacing the cards
A floor manager may, after a round of play, direct that the cards be
replaced.
17
Using a dealing shoe
All cards used in the game of blackjack switch must be dealt from
a dealing shoe designed for the purpose and located on the table to
the left of the dealer.
18
Dealing the cards
(1)
At the start of each round of play, the dealer must, starting on the
dealer’s left and continuing around the table, deal the cards in the
following order—
(a)
one card face up to each blackjack switch betting area of a
box on the layout which contains a blackjack switch wager;
386
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(2)
(3)
(b)
one card face up to the dealer;
(c)
a second card face up to each blackjack switch betting area
of a box on the layout which contains a blackjack switch
wager.
After 4 cards have been dealt to each player and 1 card to the
dealer, the dealer must—
(a)
take all losing super match wagers; and
(b)
pay all winning super match wagers.
When all super match wagers have been dealt with, the dealer
starting from the dealer’s left, must announce the point total of
each player’s hand and act on each player’s decision to do any of
the following—
(a)
switch;
Example—
If a player’s first hand consists of a 9 and a 3 and their second hand consists of
a 2 and a 10, the player may switch the 3 with the 10 so that the player’s first
hand consists of a 9 and a 10 and their second hand consists of a 2 and a 3.
(4)
(b)
double down;
(c)
split cards;
(d)
stand;
(e)
draw.
For subsection (2), a player must indicate an intention to—
(a)
switch by verbally advising the dealer; and
(b)
double down or split cards by placing an additional wager;
and
(c)
stand or draw by a hand signal.
(5)
If a player wishes to switch, they must do so before they double
down, split cards, stand or draw.
(6)
As each player indicates his or her decision, the dealer must—
(a)
switch cards if requested; and
(b)
deal any additional cards face up and announce the point
total of the hand after each additional card is dealt.
387
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
19
(7)
If after switching, a hand has an ace and a picture card or an ace
and a 10, the dealer must turn the second card sideways to indicate
a switched blackjack.
(8)
After all additional cards have been dealt, the dealer must deal a
second card face up to the dealer.
(9)
Any additional cards dealt to the hand of the dealer must be dealt
face up after which the dealer must announce the dealer’s point
total.
Collecting and discarding cards after play
At the completion of a round of play, all cards still remaining on
the layout must be picked up by the dealer in order and placed face
down in the discard rack so that the cards can be easily arranged to
indicate each player’s hand if there is a question or dispute.
20
Procedure when cutting card is reached
When the cutting card is reached in a round of play, the dealer
must continue dealing the cards until the round of play is
completed and then reshuffle the cards.
21
Players not to handle cards
A player or spectator must not handle, remove or alter any cards
used in a game of blackjack switch.
22
Player responsible for own point total
Each player at the table is responsible for correctly computing the
point total of the player’s hand and may not rely on the point total
announced by the dealer.
23
Play if player has blackjack
(1)
A player dealt a blackjack must still be given the opportunity to
switch.
(2)
If a player does not switch after receiving a blackjack and the
dealer’s card is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9, the dealer must announce
388
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
and pay the blackjack and must remove the player’s blackjack
cards.
(3)
If the first face up card dealt to the dealer is an ace, king, queen,
jack or 10 and a player has a blackjack, the dealer may make no
payment until all other cards are dealt to the players and the dealer
receives a second card.
(4)
If the dealer’s second card does not give the dealer blackjack, the
dealer must complete his or her hand and any player with
blackjack must be paid at the odds of 1 to 1.
(5)
If a player, after switching, has an ace and a picture card, or an ace
and a 10 in one hand then that hand point total is 21 and not a
blackjack.
Part 3
24
Different types of wagers, extra
players and other matters
Insurance wagers
(1)
If the first card dealt to the dealer is an ace, each player may make
an insurance wager which wins if the dealer’s second card is a
picture card or 10 and loses if the dealer’s second card is an ace, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9.
(2)
If subsection (1) applies, the dealer must call for insurance wagers
by calling ‘insurance’.
(3)
A player may make an insurance wager, immediately after the
second card is dealt to each blackjack switch betting area of their
box, by placing on the insurance line an amount not more than half
the amount staked on each blackjack switch betting area of their
box.
(4)
There may only be one insurance wager for each blackjack switch
box.
(5)
All losing insurance wagers must be collected by the dealer
immediately after the dealer draws a second face up card for the
dealer’s hand and before the dealer draws any additional cards.
389
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
25
26
Doubling down
(1)
If the point count of the 2 cards dealt to a player’s hand or the first
2 cards of a hand made by splitting cards totals 9, 10 or 11, the
player may elect to make an additional wager of not more than the
amount of the player’s blackjack switch wager (to double down)
on the first 2 cards dealt to the player or the first 2 cards of a hand
made by splitting cards.
(2)
However, only 1 additional card may be dealt to the hand on which
the player has elected to double down.
(3)
The additional card must be dealt face up and placed sideways on
the layout.
(4)
An ace in the first 2 cards of a double down has a value of 1, not
11.
Splitting cards
(1)
If the 2 cards on a player’s hand are identical in value, the player
may elect to split the hand, making each card the first card of a
separate hand.
Example—
If a player’s hand consists of a queen and a 10, the 2 cards may be split,
making the queen the first card of 1 hand and the 10 the first card of a separate
hand.
(2)
However, the player must wager on each hand the amount wagered
on the original hand before it was split.
(3)
When a player splits cards, the dealer must deal a second card to
the first of the hands formed and must complete the player’s
decisions about the hand before proceeding to deal cards to the
second hand.
(4)
After a second card is dealt to a split card, the dealer must
announce the point total of the hand and the player must indicate
to the dealer whether the player wishes to stand, draw or double
down but—
(a)
a player may not split cards again; and
(b)
a player splitting aces may have only 1 card dealt to each ace
and may not elect to receive additional cards; and
390
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(c)
27
28
29
a player splitting aces or 10 point value cards can not
achieve a blackjack.
Additional cards for players
(1)
Subject to section 25(2) and 26(4)(b), a player may elect to draw
additional cards if the player’s point total is less than 21.
(2)
A dealer may direct a player to draw an additional card if the
player’s point total is not more than 11, other than if—
(a)
the total includes an ace that has been given a value of 1; or
(b)
section 25 or 26 applies.
Additional cards for dealer
(1)
A dealer must draw additional cards to the dealer’s hand until the
dealer has a hard total of 17 to 22 or a soft total of 18 to 21 after
which the dealer must not draw any further cards to the dealer’s
hand.
(2)
A dealer must not draw additional cards to the dealer’s hand,
regardless of the point total, if decisions have been made on all
players’ hands and the additional cards would have no effect on
the outcome of the round of play.
One player for each box
Subject to section 8(3)—
30
(a)
only 1 player may play on a box at a blackjack switch table;
and
(b)
the dealer must not allow a player to place a wager on
another player’s hand.
Circumstances when a player may wager on more than 1 box
(1)
A player may be permitted by a casino operator to place blackjack
switch wagers on more than 1 box at a blackjack switch table with
the understanding that, when there are not enough seats in the
casino to accommodate patron demand, a player wagering on more
than 1 box must give up a box or boxes to accommodate other
players.
391
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(2)
If a player is permitted to place blackjack switch wagers on more
than 1 box at a table, the player must make at least the minimum
wagers on each box played.
Part 4
31
Irregularities
Exposed card in rack
A card found face up in the shoe must be removed from play and
placed in the discard rack.
32
Card drawn in error to be used in play
(1)
A card drawn in error without its face being exposed must be used
as though it were the next card from the shoe.
(2)
After the first 4 cards have been dealt to each player and a card is
drawn in error and exposed to the players, the card must be dealt to
a player or the dealer as though it were the next card from the
shoe.
Examples of a card drawn in error and exposed to players—
33
1
A dealer gives a card to a player who has not indicated for a card.
2
A dealer accidentally exposes a card when drawing it from a dealing
shoe.
(3)
A player refusing to accept the card must not have any additional
cards dealt to that hand during the round.
(4)
If the card is refused by the players, it must become the dealer’s
second card.
Card drawn in error not to be used
(1)
Subsection (2) applies if the dealer—
(a)
has a hard total of 17 or more or a soft total of 18 or more;
and
(b)
accidentally deals another card to the dealer’s hand; and
392
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(c)
(2)
34
exposes the face of the card to the players.
The card must be removed from play and placed in the discard
rack.
Not enough cards in shoe to complete round of play
If there are not enough cards remaining in the shoe to complete a
round of play, the dealer must shuffle and cut the cards in the
discard rack and complete the round of play.
35
36
Incorrect placement of card
(1)
If, during the original dealing of cards in a round of play, any of
the cards are incorrectly placed, and the incorrect placement is
noticed before the dealer acts on any hand, the cards must be
placed in the order they would have been in if the incorrect
placement had not happened.
(2)
For subsection (1), a dealer is taken to have acted on a hand if—
(a)
the dealer has received a hand signal from the player for the
first box in play at the table; or
(b)
the player for the first box in play at the table has decided to
double down on one hand and a third card has been
delivered to the hand; or
(c)
the player for the first box in play at the table has decided to
split the hand and a second card has been delivered to the
first of the hands formed; or
(d)
the player for the first box in play at the table has indicated
that they wish to switch their cards; or
(e)
a player’s wager has been settled.
Dealer with too many cards
(1)
If, contrary to section 18(1)(b), the dealer has inadvertently dealt 2
or more cards to the dealer’s hand, and the dealer has started
acting on a player’s hand, the dealer must—
(a)
inform the players that the cards held by the dealer are taken
to have the point total usually counted after the dealer’s
cards have been dealt, but not a blackjack; and
393
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(2)
37
38
(b)
give each player the choice of withdrawing their blackjack
switch wagers; and
(c)
finish acting on all players’ hands that have not been
withdrawn.
The dealer must finish hitting the dealer’s hand if there is at least 1
player—
(a)
who did not withdraw their blackjack switch wagers; and
(b)
whose point total is not more than 21.
No cards or only 1 card dealt to a player’s hand
(1)
If no cards are dealt to a player’s hand (player A) and the dealer
has started acting on another player’s hand, player A’s hand is
dead and player A must retract his or her blackjack switch wager.
(2)
If, despite having valid bets on both blackjack switch betting areas
of their box, a player (player B) receives less than the four initial
cards required, player B may—
(a)
retract their blackjack switch wagers on the box; or
(b)
receive further cards to complete the original two hands
when the dealer starts acting on player B’s box.
No second card to either of the last player’s hands if the
dealer has no second card
(1)
(2)
This section applies to the player immediately before the dealer
if—
(a)
the dealer has not dealt a second card to either of the player’s
blackjack switch hands; and
(b)
all other players have been dealt a second card to each of
their blackjack switch hands and hit with the additional cards
as requested; and
(c)
the dealer has not dealt the dealer’s hand a second card.
The player may choose—
(a)
to retract the player’s blackjack switch wagers; or
(b)
to be dealt a second card and additional cards before the
dealer deals a second card to the dealer’s hand.
394
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
39
Additional cards not offered or dealt to a player
(1)
This section applies to a player if—
(a)
(b)
(2)
40
the dealer does not—
(i)
offer additional cards to the player; or
(ii)
deal additional cards to the player and the player has
indicated for additional cards; and
the player is not the player immediately before the dealer.
The player may retract his or her blackjack switch wagers or play
out his or her hand after all other players have completed their
hands and before any other card is dealt.
No second card or additional cards to either of the last
player’s hands if the dealer has second card and more
(1)
This section applies to the player immediately before the dealer
if—
(a)
the dealer has not dealt a second card to either of the player’s
blackjack switch hands, or offered to hit the player with
additional cards; and
(b)
the dealer has dealt themselves a second card and hit the
dealer’s hand with an additional card.
(2)
The dealer must separate out the dealer’s second card and any
additional cards in the order in which they were dealt.
(3)
Before taking any other cards from the shoe, the dealer must use
the second card and any additional cards that have been separated
out in the order the cards were originally taken from the shoe.
(4)
The dealer must deal the player immediately before the dealer—
(5)
(a)
if the player was not dealt a second card—a second card; and
(b)
if the player indicates they want to be hit with additional
cards—as many additional cards as the player indicates.
The dealer must deal a second card to the dealer’s hand and may
hit the dealer’s hand in the usual way.
395
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
41
Dealer with no first card
(1)
(2)
(3)
42
If a dealer is acting on a player’s hand and discovers the dealer has
missed dealing a first card to the dealer’s hand, the dealer must—
(a)
give each player the choice of withdrawing the player’s
blackjack switch wagers; and
(b)
finish acting on all players’ hands that have not been
withdrawn.
The dealer must take 2 cards and, if necessary, finish hitting the
dealer’s hand, if there is at least 1 player—
(a)
who did not withdraw their blackjack switch wagers; and
(b)
whose point total is not more than 21.
The dealer need not deal to the dealer’s hand if either of the
following applies to each of the players—
(a)
the player withdrew the player’s blackjack switch wagers;
(b)
the player obtained a point total of more than 21.
Extra hand dealt
If the dealer has started acting on a player’s hand, any extra hand
dealt in error is void.
43
Player not acting on hand after wagering
If a player who has placed a blackjack switch wager on both
blackjack switch betting areas of their box does not act on their
hand within a reasonable time, or refuses to act or is not present, a
floor manager may direct that—
(a)
the first 4 cards must be dealt to the player; and
(b)
the player’s cards must not be switched; and
(c)
further cards must be dealt to the player’s hand if the hard
total of the hand is not more than 11 or the soft total of the
hand is not more than 17.
396
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
44
Player having only one bet on blackjack switch box
If a player places only one blackjack switch wager on a blackjack
switch box and is dealt one hand to that wager, the following will
apply –
(a)
the hand, and if applicable, the super match wager placed on
the player’s box is void; and
(b)
all other players on the table must be given the option to
retract their blackjack switch wagers.
Part 5
45
Use of card machine
Card machine
(1)
A card machine may be used for blackjack switch.
(2)
If a card machine is used, the operation of parts 1 to 4 is changed
to the extent necessary for the following to have effect—
(a)
the number of decks used must be not less than the
minimum, and not more than the maximum (which in turn
must be not more than 8), number of decks approved by the
chief executive for use in the card machine;
(b)
when play is started, or if the cards in the card machine are
replaced under section 16, the cards must be inspected and
shuffled and then placed in the card machine;
(c)
the cards do not need to be cut before being placed in the
card machine;
(d)
a cutting card may be used to conceal the bottom card of the
cards placed into the machine, but it must be removed from
the machine before cards for the first round of play are dealt;
(e)
cutting cards are not used for the game, other than in the way
mentioned in paragraph (d);
(f)
for dealing the cards, the card machine takes the place of the
dealing shoe;
397
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(g)
(3)
46
cards that have been placed in the discard rack are placed in
the card machine to be mixed with the remaining cards in the
machine.
Section 11 does not apply if a card machine is used.
Card machine malfunction
(1)
This section applies if a card machine malfunctions during a round
of play.
(2)
A pit manager must ensure that the card machine is repaired or
replaced in accordance with the casino’s approved control system.
(3)
If the pit manager considers that the malfunction has
disadvantaged a player, each player must be given the opportunity
to have the player’s wagers for the round of play returned to the
player before the round of play is continued.
398
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Diagram 20.1—Blackjack switch table layout
section 4
399
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 21
Lucky Draw Baccarat
section 3(2)
Part 1
1
Preliminary
Conducting and playing Lucky Draw Baccarat
This schedule states the rules for conducting and playing the
casino game known as lucky draw baccarat.
2
Definitions for sch 21
In this schedule—
3-3-3 Off Suit means a three card point count of 9 where the cards
in a hand are each a value of 3 and comprised of at least 2 different
suits.
3-3-3 Suited means a three card point count of 9 where the cards
in a hand are each a value of 3 and are all same suit.
draw wager means a subsequent wager placed in the appropriately
marked area during the subsequent deal.
dealer means the person responsible for dealing the cards at a
lucky draw baccarat table.
enter wager means an initial wager placed in the appropriately
marked area.
lucky 7 means a three card point count of 7.
lucky 8 means a three card point count of 8.
lucky 9 means a three card point count of 9.
400
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
3
4
Table and layout
(1)
Lucky draw baccarat is played at a table having a place for the
dealer on 1 side and places for up to 7 players on the opposite side.
(2)
The layout cloth for the lucky draw baccarat table must have
printed on it the name of, or logo for, the casino and designated
areas to show boxes for wagers; and
(3)
The following words must be printed on the layout cloth—dealer
must stand on 5 and must draw to 4
Drop box and discard rack
Each lucky draw baccarat table must have a drop box and a discard
rack attached to it at approximately the positions shown in
diagram 21.1.
Part 2
5
General rules
Number of decks
Lucky draw baccarat is played with 6 to 8 decks of cards with
backs of the same colour and design and 2 additional cutting cards.
6
Value of cards
(1)
(2)
The value of the cards contained in each deck is as follows—
(a)
a card from 2 to 9 has its face value;
(b)
a 10, jack, queen or king has a value of 0;
(c)
an ace has a value of 1.
The point count of a hand will be:
(a)
where the total value of the cards in the hand is a number
between 0 and 9 inclusive, that number; or
(b)
where the total value of the cards in the hand is 10 or higher,
the right digit of that number.
401
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
7
Permissible wagers and results
(1)
Before the first card is dealt for each round of play, each player at
a game of lucky draw baccarat must make a wager (an enter
wager) in the enter wager betting area against the dealer.
(2)
The enter wager—
(a)
wins if the player’s hand has a point count higher than that
of the dealer’s hand;
(b)
loses if the player’s hand has a point count lower than that of
the dealer’s hand
(c) will be declared a tie if the point counts of the player’s hand
and the dealer’s hand are equal and neither shall win nor
lose.
8
(3)
A player who elects to receive a third card must make a wager (a
draw wager), which must be of equal value as their ‘enter’ wager
on the appropriate betting area of the layout marked ‘draw’.
(4)
The draw wager(a)
wins if the player’s hand has a point count higher than that
of the dealer’s hand;
(b)
loses if the player’s hand has a point count lower than that of
the dealer’s hand
(c)
will be declared a tie if the point counts of the player’s hand
and the dealer’s hand are equal and neither shall win nor
lose.
How wagers may be made
(1)
A wager at lucky draw baccarat is made by placing chips in the
appropriate wager area of the layout.
(2)
A wager can not be made orally.
(3)
Only 1 wager may be accepted on each area for wagers.
(4)
Each player at a game of lucky draw baccarat must make an enter
wager against the dealer prior to any cards being dealt for a round
of play.
402
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
9
10
11
When wagers can not be placed, changed or withdrawn
(1)
After the first card of a round of play has been removed from the
shoe, a player must not handle, remove or alter their enter wager
until a decision about the wager has been made and has taken
effect.
(2)
After a draw wager has been made by a player and confirmed by
the dealer, the player must not handle, remove or alter any wager
until a decision about the wager has been made and has taken
effect.
Circumstances when a player may wager on more than 1 box
(1)
A player may be permitted to place an enter wager on more than 1
box at a lucky draw baccarat table with the understanding that,
when there are not enough seats in the casino to accommodate
patron demand, a player wagering on more than 1 box must give
up a box or boxes to accommodate other players.
(2)
If a player is permitted to place an enter wager on more than 1 box
at a table, the player must make at least the minimum wager on
each hand played.
Minimum and maximum wagers for tables
(1)
If the minimum wager permitted for a table is not more than $10,
the maximum wager permitted for the table must be at least $500.
(2)
Despite section 10(1) and 11(1), a casino key employee
responsible for managing table games may direct that—
(a)
a player may wager on only 1 box; and
(b)
the player may wager only the minimum wager for the table.
(3)
The employee may give the direction under subsection (2) only if
the employee reasonably believes the player is playing the game in
a way that affects, or could potentially affect, the randomness of
the outcome of the game as intended by this rule.
(4)
The employee must notify an inspector of the direction.
403
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
12
Payout odds for winning wagers
(1)
A winning enter wager is paid at odds of 1 to 1
(2)
A winning draw wager is paid at odds of(a)
with a three card point total of 6 or less, 1 to 1
(b)
with a three card point total of 7, 3 to 2
(c)
with a three card point total of 8, 2 to 1
(d)
with a three card point total of 9, 3 to 1
(e)
with a three card total of 9 where the three cards have a face
value of 3 and are off-suit, 9 to 1
(f)
with a three card total of 9 where the three cards have a face
value of 3 and are suited, 30 to 1
Part 3
13
Playing the game
Procedures for inspecting and shuffling cards
(1)
Cards must be inspected and shuffled—
(a)
under the provisions of this schedule; and
(b)
under the approved control system for the casino.
(2)
Before being used in play, the cards must be inspected to check for
marks and imperfections and that each deck of cards contains the
correct cards.
(3)
If a player asks to inspect the cards when the cards are first placed
on the table for play, the dealer must spread the cards face up on
the table to enable a person inspecting them to see if each deck of
cards is complete.
(4)
The cards must be shuffled—
(a)
before being brought into play; and
(b)
after the cutting card is reached in the dealing shoe, unless—
(i)
the cards are taken out of play; or
404
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(ii)
(c)
(5)
14
the table is to close at the end of the last round of play;
and
after a round of play if directed by a casino employee higher
than a floor manager.
The dealer, with approval of the Floor Manager must reshuffle
cards that have been preshuffled if a player asks the dealer to
reshuffle the cards before the first card is removed from the
dealing shoe.
Cutting of cards by player and dealer
(1)
After the cards have been shuffled, the cards must be cut.
(2)
Two cutting cards must be used.
(3)
The dealer must offer the stack of cards, with backs facing away
from the dealer, to the players to be cut.
(4)
The player specified in section 15 must cut the cards by placing 1
of the cutting cards in the stack at least 10 cards from either end.
(5)
However, the player mentioned in subsection (4) may ask another
player to cut the cards.
(6)
The stack of cards must be cut only once by the player unless –
(i) the cut is incorrect, then
(ii) the dealer must remove the cutting card and ask the
player to re-cut the cards.
(7)
After the cutting card has been inserted into the stack by the
player, the dealer must take the cutting card and all cards in front
of the cutting card and place them to the back of the stack.
(8)
The dealer must insert the other cutting card in a position
approximately 1 deck or more in from the back of the stack or at
the discretion of a pit boss or assistant pit boss insert the cutting
card in a position between approximately 1 deck and
approximately two-thirds of the way in from the back of the stack.
(9)
The stack of cards must then be inserted in the dealing shoe for
start of play.
405
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
15
Selecting player to cut cards
(1)
The player to cut the cards must be—
(a)
the first player to the table immediately before the start of
play; or
(b)
the player on whose box the cutting card appeared during the
last round of play; or
(c) if the cutting card appeared on the dealer’s hand during the
last round of play—the player at the farthest point to the
right of the dealer; or
(d) if the reshuffle of the cards was under section 13(4)(c)—the
player at the farthest point to the right of the dealer.
16
(2)
If the player specified in subsection (1) refuses to cut, the cards
must be offered to each other player moving clockwise around the
table until a player accepts the cut.
(3)
A player specified in subsection (1) or a player who accepts the cut
under subsection (2) may ask another player to cut the cards.
(4)
If no player accepts the cut, the dealer must cut the cards.
Replacing the cards
A floor manager may, after a round of play, direct that the cards be
replaced.
17
18
Using a dealing shoe
(1)
All cards used in the game of lucky draw baccarat must be dealt
from a dealing shoe designed for the purpose and located on the
table to the left of the dealer.
(2)
The dealer must remove cards from the shoe with the left hand,
and then with the right hand place them, face up, on the
appropriate area of the layout.
Dealing the cards
(1)
At the start of each round of play, the dealer must, starting on the
dealer’s left and continuing around the table, deal the cards in the
following order—
406
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(a)
one card face up to each box on the layout which contains an
enter wager;
(b) one card face up to the dealer;
(c) a second card face up to each box which contains an enter
wager.
19
(2)
After 2 cards have been dealt to each player and 1 card to the
dealer, the dealer, starting from the dealer’s left, must announce
each player’s point total and each player must indicate whether the
player wishes to stand or draw an additional card.
(3)
For subsection (2)—
(a)
a player must indicate whether the player wishes to draw an
additional card by placing a draw wager; or
(b)
a player must indicate whether the player wishes to stand by
a hand signal.
(4)
As each player indicates his or her decision, the dealer must deal
face up the additional card required and must announce the point
total of the player after the additional card is dealt.
(5)
After all additional cards have been dealt, the dealer must deal a
second card face up to the dealer.
(6)
If the dealer’s two card point count is 4 or lower, a third card must
be dealt to the dealer’s hand.
(7)
A player’s and dealer’s hand can only draw 1 additional card.
Collecting and discarding cards after play
(1)
At the completion of a round of play, all cards on the layout must
be picked up by the dealer in order so that the cards can be easily
arranged to indicate each player’s hand if there is question or
dispute.
(2)
The dealer must pick up the cards starting with the player to the
dealer’s far right and moving anticlockwise around the table.
(3)
After all the players’ cards have been collected and discarded the
dealer must pick up the dealer’s cards and place them face down
on top of the players’ cards in the discard rack.
407
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
20
Procedure when cutting card is reached
When the cutting card is reached in a round of play, the dealer
must continue dealing the cards until the round of play is
completed and then reshuffle the cards.
21
Players not to handle cards
A player or spectator must not handle, remove or alter any cards
used in a game of lucky draw baccarat.
22
Player responsible for own point total
Each player at the table is responsible for correctly computing the
point total of the player’s hand and may not rely on the point total
announced by the dealer.
Part 4
23
Irregularities
Exposed card in rack
A card found face up in the shoe must be removed from play and
placed in the discard rack.
24
Card drawn in error to be used in play
(1)
A card drawn in error without its face being exposed must be used
as though it were the next card from the shoe.
(2)
After the first 2 cards have been dealt to each player and a card is
drawn in error and exposed to the players, the card must be dealt to
a player or the dealer as though it were the next card from the
shoe.
Examples of a card drawn in error and exposed to players—
1 A dealer gives a card to a player who has not indicated for a card.
2 A dealer accidentally exposes a card when drawing it from a
dealing shoe.
408
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
25
(3)
A player refusing to accept the card must not have any additional
cards dealt to that hand during the round. Any draw wager for that
player will be void.
(4)
If the card is refused by the players, it must become the dealer’s
second card.
Card drawn in error not to be used
(1)
(2)
26
Subsection (2) applies if the dealer—
(a)
has 5 or more points; and
(b)
accidentally deals another card to the dealer’s hand; and
(c)
exposes the face of the card to the players.
The card must be removed from play and placed in the discard
rack.
Not enough cards in shoe to complete round of play
If there are not enough cards remaining in the shoe to complete a
round of play, the dealer must shuffle and cut the cards in the
discard rack and complete the round of play.
27
Incorrect placement of card
(1)
If, during the original dealing of cards in a round of play, any of
the cards are incorrectly placed, and the incorrect placement is
noticed before the dealer acts on any hand, the cards must be
placed in the order they would have been in if the incorrect
placement had not happened.
(2)
For subsection (1), a dealer is taken to have acted on a hand if—
(a)
the dealer has received a hand signal from the player for the
first box in play at the table; or
(b)
the player for the first box in play at the table has decided to
draw an additional card and the card has been delivered to
the hand; or
(c)
a player’s wager has been settled.
409
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
28
Dealer with too many cards
(1)
(2)
29
30
If, contrary to section 18(1)(b), the dealer has inadvertently dealt 2
or more cards to the dealer’s hand, and the dealer has started
acting on a player’s hand, the dealer must—
(a)
inform the players that the cards held by the dealer are taken
to have the point total usually counted after the dealer’s
cards have been dealt; and
(b)
place in the discard rack any additional cards dealt to the
dealer’s hand that would not be dealt to the dealers hand if
the hand had been dealt correctly, and
(c)
give each player the choice of withdrawing the player’s
wager/s; and
(d)
finish acting on all players’ hands that have not been
withdrawn.
The dealer must finish hitting the dealer’s hand if there is at least 1
player who did not withdraw the player’s enter wager.
No cards or only 1 card dealt to a player’s hand
(1)
If no cards are dealt to a player’s hand (player A), and the dealer
has started acting on another player’s hand, player A’s hand is
dead and player A must retract his or her enter wager.
(2)
If only 1 card is dealt to a player’s hand (player B) and the dealer
has started acting on another player’s hand, player B may—
(a)
retract player B’s enter wager; or
(b)
receive a second card when the dealer starts acting on player
B’s hand.
No second card to last player if dealer has no second card
(1)
This section applies to the player immediately before the dealer
if—
(a)
the dealer has not dealt a second card to the player; and
(b)
all other players have been dealt a second card and hit with
the additional cards each has requested; and
(c)
the dealer has not dealt the dealer’s hand a second card.
410
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(2)
31
The player may choose to —
(a)
retract the player’s enter wager; or
(b)
be dealt a second card and additional card before the dealer
deals a second card to the dealer’s hand.
Additional card not offered or dealt to a player
(1)
This section applies to a player if—
(a)
(b)
(2)
32
the dealer does not—
(i)
offer an additional card to the player; or
(ii)
deal an additional card to the player and the player has
indicated for an additional card; and
the player is not the player immediately before the dealer.
The player may retract their wager/s or play out their hand after all
other players have completed their hands and before any other card
is dealt.
No second card or additional card to last player if dealer has
second card and more
(1)
This section applies to the player immediately before the dealer
if—
(a)
the dealer has not dealt a second card to the player, or
offered to hit the player with an additional card; and
(b)
the dealer has dealt himself or herself a second card and hit
the dealer’s hand with an additional card.
(2)
The dealer must separate out the dealer’s second card and
additional card in the order in which they were dealt.
(3)
Before taking any other cards from the shoe, the dealer must use
the second card and any additional cards that have been separated
out in the order the cards were originally taken from the shoe.
(4)
The dealer must deal the player immediately before the dealer—
(a)
if the player was not dealt a second card—a second card; and
(b)
if the player indicates he or she wants to be hit with an
additional card.
411
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(5)
33
Dealer with no first card
(1)
(2)
34
The dealer must deal a second card to the dealer’s hand and may
hit the dealer’s hand in the usual way.
If a dealer is acting on a player’s hand and discovers the dealer has
missed dealing a first card to the dealer’s hand, the dealer must—
(a)
give each player the choice of withdrawing the player’s
wager/s; and
(b)
finish acting on all players’ hands that have not been
withdrawn.
The dealer must take 2 cards and, if necessary, finish hitting the
dealer’s hand, if there is at least 1 player who did not withdraw the
player’s enter wager.
Extra hand dealt
If the dealer has started acting on a player’s hand, an extra hand
dealt in error is void.
35
Player not acting on hand after wagering
If a player who has made a enter wager does not act on the
player’s hand within a reasonable time, or refuses to act or is not
present, a floor manager may direct that the first 2 cards dealt to
the player’s hand will be the players hand and no additional card
will be drawn.
Part 5
36
Use of card machine
Card machine
(1)
A card machine may be used for lucky draw baccarat.
(2)
Section 17(1) does not apply if a card machine is used.
412
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(3)
37
If a card machine is used, the operation of parts 1 to 3 is changed
to the extent necessary for the following to have effect—
(a)
the number of decks used must be not less than the
minimum, and not more than the maximum (which in turn
must be not more than 8), number of decks approved by the
chief executive for use in the card machine;
(b)
when play is started, or if the cards in the card machine are
replaced under section 16, the cards must be inspected and
shuffled and then placed in the card machine;
(c)
the cards do not need to be cut before being placed in the
card machine;
(d)
a cutting card may be used to conceal the bottom card of the
cards placed into the machine, but it must be removed from
the machine before cards for the first round of play are dealt;
(e)
cutting cards are not used for the game, other than in the way
mentioned in paragraph (d);
(f)
for dealing the cards, the card machine takes the place of the
dealing shoe;
(g)
cards that have been placed in the discard rack are placed in
the card machine to be mixed with the remaining cards in the
machine.
Card machine malfunction
(1)
This section applies if a card machine malfunctions during a round
of play.
(2)
The pit manager must ensure that the card machine is repaired or
replaced in accordance with the casino’s approved control system.
(3)
If the pit manager considers that the malfunction has
disadvantaged a player, each player must be given the opportunity
to have their wagers for the round of play returned to the player
before the round of play is continued.
413
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Diagram 21.1
Lucky Draw Baccarat table layout
Section 4
Approximate location
of casino name/logo
414
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 22
Blackjack challenge
Section 3.2
Part 1
1
Preliminary
Conducting and playing blackjack challenge
This schedule states the rules for conducting and playing the
casino game known as blackjack challenge.
2
Definitions for sch 22
In this schedule—
any pair wager see section 33.
blackjack means an ace and any ten point value card dealt as
the first two cards to a player or a dealer and this shall include
an ace and any ten point value card dealt to a player who has
split pairs.
blackjack challenge wager see section 7(1).
dealer means the person responsible for dealing the cards at a
blackjack table.
double down see section 24.
five card trick means five cards drawn to a hand without
exceeding 21.
hard total means the point total of a hand containing no aces
or containing aces that are each counted as 1 in value.
pair means 2 cards with the same face value.
soft total means the point total of a hand containing an ace if
the ace is counted as 11 in value.
split for cards or a hand of cards, means to split the cards or hand
of cards under section 25.
415
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
3
Table and layout
(1)
Blackjack challenge is played at a table having a place for the
dealer on 1 side and places for the players on the opposite side.
(2)
The layout cloth for the blackjack challenge table must have
printed on it the name of, or logo for, the casino and—
(3)
4
(a)
rectangular, circular or oval areas to show boxes for
wagers; or
(b)
if the chief executive has approved a change to the boxes for
‘any pair’ wagers—the boxes as approved.
The following words must be printed on the layout cloth—
•
blackjack pays 2 to 1
•
dealer must stand on 17 and must draw to 16
Drop box and discard rack
Each blackjack challenge table must have a drop box and a
discard rack attached to it at approximately the positions shown
in diagram 22.1.
Part 2
5
General rules
Number of decks
Blackjack challenge is played with 5 to 8 decks of cards with
backs of the same colour and design and 2 additional cutting
cards.
6
Value of cards
(1)
The value of the cards contained in each deck is as follows—
(a)
a card from 2 to 10 has its face value
(b)
a jack, queen or king has a value of 10
(c)
an ace has a value of 1 or 11.
416
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(2)
7
The rank of cards for the purpose of determining blackjack
payouts in accordance with section 28 will be from highest
to lowest king, queen, jack and 10.
Winning and losing wagers
(1)
Before the first card is dealt for each round of play, each player at
a game of blackjack challenge must make a wager (a blackjack
challenge wager) against the dealer.
(2)
The wager—
(3)
(a)
wins if the player’s point total is not more than 21 and the
dealer’s point total is more than 21; or
(b)
wins if the player’s point total equals 21; or
(c)
wins if the player draws five cards to a hand and does
not exceed 21 and will be paid in accordance to section
26(6) ; or
(d)
wins if the player’s point total is more than the dealer’s
point total but neither is more than 21; or
(e)
wins if the player has a blackjack and the dealer does not
have a blackjack; or
(f)
wins if the player and the dealer have a blackjack and is
paid in accordance to section 28.
(g)
loses if the dealer has a blackjack and the player does not
have a blackjack; or
(h)
loses if the player’s and the dealer’s point totals are the
same; or
(i)
loses if the dealer’s point total is more than the player’s
point total but neither is more than 21; or
(j)
loses if the player’s point total is more than 21.
If the player has wagered a split and/or double down and the
dealer has a blackjack –
(a)
if the player’s total is more than 21, both the original and
additional wager(s) loses immediately;
(b)
if the player’s total is not more than 21; only the original
wager loses.
417
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
8
9
How wagers may be made
(1)
A wager at blackjack challenge is made by placing chips in the
appropriate area of the layout.
(2)
A wager can not be made orally.
Payout odds for winning wagers
Winning wagers will be paid at odds defined in Sections 26 and
28.
10
11
Time for wagering
(1)
After the first card of a round of play has been removed from
the shoe, a player must not handle, remove or alter the
blackjack wager on a hand until a decision about the wager has
been made and has taken effect.
(2)
After a wager to double down or a wager to split cards has been
made and confirmed by the dealer, a player must not handle,
remove or alter any wager until a decision about the wager has
been made and has taken effect.
Entry to or exclusion from game after first round
(1)
A casino operator may refuse to allow a person who has not made
a blackjack challenge wager on the first round of play to enter a
later round, until the cards are reshuffled.
(2)
A casino operator who allows a person to enter a game after the
first round of cards is dealt from the dealing shoe may allow the
person to wager only the minimum wager for the table, until the
cards are reshuffled and a new shoe is started.
(3)
A casino operator may refuse to allow a person, who has placed a
blackjack challenge wager on a round of play and declined to
place a blackjack challenge wager on a later round, to place a
further blackjack challenge wager until the shoe is completed
and a new shoe is started.
418
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
12
13
Minimum and maximum wagers for tables
(1)
If the minimum wager permitted for a table is not more than $5,
the maximum wager permitted for the table must be at least $100.
(2)
Despite subsection (1), a casino key employee responsible for
managing table games may direct that—
(a)
a player may wager on only 1 box; and
(b)
the player may wager only the minimum wager for the
table.
(3)
The casino key employee may give the direction only if the
employee reasonably believes the player is playing the game in a
way that affects, or could potentially affect, the randomness of the
outcome of the game as intended by this rule.
(4)
The casino key employee must notify an inspector of any
direction given under subsection (2).
Procedures for inspecting and shuffling cards
(1) Cards must be inspected and shuffled—
(a) under the provisions of this schedule; and
(b) under the approved control system for the casino.
(2) Before being used in play, the cards must be inspected to check
for marks and imperfections and that each deck of cards contains
the correct cards.
(3) If a player asks to inspect the cards when the cards are first placed
on the table for play, the dealer must spread the cards face up
on the table to enable a person inspecting them to see if each deck
of cards is complete.
(4) The cards must be shuffled—
(a) before being brought into play; and
(b) after the cutting card is reached in the dealing shoe,
unless—
(i) the cards are taken out of play; or
(ii) the table is to close at the end of the last round of
play; and
(c) after a round of play if directed by a casino employee
higher than a supervisor.
(5) The dealer, with approval of the supervisor, must
reshuffle cards that have been preshuffled if a player asks the
419
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
dealer to reshuffle the cards before the first card is removed from
the dealing shoe.
14
15
Cutting of cards by player and dealer
(1)
After the cards have been shuffled, the cards must be cut.
(2)
Two cutting cards must be used.
(3)
The dealer must offer the stack of cards, with backs facing
away from the dealer, to the players to be cut.
(4)
The player specified in section 15 must cut the cards by
placing 1 of the cutting cards in the stack at least 10
cards from either end.
(5)
However, the player mentioned in subsection (4) may ask
another player to cut the cards.
(6)
The stack of cards must be cut only once by the player.
(7)
After the cutting card has been inserted into the stack by
the player, the dealer must take the cutting card and all
cards in front of the cutting card and place them to the
back of the stack.
(8)
The dealer must insert the other cutting card in a position
approximately 1 deck or more in from the back of the
stack or at the discretion of a manager insert the cutting
card in a position between approximately 1 deck and
approximately two-thirds of the way in from the back of
the stack.
(9)
The stack of cards must then be inserted in the dealing
shoe for start of play.
Selecting player to cut cards
(1)
The player to cut the cards must be—
(a)
the first player to the table immediately before the start of
play; or
(b)
the player on whose box the cutting card appeared during
the last round of play; or
420
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
16
(c)
if the cutting card appeared on the dealer’s hand during
the last round of play—the player at the farthest point to the
right of the dealer; or
(d)
if the reshuffle of the cards was under section 13(4)(c)—
the player at the farthest point to the right of the dealer.
(2)
If the player specified in subsection (1) refuses to cut, the cards
must be offered to each other player moving clockwise around the
table until a player accepts the cut.
(3)
A player specified in subsection (1) or a player who accepts the
cut under subsection (2) may ask another player to cut the cards.
(4)
If no player accepts the cut, the dealer must cut the cards.
Replacing the cards
A casino employee responsible for supervising table games may,
after a round of play, direct that the cards be replaced.
17
18
Using a dealing shoe
(1)
All cards used in the game of blackjack challenge must be dealt
from a dealing shoe designed for the purpose and located on the
table to the left of the dealer.
(2)
The dealer must remove cards from the shoe with the left hand,
and then with the right hand place them, face up, on the
appropriate area of the layout.
Dealing the cards
(1)
At the start of each round of play, the dealer must, starting on the
dealer’s left and continuing around the table, deal the cards in the
following order—
(a)
one card face up to each box on the layout which contains a
blackjack challenge wager;
(b)
one card face up to the dealer;
(c)
a second card face up to each box which contains a
blackjack challenge wager.
421
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(2) After 2 cards have been dealt to each player and 1 card to the
dealer, the dealer, starting from the dealer’s left, must announce
each player’s point total and each player must indicate whether the
player wishes to double down, split cards, stand, or draw.
(3) For subsection (2)
19
(a)
a player must indicate whether the player wishes to double
down or split cards by placing an additional wager; and
(b)
a player must indicate whether the player wishes to
stand or draw by a hand signal.
(4)
As each player indicates his or her decision, the dealer must deal
face up the additional cards required and must announce the
point total of the player after each additional card is dealt.
(5)
After all additional cards have been dealt, the dealer must
deal a second card face up to the dealer.
(6)
Any additional cards dealt to the hand of the dealer must be dealt
face up after which the dealer must announce the dealer’s point
total.
Collecting and discarding cards after play
At the completion of a round of play, all cards still remaining on
the layout must be picked up by the dealer in order and placed face
down in the discard rack so that the cards can be easily arranged to
indicate each player’s hand if there is a question or dispute.
20
Procedure when cutting card is reached
When the cutting card is reached in a round of play, the dealer must
continue dealing the cards until the round of play is completed and
then reshuffle the cards.
21
Players not to handle cards
A player or spectator must not handle, remove or alter any cards used
in a game of blackjack challenge.
422
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
22
Player responsible for own point total
Each player at the table is responsible for correctly computing the
point total of the player’s hand and may not rely on the point total
announced by the dealer.
23
Play if player has blackjack
(1)
If the first face up card dealt to the dealer is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9
and a player has blackjack, the dealer must announce and pay
the blackjack at odds of 2 to 1 and must remove the player’s
cards before any player receives a third card.
(2)
If the first face up card dealt to the dealer is an ace, king, queen,
jack or 10 and a player has a blackjack, the dealer must
announce the blackjack but may make no payment nor remove
any cards until the outcome is determined by Section 27.
Part 3
24
Different types of wagers, extra
players and other matters
Doubling down
(1)
A player may elect to make an additional wager of not more than
the amount of the player’s original wager (to double down) on the
first two cards or the first three cards dealt on original or split
hands.
(2)
However, only 1 additional card may be dealt to the hands on
which the player has elected to double down.
(3)
The additional card must be dealt face up and placed sideways on
the layout.
(4)
If the player controlling the box elects to double down, player(s)
with a wager on the same box shall also have the option to double
down on that hand before the additional card is dealt. If the other
player(s) do not double, the condition that only one additional
card shall be dealt to that hand remains unchanged.
423
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(5)
25
Subject to section 7(3), if the dealer obtains blackjack after a
player doubles down, the dealer shall only collect the amount of
the player's original wager.
Splitting cards
(1)
If the first 2 cards dealt to a player are identical in value, the
player may elect to split the hand, making each card the first card
of a separate hand.
Example
If a player’s hand consists of a queen and a 10, the 2 cards may be split,
making the queen the first card of 1 hand and the 10 the first card of a
separate hand.
(2)
However, the player must wager on each hand the amount
wagered on the original hand before it was split.
(3)
When a player splits cards, the dealer must deal a second card
to the first of the hands formed and must complete the player’s
decisions about the hand before proceeding to deal cards to the
second hand.
(4)
After a second card is dealt to a split hand, the dealer shall
announce the point total of that hand and the player shall indicate
their decision to stand, draw, double or split again in accordance
to rule 25.5.
(a)
(5)
(6)
A player splitting aces or 10 point value cards shall be
capable of achieving blackjack.
A player may only split twice per box on any value of cards if
card values are of identical value to the original split cards:
(a)
The wager on all split hands is of an amount equal to the
original wager; and
(b)
No more than three hands are formed per box in each
round of play; and
(c)
A player who abstains from splitting their initial two cards
may not elect to split after having received a third card.
If the player controlling a playing area decides to split, any other
player who has placed a wager on that playing area shall either:
(a)
Make an additional wager on the already formed split
hand(s) of an amount equal to their original wager; or
424
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(b)
(7)
26
Have their original wager placed on the already formed first
hand.
Subject to section 7(3), if the dealer obtains a blackjack after a
player splits a hand, the dealer shall only collect the amount of the
player's original wager.
Additional cards for players
(1)
(2)
The dealer shall, beginning from the left, announce the player's
point total and allow the player to indicate whether he/she wishes
to:
(a)
Double down in accordance with rule 24;
(b)
Split pairs in accordance with rule 25;
(c)
Stand by electing to receive no additional cards; or
(d)
Receive additional card(s).
A dealer may direct a player to draw an additional card if the
player’s point total is not more than 11, other than if—
(a)
the total includes an ace that has been given a value of 1;
or
(b)
section 24 or 25 applies.
(3)
A player may elect to receive additional card(s), subject to rules 24
and 25, whenever their point total is less than 21.
(4)
Where a player's point total exceeds 21, any wager on that hand
shall lose and the dealer shall immediately collect the cards
from that hand and place them in the discard rack.
(5)
Where a player having a point total of 21, but not a blackjack,
regardless of the dealer’s card, the dealer shall pay the wager(s)
on that hand at odds of 1 to 1, remove the cards dealt to that box
and place them in the discard rack.
(6)
Where a player has achieved “Five Card Trick” by drawing 5
cards to a hand without exceeding 21 regardless of the dealer’s
card, the dealer shall pay the wager(s) on that hand at odds of 1
to 1, remove the cards dealt to that playing area and place them
in the discard rack.
425
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
27
28
Additional cards for dealer
(1)
A dealer must draw additional cards to the dealer’s hand
until the dealer has a hard or soft total of 17 to 21 after which the
dealer must not draw any further cards to the dealer’s hand.
(2)
A dealer must not draw additional cards to the dealer’s hand,
regardless of the point total, if decisions have been made on all
players’ hands and the additional cards would have no effect on
the outcome of the round of play.
Final Settlement
(1)
Settlement of wagers remaining on the table after the completion
of the dealer's hand in accordance with rule 27 shall be as
follows:
(a)
A player having blackjack;
(i)
When the dealer’s hand is not blackjack, shall be
paid at odds of 2 to 1;
(ii)
When the dealer’s hand is also blackjack
(a)
And the player’s 10 value card is of a higher rank than the
dealer’s 10 value card, shall be paid at odds of 5 to 1;
(b)
And the player’s 10 value card is the same rank as the
dealer’s 10 value card, shall be paid at odds of 4 to 1;
(c)
And the player’s 10 value card is of a lower rank than the
dealer’s 10 value card, shall be paid at odds of 3 to 1.
(2)
A player having a point total of 20 or less shall win and be paid
at odds of 1 to 1 if the point total exceeds that of the dealer's
hand;
(3)
A player having a point total of 20 or less shall win and be paid
at odds of 1 to 1 if the point total of the dealer's hand exceeds 21;
(d) a player having a point total equal to or less than the point
total of the dealer’s hand and the dealer’s hand does not exceed
21, the player shall lose;
426
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
29
One player for each box
Subject to section 30 and Part 4.
30
31
(a)
only 1 player may play on a box at a blackjack challenge
table; and
(b)
the dealer must not allow a player to place a wager on
another player’s hand.
More than 1 player for a box
(1)
A casino operator may permit up to 3 players to place a
blackjack challenge wager on 1 box at a blackjack challenge table.
(2)
The casino operator may direct that either—
(a)
the total of all players’ wagers on 1 box must not be more
than the table maximum; or
(b)
the separate wagers for each player must not be more than
the table maximum.
Relationship between players placing blackjack challenge
wagers on the same box
(1)
This section applies—
(a)
if more than 1 player places a blackjack challenge wager
on a box; and
(b)
to each player who places a blackjack challenge wager on
the box.
(2)
The dealer must decide the player who controls the box.
(3)
The dealer must ensure the wager of the player who controls the
box is in the part of the box closest to the dealer’s side of the
table.
(4)
Only the player controlling the box may make decisions about the
cards to be dealt to the box and all other players must place their
wagers immediately behind and in a straight line with the wager
of the player controlling the box.
(5)
If the player controlling the box doubles down, the other players
may also double down but are not required to do so.
427
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(6)
32
If the player controlling the box splits cards, the other players
must either make an additional wager to cover each split card or
have their original wager placed on the first hand so formed.
Circumstances when a player may wager on more than 1 box
(1)
A player may be permitted by a casino operator to place a
blackjack challenge wager on more than 1 box at a blackjack
challenge table with the understanding that, when there are not
enough seats in the casino to accommodate patron
demand, a player wagering on more than 1 box must give up a
box or boxes to accommodate other players.
(2)
If a player is permitted to place a blackjack challenge wager on
more than 1 box at a table, the player must make at least the
minimum wager on each hand played.
Part 4
33
Definitions for Part 4
(1)
34
Any pair wagers
For the purposes of an any pair wager, a pair shall mean a hand
that comprises the first two cards to the box which are:
(a)
Of the same number, namely, Ace, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10;
or
(b)
Of the same picture type, i.e. jack, queen or king.
Any pair wager
A player may choose to place an additional wager if the boxes
for wagers on the blackjack challenge table layout provide for
any pair wagers (an any pair wager) refer diagram 22.2.
35
Playing any pair
(1)
If a player places a blackjack challenge wager on a box, an any
pair wager may also be placed on the box.
428
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
36
(2)
The player placing the blackjack challenge wager must be given an
opportunity to place an any pair wager before any other person is
allowed to place an any pair wager on the box.
(3)
An any pair wager for a round of play must be placed before any
cards are dealt in the round of play.
(4)
An any pair wager must be at least the minimum amount, and not
more than the maximum amount, displayed on the sign at the table
about any pair wagers15.
Winning and losing any pair wagers and payouts
(1)
An any pair wager wins if the first two cards dealt to the hand on
which the wager was placed are a pair.
(2) Winning any pair wagers must be paid at the odds of 11 to 1.
(3)
37
How any pair wager dealt with
(1)
(2)
15
An any pair wager loses if the first 2 cards dealt to the hand on
which the wager was placed does not comprise a pair.
After each player has been dealt the player’s first 2 cards, the
dealer must(a)
take away all losing any pair wagers; and
(b)
make a payout to each player who has placed a winning
any pair wager.
The dealer then goes on to deal with each player in the usual way
for blackjack challenge.
Under Section 64(1)(d) of the Act, a casino operator must display at each gaming table or
location for the playing of a game a sign showing the permissible minimum and maximum wagers
for the game played at the table or location.
429
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 5
38
Irregularities
Exposed card in rack
A card found face up in the shoe must be removed from play and
placed in the discard rack.
39
Card drawn in error to be used in play
(1)
A card drawn in error without its face being exposed must be used
as though it were the next card from the shoe.
(2)
After the first 2 cards have been dealt to each player and a
card is drawn in error and exposed to the players, the card
must be dealt to a player or the dealer as though it were the next
card from the shoe.
Examples of a card drawn in error and exposed to players—
1 A dealer gives a card to a player who has not indicated for a card.
2 A dealer accidentally exposes a card when drawing it from a dealing
shoe.
40
(3)
A player refusing to accept the card must not have any additional
cards dealt to that hand during the round.
(4)
If the card is refused by the players, it must become the dealer’s
second card.
Card drawn in error not to be used
(1)
(2)
Subsection (2) applies if the dealer—
(a)
has 17 or more points; and
(b)
accidentally deals another card to the dealer’s hand;
and
(c)
exposes the face of the card to the players.
The card must be removed from play and placed in the discard
rack.
430
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
41
Not enough cards in shoe to complete round of play
If there are not enough cards remaining in the shoe to complete a
round of play, the dealer must shuffle and cut the cards in the
discard rack and complete the round of play.
42
43
Incorrect placement of card
(1)
If, during the original dealing of cards in a round of play, any of
the cards are incorrectly placed, and the incorrect placement is
noticed before the dealer acts on any hand, the cards must be
placed in the order they would have been in if the incorrect
placement had not happened.
(2)
For subsection (1), a dealer is taken to have acted on a hand if—
(a)
the dealer has received a hand signal from the player for the
first box in play at the table; or
(b)
the player for the first box in play at the table has
decided to double down and a third card has been
delivered to the hand; or
(c)
the player for the first box in play at the table has
decided to split the hand and a second card has been
delivered to the first of the hands formed; or
(d)
a player’s wager has been settled.
Dealer with too many cards
(1)
(2)
If, contrary to section 18(1)(b), the dealer has inadvertently dealt
2 or more cards to the dealer’s hand, and the dealer has started
acting on a player’s hand, the dealer must—
(a)
inform the players that the cards held by the dealer are
taken to have the point total usually counted after the
dealer’s cards have been dealt, but not a blackjack; and
(b)
give each player the choice of withdrawing the player’s
blackjack challenge wager; and
(c)
finish acting on all players’ hands that have not been
withdrawn.
The dealer must finish hitting the dealer’s hand if there is at least
1 player—
431
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
44
45
(a)
who did not withdraw the player’s blackjack challenge
wager; and
(b)
whose point total is not more than 21.
No cards or only 1 card dealt to a player’s hand
(1)
If no cards are dealt to a player’s hand (player A), and the dealer
has started acting on another player’s hand, player A’s hand is
dead and player A must retract his or her blackjack challenge
wager.
(2)
If only 1 card is dealt to a player’s hand (player B) and the dealer
has started acting on another player’s hand, player B may—
(a)
retract player B’s blackjack challenge wager; or
(b)
receive a second card when the dealer starts acting on player
B’s hand.
No second card to last player if dealer has no second card
(1) This section applies to the player immediately before the dealer
if—
(a) the dealer has not dealt a second card to the player; and
(b) all other players have been dealt a second card and hit with
the additional cards each has requested; and
(c) the dealer has not dealt the dealer’s hand a second card.
(2) The player may choose—
(a) to retract the player’s blackjack challenge wager; or
(b) to be dealt a second card and additional cards before the
dealer deals a second card to the dealer’s hand.
46
Additional cards not offered or dealt to a player
(1) This section applies to a player if—
(a) the dealer does not—
(i) offer additional cards to the player; or
432
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(ii) deal additional cards to the player and the player has
indicated for additional cards; and
(b) the player is not the player immediately before the dealer.
(2) The player may retract his or her blackjack challenge wager or
play out his or her hand after all other players have completed
their hands and before any other card is dealt.
47
No second card or additional cards to last player if dealer has
second card and more
(1) This section applies to the player immediately before the dealer if—
(a) the dealer has not dealt a second card to the player, or offered to
hit the player with additional cards; and
(b) the dealer has dealt himself or herself a second card and hit
the dealer’s hand with an additional card.
(2) The dealer must separate out the dealer’s second card and any
additional cards in the order in which they were dealt.
(3) Before taking any other cards from the shoe, the dealer must use
the second card and any additional cards that have been separated
out in the order the cards were originally taken from the shoe.
(4)
The dealer must deal the player immediately before the dealer—
(a) if the player was not dealt a second card—a second card; and
(b) if the player indicates he or she wants to be hit with
additional cards—as many additional cards as the player
indicates.
(5) The dealer must deal a second card to the dealer’s hand and may
hit the dealer’s hand in the usual way.
48
Dealer with no first card
433
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(1) If a dealer is acting on a player’s hand and discovers the dealer
has missed dealing a first card to the dealer’s hand, the dealer
must—
(a) give each player the choice of withdrawing the player’s
blackjack challenge wager; and
(b) finish acting on all players’ hands that have not been
withdrawn.
(2) The dealer must take 2 cards and, if necessary, finish hitting the
dealer’s hand, if there is at least 1 player—
(a) who did not withdraw the player’s blackjack challenge wager;
and
(b) whose point total is not more than 21.
(3) The dealer need not deal to the dealer’s hand if either of the
following applies to each of the players—
(a) the player withdrew the player’s blackjack challenge wager;
(b) the player obtained a point total of more than 21.
49
Extra hand dealt
If the dealer has started acting on a player’s hand, an extra hand
dealt in error is void.
50
Player not acting on hand after wagering
If a player who has made a blackjack challenge wager does not act on
the player’s hand within a reasonable time, or refuses to act or is not
present, a manager or supervisor may direct that—
(a) the first 2 cards must be dealt to the player’s hand; and/or
(b) further cards must be dealt to the player’s hand, if the hard total
of the hand is not more than 11 or the soft total of the hand is
not more than 16.
434
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 6
51
Use of card machine
Card machine
(1) A card machine may be used for blackjack challenge.
(2) However, a card machine must not be used for a game of blackjack
challenge if any pair is offered with the game, unless the approved
control system for the casino states that a card machine may be
used for a game of blackjack challenge with which any pair is
offered.
(3) If a card machine is used, the operation of parts 1 to 5 is changed
to the extent necessary for the following to have effect—
(a) the number of decks used must be not less than the minimum,
and not more than the maximum (which in turn must be not
more than 8), number of decks approved by the chief
executive for use in the card machine;
(b) when play is started, or if the cards in the card machine are
replaced under section 16, the cards must be inspected and
shuffled and then placed in the card machine;
(c) the cards do not need to be cut before being placed in the card
machine;
(d) a cutting card may be used to conceal the bottom card of the
cards placed into the machine, but it must be removed from
the machine before cards for the first round of play are dealt;
(e) cutting cards are not used for the game, other than in the way
mentioned in paragraph (d);
435
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(f) for dealing the cards, the card machine takes the place of the
dealing shoe;
(g) cards that have been placed in the discard rack are placed in the
card machine to be mixed with the remaining cards in the
machine.
(4) Section 11 does not apply if a card machine is used.
52
Card machine malfunction
(1) This section applies if a card machine malfunctions during a round
of play.
(2) A casino employee of the level of manager or higher must ensure
that the card machine is repaired or replaced in accordance with the
casino’s approved control system.
(3) If the casino employee considers that the malfunction has
disadvantaged a player, each player must be given the
opportunity to have the player’s wagers for the round of play
returned to the player before the round of play is continued.
436
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Diagram 22.1
Blackjack Challenge table layout
Section 4
437
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Diagram 22.2
Blackjack Challenge “Any Pair” table layout
Section 24
438
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 23
Double Zero Roulette
Part 1
Preliminary
1
Conducting and playing double zero roulette
This schedule states the rules for conducting and playing the
casino game known as double zero roulette.
Part 2
2
Equipment for double zero roulette
Double zero roulette wheel and ball
(1) A double zero roulette wheel must be not less than 0.75m in
diameter and have 38 equally spaced compartments around the
wheel.
(2) One of the compartments on a double zero roulette wheel must
be marked with ‘0’ and another ‘00’ and both coloured green and
the other compartments must be marked with a number from 1 to
36, with 18 of the compartments coloured red and 18 coloured
black.
(3) The numbers and colours on a double zero roulette wheel must be
arranged around the wheel in the way approved by the chief
executive.
(4) However, it is not necessary to obtain the chief executive’s approval
under subsection (3) for the arrangement of numbers and colours
shown in diagram 23.1
439
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
3
Double zero roulette table and layout
(1) A double zero roulette table must have a double zero roulette wheel
at 1 end of the table and a double zero roulette layout imprinted on
the opposite end of the table on a layout cloth.
(2) The layout cloth of each double zero roulette table must have the
name of, or logo for, the casino imprinted on it and must be marked
similarly to the way shown in diagram 23.2.
4
Electronic terminal
(1) An electronic terminal must display a roulette layout similar to the
layout shown in diagram 23.2.
(2) An electronic terminal also must display the following
information—
(a)
the minimum and maximum permissible wagers;
(b)
when a player may place bets;
(c)
the total number of credits available to the player;
(d)
the number of credits bet by the player for the current round
of play;
(e)
the winning number for the previous round of play;
(3) For each roulette wheel for which electronic terminals are used, the
chief executive must approve the maximum number of electronic
terminals for that wheel.
Part 3
5
General rules
Playing double zero roulette
A player plays double zero roulette using a double zero roulette
table or electronic terminal.
440
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
6
Rotating the wheel and ball and controlling wagering at a
table
(1) The roulette ball must be spun by the dealer in the opposite
direction to the rotation of the wheel and must complete at least 4
revolutions around the track of the wheel to be a valid spin.
(2) While the ball is still rotating around the wheel the dealer must
announce ‘no more bets’.
(3) If a player is using an electronic terminal—the words ‘no more bets’
must be displayed on the electronic terminal and the electronic
terminal must not accept a wager or a change or withdrawal of a
wager.
7
Announcing the winning number, placing the crown and
dealing with wagers
(1) After the ball comes to rest in a compartment around the wheel, the
dealer must announce the number of the compartment and must
place a point marker to be known as a crown on that number on the
layout.
(2) After placing the crown on the layout, the dealer must collect all
losing wagers and then pay all winning wagers.
(3) If a player is using an electronic terminal—
(a)
the winning number must be displayed on the electronic
terminal after the ball comes to rest; and
(b)
the layout displayed on the electronic terminal must be
cleared of losing wagers; and
(c)
if the player has made a winning wager—
(i)
the wager and the player’s winnings must be displayed
on the electronic terminal; and
(ii)
the wager and the player’s winnings must be added to
the player’s credits and the total of the credits must be
displayed on the electronic terminal.
441
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
8
No unauthorised interference with gaming equipment
During play a person, other than a casino key employee or a casino
employee involved in the conduct of the game, must not interfere
with the following—
9
(a)
the wheel;
(b)
the ball;
(c)
the rotation of the wheel or ball;
(d)
the operation of an electronic terminal
(e)
any other gaming equipment used for the game.
Permissible wagers and results
(1) The wagers defined in this section are the permissible wagers by a
player at the game of double zero roulette.
(2) In this schedule—
1 number or straight up means a wager that wins if a single
number from 00 to 36 is wagered and spun and loses if another
number is spun.
2 numbers or split means a wager that wins if either of the
2 numbers wagered is spun and loses if another number is spun.
3 numbers or street means a wager that—
(a) wins if—
(i)
one of the 3 numbers in the row wagered is spun;
or
(ii) 0 and 1 and 2 are wagered and 1 of them is spun;
or
(iii) 00 and 2 and 3 are wagered and 1 of them is
spun; or
(iv) 00 and 0 and 2 are wagered and 1 of them is spun; and
(b) loses if another number is spun.
4 numbers or corner means a wager that wins if 1 of the 4 numbers
wagered is spun and loses if another number is spun.
442
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
First 5 numbers (00,0,1,2,3)means a wager that wins if 1 of the 5
numbers wagered is spun and loses if another number is spun.
6 numbers or 6-line means a wager that wins if 1 of the 6 numbers
in the 2 rows wagered is spun and loses if another number is spun.
black means a wager that wins if the colour of the number wagered
and spun is black and loses if another colour is spun.
column means a wager that wins if 1 of the 12 numbers in the
column wagered is spun and loses if another number is spun.
dozen means a wager that wins if 1 of the 12 numbers in the 12
wagered (1–12, 13–24, or 25–36) is spun and loses if another
number is spun.
even means a wager that wins if the number wagered and spun is an
even number and loses if the number spun is an odd number, 00 or
0.
high—(19–36) means a wager that wins if 1 of the 18 numbers
wagered is spun and loses if another number is spun.
low—(1–18) means a wager that wins if 1 of the 18 numbers
wagered is spun and loses if another number is spun.
odd means a wager that wins if the number wagered and spun is an
odd number and loses if the number spun is an even number, 00 or
0.
red means a wager that wins if the colour of the number wagered
and spun is red and loses if another colour is spun.
10
How wagers are made and changed at a table
(1) A player makes a wager by placing gaming chips in the appropriate
wager position on the double zero roulette layout or by having
someone else place the gaming chips in the appropriate position on
the player’s behalf.
(2) A wager may be made orally, but it has no effect as a wager until the
chips have been placed under subsection (1).
(3) Diagram 23.3 shows the correct placement of wagers on the double
zero roulette layout.
(4) No wagers may be placed, changed or withdrawn after the dealer
has called ‘no more bets’.
443
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(5) A winning wager may be withdrawn before the next spin.
11
How wagers are made and changed—electronic terminal
(1) The player makes a wager by touching the layout on an electronic
terminal.
(2) Diagram 23.3 shows the correct placement of wagers on the layout
for an electronic terminal.
(3) The player may make, change or withdraw a wager until the words
‘no more bets’ are displayed on the electronic terminal.
12
Use of non-value chips at a table
(1) The dealer must give a non-value chip a value before issuing the
chip to a player at the table.
(2) A non-value chip has the value given by the dealer under subsection
(1).
(3) The dealer must not issue the same coloured non-value chips to
more than 1 player unless all the players issued with the chips agree
to the issue.
(4) A non-value chip may be used only at the table at which it was
issued.
(5) The dealer may accept a non-value chip in exchange for a value chip
only if—
(a)
the non-value chip was issued at the dealer’s table; or
(b) the non-value chip was issued at a table that is closed
when the player asks for the non-value chip to be
redeemed.
13
Player responsible for placing wagers at a table
(1) Each player is responsible for correctly positioning the player’s
wager or wagers on the layout regardless of whether the player
is helped by the dealer.
(2) Each player must ensure instructions the player gives to the dealer
about placing the player’s wager or wagers are correctly carried out.
444
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
14
Wagers dealt with when ball falls to rest
(1) Each wager must be settled strictly in accordance with its position on
the layout when the ball falls to rest in a compartment of the wheel.
(2) Subsection (1) does not apply for electronic terminals.
15
Change to application of ss 13 and 14 if unfair
(1) This section applies if—
(a)
either of the following happens—
(i)
a player’s chip is moved from its original
position by another person to another position
on the table layout and the chip and its original
position can be identified by the casino
operator;
(ii) a dealer does not place a player’s wager as
instructed by the player, or incorrectly places
the
wager, and the instructions can
be confirmed by the dealer; and
(b) the casino operator is satisfied the application of
sections 13 and 14 would be unfair to the player.
(2) Despite sections 13 and 14, the casino operator may settle the
player’s wager as if the chip were in the original or correct position.
16
Minimum and maximum wagers
(1) The amount of the minimum wager for a game of double zero
roulette must be the same for each player, when a player plays the
game at a double zero roulette table.
(2) The amount of the minimum wager for a game of double zero
roulette when a player plays the game at an electronic terminal may
be different between each electronic terminal.
(3) If the minimum wager for a type of wager mentioned in column 1 is
not more than the amount in column 2 for the wager—
(a)
for a player playing at a double zero roulette table—the
maximum wager must be at least the amount in column
3 for the wager; and
445
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(b) for a player playing at an electronic terminal—the
maximum wager must be at least the amount in column
4 for the wager.
Column 1
Column 2
Column 3
Column 4
Type of wager
Minimum
wager
Maximum
wager
(table)
Maximum
wager
(electronic
terminal)
1 number or straight up
$5
$20
$10
2 numbers or split
$5
$40
$20
3 numbers or street
$5
$60
$30
4 numbers or corner
$5
$80
$40
First 5 numbers
$5
$100
$50
6 numbers or 6-line
$5
$120
$60
column
$25
$250
$50
dozen
$25
$250
$50
low – (1 -18)
$25
$500
$100
high – (19-36)
$25
$500
$100
even
$25
$500
$100
odd
$25
$500
$100
red
$25
$500
$100
black
$25
$500
$100
446
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
17
Use of value chips at a table
The casino operator may permit, limit or prohibit the use of value
chips by a player at the double zero roulette table.
18
Payout odds for winning wagers
(1) Winning wagers at the game of double zero roulette are paid at the
following odds—
Wager
Payout Odds
1 number or straight up
35 to 1
2 numbers or split
17 to 1
3 numbers or street
11 to 1
4 numbers or corner
8 to 1
First 5 numbers
6 to 1
6 numbers or 6-line
5 to 1
column
2 to 1
dozen
2 to 1
low – (1-18)
1 to 1
high – (19-36)
1 to 1
even
1 to 1
odd
1 to 1
red
1 to 1
black
1 to 1
(2) When the ball comes to rest in the compartment of the wheel
marked ‘0’, all wagers lose other than the wagers made straight up
447
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
on the ‘0’, or made in any combination of the ‘0’ and the numbers
‘00’, 1, 2 and 3.
(3) Winning wagers made straight up on the ‘0’, or made in any
combination of the ‘0’ and the numbers ‘00’, 1, 2 and 3, are paid the
same odds as would apply to the same type of wager involving any
other numbered square on the layout.
(4) When the ball comes to rest in the compartment of the wheel
marked ‘00’ all wagers lose other than the wagers made straight up
on the ‘00’ or made in any combination of the ‘00’ and the numbers
‘0’, 1, 2 and 3.
(5) Winning wagers made straight up on the ‘00’or made in any
combination of the ‘00’ and the numbers ‘0’, 1, 2 and 3, are paid the
same odds as would apply to the same type of wager involving any
other numbered square on the layout.
19
Electronic terminal payments
(1) This section applies when a player collects the player’s credits from
an electronic terminal.
(2) The electronic terminal may dispense a ticket for the value of credits
due to the player.
(3) If the electronic terminal does not dispense a ticket, the dealer must
give the player a ticket for the value of credits due to the player.
(4) The player may redeem a ticket mentioned in subsection (2) or (3)
with the casino operator for an amount equivalent to the value of the
credits stated on the ticket.
Part 4
20
Irregularities
Irregularities and announcing no spin
(1) If the ball is spun in the same direction as the wheel, the dealer,
another casino employee, or a casino key employee must
immediately announce ‘no spin’ and the dealer must attempt to
448
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
remove the ball from the wheel before it comes to rest in 1 of the
compartments.
(2) If the dealer anticipates that the ball will not complete 4 revolutions
around the track of the wheel, the dealer, another casino
employee, or a casino key employee must immediately announce
‘no spin’ and the dealer must attempt to remove the ball from the
wheel before it comes to rest in 1 of the compartments.
(3) If a foreign object enters the wheel before the ball comes to rest, or
if the ball is unduly hung up in an air pocket, the dealer, another
casino employee, or a casino key employee must immediately
announce ‘no spin’ and the dealer must attempt to remove the ball
from the wheel before it comes to rest in 1 of the compartments.
(4) If the ball is propelled or falls out of the wheel head during a spin,
the dealer, another casino employee, or a casino key employee must
announce ‘no spin’.
(5) After the dealer, another casino employee, or a casino key employee
has announced ‘no spin’, it is an invalid spin whether or not the ball
comes to rest in 1 of the compartments before the dealer’s attempt
to remove the ball from the wheel.
(6) If ‘no spin’ is announced under this section and a player is using an
electronic terminal, the words ‘no spin’ or other words indicating
‘no spin’ has been announced, must immediately be displayed on
the electronic terminal
21
Irregularities—electronic terminal
(1) This section applies to an electronic terminal if, after the ball comes
to rest in a compartment—
(a)
the winning number is not displayed on the electronic
terminal; or
(b)
a number is incorrectly displayed on the electronic terminal as
the winning number.
(2) A casino key employee must ensure the correct winning number is
displayed on the electronic terminal.
449
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 23 – Double zero roulette (continued)
Diagram 23.1
Double zero roulette wheel
Section 2(4)
Schedule 23 – Double zero roulette (continued)
450
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Diagram 23.2
Layout for double zero roulette table and
electronic terminal
Section 3 & 4
451
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 23 – Double zero roulette (continued)
Diagram 23.3
Illustration of manner of placement of wagers
at a double zero roulette table
Section 10
452
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Schedule 24
Mississippi Stud Poker
section 3(2)
Part 1
1
Preliminary
Conducting and playing mississippi stud poker
This schedule states the rules for conducting and playing the casino
game known as mississippi stud poker.
2
Definitions for sch 24
In this schedule—
3rd street, means the first community card.
3rd street wager, see section 12.
4th street, means the second community card.
4th street wager, see section 13
5th street, means the third and final community card.
5th street wager, see section 14.
ante wager, means a wager made by a person to enable the
person to take part in a round of play of the game as a player.
453
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
community cards, means the three cards dealt to the designated
playing area.
continuing player, means a player who has made an ante and
street wager(s) and has not folded.
face value, of a card, means—
(a)
or
(b)
the number of the card, namely, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10:
the type of card, namely, jack, queen, king or ace.
fold, means to stop taking part in the round of play.
hole cards, means the two cards dealt to each player which
remain concealed from other players.
player’s hand, means the hand comprising of the player’s hole
cards and the community cards.
poker hands, see section 3.
round of play, of the game, includes the wagering, dealing of
cards, playing the game with the cards as dealt, deciding the
winning hands, collecting losing wagers and paying for winning
hands.
stand-off, means where a wager shall neither win nor lose, see
section 17.
void, means invalid with no result.
3
Ranking and meaning of poker hands
(1)
The ranking of poker hands, from lowest to highest, is as follows;
Poker hand
Cards
454
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Odd card hand
Any combination of 5 cards, other than
another poker hand mentioned in this
section
1 pair
2 cards with the same face value and 3
odd cards
2 pairs
2 cards with the same face value,
another 2 cards with the same face value
(other than the face value of the first 2
cards) and 1 odd card
3 of a kind
(Trips)
3 cards with the same face value and 2
odd cards
Straight
5 cards of more than 1 suit running
consecutively in face value
Flush
5 cards of the same suit but not running
consecutively in face value
Full House
4 of a kind
(Quads)
Straight Flush
Royal Flush
(2)
3 cards with the same face value and
another 2 cards with the same face value
(other than the face value of the first 3
cards)
4 cards with the same face value and 1 odd
card
5 cards of the same suit running
consecutively in face value, other than a
royal flush
10, jack, queen, king and ace of the
same suit
The poker hands have the meaning given opposite the hand.
455
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(3)
The ranking of cards, from lowest to highest, is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9, 10, jack, queen, king and ace.
(4)
If any player has an: ace, 2, 3, 4 and 5, the ace must rank as 1.
(5)
All suits of cards are of equal value.
Part 2
4
Table layout and equipment
Table and layout
(1)
Mississippi stud poker is played at a table with places for players
on 1 side and a place for the dealer on the opposite side.
(2)
The layout cloth covering the table must have on it(a)
(b)
(c)
(3)
the name of, or logo of, the casino; and
an area for the community cards; and
rectangular, circular or oval areas for wagers.
The areas for wagers must be markedfor ante wagers- by the word ‘ante ‘ or ‘A ‘; and
for 3rd street wagers—by the words ‘3rd street’ or ‘3rd’;
and
(c) for 4th street wagers—by the words ‘4th street’ or ‘4th’; and
(d) for 5th street wagers—by the words ‘5th street’ or ‘5th’.
The layout for the table is the layout in diagram 24.1 or a similar
layout approved by the chief executive.
(a)
(b)
(4)
5
Equipment
The table for the game must be equipped with –
(1)
A dealing shoe or a mechanical shuffling device; and
(2)
A discard rack, float tray and drop box at approximately the
location shown in diagram 24.1.
456
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 3
6
7
Preparing the game
Cards
(1)
Mississippi stud poker is played with 1 deck of 52 cards, with
backs of the same colour and design and 1 cutting card.
(2)
However, if a mechanical shuffling device is in use at a table –
(a) the device may be loaded with one deck of cards while
another deck is used in play; and
(b) the backs of the 2 decks of cards must have different
colours; and
(c) the discard rack must only contain the cards from 1 deck at
a time.
Procedures for inspecting, shuffling and cutting cards
(1)
Cards must be inspected and shuffled—
(a)
under the provisions of this part; and
(b)
under the approved control system for the casino.
(2)
Before being used in play, the cards must be inspected to check
for marks and imperfections and that each deck of cards contains
the correct cards.
(3)
If a player asks to inspect the cards when the cards are first
placed on the table for play, the dealer must spread the cards
face up on the table to enable a person inspecting them to see
if each deck of cards is complete.
(4)
The cards must be shuffled—
(a)
before being used in play; and
(b)
at the end of each round of play.
457
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(5)
Part 4
8
If the cards have been shuffled manually by the dealer, the
dealer must cut the cards and place them with the cutting card
into a dealing shoe.
Placing wagers & playing the game
Placing ante wagers
Before a round of play starts, each player must make an ante wager.
9
10
How wagers are made
(1)
All wagers must be made by placing chips in the areas for
wagers on the table.
(2)
A player must not wager on more than 1 hand in a round of play.
(3)
Only 1 wager may be accepted on each area for wagers.
(4)
After the first card of a round of play has been removed from
the dealing shoe or mechanical shuffling device, a person must
not change, take away or touch a wager until a decision about the
wager is made, and the wager is dealt with, by the dealer.
Player’s cards to be in full view of dealer
A player’s cards must be in full view of the dealer during a round of
play.
11
Dealing the hole cards
(1)
After all ante wagers for a round of play have been made, the
dealer must deal cards by starting from the dealer’s left and
continuing clockwise around the table.
(2)
The cards must be dealt in 1 of the following ways
provided for under the approved control system for the casino—
458
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(a) Where a card shoe is in use, the cards shall be dealt in the
following manner –
(i)
one card face down to each playing area containing an
‘Ante Wager’; and
(ii) in sequence, a second card face down to each playing
area containing an ‘Ante Wager’.
(iii) After all hole cards have been dealt, the players may
look at their cards.
(iv) Dealing the ‘3rd Street’. After all ‘3rd Street Wagers’
have been made, the dealer shall deal the first
community card face up.
(v) Dealing the ‘4th Street’. After all ‘4th Street Wagers’
have been made, the dealer shall deal the second
community card face up.
(vi) Dealing the ‘5th Street’. After all ‘5th Street Wagers’
have been made, the dealer shall deal the third and final
community card face up.
(b) When a shuffling device is in use, the cards shall be dealt
face down in the following manner –
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
the community cards stacked and placed on the 3rd
Street card box; and
the dealer shall then spread the community cards across
the designated playing areas with the top card on 5th
Street, second card on 4th Street and bottom being left
on 3rd Street, then
two cards at a time to each playing area containing an
‘Ante Wager’.
After all hole cards have been dealt; the players may look
at their cards.
Dealing the ‘3rd Street’. After all ‘3rd Street Wagers’
have been made, the dealer shall reveal the first
community card.
Dealing the ‘4th Street’. After all ‘4th Street Wagers’
have been made, the dealer shall reveal the second
community card.
Dealing the ‘5th Street’. After all ‘5th Street Wagers’
have been made, the dealer shall reveal the third and
final community card.
459
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
12
13
Players may look at hole cards and fold or place a 3rd street
wager
(1)
After all the hole cards have been dealt, the players may look
at their cards.
(2)
A player may decide to fold or make a wager to play in the
round of play, the player must place the wager (the 3rd street
wager) in the appropriate area for play wagers on the table and
place the cards face down on the table.
(3)
A player’s 3rd street wager must be 1x, 2x or 3x their ante
wager.
(4)
After all players have folded or placed t hei r 3rd street wager
under subsection 12(2), the dealer must deal in accordance
with section 11(2)(a) or 11(2)(b).
Player may fold or place a 4th street wager
(1)
14
After the 3rd street card has been dealt, a player may—
(a)
fold; or
(b)
place a wager (the 4th street wager) in the appropriate
area for 4th street wagers on the table.
(2)
A player’s 4th street wager must be 1x, 2x or 3x their ante
wager.
(3)
After all players have folded or placed a 4th street wager
under subsection 13(1), the dealer must deal in accordance
with section 11(2)(a) or 11(2)(b).
Player may fold or place a 5th street wager
(1)
(2)
After the 4th street card has been dealt, a player may(a) fold; or
(b) place a wager (the 5th street wager) in the appropriate area
for 5th street wagers on the table.
A player’s 5th street wager must be 1x, 2x or 3x their ante
wager.
460
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(3)
15
After all players have folded or placed a 5th street wager
under subsection 14(1), the dealer must deal in accordance
with section 11(2)(a) or 11(2)(b).
Deciding the poker ranking of player’s hand
After dealing the 5th street card, the dealer, starting on the
dealer’s right and continuing anticlockwise around the table,
must—
16
(a)
turn the hole cards of each player face up; and
(b)
decide the poker ranking of the player’s hand.
Players must not exchange cards or communicate
A player must not—
Part 5
17
(a)
exchange cards; or
(b)
exchange or communicate, or cause to be exchanged
or communicated, information about the player’s
hand; or
(c)
speak in a language other than English if directed by a
dealer or floor manager; or
(d)
touch another player’s cards.
Deciding the outcome of wagers
and paying winning wagers
Payment odds for winning ante, 3rd, 4th and 5th street
wagers
461
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
The payment odds for winning ante, 3rd, 4th and 5th street
wagers are as follows—
Winning Wager
Payment odds
Royal Flush
500 to 1
Straight Flush
100 to 1
Four of a Kind
40 to 1
Full House
10 to 1
Flush
6 to 1
Straight
4 to 1
Three of a Kind
3 to 1
Two Pair
2 to 1
Jacks or better
1 to 1
Pairs of 6’s to 10’s
Stand-off
*If the hand ranking is a pair of 5’s or lower the hand loses.
18
Player’s hand—when it wins, loses or is a stand off
(1)
(2)
(3)
If a player’s hand wins, the dealer must—
(a)
pay the ante, 3rd, 4th and 5th street wagers at the odds
mentioned in section 17; and
(b)
collect the player’s cards and place them in the
table’s discard rack.
If a player’s hand loses, the dealer must—
(a)
collect the ante, 3rd, 4th and 5th street wagers for the
hand; and
(b)
collect the player’s cards and place them in the
table’s discard rack.
If a player’s hand is a stand off—
(a)
the player’s wagers for the hand neither win nor lose
under this section; and
(b)
the dealer must collect the player’s cards and place them in the
table’s discard rack.
462
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Part 6
19
Irregularities
Wagers over or under permissible wager amount
(1)
(2)
If while acting on the hands, the dealer becomes aware that
the ‘Ante ‘ wager is –
(a)
more than the maximum allowable Ante wager - the
dealer must return the excess amount to the player and
take or pay the wager accordingly; or
(b)
less than the required minimum Ante wager - the dealer
must take or pay according to the amount wagered and
tell the player that for subsequent rounds of play the
Ante wager must meet the required minimum bet.
If, while acting on the hands, the dealer becomes aware that a
3rd, 4th or 5th bet wager is –
(a)
more than 3 times the amount of the ante wager—the
dealer must give the excess amount to the player and
take or pay the wager accordingly; or
(b)
less than the amount of the ante wager—the dealer must
take or pay according to the amount wagered and tell
the player that for subsequent rounds of play the
player’s 3rd, 4th, or 5th bet wager must be 1x, 2x, or 3x
the amount of the player’s ante wager.
463
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
20
Cards dealt with no ante wager
If a card or cards are dealt to a player who has not placed an ante
wager—
(a) the player’s hand is void; and
(b)
21
all players at the table must be given the option of
retracting their wagers.
Player wagering on more than 1 betting area
If a player has been dealt more than 1 hand in a round of play—
(a) the player’s hand, for the round of play, is the first hand
dealt to the player; and
22
(b)
other hands dealt to that player are void, with
corresponding wagers returned to the player; and
(c)
all players at the table must be given the option of
retracting their wagers.
Incorrect number of cards
(1)
If an incorrect number of hole cards is dealt to any player; or
an incorrect number of community cards are dealt and none
of the players have looked at their cards –
(a)
the round of play is void; and
(b)
the dealer must immediately tell a casino employee of
the level of floor manager or higher; and
(c)
the employee must direct the dealer to count the cards to
verify there are 52; and
(d)
if the dealer finds the deck does not contain 52 cards—a
casino employee of the level of pit boss or higher must
notify an inspector.
464
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
(2) If an incorrect number of hole cards is dealt to any player; or
an incorrect number of community cards are dealt and any
player has looked at their cards—
(3)
(4)
(a)
the dealer must immediately tell a casino employee of
the level of floor manager or higher; and
(b)
the employee must direct the dealer to count the cards to
verify there are 52.
If the dealer finds the deck does not contain 52 cards—
(a)
a casino employee of the level of pit boss or higher
must notify an inspector; and
(b)
(c)
the round of play is void; and
all wagers placed for the round of play must be returned
to the players.
If the dealer finds the deck contains 52 cards and the number
of community cards is incorrect—
(a)
(b)
(5)
the dealer must declare the round as void; and
all wagers placed for that round of play must be
returned to the players
If the dealer finds the deck contains 52 cards and the number
of player’s hole cards is incorrect—
(a)
the player’s hand is void; and
(b)
all wagers placed for the hand must be returned to the
player; and
(c)
all players at the table must be given the option of
retracting their wagers.
465
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
23
Effect of a card being exposed during a deal
If any card is exposed during the initial deal, the round of play is
void.
24
Card placed in incorrect position
If a card has been placed in an incorrect position on the layout and
no further cards have been dealt for the round of play—
25
(a)
the card must be moved to its correct position on the
layout; and
(b)
the round of play continues in the usual way.
Community cards
(1)
(2)
If the dealer exposes 1 or more of the community cards prior
to all players having made a decision whether to fold or place
a street wager, then –
(a)
the exposed card(s) will remain face up; and
(b)
players who have already made a decision will be given
the opportunity to change their decision; and
(c)
players who had not already made a decision will be
given the opportunity to do so; and
(d)
the round of play will then continue.
If the dealer exposes the wrong community card, this exposed
card will remain exposed and become the card which should
have been exposed and play will continue.
466
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
26
General
(1)
(2)
Where a player or players are suspected of viewing another
player's hole cards or collecting information from another
player(s), a casino supervisor may:
(a)
direct the player or players concerned to play their hand
prior to other players handling their cards;
(b)
restrict players suspected of collusion from playing
together at the same table;
(c)
direct the players on a table to speak English only at all
times;
(d)
remove the player(s) from participating in the game.
Where a player makes a wager and is not present to make a
decision in regard to the cards dealt to their playing area, then
that hand shall be deemed to be folded and all wagers shall be
forfeited and the cards spread and placed in the discard rack.
467
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Diagram 24.1—Mississippi stud poker table layout
sections 4 and 5
468
Casino Gaming Rule 2010
_________________________________________________________________
Endnotes
1
Index to endnotes
Page
2
Table of versions..................................................................... 429
2
Table of versions
Version No.
1
2
2A
2B
2C
3
4
4A
4B
5
5A
5B
6
7
Amendments include
none
Amendment Rule (No.2) 2011
Amendment Rule (No.3) 2011
Amendment Rule (No. 1) 2011
Amendment Rule (No. 5) 2011
Amendment Rule (No. 4) 2011
Amendment Rule (No.1) 2012
Amendment Rule (No.1) 2013
Amendment Rule (No.2) 2013
Amendment Rule (No.3) 2013
Amendment Rule (No. 1) 2014
Amendment Rule (No.2) 2014
Amendment Rule (No.3) 2014
Amendment Rule (No.1) 2015
Amendment Rule (No. 1) 2017
Effective
1 July 2010
19 August 2011
19 August 2011
26 August 2011
3 November 2011
2 August 2011
28 September 2012
11 February 2013
14 March 2013
22 April 2013
24 April 2014
29 August 2014
9 January 2015
16 October 2015
17 March 2017
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement